Nortel Networks Nn43001 106 Users Manual Communication Server 1000 Features And Services Fundamentals — Book 2 Of 6 (C)

NN43001-106 to the manual 2edf0a72-47cd-4a2b-af36-b59346aeab62

2015-01-26

: Nortel-Networks Nortel-Networks-Nn43001-106-Users-Manual-346475 nortel-networks-nn43001-106-users-manual-346475 nortel-networks pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 616 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services
Fundamentals — Book 2 of
6 (C)
NN43001-106
.
Document status: Standard
Document version: 02.04
Document date: 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Sourced in Canada
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed
to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject
to change without notice
Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
3
Revision History
May 2008
Standard 01.06. This document is up-issued to update the current behavior
of CLID with HOLD/RETRIEVE functionality for ISDN interfaces (CR
Q01809278-01).
Standard 01.05. This document is up-issued to add information on
CDP/UDP Calls to the Call Forward to Trunk Restriction chapter in Book 2.
July 2007
Standard 01.04. This document is up-issued to revise the 500 Telephone
Features and Bandwidth Management Support for Network Wide Virtual
Office chapters in Book 1 and revise the Conference Warning Tone
Enhancement chapter in Book 2.
June 2007
Standard 01.03. This document is up-issued to revise the Software
Licenses chapter in Book 6.
June 2007
Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued to revise the Network Music
feature implementation in Book 5.
May 2007
Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document is renamed Features and
Services Fundamentals (NN43001-106) and contains information previously
contained in the following legacy documents, now retired:
•Features and Services: Book 1 of 3 (A to C) (553-3001-306B1)
•Features and Services: Book 2 of 3 (D to M) (553-3001-306B2)
•Features and Services: Book 3 of 3 (N to Z) (553-3001-306B3)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
4Revision History
This document also includes the following updates:
•Corrections to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on page 534
(Book 5) and to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on page 540
(Book 5) to address CR Q01527854.
•Updated the description of EXTT prompt in LD 15 on page 338 (Book 6)
to address CR Q01272661.
July 2006
Standard 17.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following changes:
•Addition of M3900 Full Icon Support feature on pages 797 to 800 (Book
2).
•Addition of M3900 Set-to-Set Messaging feature on pages 801 to 806
(Book 2).
•Addition of M3900 series digital telephone feature reference on pages
341, 342 of the Personal Directory chapter (Book 3).
April 2006
Standard 16.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following
changes:
•Addition of keycode commands for CP PIV on pages 595 to 610 (Book
2).
•Addition of IPMG on CS1000E to the following: operating parameters on
page 364 (Book 3); and LD 97 on page 379 (Book 3).
•Additions to the following: Call Redirection by Day on page 848 (Book1);
the CRDAY prompt on page 852 (Book 1); and Call Redirection by Time
of Day on page 858 (Book 1).
•Addition of Flexible Feature Codes to list on pages 371 to 376 of Flexible
Feature Codes chapter (Book 2).
•Correction to Message Intercept for Set Status Lockout on pages
982-983 (Book 2).
•Correction to SECA001 alarm message on page 402 (Book 1).
January 2006
Standard 15.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following changes
in content:
•Addition of Converged Office feature on page 1247 (Book 1); changes
to interactions with Call Forward All Calls on pages 647, 648, 721, 725
(Book 1), and 521 (Book 2).
•Addition of IP Phones to supported sets referenced in Selectable
Conferee Display and Disconnect on pages 667 to 700 (Book 3).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Revision History 5
August 2005
Standard 14.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 4.5.
September 2004
Standard 13.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server
1000 Release 4.0.
October 2003
Standard 12.00. This document is issued to support Succession 3.0.
November 2002
Standard 11.00. This document is up-issued to support Meridian 1 Release
25.40 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise (CSE) 1000,
Release 2.0. This is book 1 of a 3 book set.
January 2002
Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content for Meridian 1 Release 25.40
and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000, Release 1.1.
April 2000
Standard 9.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for Release
25.0x. Document changes include removal of: redundant content;
references to equipment types except Options 11C, 51C, 61C, and 81C; and
references to previous software releases.
June 1999
Issue 8.00 released as Standard for Generic Release 24.2x.
October 1997
Issue 7.00. This is the Release 23.0x standard version of this document.
Certain application-specific features have been removed from this document
and have been placed in their appropriate Nortel Networks technical
publications (technical documents). Automatic Call Distribution features can
be found in Automatic Call Distribution Feature description 553-2671-110;
Call Detail Recording features can be found in Call Detail Recording
Description and formats 553-2631-100; Primary Rate Interface features can
be found in International ISDN PRI Feature description and administration
553-2901-301; R2MFC and MFC features can be found in Multifrequency
Compelled Signaling 553-2861-100; and DPNSS1 features can be found in
DPNSS1 Features and Services 553-3921-300.
August 1996
Issue 6.00. This is the Release 22.0x standard version of this document.
The features Automatic Number Identification, Automatic Trunk
Maintenance, Multi Tenant Service, Radio Paging and X08/11 Gateway
have been incorporated into this document. Accordingly, the following
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
6Revision History
Nortel Networks technical publications have been retired to reflect this
change: 553-2611-200, 553-2751-104, 553-2831-100, 553-2721-111 and
553-2941-100.
December 1995
Issue 5.00. This is the Release 21.1x standard version of this document.
July 1995
Issue 4.00. This is the Release 21 standard version of this document.
October 1994
Issue 2.0. This is the Release 20.1x soak version of the document.
July 1994
Issue 1.0. This is the Release 20.0x standard version of this document.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
7
Contents
New in this release 45
Other 45
Revision History 45
How to get help 49
Getting help from the Nortel web site 49
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 49
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 49
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 50
Features and Software options 51
Call Forward All Calls 89
Contents 89
Feature description 89
Operating parameters 90
Feature interactions 91
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 91
Attendant Alternative Answering 91
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 91
Attendant Break-In 91
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls 91
Attendant Busy Verify 91
Attendant Overflow Position 92
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 92
Call Forward and Busy Status 92
Call Forward by Call Type 92
Call Forward Destination Deactivation 92
Call Forward External Deny 92
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 92
Call Forward, Internal Calls 93
Call Forward No Answer 93
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 93
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD 93
Call Page Network Wide 93
Call Redirection by Time of Day 93
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
8Contents
Calling Party Name Display Denied 94
Calling Party Privacy 94
Call Forward Busy
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Redirection
Camp-On
Camp-On, Station 94
China - Attendant Monitor 94
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward 94
Enhanced Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward 94
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring 95
Enhanced Flexible Feature - Outgoing Call Barring 95
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 95
Conference 95
Display of Calling Party Denied 95
Do Not Disturb 96
DPNSS1 Diversion 96
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines 96
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 96
Flexible Feature Codes 96
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 97
Group Call 97
Group Hunt 97
Hunting 97
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions 97
Idle Extension Notification 97
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement 98
ISDN QSIG Call Completion 98
ISDN QSIG Name Display 98
Make Set Busy 98
Message Registration 98
Multi-Party Operations 98
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime 98
Network Intercom (Hot Type D and Hot Type 1 Enhancements) 99
Network Individual Do Not Disturb 99
Night Service Enhancements 99
Paging 99
Periodic Pulse Metering 99
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 99
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks 99
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 99
Ring Again on No Answer 99
Special prefix SPRE access codes 100
Total Redirection Count 100
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 9
Trunk Access Codes 100
User Selectable Call Redirection 100
Feature packaging 100
Feature implementation 100
Task summary list 100
Feature operation 103
Call Forward and Busy Status 105
Contents 105
Feature description 105
Busy Status 106
Call Forward Status 106
Operating parameters 106
Feature interactions 107
Attendant and Network-Wide Remote Call Forward 107
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 107
Autodial 107
Call Forward All Calls 107
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 107
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network-Wide) 107
Calling Party Privacy 107
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 108
Network Intercom 108
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 108
Feature packaging 108
Feature implementation 108
Task summary list 108
Feature operation 110
Call Forward Status 110
BFS lamp or LCD states 110
Call Forward Busy 113
Contents 113
Feature description 113
Operating parameters 113
Feature interactions 113
Attendant Alternative Answering 113
Attendant Busy Verify 113
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 114
Call Forward All Calls 114
Calling Party Privacy 114
Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones 114
Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones 114
Camp-On, Station 114
China - Attendant Monitor 114
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
10 Contents
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 115
Departmental Listed Directory Number 115
Dial Access to Group Calls 115
Call Forward Busy 115
Dial Access to Group Calls
Group Call 115
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 115
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 115
Group Hunt 115
Hot Line 115
Hunting 116
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions 116
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement 116
Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments 116
Network Intercom 116
Night Service 116
Recorded Announcement for Call Diverted to External Trunks 116
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 116
Total Redirection Count 116
Trunk Barring 117
Feature packaging 117
Feature implementation 117
Task summary list 117
Feature operation 118
Call Forward by Call Type 119
Contents 119
Feature description 119
Operating parameters 120
Feature interactions 121
Attendant 121
Attendant Alternative Answering 121
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls 121
Automatic Timed Recall 121
Call Forward All Calls 121
Call Forward No Answer 121
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 122
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD 122
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide 122
Call Redirection by Time of Day 122
Calling Party Name Display Denied 122
Calling Party Privacy 122
Call Transfer
Network Call Transfer 123
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 11
Call Waiting Redirection 123
Conference 123
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 123
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement 123
ISDN Semi Permanent Connections for Australia 124
Message Center 124
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 124
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 124
Trunk Barring 125
Feature packaging 125
Feature implementation 125
Task summary list 125
Feature operation 127
Call Forward Destination Deactivation 129
Contents 129
Feature description 129
Operating parameters 130
Feature interactions 131
Call Forward All Calls 131
Call Forward, Remote 132
Meridian Mail 132
Feature packaging 132
Feature implementation 132
Task summary list 132
Feature operation 134
16-Button DTMF telephone 135
Deactivating Multiple Appearance DN 135
Call Forward External Deny 137
Contents 137
Feature description 137
Operating parameters 138
Feature interactions 138
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 138
Call Forward All Calls 139
Calling Party Privacy 139
Network Call Forward 139
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 139
Trunk Barring 139
Feature packaging 139
Feature implementation 139
Task summary list 139
Feature operation 140
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
12 Contents
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 141
Contents 141
Feature description 141
Operating parameters 143
Feature interactions 143
Automatic Timed Reminders 143
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 143
Call Forward All Calls 143
Call Forward by Call Type 144
Call Forward No Answer 144
Call Redirection by Time of Day 144
Call Waiting Redirection 144
Calling Party Privacy 144
Directory Number Delayed Ringing 144
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing 145
Flexible Call Forward No Answer 145
Group Hunt 145
Hunting 145
Message Centers 145
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 146
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 146
Slow Answer Recall 147
Total Redirection Count 147
Trunk Barring 147
Feature packaging 147
Feature implementation 147
Task summary list 147
Feature operation 149
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer 151
Contents 151
Feature description 151
Operating parameters 152
Feature interactions 153
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 153
Attendant Administration 153
Attendant Alternative Answering 153
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 153
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls 153
Attendant Overflow Position 153
Automatic Call Distribution 154
Automatic Set Relocation 154
Automatic Timed Recall 154
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 13
Automatic Timed Reminders 154
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 154
Call Forward All Calls 154
Call Forward by Call Type 154
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 154
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 155
Call Page Network Wide 155
Call Redirection by Time of Day 155
Call Waiting 155
Call Waiting Redirection 155
Calling Party Privacy 155
Camp-On 156
China - Attendant Monitor 156
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 156
Dial Access to Group Calls 156
Departmental Listed Directory Number 156
Directory Number Delayed Ringing 156
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer 157
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines 157
Group Call 157
Group Hunt 157
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement 157
Hot Line 157
Hunting 158
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions 158
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement 158
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide 158
Meridian Mail Operator Revert 158
Multi-Party Operations 159
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime 159
Network Intercom 159
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number 159
Night Service enhancements 160
Periodic Pulse Metering 160
Recall to Same Attendant 160
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks 160
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 160
Ring Again on No Answer 160
Slow Answer Recall for Transferred External Trunks 160
Total Redirection Count 160
Trunk Barring 161
Feature packaging 161
Feature implementation 161
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
14 Contents
Task summary list 161
Feature operation 164
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD 165
Contents 165
Feature description 165
Operating parameters 165
Feature interactions 165
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward by Call Type 165
Feature packaging 166
Feature implementation 166
Feature operation 166
Call Forward to Trunk Restriction 167
Contents 167
Feature description 167
Operating parameters 167
Feature interactions 167
CDP/UDP Calls 167
Feature packaging 168
Feature implementation 168
Feature operation 168
Call Forward, Internal Calls 169
Contents 169
Feature description 169
Operating parameters 170
Feature interactions 171
Attendant Administration 171
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 171
Attendant Busy Verify 171
Attendant-Extended Calls 171
Attendant Night Service 171
Attendant Overflow 171
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward Reminder Tone 171
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide 172
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 172
Call Redirection by Time of Day 172
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Redirection 172
Calling Party Privacy 172
Camp-On 173
China - Attendant Monitor 173
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 173
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 15
Do Not Disturb
Hunting 173
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 173
Network Intercom 173
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 173
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks 173
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 174
Remote Call Forward 174
Trunk Barring 174
Feature packaging 174
Feature implementation 174
Task summary list 174
Feature operation 175
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone 175
Analog (500/2500 type) telephone 176
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide) 177
Contents 177
Feature description 177
Operating parameters 178
Feature interactions 178
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) 178
Call Forward Activation from any Feature
Call Forward and Busy Status 178
Call Forward Destination Deactivation 178
Calling Party Privacy 179
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 179
Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) 179
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 179
Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward 180
Traffic Measurements 180
Feature packaging 181
Feature implementation 181
Task summary list 181
Set-based configuration 182
Attendant-based configuration 183
Feature operation 185
Network Wide Set-based Remote Call Forward 185
Attendant-based Remote Call Forward 185
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 187
Contents 187
Feature description 187
Operating parameters 188
Feature interactions 188
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
16 Contents
Attendant Blocking of DN 188
Automatic Call Distribution 188
Attendant Barge-in
Attendant Busy Verify
Attendant Break-in 188
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) 189
BRIT 189
Call Forward-older features 189
Call Redirection by Time of Day 189
Call Transfer 189
Call Waiting 189
Call Waiting Redirection 189
Camp-on 190
Digital Private Network Signaling System One (DPNSS1) 190
Direct Inward System Access 190
Do Not Disturb 190
Flexible DN
External Flexible DN 190
Group Call 190
Group Hunt 190
Hunt 190
Hunt DN/External Hunt DN 190
Idle Extension Notification 191
Intercept Computer Call Forward 191
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operations 191
Last Number Redial 191
Multiple Appearance Multiple Call Arrangements (MCAs)
Multiple Appearance Single Call Arrangements (SCAs) 191
Primary Line Directory Number (PLDN) 191
Phantom TN 191
Priority Override 191
Radio Paging 191
Ring Again
Network Ring Again 191
Ring Again No Answer
Network Ring Again No Answer 192
Single Digit Access 192
Semi-automatic Camp-On 192
Speed Call 192
Feature packaging 192
Feature implementation 192
Task summary list 192
Feature operation 194
Standalone 194
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 17
Network 194
Call Hold, Deluxe 195
Contents 195
Feature description 195
Operating parameters 196
Feature interactions 196
Attendant Administration 196
Attendant Break-In 196
Camp-On, Forced
Override, Enhanced
Override, Priority 196
Call Hold, Deluxe 196
Calling Line Identification 196
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 196
Call Party Name Display 196
Call Transfer 196
Called Party Control on Internal Calls 197
Calling Party Privacy 197
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 197
Mixed DNs 197
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 197
Music, Enhanced 197
Predictive Dialing 197
Feature packaging 197
Feature implementation 197
Task summary list 197
Feature operation 199
Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement 201
Contents 201
Feature description 201
Operating parameters 202
Feature interactions 203
Automatic Call Distribution 203
Automatic Hold 203
Multi-Party Operations 203
Conference (A03/A06, C6A) 204
Exclusive Hold 204
Permanent Hold on an analog (500/2500 type) set 204
Switch Hook Flash 204
Transfer (TRN) 205
Feature packaging 205
Feature implementation 205
Task summary list 205
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
18 Contents
Feature operation 207
Call Hold, Permanent 209
Contents 209
Feature description 209
Operating parameters 209
Feature interactions 210
Attendant Break-In 210
Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) 210
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall 210
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 210
Calling Party Privacy 210
Camp-On, Forced
Override, Enhanced
Override, Priority 211
China - Attendant Monitor 211
DECT and DCS telephones 211
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 211
Predictive Dialing 211
Privacy 211
Feature packaging 211
Feature implementation 212
Task summary list 212
Feature operation 212
Call Park 215
Contents 215
Feature description 215
Operating parameters 216
Feature interactions 217
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1 217
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar 217
Access Restrictions 217
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 218
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 218
Attendant Break-In 218
Automatic Call Distribution 218
Automatic Redial 218
Attendant Consoles 218
Autodial
Speed Call 218
Automatic Timed Reminders 218
Busy Lamp Field 218
Call Detail Recording (CDR) 219
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 219
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 19
Call Forward 219
Call Page Network Wide 219
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 219
Call Party Name Display 219
Call Pickup 219
Call Pickup Network Wide 219
Call Transfer
Conference 219
Call Waiting 220
Centralized Attendant Service 220
China - Attendant Monitor 220
Conference 220
Console Presentation Group Level Services 220
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 220
Display of Calling Party Denied 220
Do Not Disturb 221
Generic XFCOT Software Support 221
Group Call 221
Held Call Clearing 221
Hot Line 221
In-Band Automatic Number Identification 221
INIT ACD Queue Call Restore 221
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operation 222
Make Set Busy 222
Multi-Tenant Service 222
Music 222
Network Intercom
Private Line Service 222
Periodic Pulse Metering 222
Privacy Override 222
Privacy Release 223
Recall After Parking 223
Traffic measurements 223
Feature packaging 223
Feature implementation 223
Task summary list 223
Feature operation 225
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 227
Contents 227
Feature description 227
Operating parameters 227
Feature interactions 228
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication 228
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
20 Contents
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 228
Call Hold, Deluxe
Call Hold, Permanent 228
Call Park 228
Camp-On 228
Feature packaging 228
Feature implementation 228
Feature operation 229
Call Party Name Display 231
Contents 231
Feature description 231
Call Party Name Display assignment 232
Call Party Name Display composition 232
Display Devices and Capabilities 233
Operating parameters 234
Feature interactions 235
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall 235
ACD Routing by DNIS 235
Attendant Recall 235
Attendant Recall with Splitting 235
Autodial
Speed Call 235
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Dialed Number Identification Services
(DNIS) 236
Automatic Wake Up 236
Call Hold, Deluxe 236
Call Park 236
Call Pickup 236
Call Pickup Network Wide 236
Call Transfer 236
Calling Party Privacy 237
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) 237
Conference 237
Dial Intercom 237
Dialed Number Identification Service 237
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access Signaling
System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working 237
Display Key 237
End-to-End Signaling 238
ISDN 238
ISDN QSIG Name Display 238
Listed Directory Number 238
Manual Signaling (Buzz) 238
Meridian Hospitality Voice Services 238
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 21
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration 238
Meridian 911 238
Network Intercom 239
Override 239
Slow Answer Recall 239
Voice Call 239
Feature packaging 239
Feature implementation 239
Task summary list 239
Enable CPND and add names to the CPND data block 240
Change or remove names in the CPND data block 243
Print entries from the CPND data block 244
Add or change CPND name entry for a telephone 244
Feature operation 245
Call Pickup 247
Contents 247
Feature description 247
Operating parameters 248
Feature interactions 248
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 248
Attendant Alternative Answering 248
Attendant Overflow Position 248
Automatic Call Distribution 248
Call Park 248
Calling Party Privacy 248
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 248
Call Pickup, Directed 248
Conference 249
Dial Intercom 249
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access Signaling
System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working 249
Display of Calling Party Denied 249
Flexible Feature Codes 249
Group Call 249
Hot Line 249
ISDN QSIG Name Display 249
Multi-Party Operations 250
Network Intercom 250
Periodic Pulse Metering 250
M3900 (Single Site) Virtual Office 250
Feature packaging 250
Feature implementation 250
Task summary list 250
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
22 Contents
Feature operation 252
Call Pickup, Directed 253
Contents 253
Feature description 253
Operating parameters 254
Feature interactions 254
Automatic Call Distribution 254
Call Pickup 254
Flexible Feature Code 254
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service 254
Feature packaging 254
Feature implementation 254
Task summary list 254
Feature operation 256
Call Redirection by Day 259
Contents 259
Feature description 259
Operating parameters 260
Feature interactions 260
Call Redirection by Time of Day 260
Calls to Idle Stations: 260
Calls to Busy Stations: 260
Call Forward No Answer 261
Call Forward All Calls 261
Call Waiting Redirection 261
Hunting 261
Hunting by Call Type 261
Group Hunting 261
Multiple Appearance DN, Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime 262
Second Level Call Forward No Answer 262
User Selectable Call Redirection 262
Feature packaging 262
Feature implementation 262
Task summary list 262
Feature operation 266
Call Redirection by Time of Day 267
Contents 267
Feature description 267
Operating parameters 268
Feature interactions 268
Calls to Idle Stations: 268
Calls to Busy Stations: 268
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 23
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward, Internal
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC 268
Call Forward by Call Type
Hunting by Call Type 268
Call Forward No Answer 269
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 269
Call Waiting Redirection 269
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime 269
Hunting 269
User Selectable Call Redirection 269
Feature packaging 269
Feature implementation 270
Task summary list 270
Feature operation 272
Call Transfer 273
Contents 273
Feature description 273
Restricted Call Transfer 273
Operating parameters 274
Feature interactions 274
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 274
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar 274
Attendant Break-In 274
Automatic Redial 275
Call Forward by Call Type 275
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide 275
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 275
Call Hold, Deluxe 275
Call Page Network Wide 275
Call Party Name Display 275
Call Pickup Network Wide 275
Call Transfer 276
Calling Party Name Display Denied 276
Calling Party Privacy 276
Charge Account and Calling Party Number 276
Charge Account, Forced 276
China - Attendant Monitor 276
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 277
Conference 277
Dial Intercom 277
Display Calling Party Denied 277
Dial Access to Group Calls 277
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
24 Contents
Group Call 277
Group Hunt 278
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement 278
Held Call Clearing 278
Hold 278
In-Band Automatic Number Identification 278
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion 278
ISDN QSIG Name Display 278
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks 278
Meridian 911 279
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon 279
Message Registration 279
Multi-Party Operations 279
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements 279
Music, Enhanced 279
Network Intercom 279
Off-Hook Alarm Security 279
On Hold on Loudspeaker 280
Periodic Pulse Metering 280
Predictive Dialing 280
Privacy Override 281
Station Activity Records 281
Supervised Analog Lines 281
China-Supervised Analog Lines 281
Three-Party Service 281
Trunk Barring 281
Trunk to Trunk Connection 282
Feature packaging 282
Feature implementation 282
Task summary list 282
Feature operation 283
Call Waiting Redirection 285
Contents 285
Feature description 285
Operating parameters 286
Feature interactions 286
Automatic Timed Reminders
Automatic Timed Recalls 286
Basic Rate Interface 286
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward, Internal 286
Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type 286
Call Forward/Hunt Override via Flexible Feature Code 287
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 25
Call Forward No Answer 287
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 287
Call Redirection by Time of Day 287
Call Pickup Network Wide 287
Call Waiting 287
Camp-On 287
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer 288
Distinctive Ringing/New Distinctive Ringing
Call Forward No Answer 288
Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing 288
Hunting 288
Internal or Station-to-Station Call Waiting 288
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration 288
Message Center 288
Message Waiting 289
Multi-Party Operations 289
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 289
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime 289
Network Call Forward No Answer 290
Network Call Redirection 290
Night Restriction Classes of Service 290
Night Service
Night Service Enhancements 290
Voice Mail 290
Feature packaging 290
Feature implementation 290
Task summary list 290
Feature operation 293
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting 295
Contents 295
Feature description 295
Internal Call Waiting 296
Call Waiting Flexible Feature Codes 296
Operating parameters 296
Feature interactions 297
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 297
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 297
Attendant Break-In 297
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators 297
Attendant Queuing 298
Automatic Line Selection 298
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Waiting. 298
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
26 Contents
Call Forward Busy - proprietary telephones 298
Call Forward Busy - Analog (500/2500 type) telephones 298
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 298
Call Forward, Internal Calls 298
Call Forward No Answer 298
Call Park 298
Call Pickup Network Wide 298
Call Waiting Redirection 298
Camp-On 299
Camp-on, Station 299
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control 299
Dial Intercom 299
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 299
Directory Number Delayed Ringing 299
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 299
Flexible Feature Code enhancement 299
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 299
Group Hunt 299
Hunting 299
Idle Extension Notification 300
ISDN Night Service 300
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion 300
Message Center 300
Multi-Party Operations 300
Multi-Party Operations 300
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service 301
Night Restriction Classes of Service 301
Night Service Enhancements 302
On Hold on Loudspeaker 302
Ring Again 302
Station Camp-on 302
Feature packaging 302
Feature implementation 302
Task summary list 302
Feature operation 303
Called Party Control on Internal Calls 305
Contents 305
Feature description 305
Operating parameters 305
Feature interactions 306
Automatic Hold 306
Call Hold, Deluxe 306
Held Call Clearing 306
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 27
Feature packaging 306
Feature implementation 307
Task summary list 307
Feature operation 308
Simple Call - Meridian 1 Proprietary Sets 309
Simple Call - Analog (500/2500 type) Sets 309
Conference Call 309
Transfer Call 310
Call on Hold 310
Called Party Disconnect Control 311
Content 311
Feature description 311
Operating parameters 311
Feature interactions 312
Automatic Answerback 312
Conference 312
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) - Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) 312
Malicious Call Traced - Enhanced 312
Meridian 911 312
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon 312
Periodic Clearing Enhancement 313
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music 313
Feature packaging 313
Feature implementation 313
Feature operation 313
Calling Party Name Display Denied 315
Content 315
Feature description 315
Operating parameters 317
Feature interactions 317
Attendant Consoles 317
Call Forward
Call Transfer 317
Calling Party Privacy 317
Conference 317
ISDN QSIG Name Display 317
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 318
Office Data Administration System (ODAS) 318
Feature packaging 318
Feature implementation 318
Task summary list 318
Feature operation 319
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
28 Contents
Calling Party Privacy 321
Calling Party Privacy Override 323
Content 323
Feature description 323
Outgoing calls 324
Incoming calls 325
Tandem Calls 325
Operating parameters 326
Feature interactions 327
Attendant Consoles 327
Autodial 328
Automatic Call Distribution 328
Automatic Call Distribution MAX 328
Basic Rate Interface 328
Call Detail Recording 329
Call Pickup Network Wide 329
Call Hold 329
Call Forward All Types
Hunt
Network Hunt 329
Call Pickup 330
Call Transfer 330
Calling Line Identification Restriction 330
Calling Party Privacy 331
Conference 332
Display of Calling Party Denied 332
E.164 ESN Numbering Plan Enhancement 332
Feature Group D 332
Hot Line 332
Last Number Redial 333
Incoming Trunk Programmable Calling Line Identification 333
ISDN Signaling Link 333
Malicious Call Trace 333
Meridian 911 333
Meridian Interactive Voice Response 333
Meridian Link 333
Meridian Mail 334
Meridian MAX 334
Network Call Redirection 334
Network Message Center 334
Network Ring Again 334
Nortel Symposium Call Center 334
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 29
Private Line Service 334
Remote Virtual Queuing 335
Ring Again - Busy Trunk 335
Speed Call
System Speed Call 335
Stored Number Redial 335
Trunk Anti-Tromboning 335
Trunk Optimization Before Answer 335
Virtual Network Services 336
VISIT 336
Feature packaging 336
Feature implementation 336
Task summary list 336
Feature operation 339
Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing 341
Contents 341
Feature description 341
Operating parameters 342
Feature interactions 342
342
Feature packaging 343
Feature implementation 343
Feature operation 343
Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number 345
Contents 345
Feature description 345
Operating parameters 346
Feature interactions 346
Attendant Break-in 346
Centralized Multiline 346
Make Set Busy 346
Network Camp-On 346
Operator Call Back 346
Single Call Ringing and Non-ringing 347
Station Camp-On 347
Feature packaging 347
Feature implementation 347
Feature operation 347
Camp-On 349
Content 349
Feature description 349
Operating parameters 349
Feature interactions 350
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
30 Contents
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 350
Attendant Break-In 350
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward, Internal Call 350
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 350
Call Forward No Answer 350
Call Park Network Wide 350
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 350
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Redirection 350
Camp-On, Station 350
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control 351
Enhanced Override
Forced Camp-On
Priority Override 351
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 351
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 351
Generic XFCOT Software Support 351
Group Hunt 351
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation 352
Hunting 352
Idle Extension Notification 352
Multi-Party Operations 352
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements 352
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service 352
On Hold on Loudspeaker 352
Override - Forced Camp-On and Priority Override
Override, Enhanced 352
Periodic Pulse Metering 352
Source Included when Attendant Dials 353
Uninterrupted Line Connections 353
Warning Tone 353
Feature packaging 353
Feature implementation 353
Task summary list 353
Feature operation 354
Camp-On, Forced 357
Content 357
Feature description 357
Operating parameters 358
Feature interactions 359
Attendant Break-In 359
Attendant Calls 359
Automatic Call Distribution 359
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 31
Call Hold, Deluxe
Call Hold, Permanent
Hold 360
Camp-On 360
Conference calls 360
Data calls 360
Do Not Disturb 360
Make Set Busy 360
Multi-Party Operations 360
Night Restriction Classes of Service 360
Operator Call Back 361
Override 361
Feature packaging 361
Feature implementation 361
Task summary list 361
Feature operation 363
Forced Camp-On with an analog (500/2500 type) telephone 364
Forced Camp-On with a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone 365
Camp-On, Station 367
Contents 367
Feature description 367
Operating parameters 368
Camp-On indication 368
Feature interactions 368
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward Busy
Call Waiting
Hunting 368
Camp-On 368
Dial Impulse Set 369
Network Attendant Service 369
Feature packaging 369
Feature implementation 369
Feature operation 370
Standalone case 370
Network case 370
Recall timing on Camp-On calls 371
Card LED Status 373
Contents 373
Feature description 373
Operating parameters 373
Feature interactions 374
Feature packaging 374
Feature implementation 374
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
32 Contents
Task summary list 374
Feature operation 374
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation 375
Contents 375
Feature description 375
Operating parameters 375
Feature interactions 376
Digit Display 376
Feature packaging 376
Feature implementation 376
Task summary list 376
Feature operation 377
Centrex Switchhook Flash 379
Contents 379
Feature description 379
Operating parameters 380
Feature interactions 381
Autodial Tandem Transfer 381
China - Attendant Monitor 381
Collect Call Blocking 381
Conference 381
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 381
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced 381
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music 381
Secrecy 381
Feature packaging 382
Feature implementation 382
Task summary list 382
Feature operation 385
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones 385
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones 385
Attendant Consoles 385
Charge Account and Calling Party Number 387
Contents 387
Feature description 387
Operating parameters 388
Feature interactions 389
Attendant Barge-In
Attendant Busy Verify 389
Call Transfer 389
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring 389
Conference 389
Music, Enhanced 389
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 33
Override 390
Ring Again 390
Speed Call 390
Telephone keys 390
Feature packaging 390
Feature implementation 391
Task summary list 391
Feature operation 392
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones 393
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones 394
Attendant Consoles 396
Charge Account, Forced 397
Contents 397
Feature description 397
Operating parameters 398
Feature interactions 398
Autodial
Speed Call 398
Authorization Code Security Enhancement 399
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) 399
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) 399
Call Detail Recording 399
Call Transfer
Conference 399
Last Number Redial 399
Pre-translation 399
Scheduled Access Restrictions 399
Stored Number Redial 400
Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR) 400
Feature packaging 400
Feature implementation 400
Task summary list 400
Feature operation 402
Charge Display at End of Call 403
Contents 403
Feature description 403
M2317 charge display 404
Modular Set charge display 404
Operating parameters 404
Feature interactions 404
Feature packaging 404
Feature implementation 405
Task summary list 405
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
34 Contents
Feature operation 405
China - Attendant Monitor 407
Contents 407
Feature description 407
Attendant Monitor Function 407
Operating parameters 408
Feature interactions 408
Attendant Barge-In 408
Attendant Break-In 408
Attendant Busy Verify 409
Automatic Call Distribution 409
Call Forward All Calls 409
Call Forward Busy 409
Call Forward, Internal Calls 409
Call Forward No Answer 409
Call Hold, Permanent 409
Call Park 409
Call Trace 409
Call Transfer 410
Centrex Switchhook Flash 410
Conference 410
Do Not Disturb 410
Make Set Busy 410
Malicious Call Trace 410
Multiple Appearance DN 410
Override 410
Override, Enhanced 411
Privacy Release 411
Private Line 411
Feature packaging 411
Feature implementation 411
Task summary list 411
Feature operation 412
Monitor a DN 412
Monitor a Trunk 413
China - Busy Tone Detection 415
Contents 415
Feature description 415
Operating parameters 415
Feature interactions 416
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks 416
Feature packaging 416
Feature implementation 416
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 35
Task summary list 416
Feature operation 418
China - Flexible Feature Codes 419
Contents 419
Feature description 419
Busy Number Redial 419
Customer Call Forward 420
Outgoing Call Barring 420
Operating parameters 420
Feature interactions 421
Busy Number Redial 421
Customer Call Forward 421
Outgoing Call Barring 422
Feature packaging 424
Feature implementation 424
Task summary list 424
Busy Number Redial 425
Customer Call Forward 427
Outgoing Call Barring 428
Feature operation 431
Busy Number Redial 431
Customer Call Forward 431
Outgoing Call Barring 431
China - Supervised Analog Lines 433
Contents 433
Feature description 433
Battery Reversal Supervision 433
Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision 434
Operating parameters 434
Feature interactions 435
Call Transfer 435
Conference 436
Multi-Party Operations 436
Feature packaging 436
Feature implementation 436
Task summary list 436
Feature operation 437
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 439
Contents 439
Feature description 439
Operating parameters 440
Feature interactions 440
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
36 Contents
Call Diversion (Call Transfer, Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward, Internal Calls, Call Forward No Answer, Hunting) 440
Conference 440
Digitone Receiver Pads 441
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Pads 441
Multi-Party Operations 441
Feature packaging 441
Feature implementation 441
Task summary list 441
Feature operation 443
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements 445
Contents 445
Feature description 445
ANI Definition 445
Shared functionality 446
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation introduction 446
CIS Gateway Enhancements introduction 446
ANI Digits Manipulation feature functionality 446
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation examples 448
Example 1 - DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI 448
Example 2 - DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI 448
Gateways Enhancement feature functionality 448
Operating parameters 455
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation operating parameters 455
CIS Gateways Enhancements operating parameters 455
Feature interactions 456
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature interactions 456
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interactions 457
Feature packaging 457
Feature implementation 458
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature 458
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature implementation 466
Feature operation 471
CIS ANI Reception 473
Contents 473
Feature description 473
Automatic ANI request 474
Solicited ANI request 475
ANI Gateways 478
ANI Digits Display 479
ANI Digits in CDR 480
Operating parameters 480
Feature interactions 480
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 37
CIS Digital Trunk Interface and CIS Multifrequency Shuttle (MFS) 480
Malicous Call Trace (MCT) 480
Feature packaging 480
Feature implementation 481
Task summary list 482
Feature operation 485
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection 487
Contents 487
Feature description 487
Operating parameters 490
Feature interactions 490
CIS 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (CIS DTI2) 490
Feature packaging 490
Feature implementation 491
Task summary list 491
Feature operation 492
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 493
Contents 493
Feature description 493
Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS sets 496
Date and time stamp information 497
Calling number information 497
Calling name information 498
Network engineering for CLASS sets 499
Operating parameters 513
Feature interactions 514
Attendant Call Extension 514
Automatic Wake Up 514
Blind Transfer 514
Call Forward All Calls 514
Call Forward, Internal 514
Call Transfer 514
Calling Line Identification Restriction for ISDN BRI sets 514
Conference/No Hold Conference 514
Dial Intercom 515
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 515
Display of Calling Party Denied 515
Distinctive Ringing 515
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) Enhancement 515
Group Call 515
Hotline 516
Hunt 516
Incremental Software Management 516
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
38 Contents
Feature Group D 516
In-Band ANI 516
Integrated Services Digital Network 517
Meridian 911 517
Private Line Service 517
VIP Automatic Wakeup 518
Virtual Network Services (VNS) 518
Feature packaging 518
Feature implementation 519
Task summary list 519
Feature operation 522
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator 523
Contents 523
Feature description 523
Operating parameters 527
Feature interactions 528
Attendant Console 528
Call Party Control Incoming 528
Make Set Busy 528
Meridian Mail 528
Message Waiting 528
Permanent Hold 529
Set Relocation 529
Feature packaging 529
Feature implementation 529
Task summary list 529
Feature maintenance and diagnostics 530
Feature operation 531
CLID Name Enhancement and CLID B 533
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID) 535
Contents 535
Feature description 535
Operating parameters 538
Feature interactions 539
Attendant Call Extension 539
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 540
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 540
Information Notification Service for Japan 540
Private Line Service 540
Feature packaging 540
Feature implementation 540
Feature operation 541
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 39
Collect Call Blocking 543
Contents 543
Feature description 543
Operating parameters 545
Feature interactions 546
Automatic Answerback 546
Automatic Call Distribution 546
Automatic Call Distribution Interflow 546
Automatic Call Distribution Night Call Forward 546
Automatic Call Distribution Night RAN Route Announcement 546
Automatic Call Distribution Overflow 547
Autoterminate 547
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Sets 547
Central Answering Position 547
Centralized Attendant Service 547
Centrex Switchhook Flash 547
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced 547
Meridian Mail 547
Network Automatic Call Distribution 548
Pilot DN 548
Private Line Service 548
Recorded Announcement 548
Tandem to Unsupervised Trunk 548
Trunk Hook Flash 548
Feature packaging 548
Feature implementation 549
Task summary list 549
Feature operation 553
Conference Warning Tone Enhancement 555
Contents 555
Feature description 555
Operating parameters 556
Feature Interactions 556
Tones and Cadences 556
Feature packaging 556
Feature implementation 556
Task summary list 556
Feature operation 558
Conference 559
Contents 559
Feature description 559
Operating parameters 560
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
40 Contents
Feature interactions 561
500/2500 Line Disconnect 561
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1 561
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall 561
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar 561
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 561
Attendant Barge-In
Attendant Busy Verify 562
Attendant Break-In 562
Attendant Console 562
Attendant Overflow Position 562
Autodial Tandem Transfer 562
Automatic Redial 562
B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching 562
Call Forward All Calls 563
Call Forward by Call Type 563
Call Page Network Wide 563
Call Park 563
Call Party Name Display 563
Call Pickup 563
Call Pickup Network Wide 563
Call Transfer 563
Called Party Disconnect Control 564
Calling Party Name Display Denied 564
Calling Party Privacy 564
Camp-On, Forced 564
Centrex Switchhook Flash 564
Charge Account and Calling Party Name 564
China - Attendant Monitor 564
China - Supervised Analog Lines 565
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 565
Controlled Class of Service 565
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced 565
Dial Access to Group Calls 565
Dial Intercom 566
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 566
End-to-End Signaling 566
Group Call 566
Held Call Clearing 566
Hot Line 566
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion 566
ISDN QSIG Name Display 566
In-Band Automatic Number Identification 567
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 41
Malicious Call Trace 567
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced 567
Meridian Mail Conference Control 567
Meridian 911 567
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon 567
Message Registration 568
Multi-Party Operations 568
Multi-Party Operations - Call Join 568
Multi-Party Operations -Three-Party Service
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements 568
Music 568
Music, Enhanced 568
Network and Executive Distinctive Ringing 568
Network Intercom 568
No Hold Conference 568
Off-Hook Alarm Security 569
On Hold on Loudspeaker 569
Override 569
Override, Enhanced 569
Paging 569
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) 569
Privacy Override 569
Recorded Announcement Trunk 569
Recorded Telephone Dictation 569
Ring Again 570
Station Activity Records 570
Trunk Access from any Station 570
Trunk Barring 570
Trunk to Trunk Connection 570
Feature packaging 570
Feature implementation 571
Task summary list 571
Feature operation 572
Console Operations 575
Contents 575
Feature description 575
Console Presentation 575
Queue Thermometer 576
Operating parameters 576
Console Presentation 576
Feature interactions 576
Console Presentation 576
Feature packaging 576
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
42 Contents
Feature implementation 577
Task summary list 577
Console Presentation 577
Queue Thermometer 577
Feature operation 577
Console Presentation Group Level Services 579
Contents 579
Feature description 579
Operating parameters 580
Feature interactions 580
Attendant Administration 580
Attendant Secrecy 580
Attendant Supervisory Console 580
Call Park 580
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number 581
Night Key for Direct Inward Dialing Digit Manipulation 581
Feature packaging 581
Feature implementation 581
Task summary list 581
Feature operation 583
Context-sensitive soft keys 585
Feature description 585
Soft keys configuration 585
Operating parameters 587
Feature restrictions 588
Feature interactions 588
Feature packaging 588
Feature implementation 588
Feature operation 589
Using call features 590
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys 592
Controlled Class of Service 595
Contents 595
Feature description 595
Operating parameters 595
Feature interactions 596
Authorization Code 596
Conference 596
Flexible Feature Codes 596
Hot Line 596
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 596
Room Status 597
Scheduled Access Restrictions 597
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 43
Station Category Indication 597
Feature packaging 597
Feature implementation 597
Task summary list 597
Feature operation 599
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced 601
Contents 601
Feature description 601
Operating parameters 601
Feature interactions 602
Attendant Administration 602
Attendant Supervisory Console 602
Authorization Codes 602
Conference 602
Coordinated Dialing Plan 602
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 602
Pre-translation 602
Feature packaging 602
Feature implementation 602
Task summary list 602
Feature operation 605
Converged Office 607
Corporate Directory 609
Contents 609
Feature description 609
Operating parameters 610
Call Server memory requirements 610
Feature interactions 611
Call Transfer
Conference 611
Feature packaging 611
Feature implementation 611
Feature operation 612
Special characters 613
Search/Edit screen features 613
Corporate Directory views 613
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
44 Contents
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
45
New in this release
There have been no updates to the document in this release.
Other Revision History
May 2008 Standard 02.04. This document has been up-issued to add information on
CDP/UDP Calls to the Call Forward to Trunk Restriction chapter.
December 2007 Standard 02.03. This document has been up-issued to support
Communication Server Release 5.5.
July 2007 July 2007 Standard 01.04. This document is up-issued (revising the 500
Telephone Features and Bandwidth Management Support for Network
Wide Virtual Office chapters in Book 1 and revising the Conference
Warning Tone Enhancement chapter in Book 2).
June 2007 Standard 01.03. This document is up-issued (revising the Software
Licenses chapter in Book 6).
June 2007 Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued (revising the Network Music
feature implementation in Book 5).
May 2007 Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document is renamed Features and
Services Fundamentals - Book 2 of 6 (NN43001-106-B2) and contains
information previously contained in the following legacy documents, now
retired:
•Features and Services Fundamentals - Book 1 of 6 (NN43001-106-B1)
•Features and Services Fundamentals - Book 2 of 6 (NN43001-106-B2)
•Features and Services Fundamentals - Book 3 of 6 (NN43001-106-B3)
This document also includes the following updates:
•Corrections to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on page
534 (Book 5) and to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on
page 540 (Book 5)
•Updated the description of EXTT prompt in LD 15 on page 338 (Book
6)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
46 New in this release
July 2006 Standard 17.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following
changes:
•Addition of M3900 Full Icon Support feature on pages 797 to 800
(Book 2)
•Addition of M3900 Set-to-Set Messaging feature on pages 801 to 806
(Book 2)
•Addition of M3900 series digital telephone feature reference on pages
341, 342 of the Personal Directory chapter (Book 3)
April 2006 Standard 16.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following
changes:
•Addition of keycode commands for CP PIV on pages 595 to 610 (Book
2)
•Addition of IPMG on CS1000E to the following: operating parameters
on page 364 (Book 3); and LD 97 on page 379 (Book 3)
•Additions to the following: Call Redirection by Day on page 848
(Book1); the CRDAY prompt on page 852 (Book 1); and Call
Redirection by Time of Day on page 858 (Book 1)
•Addition of Flexible Feature Codes to list on pages 371 to 376 of
Flexible Feature Codes chapter (Book 2)
•Correction to Message Intercept for Set Status Lockout on pages
982-983 (Book 2)
•Correction to SECA001 alarm message on page 402 (Book 1)
January 2006 Standard 15.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following
changes in content:
•Addition of Converged Office feature on page 1247 (Book 1); changes
to interactions with Call Forward All Calls on pages 647, 648, 721,
725 (Book 1), and 521 (Book 2)
•Addition of IP Phones to supported sets referenced in Selectable
Conferee Display and Disconnect on pages 667 to 700 (Book 3)
August 2005 Standard 14.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 4.5.
September 2004 Standard 13.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server
1000 Release 4.0.
October 2003 Standard 12.00. This document is issued to support Succession 3.0.
November 2002 Standard 11.00. This document is up-issued to support Meridian 1
Release 25.40 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise
(CSE) 1000, Release 2.0. This is book 1 of a 3 book set.
January 2002 Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content for Meridian 1 Release 25.40
and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000, Release 1.1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Other 47
April 2000 Standard 9.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for Release
25.0x. Document changes include removal of: redundant content;
references to equipment types except Options 11C, 51C, 61C, and 81C;
and references to previous software releases.
June 1999 Issue 8.00 released as Standard for Generic Release 24.2x.
October 1997 Issue 7.00. This is the Release 23.0x standard version of this document.
Certain application-specific features have been removed from this
document and have been placed in their appropriate Nortel Networks
technical publications (technical documents). Automatic Call Distribution
features can be found in Automatic Call Distribution Feature description
553-2671-110; Call Detail Recording features can be found in Call Detail
Recording Description and formats 553-2631-100; Primary Rate Interface
features can be found in International ISDN PRI Feature description and
administration 553-2901-301; R2MFC and MFC features can be found in
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling 553-2861-100; and DPNSS1 features
can be found in DPNSS1 Features and Services 553-3921-300.
August 1996 Issue 6.00. This is the Release 22.0x standard version of this document.
The features Automatic Number Identification, Automatic Trunk
Maintenance, Multi Tenant Service, Radio Paging and X08/11 Gateway
have been incorporated into this document. Accordingly, the following
Nortel Networks technical publications have been retired to reflect this
change: 553-2611-200, 553-2751-104, 553-2831-100, 553-2721-111 and
553-2941-100.
December 1995 Issue 5.00. This is the Release 21.1x standard version of this document.
July 1995 Issue 4.00. This is the Release 21 standard version of this document.
October 1994 Issue 2.0. This is the Release 20.1x soak version of the document.
July 1994 Issue 1.0. This is the Release 20.0x standard version of this document.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
48 New in this release
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
49
How to get help
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
Getting help from the Nortel web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support web site:
http://www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and
tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
•download software, documentation, and product bulletins
•search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base
for answers to technical issues
•sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation
for Nortel equipment
•open and manage technical support cases
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support
web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over
the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone
number for your region:
http://www.nortel.com/callus
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express
Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel
product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
50 How to get help
http://www.nortel.com/erc
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor
or reseller.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
51
Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface
•Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface
•Reference Clock Switching (See also packages
129, 131, and 154)
75 PBXI 5
16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone
•16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Operation
144 ABCD 14
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface
•DID Recall features on DTI2 for Italy – DID
Offering
•DID Recall features on DTI2 for Italy – DID Recall
•Italian Central Office Special Services (see also
packages 131, and 157)
•Italian Periodic Pulse Metering
•Pulsed E&M DTI2 Signaling
•Reference Clock Switching (see also packages
75, 131, and 154)
•R2MFC 1.5 Mbps DTI
•2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface
•2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface Enhancements:
— Alarm Handling on DID Channels
— Alarm Handling on Incoming COT/DID Calls
— Call Clearance
— Clock Synchronization
— DID Call Offering
— Disable Out-of-Service Alarm State
— Fault Signal
129 DTI2 10
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
52 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
— Incoming Seizure
— Outpulsing Delay
— Release Control
— Signal Recognition
— Trunk Entering Alarm Status/Trunk Pack
Exiting Alarm Status
— 64 Kbps Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Handling
2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface
•Reference Clock Switching (see also packages
75, 129, and 131)
154 PRI2 14
2500 Set Features
•Call Hold, Permanent
•2500 Set Features
18 SS25 1
500 Set Dial Access to Features
•500 Set Features
•500/2500 Line Disconnect
73 SS5 4
AC15 Recall
•AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall
•AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar
•AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1
•Access Restrictions
236 ACRL 20
ACD/CDN Expansion
•ACD/CDN Expansion
388 ACDE 25.40
Administration Set
•Set-based Administration Enhancements
256 ADMINSET 21
Advanced ISDN Network Services 148 NTWK 13
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 53
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
•Advice of Charge – Charging Information and
End of Call for NUMERIS Connectivity (see also
package 101)
•Advice of Charge Real-time Supplementary
Services for NUMERIS and SWISSNET (see also
package 101)
•Alternative Conference PAD Levels
•Alternative Loss Plan
•Alternative Loss Plan for China
Analog Calling Line Identification
•CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)
349 ACLI 25
Aries Digital Sets
•Meridian Communications Adapter
•Meridian Modular Telephones
170 ARIE 14
Attendant Administration
•Attendant Administration
54 AA 1
Attendant Alternative Answering
•Attendant Alternative Answering
•Attendant Barge-In
174 AAA 15
Attendant Announcement
•Attendant Announcement
384 AANN 25.40
Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer
•Attendant Break-In
•Break-In busy Indication and Prevention
•Break-In to Inquiry Calls
•Break-In to Lockout Set Denied
•Break-In with Secrecy
•China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator
Break-In (see also Package 131)
•Network Individual Do Not Disturb (see also
packages 9, and 159
•Attendant Busy Verify
•Attendant Call Selection
•Attendant Calls Waiting Indication
•Attendant Consoles
127 BKI 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
54 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
•Attendant Delay on Hold
•Attendant Display of Speed Dial or Autodial
Attendant Forward No Answer
•Attendant Forward No Answer
•Attendant Forward No Answer Expansion
•Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
•Attendant Interpositional Transfer
•Attendant Lockout
134 AFNA 14
Attendant Overflow Position
•Attendant Overflow Position
•Attendant Position Busy
•Attendant Recall
•Attendant Recall with Splitting
56 AOP 1
Attendant Remote Call Forward
•Call Forward, Remote (Network and Attendant
Wide)
•Attendant Secrecy
•Attendant Splitting
•Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication
•Audible Reminder of Held Calls
253 ARFW 20
Autodial Tandem Transfer
•Autodial Tandem Transfer
258 ATX 20
Automated Modem Pooling 78 AMP 5
Automatic Answerback
•Automatic Answerback
•Automatic Call Distribution Answer Time in Night
Service
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Delays (see also
package 40)
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Priority (see also
package 40)
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Waiting Thresholds
(see also packages 40 and 41)
47 AAB 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 55
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
•Automatic Call Distribution Calls on Hold (see also
package 40)
•Automatic Call Distribution Dynamic Queue
Threshold (see also package 40)
Automatic Call Distribution Enhanced Overflow
•Automatic Call Distribution Enhanced Overflow
178 EOVF 15
Automatic Call Distribution Load Management
•Automatic Call Distribution Load Management
Reports
43 LMAN 1
Automatic Call Distribution Night Call Forward
without Disconnect Supervision
•Call Processor Input/Output)
289 ADSP 23
Automatic Call Distribution Package C
•Automatic Call Distribution Report Control (see
also package 50)
•500/2500 Line Disconnect
42 ACDC 1
Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary
Link Processor
•ACD Package D Auxiliary Processor Link
51 LNK 2
Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary
Security
•ACD-D Auxiliary Security
114 AUXS 12
Automatic Call Distribution Package D
•Automatic Call Distribution Report Control (see
also package 42)
•Automatic Call Distribution Threshold Visual
Indication (see also packages 40 and 41)
50 ACDD 2
Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code
•Automatic Call Distribution Activity Code
155 ACNT 13
Automatic Call Distribution, Package A
•Automatic Call Distribution
45 ACDA 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
56 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Automatic Call Distribution, Package B
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Waiting Thresholds
(see also packages 40, and 131)
•Automatic Call Distribution Least Call Queuing
•Automatic Call Distribution Threshold Visual
Indication (see also packages 40, and 131)
41 ACDB 1
Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent
•Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent
116 PAGT 12
Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow
Queuing
•ACD Timed Overflow
•Automatic Gain Control Inhibit
•Automatic Guard Detection
•Automatic Hold
111 TOF 10
Automatic ID of Outward Dialing 3AIOD 1
Automatic Installation (Option 11 only)
•Automatic Installation
200 AINS 16
Automatic Line Selection
•Automatic Line Selection
72 LSEL 4
Automatic Number Identification Route Selection
•Automatic Number Identification Route Selection
13 ANIR 1
Automatic Number Identification
•Automatic Number Identification
•Automatic Number Identification on DTI
•Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory Number
12 ANI 1
Automatic Re-dial
•Automatic Re-dial
•Automatic Timed Reminders
304 ARDL 22
Automatic Wake-Up
•Automatic Wake Up
102 AWU 10
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 57
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Auxiliary Processor Link
•Auxiliary Processor Link
•Auxiliary Signaling
•B34 Dynamic Loss Switching (see also packages
164 and 203)
109 APL 10
Background Terminal
•Background Terminal Facility
99 BGD 10
Basic Alternate Route Selection
•Network Alternate Route Selection/Basic
Alternate Route Selection Enhancement – Local
Termination (see also package 58)
57 BARS 1
Basic Authorization Code
•Basic Authorization Code
25 BAUT 1
Basic Automatic Call Distribution
•Automatic Call Distribution Alternate Call Answer
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Delays (see also
package 131)
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Priority (see also
package 131)
•Automatic Call Distribution Call Waiting Thresholds
(see also packages 41, and 131)
•Automatic Call Distribution Calls on Hold (see also
package 131)
•Automatic Call Distribution Dynamic Queue
Threshold (see also package 131)
•Automatic Call Distribution Enhancements
•Automatic Call Distribution in Night Service
•Automatic Call Distribution Threshold Visual
Indication (see also packages 41, and 131)
•INIT Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Queue Call
Restore
40 BACD 1
Basic Call Processing 0BASIC 1
Basic Queuing
•Basic Queuing
28 BQUE 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
58 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Basic Rate Interface
•Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate
Interface (see also packages 216, and 235)
216 BRI 18
Basic Routing
•Basic Routing
14 BRTE 1
Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation)
•Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering
198 FTCSF 15
BRI line application
•Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate
Interface (see also packages 216, and 233)
•ISDN Basic Rate Interface Connected Line
Presentation/Restriction
•Bridging
•Busy Lamp Field Array
235 BRIL 18
Business Network Express
•Business Network Express/EuroISDN Call
Diversion
•Business Network Express/EuroISDN Explicit Call
Transfer
•Business Network Express/Name and Private
Number Display
367 BNE 25
Busy Tone Detection
•China Phase II – Busy Tone Detection
•Busy Tone Detection for Asia Pacific and CALA
•Call Capacity Report
294 BTD 21
Call Center Transfer Connect
•Call Center Transfer Connect
393 UUI 3.0
Call Detail Recording Enhancement
•Call Detail Recording Enhancement
259 CDRX 20
Call Detail Recording Expansion (7 digit)
•Call Detail Recording Expansion
151 CDRE 13
Call Detail Recording on Teletype Terminal
•CDR on TTY
5CTY 1
Call Detail Recording Queue Record
•ACD CDR Queue Record
83 CDRQ 3
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 59
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Call Detail Recording, Data Link 6CLNK 1
Call Detail Recording
•Call Detail Recording
•Call Detail Recording Enhancement
•Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming
Calls
•Call Detail Recording with Optional Digit
Suppression
•Call Detail Recording 100 Hour Call
•NPI and TON in CDR Tickets
•Call Forward and Busy Status
•Call Forward Busy
•Call Forward by Call Type
•Call Forward External Deny
•Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
•Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No
Answer
•Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD
•Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD
•Call Forward to Trunk Restriction
•Call Forward, Break-In & Hunt Internal/External
Network Wide
•Call Forward, Internal Calls
4CDR 1
Call ID (for AML applications)
•Call Identification
247 CALL ID 19
Call Page Network Wide
•Call Page Network Wide
307 PAGENET 22
Call Park Network Wide
•Call Park Network Wide
306 CPRKNET 22
Call Park
•Call Park
•Recall after Parking
•Call Pickup
33 CPRK 2
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
60 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81)
•Call Processor Input/Output)
•Call Redirection by Time of Day
•Call Transfer
298 CPIO 21
Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)
•Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)
•Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
225 CWNT 19
Call-by-Call Service
•Call-by-Call Service
117 CBC 13
Called Party Control on Internal Calls
•China Phase III - Called Party Control on Internal
Calls
•Called Party Disconnect Control
310 CPCI 22
Calling line Identification in Call Detail Recording
•Calling Line Identification in Call Detail Recording
118 CCDR 13
Calling Party Name Display
•Call Party Name Display
•DNIS Name Display (see also packages 98, and
113)
•Calling Party Name Display Denied
95 CPND 10
Calling Party Privacy
•Calling Party Privacy
•Camp-On
•Camp-On
•Camp-on to Multiple Appearance Directory
Number
•Capacity Expansion
•Card LED Status
301 CPP 21
Centralized Attendant Services (Main)
•Centralized Attendant Services - Main
26 CASM 1
Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)
•Centralized Attendant Services – Remote
•Centralized Multiple Line Emulation
27 CASR 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 61
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Charge Account for CDR
•Charge Account and Calling Party Number
23 CHG 1
Charge Account/Authorization Code
•Charge Account/Authorization Code Base
•Charge Display at End of Call (see also package
101)
24 CAB 1
China Attendant Monitor Package
•China – Attendant Monitor
•China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator
Break-In (see also Package 127)
•China Number 1 Signaling Enhancements
•China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements
(see also packages 49, 113, and 128)
285 CHINA 21
China Toll Package
•China Phase II – Toll Call Loss Plan
292 CHTL 21
CLASS Calling Name Delivery
•CLASS
333 CNAME 23
CLASS Calling Number Delivery
•CLASS
332 CNUMB 23
Collect Call Blocking
•Collect Call Blocking
290 CCB 21
Command Status Link
•Command Status Link
77 CSL 8
Commonwealth of Independent States
Multifrequency Shuttle Signaling
•CIS Multifrequency Shuttle Signaling
326 CISMFS 23
Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks
•Commonwealth of Independent States Digital
Trunk Interface
•Three-Wire Analog Trunk – CIS
•Commonwealth of Independent States Automatic
Number Identification (ANI) Digits Manipulation
and Gateways Enhancements
•Commonwealth of Independent States Automatic
Number Identification (ANI) Reception
221 CIST 21
24
24
24
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
62 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
•Commonwealth of Independent States Toll Dial
Tone Detection
•Conference
•Conference Warning Tone Enhancement for Italy
Console Operations
•Console Operations
169 COOP 14
Console Presentation Group
•Console Presentation Group Level Services
172 CPGS 15
Controlled Class Of Service
•Controlled Class of Service
81 CCOS 7
Coordinated Dialing Plan
•Coordinated Dialing Plan
59 CDP 1
Core Network Module
•Core Network Module
•CP3
299 CORENET 21
Corporate Directory
•Corporate Directory
381 CDIR 25
CSL with Alpha Signalling 85 CSLA 8
Customer Controlled Routing
•Customer Controlled Routing
•MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications
(see also packages 128, and 214)
•Dataport Hunting
215 CCR 17
CP Pentium®Backplane for Intel®Machine 368 CPP_CNI 25
Deluxe Hold
•Call Hold, Deluxe
•Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement
71 DHLD 4
Departmental Listed Directory Number 76 DLDN 5
Dial Intercom
•Dial Intercom
•Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom
•Dial Pulse/Dual-tone Multifrequency Conversion
21 DI 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 63
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Dial Tone Detector
•Dial Tone Detection
•Flexible Dial Tone Detection
138 DTD 10
Dialed Number Identification System 98 DNIS 10
•Dialed Number Identification Services
•Dialed Number Identification Services Length
Flexibility
•Dialed Number Identification Services Name
Display (see also packages 95, and 131)
•7 Digit DNIS for MAX
•N Digit DNIS 24
Digit Display
•Digit Display
19 DDSP 1
Digit Key Signaling 180 DKS 1
Digital Access Signaling System 2
•Analog Private Network Signaling System
(APNSS) (see also packages 190, 122, and 123)
•DASS2/DPNSS1 – Integrated Digital Access (see
also packages 122, and 123)
124 DASS2 16
Digital Private Network Signaling Network Services
(DPNSS1)
•Attendant Call Offer
•Attendant Timed Reminder Recall and Attendant
Third Party Service
•Call Back when Free and Next Used
•D-channel Handler Interface Expansion
•Extension Three-Party Service
•Loop Avoidance
•Redirection
•Route Optimization
•Step Back on Congestion
•Diversion
•Night Service
•Route Optimization/MCDN Trunk Anti-Tromboning
Inter-working
231 DNWK 16
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
64 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Digital Private Network Signaling System 1
Message Waiting Indication
•DPNSS1 Message Waiting Indication
325 DMWI 23
Digital Private Network Signaling System 1
•Analog Private Network Signaling System
(APNSS) (see also packages 190, 122, and 124)
•DASS2/DPNSS1 – Integrated Digital Access (see
also packages 122, and 124)
•Digital Trunk Interface Enhancements
•Digitone Receiver Enhancements: – Digitone
Receiver Timeout Enhancement
•Digitone Receiver Enhancements: – Quad Density
Digitone Receiver Card
123 DPNSS 16
Direct Inward Dialing to TIE (Japan only)
•Direct Inward Dialing to TIE
•Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection
176 DTOT 16
Direct Inward System Access
•Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
•Direct Inward System Access
•Direct Inward System Access on Unsupervised
Trunks
22 DISA 1
Direct Private Network Access
•Direct Private Network Access
250 DPNA 21
Directed Call Pickup
•Call Pickup, Directed
•Directory Number Delayed Ringing
115 DCP 12
Directory Number Expansion (7 Digit)
•Directory Number Expansion
•Directory Number
— Flexible Attendant Directory Number
— Listed Directory Numbers
— Single Appearance Directory Number
— Multiple Appearance Directory Number
— Prime Directory Number
150 DNXP 13
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 65
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
•Diskette Overflow Warning
•Display of Calling Party Denied
Distinctive Ringing
•Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
74 DRNG 4/9
Do Not Disturb, Group
•Do Not Disturb Group
16 DNDG 1
Do Not Disturb, Individual
•Do Not Disturb
•Network Individual Do Not Disturb (see also
packages 127, and 159)
•Electronic Brandlining
9DNDI 1
Emergency Services Access Calling Number
Mapping
•Emergency Services Access (See also packages
329 and 330)
331 ESA_CLMP 23
Emergency Services Access Supplementary
•Emergency Services Access (See also packages
329 and 331)
330 ESA_SUPP 23
Emergency Services Access
•Emergency Services Access (See also packages
330 and 331)
•End of Selection
•End of Selection Busy
•End-of-Dialing on Direct Inward/Outward Dialing
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement
329 ESA 23
End-To-End Signaling
•Attendant End-to-End Signaling
•End-to-End Signaling
10 EES 1
Enhanced ACD Routing
•Enhanced Automatic Call Distribution Routing
•MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications
(see also packages 128, and 215)
214 EAR 17
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
66 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Enhanced Call Trace
•Customer Controlled Routing
•MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications
(see also packages 128, and 214)
215 ECT 18
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service 173 ECCS 15
Enhanced DPNSS Services
•DPNSS1 Executive Intrusion
288 DPNSS_ES 21
Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway
•Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway
284 DPNSS189I 20
Enhanced Hot Line
•Hot Line
•Network Intercom
•Enhanced input/output buffering
•Enhanced Maintenance (Patching)
70 HOT 4/10
Enhanced Music
•Music, Enhanced
119 EMUS 12
Enhanced Night Service
•Enhanced Night Service
•Enhanced package printout
•Equal Access Compliance
133 ENS 20
Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side
•EuroISDN Trunk - Network Side
309 MASTER 22
Euro ISDN
•ISDN – Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
•ISDN BRI and PRI Trunk Access for Europe
(EuroISDN)
•EUROISDN Continuation
261 EURO 20
Euro Supplementary Service
•EuroISDN Call Completion Supplementary Service
323 ETSI_SS 22
Executive Distinctive Ringing
•Executive Distinctive Ringing
185 EDRG 16
Fast Tone and Digit Switch
•Fast Tone Digit Switch
87 FTDS 7
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 67
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision
•Federal Communications Commission Compliance
for DID Answer Supervision
223 FCC68 17
Feature Group D
•Feature Group D (Inbound to Meridian 1)
•Federal Communications Commission Compliance
for Equal Access
•First-Second Degree Busy Indication
•First-Second Degree Busy Indication, ISDN
•Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds
•Flexible Busy Tone Timer
158 FGD 17
Fiber Network 365 FIBN 25
Flexible Call Back Queuing
•Flexible Call Back Queuing
61 FCBQ 1
Flexible Direct Inward Dialing
•Flexible Direct Inward Dialing
362 FDID 24
Flexible Feature Codes
•Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature
Code
•China Number 1 Signaling – Flexible Feature
Codes
•Dial Access to Group Calls (see also package 48).
•Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer
Timer
•Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on
Private Lines
•Flexible Feature Codes
•Automatic Wake FFC Delimiter
•Call Forward Destination Deactivation
139 FFC 15
Flexible Numbering Plan
•Alternative Routing for DID/DOD
•Flexible Numbering Plan
•Special Dial Tones after Dialed Numbers
•Flexible Numbering Plan Enhancement
•Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer
160 FNP 14
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
68 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Flexible Tones and Cadences
•Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control
•Reverse Dial on Routes and Telephones
•Tones and Cadences
125 FTC 16
Forced Charge Account
•Charge Account, Forced
52 FCA 1
French Type Approval
•Camp-on to a Set in Ringback or Dialing
•Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward
Dialing
•Group Hunt Queuing (see also package 120)
•Group Hunt Queuing Limitation Enhancement
(see also package 120)
•Loopback on Central Office Trunks
197 FRTA 15
Geographic Redundancy Primary system 404 GRPRIM 4.0
Geographic Redundancy Secondary system 405 GRSEC 4.0
Group Call
•Dial Access to Group Calls (see also package
139).
•Group Call
•Group Hunt Queuing Limitation (see also package
120)
48 GRP 1
Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL
•Group Hunt Queuing (see also package 197)
•Group Hunt Queuing Limitation (see also package
131)
•Group Hunt Queuing Limitation Enhancement
(see also package 197)
•Group Hunt
•Speed Call Directory Number Access
•Handset Volume Reset
•Handsfree Download (Meridian Digital Telephones
•Held Call Clearing
120 PLDN 15
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 69
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
H323 Virtual Trunk
•IP Peer Networking Phase 2
•Branch Office
399 H323_VTRK 3.0
HiMail Fax Server 195 FAXS 18
History File
•History File
55 HIST 1
Hold in Queue for IVR 218 IVR 18
Hospitality Management 166 HOSP 16
Hospitality Screen Enhancement
•Hospitality Enhancements: Display Enhancements
•Hunting By Call Type
•Hunting
— Circular Hunting
— Linear Hunting
— Secretarial Hunting
— Short Hunting
— Data Port Hunting
— Trunk Hunting
•Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement
208 HSE 17
Incoming DID Digit Conversion
•China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements
(see also packages 49, 128, and 131)
•DNIS Name Display (see also packages 95, and
98)
•Incoming DID Digit Conversion
•Incoming Trunk Programmable Calling Line
Identification
•Incremental Software Management
•Input/Output Access and System Limits
113 IDC 12
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
70 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Integrated Digital Access
•Analog Private Network Signaling System
(APNSS) (see also packages 190, 123, and 124)
•DASS2/DPNSS1 – Integrated Digital Access (see
also packages 123 and 124)
•DPNSS1 Satellite
•DASS2/DPNSS INIT Call Cutoff
122 IDA 16
Integrated Message System UST and UMG are part
of IMS Package.
•Integrated Messaging System Link
35 IMS 2
Integrated Services Digital Network Application
Module Link for Third Party Vendors
•Application Module Link
•Network Application Protocol Link Enhancement
153 IAP3P 13
Integrated Services Digital Network BRI Trunk
Access
•Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate
Interface (see also packages 216, and 235)
233 BRIT 18
Integrated Services Digital Network Supplementary
Features
•Call Connection Restriction (see also packages
146 and 147)
•Direct Inward Dialing to Network Calling
•Incoming Digit Conversion Enhancement
•Network Time Synchronization
•X08 to X11 Gateway
161 ISDN INTLSUP 14
Integrated Services Digital Network Signaling Link
•Call Connection Restriction (see also packages
146 and 161)
147 ISL 13
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 71
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Integrated Services Digital Network
•Backup D-Channel to DMS-100/250 and AT&T
4ESS
•Call Pickup Network Wide
•D-Channel Error Reporting and Monitoring
•Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Primary Rate Interface
•Network Name Display (Meridian 1 to
DMS-100/250)
•Total Redirection Count
•T309 Time
•Integrated Voice and Data
145 ISDN 13
Intercept Computer Interface
•Intercept Computer Dial from Directory
•Intercept Computer Enhancements
•Intercept Computer Flexible DN Length
•Intercept Computer Interface
•Intercept Computer Meridian Mail Interactions
•Intercept Computer Network Screen Activation,
Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions
•Intercept Treatment Enhancements
143 ICP 10
Intercept Treatment
•Intercept Treatment
11 INTR 1
Inter-Exchange Carrier
•Inter Exchange Carrier
149 IEC 13
Internal CDR
•Internal Call Detail Recording
108 ICDR 10
International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway
•Radio Paging
•International Meridian 1
167 GPRI 18
International nB+D
•ISDN PRI D70 Trunk Access for Japan (nB+D)
255 INBD 20
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
72 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
International Primary Rate Access (CO)
•Call Connection Restriction (see also packages
147 and 161)
•Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Access
•Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Access Central Office Connectivity to Japan D70
146 PRA 13
International Primary Rate Access
•Integrated Services Access/Call by Call Service
Selection Enhancements
•Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Access to 1TR6 Connectivity
•Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Access to NUMERIS Connectivity
•Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Access to SwissNet 2 Connectivity
•Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Access to SYS-12 Connectivity
202 IPRA 15
International Supplementary Features 131 SUPP 9
•IODU/C
IP Expansion 295 IPEX 25.40
•IP Expansion
IP Media Gateway 403 IPMG 4.0
ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection
•ISDN Semi-Permanent Connections for Australia
•Italian Central Office Special Services (see also
packages 129, and 157)
313 ISPC 22
Japan Central Office Trunks
•Japan Central Office Trunk
97 JPN 9
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface
•Japan Digital Multiplex Interface
136 JDMI 14
Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee
•Japan TTC Common Channel Signaling
335 JTTC 23
Japan Tone and Digit Switch
•Japan Tone and Digit Switch
171 JTDS 14
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 73
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Last Number Redial
•Last Number Redial
90 LNR 8
Latin American Spanish
•Latin American Spanish
279 MLMS_SPL 20
Limited Access to Overlays
•B34 Dynamic Loss Switching (see also packages
131 and 203)
•Faster I/O
•Limited Access to Overlays
•Limited Access to Overlays Password
Enhancement
•Teletype Terminal Access Control in
Multi-Customer Environment (see also
package 131)
164 LAPW 16
Line Load Control
•Line Load Control
•Line Lockout
105 LLC 10
Local Steering Code Modifications
•Local Steering Code Modifications
•Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy and MFE
Signaling Treatments
•LOGIVOX Telephone
•Loop Start Answer Supervision XUT
•Loop Start Supervisory Trunks
•Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls)
137 LSCM 10
Location Code Expansion 400 LOCX 4.0
M2000 Digital Sets
•Distinctive Ringing for Digital Telephones
•M2317 Telephones
•Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number
88 DSET 7
M2250 Attendant Console
•Digital Attendant Console
140 DCON 15
M2317 Digital Sets
•M2317 Digital Sets
91 DLT2 9
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
74 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
M3000 Digital Sets
•M3000 Telephones
89 TSET 7
M3900 Full Icon Support
•M3900 Full Icon Support
397 ICON_ PAC
KAGE 3.0
M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement
•Virtual Office Enhancement
387 VIR_OFF_
ENH 25.40
M3900 Ring Again 396 M3900_RGA
_PROG 3.0
M911 Enhancement Display
•10/20 Digit ANI on 911 Calls
249 M911 ENH 25
Maid Identification
•Maid Identification
•Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override
210 MAID 17
Make Set Busy
•Make Set Busy
•Make Set Busy Improvement
•Malicious Call Trace on Direct Inward Dialing
17 MSB 1
Malicious Call Trace
•Enhanced Malicious Call Trace
•Malicious Call Trace
•Malicious Call Trace DN/TN Print
•Malicious Call Trace Idle
•Manual Line Service
•Manual Service Recall to Attendant
•Manual Signaling (Buzz)
•Manual Trunk Service
107 MCT 10
MAT 5.0
•Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements (see
also package 76)
296 MAT 22
Meridian 1 Companion Option
•Nortel Networks Integrated DECT
240 MCMO 19
MCDN End to End Transparency 348 MEET 24
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 75
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Meridian 1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS
•Meridian 1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS
204 XCT0 15
Meridian 1 Fault Management
•Alarm Management
•Meridian 1 Initialization Prevention and Recovery
243 ALRM_FILTER 19
Meridian 1 Microcellular Option 303 MMO 22
Meridian 1 Mobility Multi-Site Networking 314 MMSN 22
Meridian 1 Packet Handler
•Meridian 1 Packet Handler
248 MPH 19
Meridian 1 Superloop Administration (LD 97)
•Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe
•Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software
Support
•Extended Tone Detector and Global Parameters
Download (see also package 203)
•Generic XFCOT Software Support
205 XCT1 15
Meridian 1 XPE
•B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading
•B34 Dynamic Loss Switching (see also packages
131, and 164)
•Extended Multifrequency Compelled
Sender/Receiver
•Extended Tone Detector and Global Parameters
Download (see also package 205)
•Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support
Enhancements
203 XPE 15
Meridian 911
•Meridian 911 Enhancements – Call Abandon
•Meridian 911 Enhancements – MADN Display
Coordination
224 M911 19
Meridian Hospitality Voice Service
•Meridian Hospitality Voice Services
179 HVS 16
Meridian Link Modular Server
•Meridian Link Enhancements
209 MLM 16
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
76 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Meridian SL-1 ST Package
•Meridian SL-1 ST Package
96 SLST 9
Message Intercept
•Message Intercept
163 MINT 15
Message Waiting Center
•Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance
•Message Waiting Unconditional
•Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction
46 MWC 1
Message Waiting Indication Inter-working with
DMS
•Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Inter-working
219 MWI 19
Mini CDR 31 MCDR 1
Mobile Extensions 412 MOBX 5.50
Mobility Server 302 MOSR 22
•Modular Telephone Relocation
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
•China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements
(see also packages 49, 113, and 131)
•China Number 1 Signaling – Active Feature Dial
Tone (see also package 126)
•China Number 1 Signaling – Audible Alarm (see
also package 126)
•China Number 1 Signaling – Vacant Number
Announcement (see also package 126)
•India Phase 2
•R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC)
DID/DTMF DOD
•R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC)
Selective Route To Attendant
•MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications
(see also packages 214 and 215)
•R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Timer
Control
•Semi-Compelled MFC and Calling Name
Identification Charges
128 MFC 9
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 77
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel
•Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel
135 MFE 10
Multi-Language I/O Package
•Multi-language TTY Input/Output
211 MLIO 16
Multi-Language Wake Up
•Multi-language Wake Up
•Multi-Party Operation Enhancements
206 MLWU 16
Multi-Party Operations
•Attendant Clearing during Night Service
•Multi-Party Operations
•Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime
•Multiple Console Operation
141 MPO 20
Multiple Queue Assignment
•Multiple Queue Assignment
297 MQA 21
Multiple-Customer Operation
•Multiple Customer Operation
2CUST 1
Multiple-Tenant Service
•Multi-Tenant Service
86 TENS 7
Multipurpose Serial Data Link Serial Data Interface
•Multipurpose Serial Data Link Serial Data Interface
227 MSDL SDI 19
Multipurpose Serial Data Link Single Terminal
Access
•Single Terminal Access
228 MSDL STA 19
Multipurpose Serial Data Link
•Multipurpose Serial Data Link
222 MSDL 18
Multi-Site Mobility Networking 370 MSMN 25
Multi-User Login
•Multi-User Login
242 MULTI_USER 19
Music Broadcast
•Music Broadcast
328 MUSBRD 23
Music
•Music
44 MUS 1
N/W Communications Management Center 30 CMAC 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
78 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Network Alternate Route Selection
•Equi-distribution Network Attendant Service
Routing (see also package 159)
•Network Alternate Route Selection/Basic
Alternate Route Selection Enhancement – Local
Termination (see also package 57)
•Network Anti-tromboning
•Virtual Network Services/Virtual Directory Number
Expansion (see also package 183)
58 NARS 1
Network Attendant Service
•Equi-distribution Network Attendant Service
Routing (see also package 58)
•Network Individual Do Not Disturb (See also
packages 9 and 127).
159 NAS 20
Network Authorization Code
•Network Authorization Code
63 NAUT 1
Network Automatic Call Distribution
•Network Automatic Call Distribution
207 NACD 15
Network Call Back Queuing
•Network Call Back Queuing
38 MCBQ 2
Network Call Transfer 67 NXFR 3
Network Class Of Service
•Network Class of Service
32 NCOS 1
Network Message Services 175 NMS 16
Network Priority Queuing
•Network Priority Queuing
60 PQUE 1
Network Signaling
•Network Signaling
37 NSIG 2
Network Speed Call
•Network Speed Call
39 NSC 2
Network Traffic Measurements
•Network Traffic Measurement
29 NTRF 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 79
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
New Flexible Code Restriction
•China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements
(see also packages 113, 128, and 131)
•New Flexible Code Restriction
49 NFCR 2
New Format CDR
•Call Detail Recording Time to Answer
•CDR on Busy Tone
234 FCDR 18
Next Generation Connectivity 324 NGEN 22
NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection 334 NI-2 CBC 23
•Night Restriction Classes of Service
•Night Service
•Night Service Enhancements – All Calls Remain
Queued for Night Service
•Night Service Enhancements – Recall to Night DN
•Night Service Enhancements – Re-queuing of
Attendant Present Calls
•Night Service Enhancements – Re-queuing of
Attendant Present Calls
NI-2 Name Display Service
•NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service
385 NDS 25.40
Nortel Symposium Call Center 311 NGCC 22
North America National ISDN Class II Equipment 291 NI2 21
•North American Numbering Plan
•Off-Hook Alarm Security
Observe Agent Security
•Observe Agent Security
394 OAS 3.0
Off-Hook Queuing
•Network Drop Back Busy and Off-hook Queuing
(see also package 192)
62 OHQ 1
Office Data Administration System
•Office Data Administration System
•Off-Premise Extension
20 ODAS 1
On Hold On Loudspeaker 196 OHOL 20
•On-Hook Dialing
Open Alarms 315 OPEN ALARM 22
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
80 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Operator Call Back (China #1)
•Busy Verify on Calling Party Control Calls
•China Number 1 Signaling – Active Feature Dial
Tone (see also package 128)
•China Number 1 Signaling – Audible Alarm (see
also package 128)
•China Number 1 Signaling – Called Party Control
•China Number 1 Signaling – Calling Number
Identification on Outgoing Multifrequency
Compelled Signaling
•China Number 1 Signaling – Calling Party Control
•China Number 1 Signaling – Flexible Timers
•China Number 1 Signaling – KE Multifrequency
Compelled Tandem Signaling
•China Number 1 Signaling – Malicious Call Trace
Enhancement
•China Number 1 Signaling – Off-hook Tone
•China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Call Identification
•China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator Call
Back
•China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator Call
Back Enhancement
•China Number 1 Signaling – Vacant Number
Announcement (see also Package 128)
126 OPCB 14
Optional Features
•Autodial
•Call Forward All Calls
•Ring Again
•Speed Call
•Speed Call on Private Lines (see also package 0)
•Speed Call/Autodial with Authorization Codes (see
also package 34)
•Speed Call Delimiter (see also package 34)
1OPTF 1
Optional Outpulsing Delay
•Optional Outpulsing Delay
79 OOD 5
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 81
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Originator Routing Control
•Network Drop Back Busy and Off-hook Queuing
(see also package 62)
•Remote Virtual Queuing
•Out-of-Service Unit
192 ORC_RVQ 18
Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#)
•Outpulsing of Asterisk (*) and Octothorpe (#)
104 OPAO
Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO)
•Overlap Signaling
•Overlay 45 Limited Repeats
•Overlay Cache Memory
•Override
•Paging
•Partial Dial Timing
•PBX (500/2500) Telephones
•Periodic Camp-on Tone
•Periodic Clearing
•Periodic Clearing Enhancement
•Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD,
and Music
184 OVLP 15
Personal Call Assistant
•Personal Call Assistant
398 PCA 3.0
Phantom TN
•Phantom TNs
•Position Busy with Call on Hold
254 PHTN 20
PPM/Message Registration
•Advice of Charge Real-time Supplementary
Services for NUMERIS and SWISSNET (see also
package 131)
•Advice of Charge – Charging Information and
End of Call for NUMERIS Connectivity (see also
package 131)
•Message Registration
•Periodic Pulse Metering
101 MR 10
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
82 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
•Predictive Dialing
Pre-translation
•Pre-translation
•Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward
92 PXLT 8
Priority Network Override
•Network Breaking and Force Disconnect
389 PONW 25.40
Priority Override/Forced Camp-On
•Forced Camp-on and Priority Override
•Privacy
•Privacy Override
•Privacy Release
•Private Line Service
186 POVR 20
Proactive Voice Quality Management 401 PVQM 4.0
Property Management System Interface
•Property Management System Interface
•Public Switched Data Service
103 PMSI 10
Pulsed E&M (Indonesia, French Colisée)
•Pulsed E&M DTI2 Signaling
232 PEMD 18
Q Reference Signaling Point Interface
•Integrated Services Digital Network QSIG Basic
Call
263 QSIG 20
QSIG Generic Functional protocol
•ISDN QSIG Generic Functional Transport
305 QSIG GF 22
QSIG Supplementary Service
•ISDN QSIG Call Completion
•ISDN QSIG Call Diversion Notification
•ISDN QSIG Path Replacement
316 QSIG-SS 22
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 83
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Radio Paging
•Radio Paging
•Radio Paging Product Improvements
•Recall to Same Attendant
•Recall with Priority during Night Service
•Recall With Priority during Night Service
•Recall With Priority during Night Service Network
Wide
187 RPA 15
Recorded Announcement Broadcast
•Recorded Announcement Broadcast
327 RANBRD 23
Recorded Announcement
•Recorded Announcement
7RAN 1
Recorded Overflow Announcement
•Recorded Overflow Announcement
•Recorded Telephone Dictation
•Recovery of Misoperation on the Attendant
Console
•Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
•Reference Clock Switching
•Reference Clock Switching (see also packages
75, 129, and 154)
36 ROA 2
Remote IPE
•Remote Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
286 REMOTE_IPE
Remote Virtual Queuing
•Network Drop Back Busy and Off-hook Queuing
(see also package 62)
•Remote Virtual Queuing
192 RVQ 18
Resident Debug 82 RSDB 9
•Restricted Call Transfer
•Ring and Hold Lamp Status
•Ringback Tone from Meridian 1 Enhancement
Ringing Change Key
•Ringing Change Key
193 RCK 15
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
84 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Room Status
•Room Status
100 RMS 10
Scheduled Access Restrictions
•Scheduled Access Restrictions
•Secrecy Enhancement
•Secretarial Filtering
•Seizure Acknowledgment
•Selectable Conferee Display and Disconnect
•Selectable Directory Number Size
162 SAR 20
Semi-Automatic Camp-On
•Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
•Attendant Idle Extension Notification
•Semi-Automatic Camp-On
•Serial Port Expansion
181 SACP 15
Series Call
•Series Call
191 SECL 15
Set Relocation
•Automatic Set Relocation
•Short Buzz for Digital Telephones
•Short Memory Test
•Single Digit Access to Hotel Services
53 SR 1
Set-to-Set Messaging
•Set-to-Set Messaging
380 STS 25
Single Term Access
•Single Term Access
•Slow Answer Recall Enhancement
•Slow Answer Recall for Transferred External
Trunks
•Source Included when Attendant Dials
228 STA 19
SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop 406 SIP 4.0
Soft Switch 402 SOFTSWITCH 4.0
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 85
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface
•KD3 Direct Inward Dialing/Direct Outward Dialing
for Spain
•Special Signaling Protocols
•Special Trunk Support
•Speed Call Directory Number Access
•Speed Call on Private Lines (see also package 1)
•Speed-Up Data Dump
252 KD3 20
Standalone Meridian Mail
•Meridian Mail, Standalone
262 SAMM 20
Station Activity Records
•Station Activity Records
251 SCDR 20
Station Camp-On
•Station Camp-On
121 SCMP 20
Station Category Indication
•Station Category Indication
80 SCI 7
Station Loop Preemption 106 SLP 10
Station Specific Authorization Codes
•Station Specific Authorization Code
•Station-to-Station Calling
229 SSAU 19
Stored Number Redial
•Stored Number Redial
64 SNR 3
Supervisory Attendant Console
•Supervisory Attendant Console
93 SUPV 8
Supervisory Console Tones 189 SVCT 20
•System Capacity Enhancements
System Errors and Events Lookup
•System Message Lookup
245 SYS_MSG_
LKUP 19
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
86 Features and Software options
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
System Speed Call
•Speed Call/Autodial with Authorization Codes (see
also package 1)
•Speed Call, System
•Speed Call Delimiter (see also package 34)
•Telephones (PBX)
•Teletype Terminal Access Control in
Multi-Customer Environment (see also
package 164)
•Telset Call Timer Enhancement
34 SSC 2
Time and Date
•Time and Date
8TAD 1
Tone Detector Special Common Carrier 66 SCC 7
Tone Detector
•Tone Detector
•Tone to Last Party
•Tones, Flexible Incoming
65 TDET 7
Traffic Monitoring 168 TMON
Trunk Anti-Tromboning
•Trunk Anti-Tromboning
293 TAT 21
Trunk Barring
•Trunk Barring
132 TBAR 20
Trunk Failure Monitor
•Trunk Failure Monitor
•Trunk Failure Monitor Enhancement
182 TFM 15
Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex)
•Centrex Switchhook Flash
•Italian Central Office Special Services (see also
packages 129, and 131)
•Trunk to Trunk Connections
•Trunk Traffic Reporting Enhancement
157 THF 14
Trunk Verification from Station
•Trunk Verification from a Station
•Uninterrupted Line Connection
110 TVS 9.32
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Features and Software options 87
Package Name Number Mnemonic Release
United Kingdom
•Analog Private Network Signaling System
(APNSS) (see also packages 122 123, and 124)
•UK Analogue Hardware Support
190 UK 16
Universal ISDN Gateways
•Universal ISDN Gateway
•Variable Flash Timing and Ground Button
•Variable Guard Timing
283 UIGW 20
VIP Auto Wake Up
•Hospitality Enhancements: V.I.P. Auto Wake Up
212 VAWU 17
Virtual Network Services
•Virtual Network Services
•Virtual Network Services/Virtual Directory Number
Expansion (see also package 58)
•Voice Call
183 VNS 16
Virtual Office
•Branch Office
•Emergency Services For Virtual Office
•Internet Telephone Virtual Office
•Virtual Office
382 VIRTUAL_
OFFICE 25
Virtual Office Enhancement
•Branch Office
•Emergency Services For Virtual Office
•Internet Telephone Virtual Office
387 VOE 3.0
Voice Mailbox Administration
•Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration
246 VMBA 19
X08 to X11 Gateway
•X08 to X11 Gateway
188 L1MF 15
Zone Call Admission Control
•Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management
407 ZCAC 4.5
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
88 Features and Software options
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
89
Call Forward All Calls
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 89)
"Operating parameters" (page 90)
"Feature interactions" (page 91)
"Feature packaging" (page 100)
"Feature implementation" (page 100)
"Feature operation" (page 103)
Feature description
Call Forward All Calls (CFW) automatically forwards incoming calls to
another destination, within or outside the system. Only calls to the Prime
DN or any single-appearance DN on the telephone are forwarded. Outgoing
calls can still be placed from the telephone when Call Forward is active.
Call Forward All Calls can be selectively activated depending on the source
of the originating party. With the Internal Call Forward (ICF) feature, the
user can cause only internal calls to be forwarded. The Call Forward
Reminder Tone (CFRT) presents special dial tones on analog (500/2500
type) telephones with CFW active. One tone indicates that CFW is active;
a second indicates that there is a message waiting for the telephone with
CFW active.
Call Forward All Calls, as well as Internal Call Forward, is assigned on a
per-telephone basis. Meridian 1 proprietary telephones must be equipped
with separate key/lamp pairs to allow the activation and deactivation of
each feature. Customers can specify the length of the destination number
in LD 11. Options are 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 23 digits. If you enter another
number for the length, the system rounds to the nearest acceptable choice.
The default is 16 digits.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
90 Call Forward All Calls
When you use Multiple Appearance DNs (MADNs), call redirection is
determined based on the Terminal Number (TN) order in your DN block. To
determine the TN order, print the DN block from LD 20 or LD 22 (TYPE =
DNB). When a call comes in to an MADN, the system begins a search
to determine how the call is handled. Using the TN list you printed, the
system performs the following search, beginning at the bottom of the TN
list, and working up.
1. Searches for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call
Forward All Calls activated.
2. If there are no Prime DN appearances, the Call Forward All Calls cannot
be activated.
The search does not necessarily determine the lowest numerical TN. The
search starts at the bottom of the TN list.
Operating parameters
The forwarding of a call depends on the access limitations assigned to the
telephones and the trunks involved in the call. If call forwarding results in
a connection that is not permitted by the assigned access limitations, the
incoming call is not forwarded.
The customer can specify which telephone determines the successful
completion of the call: the originating telephone or the forwarding telephone.
Internal Call Forward requires a programmable feature key. Therefore,
Internal Call Forward is not supported on BRI telephones.
LD 17 CFWS allows telephones to have their CFW status saved as part of
the data dump routine and then reinstated following a SYSLOAD. For more
information, refer to the Call Forward Save feature RL.
Call Forward Reminder Tone does not apply to telephones that have a visual
indication of active CFW status.
The Reciprocal Call Forward All Calls option prevents the situation whereby
an infinite loop is caused in a network-wide Call Forward configuration
resulting from telephone A being call forwarded (all calls) to telephone B at
another node, which in turn has been call forwarded back to telephone A.
A check is provided using the Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer (FOPT),
which prohibits any telephone from call forwarding more than one call off
node for a period of 14 seconds.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 91
The Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer, previously fixed at 14 seconds, can
be set during Service Change from 0 to 30 seconds (even numbers only). If
a value of 0 is defined, then Orbit Prevention is disabled and call forwarding
is not inhibited in any way.
The Orbit Prevention protection, however, does not extend to all potential
orbiting situations. Improperly engineered networking or multiple switching
arrangements can produce orbiting.
Feature interactions
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either transferred, extended or
redirected to another telephone using Call Forward All Calls are charged
against the last telephone that answers the call and the controlling telephone
releases. Additionally, the last party that transfers or forwards a call to an
ISDN Central Office trunk is charged for both connections.
Attendant Alternative Answering
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over all other Call Forwarding
features for a particular telephone. Calls forwarded by Attendant Alternative
Answering (AAA) are subject to the Call Forwarding conditions on the AAA
DN.
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override Call Forward All Calls.
If the dialed DN of the telephone is idle, the DN can be blocked; if the DN
is busy, busy tone is heard.
Attendant Break-In
The attendant can override call forwarding on a destination DN by pressing
the Break-In key before dialing the destination DN. The attendant may not
apply Camp-On to a telephone with Call Forward active.
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls
The operation of Call Forward All Calls is overridden on a analog (500/2500
type) telephone that has inadvertently been placed on-hook during a
Break-In conference to allow it to be re-rung by the attendant.
If the controlling party goes on hook in a Break-In conference, and is being
re-rung by the attendant, the ringing takes precedence over Call Forward All
Calls that may be applied to the telephone.
Attendant Busy Verify
If the DN is call forwarded to the attendant console, the attendant will
receive a click followed by silence.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
92 Call Forward All Calls
Attendant Overflow Position
If the telephone assigned an Attendant Overflow DN has activated the Call
Forward All Calls feature, overflow calls are not rerouted to the telephone. If
a analog (500/2500 type) telephone is forwarded, AOP is canceled.
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does not
affect how the Call Forward All Calls feature operates; however, it does
provide information about the answering party in the Call Detail Recording
ID field if incoming calls have been redirected by any one of these features.
Call Forward and Busy Status
Call Forward All Calls must be assigned to Party A’s telephone to enable
the Call Forward Status function, which allows party B to monitor and alter
the Call Forward state of party A’s telephone.
Call Forward by Call Type
If a call is unanswered at the forwarded DN, the telephone that has Call
Forward All Calls activated is checked for the Class of Service and the call
forward DN. If a chain of call forwarding occurs, the Class of Service and the
forward DN for Call Forward No Answer are obtained from the first telephone
in the chain. This applies when FDN and HNT have been specified for Call
Forward No Answer at the customer level.
Call Forward Destination Deactivation
If the Call Forward All Calls (CFW) DN of telephone A is the DN of telephone
B and telephone A dials the CFW FFC to activate Call Forward All Calls,
then telephone A’s calls are forwarded to telephone B. Telephone B can
deactivate CFW on telephone A by dialing the Call Forward Destination
Deactivation (CFDD) FFC.
Call Forward External Deny
This feature overrides other Call Forward All Calls parameters. For example,
if Call Forward to Trunk Access Code (CFTA) is allowed for the customer,
but Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled for the telephone, CFXD
takes precedence and call forwarding to a trunk access code is denied.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
The Call Forward All Calls feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt
Override Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 93
Call Forward, Internal Calls
If Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed (CFRA) is in effect, whenever
an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with Internal Call Forward active
goes off hook to originate a call, the telephone sounds the reminder
tone. The reminder tone is either Call Forward Dial Tone (CFDT) or Call
Forward/Message Waiting Dial Tone (CFMW).
Call Forward No Answer
Call Forward All Calls may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone
that is different from the dialed DN. In this case, if the call is eligible for
Flexible Call Forward No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for
the dialed DN, not the ringing DN.
Suppose that party A calls party B, and party B has programmed Call
Forward All Calls to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a
No Answer call at party C to the FDN associated with party B, the dialed DN.
After the call is forwarded, the MARP TN for the dialed DN controls the call
redirection for Flexible Call Forward No Answer.
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the final (ringing) telephone in
the chain to obtain Class of Service and forwarding DN information.
First level treatment operates in the following manner. Suppose that Party A
calls Party B, and Party B has programmed Call Forward All Calls to Party
C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a No Answer call at Party C
to the forwarding directory number associated with Party B, the dialed DN.
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD
The Call Forward status of each telephone can be saved as part of the data
dump routine and reinstated following a SYSLOAD operation.
Call Page Network Wide
Call Page Network Wide (PAGENET) does not block a telephone from
being programmed to Call Forward All Calls to an external Paging trunk. At
call termination time, calls that are forwarded to an external PAGENET
uncontrolled trunk are not blocked. However, calls forwarded to an external
PAGENET controlled trunk are given access denied intercept treatment
at the Paging node.
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Call Forward All Calls has precedence over Call Redirection by Time of Day.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
94 Call Forward All Calls
Calling Party Name Display Denied
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating
telephone. This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of
Service of the calling telephone and the forwarding/transferring telephone.
The name of the forwarding/transferring telephone is not displayed on the
calling and terminating telephone.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Call Forward Busy
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Redirection
Camp-On
Camp-On, Station
Call Forward All Calls has precedence over Call Forward Busy, Call Waiting,
Call Waiting Redirection, Camp-On and Station Camp-On.
China - Attendant Monitor
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,
idle DN treatment is given.
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward
Enhanced Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward
When Customer Call Forward (CCFW) is active CFWAC cannot be activated
by Flexible Feature Code, but can be activated by SPRE. When CFWAC is
active, CCFW cannot be activated.
CCFW can be deactivated by deactivating CFWAC. CFWAC can only be
deactivated by the CCFD FFC if the current CFW DN is the same as the
current CCFW DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 95
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring
Enhanced Flexible Feature - Outgoing Call Barring
When a telephone with Outgoing Call Barring active activates CFWAC with
a new CFW DN, the CFW DN is tested against the current barring level. If
the DN is not allowed to be dialed, it can also not be used as a Call Forward
DN. This is to prevent a telephone from forwarding to a barred DN and then
dialing its own DN to bypass the limitations.
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the
forwarding or hunting call is answered.
Conference
On analog (500/2500 type) telephones, Call Forward All Calls can be
activated or canceled during a conference call.
Display of Calling Party Denied
When a telephone activates any of the call forwarding features, the displays
given on the calling telephone and the terminating telephone are in
accordance with the Class of Service of the telephones involved in the call.
If the terminating telephone has Dialed Name Display Denied (DNDD), the
display on the terminating telephone reflects the name and number of the
calling party and the name and the number of the forwarding telephone.
If the terminating telephone has Dialed Name Display Allowed (DNDA), the
display on the terminating telephone reflects the number of the calling party
and the name and number of the forwarding telephone. In both cases, the
terminating telephone’s display is in accordance with the DPD Class of
Service options of the calling and forwarding telephones.
For a MCDN ISDN call, the calling party’s Calling Line Identification (CLID)
is replaced with the ISDN route access code (ACOD) and the route member
number, and the calling party’s name is replaced by a string of four Xs (X
X X X).
The display given on the calling telephone of an internal call, which has
been forwarded to a telephone within the same switch, includes the name
and number of the terminating telephone along with the number of the
forwarding telephone. If the DPD Class of Service options, which are
specified for the terminating telephone, indicate that the display of the
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
96 Call Forward All Calls
name and number of the terminating telephone be denied, then on the
calling telephone, the name of the terminating telephone is replaced by a
string of four Xs (X X X X). The number is replaced by dashes (- - - -). If
the number of the terminating telephone is blocked from being displayed
on the calling telephone, the number of the forwarding telephone is also
blocked from being displayed on the calling telephone, regardless of the
DPD Class of Service options of the forwarding telephone. Conversely, if
the display of the terminating telephone’s number is allowed in the calling
telephone, then the number of the forwarding telephone is also displayed
on the calling telephone, irrespective of the DPD Class of Service options
of the forwarding telephone.
Do Not Disturb
If activated, Call Forward All Calls will take precedence over Do Not Disturb
busy indication.
DPNSS1 Diversion
Call Forward All Calls on unanswered calls are activated in the following
order: Call Forward All Calls, Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer,
Slow Answer Recall. For busy telephones the order is: Call Forward All
Calls, Hunting, Calling Waiting/Camp On, Message Waiting Busy Forward,
Call Forward Busy.
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines
For Call Forwarding, the COS and NCOS used for the forwarding call can be
taken from either the forwarding telephone or from the forwarded telephone,
depending on the option defined in the Customer Data Block.
For example, telephone B call forwards all calls to an external trunk.
Telephone A calls telephone B. If OPT = CFF in LD 15 (Call Forward
forwarded to party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone B
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk. If OPT = CFO (Call Forward
originating party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone A
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk.
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering
Although Call Forward All Calls and Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial
Filtering can be equipped on the same telephone, they cannot both be
active at the same time. There is no precedence of one over the other; it is
not possible to activate one if the other is active on the telephone.
Flexible Feature Codes
When Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) are configured for a customer, #1
automatically becomes the FFC DN for both Call Forward Activate (CFWA)
and Call Forward Deactivate (CFWD). When the same DN is used for both
CFWA and CFWD, FFC toggles the call forward activated/deactivated state
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 97
of the telephone. When call forward is activated for a telephone, entering #1
automatically deactivates call forward, no matter what follows #1. When call
forward is deactivated for a telephone, the result of entering #1 depends on
what follows #1:
•If the telephone goes on hook immediately, Call Forward is activated for
the telephone to its previous Call Forward number.
•If a valid DN is entered after #1, Call Forward is activated for the
telephone to that valid DN.
•If an invalid DN is entered after #1, Call Forward remains deactivated for
the telephone.
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number
Voice calls directed to a dynamic voice/data Terminal Number are forwarded,
if either of these features are enabled. Data calls, to a dynamic voice/data
TN, are not forwarded.
Group Call
A Group Call to a telephone with Call Forward active is forwarded one step
only. The Call Forward number must be a valid DN.
Group Hunt
When Group Hunting attempts to terminate on a DN which has CFW All
Calls active, it will continue with the next DN in the group if the attempted
DN is busy, or if the DN is idle and the response to the Call Forward Ignore
(CFWI) prompt in LD 57 is "NO". If the attempted DN is idle and the
response to the CFWI prompt in LD 57 is "YES", then Group Hunting will
terminate and the stations associated with the DN is rung.
Hunting
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Hunting.
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions
When a call redirected by Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,
Call Forward Busy, or Hunt terminates on an Intercept Computer (ICP)
position, a redirected message identification "50" is sent to the ICP
computer, when the call is answered.
Idle Extension Notification
When an extension that is being supervised for Idle Extension Notification
becomes idle, it has the ability to make outgoing calls. If Call Forward All
Calls or Intercept Call Forward are activated at the extension before the
attendant presses the SACP key to ring that extension, the attendant’s call
is forwarded to the Call Forward destination. The attendant display will show
both the call forward DN, as well as the original extension’s DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
98 Call Forward All Calls
If the Call Forward DN is busy, SACP can be activated towards the Call
Forward DN, if all the requirements for allowing Idle Extension Notification
are met by this DN.
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement
When a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) call to station that is unrestricted from
receiving DID calls (UDI Class of Service) is forwarded to a UDI station due
to Call Forward All Calls or Call Forward Busy, the call is RDI-intercepted to
the attendant. The attendant display shows the DN of the dialed party.
If the call has been forwarded to the attendant, the Call Forward All
Calls/Call Forward Busy ICI lights up, and not the RDI-intercept ICI.
ISDN QSIG Call Completion
When the Call Forward feature is activated on a local basis and an incoming
Call Completion request is received, the Call Completion request is
registered against the forwarded DN.
ISDN QSIG Name Display
When an incoming QSIG call, with name display presentation allowed Name
Display, is forwarded locally, the calling party’s name information is displayed
on the forwarding telephone. With presentation restriction, the calling party’s
name information is not displayed to the destination telephone.
Make Set Busy
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Make Set Busy.
Message Registration
The party that originates a call is charged. The charge cannot be moved to
another party using Call Forward All Calls.
Multi-Party Operations
A telephone which has activated Call Forward All Calls can still initiate calls
and become the controlling party of a consultation connection. In this case,
if the telephone fails to operate, then Multi-Party operations while re-ringing
the controlling party as a part of failed operation recovery ignores the Call
Forward All Calls indication present on the controlling party.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime (MARP) affects
how call redirection operation is defined. Refer to the MARP module in this
document for details.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 99
Network Intercom (Hot Type D and Hot Type 1 Enhancements)
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.
Network Individual Do Not Disturb
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Do Not Disturb Individual
(DNDI) treatment.
Night Service Enhancements
Any call which has been presented to the Attendant Overflow Position
cannot be removed from the console and re-queued by pressing the Make
Set Busy (MSB) key. The call will only be removed if the Attendant Forward
No Answer feature is active, and the Attendant Forward No Answer Timer
has timed out. In this case, the call is re-queued and the Attendant Overflow
Position is idled.
Paging Calls that originate on a TIE trunk to a telephone that is redirected to a
paging route are blocked.
Periodic Pulse Metering
Metered calls transferred or extended from one station to another using the
Call Forward All Calls feature are charged against the last station at which
the call is answered as the controlling station releases. The last party to
forward a call onto a metered Periodic Pulse Metering trunk is charged.
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)
Call Forward All Calls is used in conjunction with Remote Call Forward
(RCFW) to redirect incoming calls from a phantom TN/DN to a valid DN.
Call Forward cannot be overridden on phantom TNs. Overflow tone occurs
if an override is attempted.
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks
If a call is forwarded to an outgoing external Central Office (CO) route with
the Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX)
flag set, RANX is activated.
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Ring Again on No Answer
If an unanswered call is forwarded to another station by Call Forward All
Calls, Ring Again on No Answer is applied to the originally dialed station.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
100 Call Forward All Calls
Special prefix SPRE access codes
SPRE access codes cannot be used as CFW DNs. If an attempt is made to
program SPRE access code as a CFW DN, the overflow tone is given at
the time of CFW activation.
Total Redirection Count
Call Forward All Calls redirection is limited to the value defined in the Total
Redirection Count limit (if greater than 0). If this limit is exceeded, intercept
treatment is given.
Trunk Access Codes
There is an option in LD 15 to allow or disallow telephones to program Call
Forward All Calls to a Trunk Access Code. See "Call Forward All Calls"
(page 89).
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
User Selectable Call Redirection
When CFW redirects a call from telephone A to telephone B, and telephone
B does not answer, the Ringing Cycle Options of telephone B determines
how long it rings. After the designated number of rings, the Flexible Call
Forward No Answer of telephone A redirects the call.
Feature packaging
Internal Call Forward requires the 500 Set Dial Access to Features (SS5)
package 73 for analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and the Flexible Feature
Codes (FFC) package 139. Call Forward Reminder Tone is packaged with
the Call Forward All Calls feature.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls." (page 101)
Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls
2. "LD 10 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward
for analog (500/2500 type) telep" (page 101)
Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for
Meridian 1 proprietary telep" (page 102)
Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for Meridian
1 proprietary telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 101
4. "LD 57 - Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward."
(page 103)
Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward.
On an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, the user accesses the Call
Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward features by dialing either the
SPRE plus the feature code, or the appropriate Flexible Feature Codes
(FFCs). On a digital telephone, the user accesses each feature using its
feature key.
LD 15 - Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Call Redirection.
CUST Customer number.
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT (CFO) CFF (CFO) = Calling party Class of Service is active during Call
Forward All Calls.
CFF = Forwarding party Class of Service is active during Call
Forward All Calls.
(PVCA) PVCD Prevention of reciprocal Call Forward (allowed) or denied.
- CFTA (NO) YES (Deny) allow telephones to Call Forward All Calls to a Trunk
Access Code.
- OPT (CFRD) CFRA Call Forward Reminder Tone (denied) allowed for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones.
In LD 56, the XCT Tone Code (XCAD) default value is set to 0. If the XCAD
prompt is not changed in LD 56, an Analog 500-type telephone will not
receive Call Forward Reminder Tone (CFRT) even if it has been enabled in
LD 15 (OPT = CRFA).
LD 10 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN lscu Terminal Number
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
102 Call Forward All Calls
Prompt Response Description
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FTR CFW xx yyyy...y Allow Call Forward All Calls, where:
xx = maximum number of digits in the CFW DN. Valid entries
are any integer in the range of (4)-31. yyyy = number where
calls are forwarded.
YYYY cannot be entered from the maintenance terminal. When
the telephone information is printed in LD 20, yyyy shows the
call forward number.
FTR ICF xx Allow Internal Call Forward, where:
xx = maximum number of digits in the Forward DN. Valid entries
are any integer in the range of (4)-31.
LD 11 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN lscu Terminal Number
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
KEY xx CFW yy
zzzz...z Define Call Forward All Calls, where:
xx = key number; M2317 must use key 22
yy = maximum number of digits in the CFW DN.
Valid entries for M2317 telephones are any integer in the range
of (4)-23. For all other Meridian 1 proprietary type telephones,
valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-31.
zzzz = number where calls are forwarded.
KEY xx ICF yy zzzz Define Internal Call Forward, where:
xx = key number
yy = maximum number of digits in the Forward DN.
Valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-31.
zzzz = number where calls are forwarded.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 103
LD 57 - Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG OUT Add, change, or remove an FFC.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code.
CODE ICFA
ICFD
ICFV
Access code for Internal CFW Activate.
Access code for Internal CFW Deactivate.
Access code for Internal CFW Verify.
ICFA xxxx Internal CFW Activate Code (ICFD and ICFA may share the
same code).
ICFD xxxx Internal CFW Deactivate Code (ICFD and ICFA may share the
same code).
ICFV xxxx Internal CFW Verify Code.
Feature operation
To forward all calls from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:
Step Action
1Press Forward.
2Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.
3Press Forward.
—End—
To forward internal calls only from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:
Step Action
1Press Internal Call Forward.
2Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.
3Press Internal Call Forward.
—End—
To cancel Call Forward All Calls:
•Press Forward.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
104 Call Forward All Calls
To cancel Internal Call Forward:
•Press Internal Call Forward.
To forward calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:
Step Action
1Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74
or lift the handset and dial #1 (2500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Allowed FFC.
2Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.
3Hang up.
—End—
If you deactivate Call Forward, then reactivate without changing the number,
calls is forwarded to the previously established CFW DN.
To forward internal calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:
Step Action
1Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914
or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward FFC.
2Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.
3Hang up.
—End—
To cancel Call Forward All Calls:
•Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74
or lift the handset and dial #1 (2500 telephone)
or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Deny FFC.
To cancel Internal Call Forward:
•Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914
or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward Deny FFC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
105
Call Forward and Busy Status
Contents The following are topics in this section:
"Feature description" (page 105)
"Operating parameters" (page 106)
"Feature interactions" (page 107)
"Feature packaging" (page 108)
"Feature implementation" (page 108)
"Feature operation" (page 110)
Feature description
The Call Forward and Busy Status feature was designed for an environment
where Party A forwards calls to Party B for screening.
When equipped with a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key-lamp or key-Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) pair, Party B can perform the following:
•monitor, activate, or deactivate Call Forward for Party A
•override Call Forward of Party A, in order to place a call to Party A or
•determine whether Party A is busy on a call
The BFS key-lamp or key-LCD pair serves a dual purpose. The Busy Status
function indicates to Party B, using lamp or LCD state, whether Party A is
busy or not. The Call Forward Status function allows Party B to monitor and
alter the Call Forward state of Party A. Therefore, the BFS lamp or LCD
state of Party B may indicate that Party A is in any one of the following
four possible states:
•Call Forward activated and not busy
•Call Forward activated and busy
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
106 Call Forward and Busy Status
•Call Forward deactivated and not busy or
•Call Forward deactivated and busy
The BFS key also acts as an Autodial (ADL) key. To use the BFS key as
an ADL key to call Party A, Party B goes off-hook and presses the BFS
key for Party A.
Busy Status
The Busy Status portion of the feature indicates if Party A is busy for any of
the following reasons:
•call active on a Directory Number (DN) key (SCR, SCN, MCR, or MCN)
•has Make Set Busy (MSB) activated
•has Do Not Disturb (DND) activated
•call active on a Group Call (GRC) key
•call active on a Private-line non-ringing (PVN) or Private-line Ringing
(PVR) key
•Party A ringing
•if Party A is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and has call on Hold
•if Party A is an analog (500/2500 type) telephone and has a call on
permanent Hold
Call Forward Status
The Call Forward portion allows Party B to monitor and alter the Call
Forward state of Party A. Party A may be either an analog (500/2500
type) telephone or Meridian 1 proprietary telephone and must have Call
Forward All Calls equipped. The Call Forward and Busy Status feature
introduces a modification to the Call Forward All Calls feature functionality.
The modification is activated or deactivated on a customer-wide basis by
the response to OPT in LD 15. The OPT responses are "FKD" (Forward
Key Denied) and the default setting "FKA" (Forward Key Allowed).
Operating parameters
Party B must be using a Meridian Modular telephone. Party A may have an
Meridian Modular or 500/2500-type telephone, with Call Forward All Calls
(CFAC) equipped. The operating parameters are the same as for CFAC.
A station may be monitored by a maximum of 16 other stations using the
BFS key.
The monitored and monitoring stations must all belong to the same
customer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 107
Feature interactions
Attendant and Network-Wide Remote Call Forward
When the call forward status of a BFS station is changed from a telephone or
attendant-based Remote Call Forward feature, the BFS lamp(s) associated
with that station are updated accordingly.
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override these Call Forward
and Busy Status. If the dialed DN of the telephone is idle, the DN can be
blocked; if the DN is busy, busy tone is heard.
Autodial
Party A can use the Busy/Forward Status key as an Autodial key to dial
Party B.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls must be assigned to Party A’s telephone to enable
the Call Forward Status function, which allows Party B to monitor and alter
the Call Forward state of Party A’s telephone.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Call Forward and Busy Status is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt
Override Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network-Wide)
When the call forward status of a BFS station is changed from a telephone or
attendant-based Remote Call Forward feature, the BFS lamp(s) associated
with that station are updated accordingly.
Calling Party Privacy
If an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the outgoing trunk route on the
tandem node also has CCP provisioned.
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (that is,
at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating telephone. In
this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN
(such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
108 Call Forward and Busy Status
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering
If the secretary telephone is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, or a
compact digital telephone, it may be equipped with a Call Forward and Busy
Status (BFS) key/lamp pair, to perform the following:
•monitor the status of the Call Forward feature on a boss telephone
•activate/deactivate the Call Forward feature on a boss telephone
•monitor whether or not a boss telephone is busy on a call, and
•override the Call Forward All Calls feature on a boss telephone, in order
to place a call to the boss telephone.
The above functions, however, can only be performed by the secretary
telephone while it is in an unattended state, since BFS and Flexible Feature
Code Boss Secretarial Filtering cannot be active simultaneously.
Network Intercom
In a Secretarial filtering scenario, the secretary’s Busy/Forward Status
(BFS) lamp also will reflect that the boss’ telephone is busy if the boss is
on a Hot Type I call.
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)
When a user attempts to define a BFS key for a phantom TN, the system
generates the following error message: "An invalid TN has been entered for
the Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key."
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Activate the Call Forward and Busy Status mode of operation."
(page 109)
Activate the Call Forward and Busy Status mode of operation.
2. "LD 11 - Assign a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key." (page 109)
Assign a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key.
3. "LD 20 - Print the BFS key type and related information." (page 109)
Print the BFS key type and related information.
4. "LD 21 - Print the OPT setting." (page 109)
Print the OPT setting.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 109
LD 15 - Activate the Call Forward and Busy Status mode of operation.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Call Redirection
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
...
NCOS ...
- OPT (FKA) FKD Forward Key (Allowed) Denied — determines whether Call
Forward keys on telephones for this customer are operational.
LD 11 - Assign a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG NEW Request: Modify or create data block.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
...
LANG ...
KEY
0-69 BFS l s c u
0-69 BFS c u
Key number (0-69), Busy/Forward Status (BFS), Terminal
Number (TN) of telephone to be monitored.
For Large Systems
For Small Systems
LD 20 - Print the BFS key type and related information.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: PRT Request: Print data block.
TYPE: xxxx Type of data block.
TN ...
LD 21 - Print the OPT setting.
Prompt Response Description
REQ PRT Request: Print data block.
TYPE CDB Type of data block: Customer Data Block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
110 Call Forward and Busy Status
Feature operation
Call Forward Status
With FKA, the default, selected Party A’s Call Forward (CFW) key-lamp or
key-LCD pair operation is unaffected and depressing Party B’s BFS key will
result in one of the following:
•If Party A does not currently have Call Forward activated, Party A has
Call Forward activated to Party B’s DN and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD
is activated.
•If Party A already has Call Forward activated to Party B’s DN, Party
A has Call Forward deactivated and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD is
deactivated.
•If Party A already has Call Forward activated to a DN other than Party
B’s, Call Forward is left as is.
With FKD selected Party A’s CFW key-lamp or key-LCD pair operation is
modified so that the pair is usable as an indicator only, the key is disabled,
and depressing Party B’s BFS key will result in one of the following:
•If Party A has Call Forward active to the DN of a BFS key equipped
telephone other than Party B, Call Forward is left as is.
•If Party A has Call Forward active to a remote DN and Call Forward was
activated by a remote FFC, the existing Call Forward DN is overridden
and all new calls are forwarded to Party B’s DN.
•If Party A has Call Forward active to Party B’s DN, Party A’s Call
Forward is deactivated and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD is deactivated.
•If Party A does not have Call Forward active, Call Forward is activated to
Party B’s DN and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD is activated.
When the Boss telephone is call forwarded to one of the secretary DNs,
then calling the Boss telephone from the secretary by using the BFS
key overrides the call forward. If the secretary calls the Boss, and Boss
telephone has been call forwarded to a DN which is not a secretary DN,
then the call is forwarded.
BFS lamp or LCD states
Party B’s BFS lamp or LCD reflects the status of Party A’s telephone in
terms of both the Busy or Idle and the Call Forward states. The following
gives the possible BFS lamp or LCD states for the various states Party
A can be in:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 111
Party A’s Call Forward
Party A’s
telephone Deactivated Activated
Idle Dark Wink = Fast Flash
Busy Lit Flash
Dark indicates lamp or LCD is off.
Wink indicates lamp or LCD is winking at 60 impulses per minute (ipm)
(0.875 seconds on, 0.125 seconds off).
Lit indicates lamp or LCD is on
Flash indicates lamp or LCD is flashing at 30 ipm (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds
off).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
112 Call Forward and Busy Status
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
113
Call Forward Busy
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 113)
"Operating parameters" (page 113)
"Feature interactions" (page 113)
"Feature packaging" (page 117)
"Feature implementation" (page 117)
"Feature operation" (page 118)
Feature description
Call Forward Busy (CFB) automatically routes incoming Direct Inward
Dialing (DID) calls to the attendant console when a telephone is busy.
This capability is allowed or denied in the Class of Service (FBA/FBD) of
the telephone.
Operating parameters
On incoming DID calls, Hunting takes precedence, followed by Call Waiting,
then Call Forward Busy. In busy situations, the call hunts if the telephone
has Hunting specified.
Feature interactions
Attendant Alternative Answering
If Call Forward Busy is allowed for the Attendant Alternative Answering
(AAA) DN (and that DN is busy), a DID call is returned to the attendant and
can again be eligible for AAA timing and operation.
Attendant Busy Verify
Attendant Busy Verify does not affect Call Forward Busy.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
114 Call Forward Busy
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does not
affect how the Call Forward Busy feature operates; however, it does provide
information about the answering party in the CDR ID field if incoming calls
have been redirected by any one of these features.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Forward Busy.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones
If Class of Service allows CFB and Call Waiting Allowed, and the telephone
has a Call Waiting key, calls do not forward to the attendant when the
telephone is busy and another call is waiting.
Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones
If a telephone has CFB and Call Waiting Allowed Class of Service, calls are
forwarded to the attendant when the telephone is busy and has another
call waiting.
Camp-On, Station
For DID calls only, Call Forward Busy takes precedence over Camp-On,
Station.
China - Attendant Monitor
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,
idle DN treatment is given.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 115
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the
forwarding or hunting call is answered.
Departmental Listed Directory Number
Call Forward Busy operates like Call Forward to 0, and are routed to any
idle attendant console in the customer group.
Dial Access to Group Calls
Call Forward Busy cannot be applied to a Group Call.
Call Forward Busy
Calls modified by Call Forward Busy are not given Distinctive Ringing as
they terminate on the attendant console.
Dial Access to Group Calls
Group Call
Call Forward Busy cannot be applied to Dial Access to Group Calls or
Group Call.
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering
Call Forward Busy to a boss telephone with filtering active is routed to the
secretary telephone.
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number
Voice calls directed to a call processing busy dynamic voice/data TN are
redirected using Call Forward Busy provided this feature is configured for
the TN. Data calls to dynamic voice/data TNs are not redirected.
Group Hunt
Group Hunting has priority over the Call Forward Busy feature.
If the DN attempted for termination has FBA (Forward Busy Allowed) Class
of Service, and if it is busy, then Group Hunting continues with the next
DN in the group
Hot Line
Any Hot Line telephone can be assigned Call Forward Busy but it applies
only to the two-way Hot Line capability.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
116 Call Forward Busy
Hunting
When a telephone is busy, an incoming call hunts only if Hunting is allowed
for that telephone. If all the steps in the hunt group are busy, and Call
Waiting is not allowed, the call forwards to the attendant console.
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions
When a call redirected by Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,
Call Forward Busy, or Hunt terminates on an Intercept Computer (ICP)
position, a redirected message identification "50" is sent to the ICP
computer, when the call is answered.
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement
When a DID call to station that is unrestricted from receiving DID calls (UDI
Class of Service) is forwarded to a UDI station due to Call Forward All Calls
or Call Forward Busy, the call is RDI-intercepted to the attendant. The
attendant display shows the DN of the dialed party.
If the call has been forwarded to the attendant, the Call Forward All
Calls/Call Forward Busy ICI lights up, and not the RDI-intercept ICI.
Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments
Call Forward Busy takes precedence over lockout and second degree busy.
Network Intercom
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.
Night Service
When the system is in Night Service, DID calls forwarded by Call Forward
Busy are routed to the specified night number. If the night telephone is busy,
subsequent calls receive busy tone.
Recorded Announcement for Call Diverted to External Trunks
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX) is
activated if the call is forwarded to an outgoing external CO trunk with the
RANX feature active.
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Total Redirection Count
Call Forward Busy redirections is limited to the value defined in the Total
Redirection Count limit (if greater than 0). If this limit is exceeded, intercept
treatment is given.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 117
Trunk Barring
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI)
on attendant consoles." (page 117)
Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) on
attendant consoles.
2. "LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 117)
Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 118)
Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
LD 15 - Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) on attendant consoles.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: ATT_DATA Attendant console options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
- ICI xx CFB Add a Call Forward Busy ICI key; xx = 0-19.
LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN lscu Terminal Number
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
118 Call Forward Busy
Prompt Response Description
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (FBD) FBA (Deny) allow Call Forward Busy.
LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN lscu Terminal Number
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (FBD) FBA (Deny) allow Call Forward Busy.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
119
Call Forward by Call Type
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 119)
"Operating parameters" (page 120)
"Feature interactions" (page 121)
"Feature packaging" (page 125)
"Feature implementation" (page 125)
"Feature operation" (page 127)
Feature description
Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) routes calls receiving a no answer or busy
signal to separately defined DNs based on the type of incoming call. The
two types of incoming calls are internal and external.
An internal call is defined as a station-to-station call, a Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) call, or an incoming call over a trunk route class marked as
internal. An external call is an incoming call over a trunk route class marked
as external. The trunk route data block (LD 16) allows routes to be defined
as internal or external for this feature.
Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN), Attendant Recall (ATT), Call
Forward denied for all telephones (NO), and Hunting (HNT). Call Forward
by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled only when the FDN and HNT options are
chosen.
In LD 15 Call Forward No Answer is defined by FNAT for external non-DID
calls and by FNAL for internal calls. FNAD continues to define Call Forward
No Answer for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk calls.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
120 Call Forward by Call Type
CFCT is allowed or denied for each telephone in LD 10 or LD 11 with
Class of Service (CFTA/CFTD). If CFCT is allowed (CFTA), the forwarding
destination is also defined in LD 10 or LD 11.
Once enabled, CFCT requires no intervention. How the system initiates Call
Forward by Call Type is described below.
When a call is presented to a telephone, the telephone is checked for
the appropriate Class of Service (Hunting Allowed (HTA), Call Forward
No Answer (FNA), Call Forward by Call Type (CFTA). The incoming call is
then checked to determine if it is a telephone, DISA, or trunk call. If it is a
trunk call, the trunk route is checked to determine whether the call should
be treated as an internal or external call. After these checks, internal calls
are forwarded to the FDN or Hunt DN of the telephone. External calls are
forwarded to the External Flexible DN (EFD) or External Hunt (EHT) DN
of the telephone.
The order in which the system handles no answer and busy calls is an
important consideration when implementing this feature. The order of
precedence is listed below.
Calls to telephones that do not answer:
•Call Forward All Calls
•Message Waiting
•Call Forward No Answer
•Attendant Recall
Calls to busy telephones:
•Call Forward All Calls
•Hunting
•Call Waiting or Camp-On
•Message Waiting Forward Busy
•Call Forward Busy
Operating parameters
Attendant Administration does not support the entry of the new EFD and
EHT Class of Service required for Call Forward by Call Type.
The following trunk routes can be defined as internal or external call types
for CFCT: CO, DID, FX, ATVN, CCA, TIE, WATS, and CSA.
Incoming DISA calls are always treated as internal calls irrespective of the
trunk route class mark defined for the incoming trunk.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 121
If an incoming call has been modified by Call Forward All Calls or Hunting,
the Class of Service and forwarding DN are obtained from the dialed DN.
This applies when Call Forward No Answer specified at the customer level
is HNT or FDN.
Feature interactions
Attendant
An attendant-extended call is classified internal or external by the originating
telephone or class mark of the trunk type. This is the case whether or not
the attendant has released before forwarding occurs.
Attendant Alternative Answering
If Call Forward by Call Type is enabled on the Attendant Alternative
Answering (AAA) DN, calls are forwarded based on the Call Type of the
originator.
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls
The operation of Call Forward by Call Type is overridden on a analog
(500/2500 type) telephone that has inadvertently been placed on-hook
during a Break-In conference to allow it to be re-rung by the attendant.
Automatic Timed Recall
Calls eligible for Flexible Call Forward No Answer treatment, and handled
by Call Forward by Call Type, use the Call Forward No Answer timer in
the Customer Data Block as the recall timer for attendant extended calls.
Irrespective of the relative timeout for Automatic Timed Recall, the ringing
continues as long as allowed by the Call Forward No Answer Timer.
Call Forward All Calls
If a call is unanswered at the forwarded DN, the telephone that has Call
Forward All Calls activated is checked for the Class of Service and the call
forward DN. If a chain of call forwarding occurs, the Class of Service and the
forward DN for Call Forward No Answer are obtained from the first telephone
in the chain. This applies when FDN and HNT have been specified for Call
Forward No Answer at the customer level.
Call Forward No Answer
The sequence for forwarding unanswered calls is Call Forward All Calls,
Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer, then Attendant Recall (if the call
is attendant-extended). The same sequence is used when Call Forward by
Call Type is active for the customer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
122 Call Forward by Call Type
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
To implement CFCT for Second Level Call Forward No Answer eligible
calls, the originating party’s call type is checked. If it is internal, the call is
forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN). If it is external,
the call is forwarded to the External Flexible DN (EFD).
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD
The Call Forward status of each telephone can be saved as part of the data
dump routine and reinstated following a SYSLOAD operation.
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide
If the Internal/External definition in LD 15 is set to YES, a call is treated as
internal or external on a network wide basis.
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) takes precedence over Call Redirection
by Time of Day.
If Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward No
Answer (CFNA) and Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD), unanswered
internal calls receiving CFNA are routed to the Flexible CFNA DN, Hunt
DN, Alternate Flexible CFNA DN or Alternate Hunt DNs. External calls are
routed in the same manner.
If CFNA is enabled with Hunting by Call Type and Call Redirection by Time
of Day (CRTOD), unanswered internal calls are redirected to the Hunt DN
or Alternate Hunt DN during the alternative time. External calls are routed
in the same manner. The alternate time is defined on the called DN’s
data block.
Calling Party Name Display Denied
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating
telephone. This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of
Service of the calling telephone and the forwarding/transferring telephone.
The name of the forwarding/transferring telephone is not displayed on the
calling and terminating telephone.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 123
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Call Transfer
Network Call Transfer
Calls modified by Call Transfer and Network Call Transfer receive CFCT
treatment. If party A (telephone or trunk) calls party B, and B transfers to
party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are obtained from party C.
Call Waiting Redirection
If Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward
No Answer and Call Waiting Redirection, "no answer" internal calls receiving
Call Waiting treatment are routed for CFNA treatment to the Flexible CFNA
DN (FDN) or Hunt DN, and "no answer" external calls are routed for CFNA
treatment to the External Flexible CFNA DN (EFD) or External Hunt DN
(EHT).
Conference
Calls modified by Conference receive CFCT treatment for the conferenced
telephone. If party A calls party B, and B tries to conference in party C,
the forwarding DN and Class of Service are that of C. For example, Joan
and Bob are in conversation, and they try to conference in Mack. Mack is
not at his desk, so the attempted conference call is sent to the destination
associated with Mack’s telephone.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Eligibility of a DID call for Call Forward by Call Type is determined by
allowing or denying the type of call in the Customer Data Block (FNAD
prompt). The decision to treat a DID call as internal or external is made on
a trunk route basis.
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement
An external call is made to the PLDN. An idle group hunt list member
station is rung but does not answer. If the member station has Call Forward
No Answer (FNA) or Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of
Service, then the call is transferred to the attendant after the number of ring
cycles defined for Call Forward No Answer has been reached. If the call
is an internal call, then the system searches for another idle group hunt
list member.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
124 Call Forward by Call Type
ISDN Semi Permanent Connections for Australia
ISPC calls are handled according to the configuration of the route
associated to the phantom trunk TN. This configuration is independent of
the route associated to the real TN.
Message Center
Message Center uses the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) of the
called telephone to route no answer calls. If CFCT is enabled, unanswered
internal calls use the FDN to route a call. Unanswered external calls use the
External Flexible DN (EFD) to route a call.
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers
Call redirection parameters like Call Forward No Answer are derived
from the TN data block of the prime appearance of the called Multiple
Appearance Directory Number. If there is more than one prime appearance,
the parameters are selected from the last TN in the DN block.
If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following
information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection
parameters for MADNs.
The DN Block organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN
with the highest numerical value (000-0-06-03) is placed at the beginning of
the list. The list then continues in descending order with the lowest numerical
TN (000-0-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change activity affects the
organization of the DN list as described in the following paragraphs.
•If a telephone undergoes Service Change, its TN is moved to the
beginning of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This
telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another service
change or a SYSLOAD.
•If a DN appears on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian
1 proprietary telephones, the analog (500/2500 type) telephones are
listed in numerical TN order at the top of the list. Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A
Service Change to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone moves its TN to
the beginning of the list. A Service Change to a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone moves its TN to the end of the list.
•A SYSLOAD restructures the list back to numerical TN order, with
analog (500/2500 type) telephones at the top and Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be
derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 125
Trunk Barring
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
Feature packaging
Call Forward by Call Type is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer." (page 125)
Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer.
2. "LD 16 - Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward
by Call Type." (page 126)
Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward by Call Type.
3. "LD 10 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 126)
Enable Call Forward by Call Type for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
4. "LD 11 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 126)
Enable Call Forward by Call Type for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
LD 15 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Call Redirection
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System Media
Gateway 1000B.
- FNAD (HNT)
ATT
NO
FDN
Treatment for incoming DID calls.
- FNAT (HNT)
ATT
NO
FDN
Treatment for incoming external calls.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
126 Call Forward by Call Type
Prompt Response Description
- FNAL (HNT)
ATT
NO
FDN
Treatment for incoming internal calls.
- CFNA 1-(4)-15 Number of ringing cycles for CFNA.
LD 16 - Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward by Call Type.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE CDB Customer Data Block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
RCLS (EXT) INT Route class marked as (external) or internal.
LD 10 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
HUNT xxxx Hunt DN for internal calls.
CLS (CFTD) CFTA (Deny) allow Call Forward by Call Type Telephone. Must have
Hunting (HTA) and Call Forward No Answer (FNA) allowed.
FTR EFD xxxx
EHT xxxx
FDN xxxx
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls. Hunt DN
for external calls.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls.
LD 11 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 127
Prompt Response Description
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FDN xxxx Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls.
CLS (CFTD) CFTA (Deny) allow Call Forward by Call Type Telephone. Must have
Hunting (HTA) and Call Forward No Answer (FNA) allowed.
EFD xxxx Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls.
HUNT xxxx
000 Hunt DN for internal calls.
Short Hunt for internal calls.
EHT xxxx
000 Hunt DN for external calls.
Short Hunt for external calls.
LHK xx Last hunt key number for internal and external calls
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
128 Call Forward by Call Type
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
129
Call Forward Destination Deactivation
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 129)
"Operating parameters" (page 130)
"Feature interactions" (page 131)
"Feature packaging" (page 132)
"Feature implementation" (page 132)
"Feature operation" (page 134)
Feature description
The existing Call Forward All Calls feature allows users to divert incoming
calls from a telephone. The activation/deactivation of Call Forward All Calls
must occur from the originating telephone. The Flexible Feature Codes
and Remote Call Forward features allowed users the extended flexibility to
activate/deactivate Call Forward All Calls from within the system, or outside
the local network using Direct Inward System Access.
Call Forward Destination Deactivation (CFDD) permits the call forwarded
destination to deactivate the Call Forward All Calls functionality on the
call forward station. As illustrated in Figure 1 "Call Forward Destination
Deactivation Capability" (page 130), if telephone A is call forwarded to
telephone B, then telephone B can deactivate call forward.
This feature also allows a user to deactivate call forward by using Remote
Call Forward deactivate Flexible Feature Code.
In China, the Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature requires an
octothorpe (#) as an end of dial delimiter when entering FFC’s to deactivate.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
130 Call Forward Destination Deactivation
Figure 1
Call Forward Destination Deactivation Capability
Operating parameters
The feature is applicable to all systems.
Call Forward Destination Deactivation is only supported on Call Forward.
This feature is not supported on Internal Call Forward.
The existing Call Forward All Calls features allows users to program a
call forward station within a system switch or Public Switching Telephone
Network. The Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature is designed for
stand alone application only. Therefore, both the destination and originator
must belong to the same customer on the system.
The call forwarded destination can deactivate the Call Forward All Calls
functionality. However, the call forwarded destination cannot activate the
call forward functionality from the originating telephone unless using the
RCFA FFC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 131
CFDD can be activated on proprietary, ISDN Basic Rate Interface and
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones by dialing the CFDD FFC. 16-button
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency telephones can use one of the A,B,C or D
function keys, configured as CFDD, or they can also dial CFDD FFC to
use this feature.
CFDD can be activated on Meridian proprietary, ISDN Basic Rae interface
and Analog (500/2500 type) telephones by dialing the CFDD FFC. An
analog 500-type telephone with a dial pulse Class of Service cannot dial
an octothorpe (#) as the end of dial delimiter. To Activate CFDD, the call
forwarded destination of an analog 500-type telephone has to dial the string
of digits (as defined in LD 15) for the end of dial delimiter.
An analog 500-type telephone with a dial pulse Class of Service cannot
dial an octothorpe (#) as the end of dial delimiter. To activate CFDD on an
analog 500-type telephone, the dial string digits (the STRG prompt in LD
15) must be configured for the end of dial delimiter.
If the string to indicate end of dialing (STRG prompt in LD 15) is defined,
then analog (500/2500 type), 16-button DTMF, ISDN BRI and proprietary
telephones must dial string digits as an end of dial delimiter to activate
CFDD.
In China, to activate CFDD a user must dial an octothorpe (#) as an end
of dial delimiter. In this market, an analog 500-type telephone does not
support this feature.
An Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agent can only activate this feature
from their personal Directory Number key. This feature cannot be activated
on the ACD in calls key.
If the call forward station has a Prime DN and Secondary DN defined,
then the Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature only considers the
Prime DN to forward a call. Therefore, during the feature operation, the call
forwarded destination’s dialed DN of telephone A is compared with the call
forward station’s Prime DN.
Feature interactions
Call Forward All Calls
If a user’s call forwarded Directory Number (DN) is defined as DN of
telephone B and telephone A dials the CFW FFC to activate call forward,
then telephone A gets forwarded to telephone B. Telephone B can deactivate
CFW on telephone A by dialing the CFDD FFC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
132 Call Forward Destination Deactivation
Call Forward, Remote
Remote Call Forward (RCFW) and Call Forward Destination Deactivation
(CFDD) provide the same functionality but are activated differently. CFDD
does not require the call forward station’s control password to deactivate the
call forward functionality on the call forward station.
The call forwarded destination can use the Remote Call Forward
deactivation FFC as well as CFDD to deactivate the Call Forward All Calls
functionality on the call forward station.
Meridian Mail
Meridian Mail cannot deactivate the CFW functionality on the call forward
station by using CFDD FFC.
Feature packaging
Call Forward Destination Deactivation (CFDD) requires Flexible Feature
Code (FFC)/China Flexible Feature Code (CHFFC) package 139.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure Dial String in Customer Data Block." (page 132)
Configure Dial String in Customer Data Block.
2. "LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Call Forward Destination
Deactivation." (page 133)
Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Call Forward Destination
Deactivation.
3. "LD 18 - Configure Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC on
16-button DTMF telephone." (page 134)
Configure Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC on 16-button
DTMF telephone.
The Call Forward All Calls feature is configured in LD 10 for Analog
(500/2500 type) telephones and LD 11 for proprietary telephones.
LD 15 - Configure Dial String in Customer Data Block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data block.
TYPE: FFC Flexible Feature Code gate opener.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 133
Prompt Response Description
0-31 Range for Small System Media
Gateway 1000B.
...
- FFCS YES Change end of dialing digits.
- - STRL 1-3 Number of digits to indicate end of dialing.
- - STRG xxx String to indicate end of dialing. Outpulsing of Asterisk (*) and
Octothorpe (#) (OPAO) package 104 is required to out-pulse
(*) and (#) in the string.
The asterisk (*) used to introduce a pause while out-pulsing
digits is supported on analog and DTI trunks, but not supported
on ISDN trunks. On ISDN trunks, if the OPAO feature is
enabled, the asterisk (*) is outpulsed as a called party digit.
LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Call Forward Destination Deactivation.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
FFCT (NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.
YES = confirmation tone is required.
CODE DEAF Deactivate Feature.
- DEAF xxxx Enter Flexible Feature Code on a telephone.
CODE CFWA Call Forward All Calls Activate Code.
- CFWA xxxx Enter Flexible Feature Code to activate.
CODE CFWD Call Forward All Calls Deactivation Code.
- CFWD xxxx Enter Flexible Feature Code to deactivate.
CODE CFWV Call Forward All Calls Verify Code.
- CFWV xxxx Enter Flexible Feature Code to verify.
CODE CFDD Call Forward All Calls Destination Deactivation Code.
- CFDD xxxx Enter Flexible Feature Code.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
134 Call Forward Destination Deactivation
LD 18 - Configure Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC on 16-button DTMF telephone.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG Add, or Change 16-button data block.
TYPE ABCD 16-button data block.
TBNO 1-254 Number of ABCD Table to be added or changed.
DFLT 1-254 Number of default function table.
PRED YES Function table is changed for pre-dial.
NO = default mnemonics are used.
- A CFDD Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC assignment of key.
- B CFWA Call Forward All Call Activation FFC assignment of key.
...
Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC function can be assigned to any A, B, C or D key of the
16-button DTMF telephone.
ISDN BRI telephones can deactivate the Call Forward All Call feature. To
set up the digital subscriber loop and terminal service profile for a BRI
telephone refer to Overlay 27.
Feature operation
To enable the Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature, complete the
following:
Step Action
1Go off-hook on the "call forward to" Directory Number of the call
forwarded telephone and listen for dial tone.
2Dial the CFDD FFC followed by DN of the call forward originator
and end of dial delimiter.
3Response provided.
—End—
The following responses are provided to the user of the call forwarded
destination.
1. If originator’s call forward DN is the same as active DN of destination
then the call forward feature on originator is deactivated. If the
confirmation tone in LD 57 is enabled, then a confirmation tone or
speech is provided to the destination telephone. Otherwise, silence
is provided.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 135
2. If the originator’s call forward DN does not match the active DN of
the destination, then an overflow tone is provided to the destination
telephone.
3. If the Call Forward All Calls functionality on the originator telephone is
already deactivated, then an overflow tone is provided to the destination
telephone.
4. If the originator does not have call forward all calls defined, then an
overflow tone is provided to the destination telephone.
16-Button DTMF telephone
To activate CFDD on this telephone, the user must press one of the ABCD
function keys that is defined as CFDD FFC, followed by DN of call forward
telephone and end of dial delimiter.
Deactivating Multiple Appearance DN
The Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature operation remains the
same. However, if the call forward station is a Multiple Appearance DN
(MADN) telephone, then the station’s Prime DN is considered to find the
Call Forward All Calls functionality for deactivation.
If more than one MADN call forward stations have Call Forward All Calls
defined and the call forward DN on one or more MADN call forward stations
matches the active DN of telephone B, then the call forward functionality on
one or more MADN call forward stations is deactivated.
Any one of MADN call forwarded destination station is allowed to deactivate
the call forward function on the call forward station by using the CFDD FFC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
136 Call Forward Destination Deactivation
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
137
Call Forward External Deny
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 137)
"Operating parameters" (page 138)
"Feature interactions" (page 138)
"Feature packaging" (page 139)
"Feature implementation" (page 139)
"Feature operation" (page 140)
Feature description
This enhancement provides the option to restrict, on a per-telephone basis,
the DN that can be programmed for Call Forward All Calls to internal DNs
only. Internal DNs are defined as:
•DNs that terminate on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
•DNs that terminate on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
•DNs that terminate on a data terminal defined in LD 10 or LD 11
•Attendant DNs or Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) local attendant
DNs
•Listed DNs (LDNs)
•Message Center DNs as defined in LD 23
External DNs include (but are not limited to) trunk access codes,
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes, Basic and Network
Alternate Route Selection (BARS/NARS) access codes, Electronic Switched
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
138 Call Forward External Deny
Network (ESN) Location Codes, non-message center Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) numbers, Call Park numbers, and Direct Inward Services
Access numbers.
When Call Forward External Deny is enabled for a telephone:
•A user trying to forward calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
to an external DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is not call
forwarded.
•A user trying to forward calls from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
to an external DN receives overflow tone and the lamp associated with
the Call Forward key of the telephone flashes. The telephone is not
call forwarded.
•A user trying to forward calls from a Meridian digital or a display
telephone to an external DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is
not call forwarded and the following message is displayed on M2317
telephones:
—Release and try again
•A user trying to forward calls from a data module to an external DN does
not receive overflow tone. Calls are not forwarded and the following
message is displayed on M2317 telephones:
—Invalid data forward number
Operating parameters
External DNs cannot be used with Call Forward All Calls if Call Forward
External Deny is enabled for the telephone.
Both ESN access codes and CDP steering codes are considered external
DNs, and cannot be used as a Call Forward All Calls DN if Call Forward
External is denied for the telephone.
The number of digits specified in LD 10 or LD 11 for the Call Forward DN
must be equal to or greater than the number of digits of any other internal
DN.
Attendant Administration cannot change Call Forward External Deny Class
of Service.
Feature interactions
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
If Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled, Call Forward to an ACD
DN is allowed only if the ACD DN is a message center.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 139
Call Forward All Calls
This feature overrides other Call Forward All Calls parameters. For example,
if Call Forward to Trunk Access Code (CFTA) is allowed for the customer,
but Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled for the telephone, CFXD
takes precedence and call forwarding to a trunk access code is denied.
Calling Party Privacy
If an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the outgoing trunk route on the
tandem node also has CCP provisioned.
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (that is,
at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating telephone. In
this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN
(such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Network Call Forward
Call Forward External Deny restricts a telephone from being forwarded
unconditionally to a number that is not on the home switch. Therefore, Call
Forward External Deny and the Integrated Services Digital Network Primary
Rate Interface (ISDN PRI) feature Network Call Forward are mutually
exclusive.
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Trunk Barring
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for analog (500/2500
type) telephones." (page 140)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
140 Call Forward External Deny
Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for Meridian 1
proprietary telephones." (page 140)
Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS CFXA Allow Call Forward to an external DN CFXD = Deny Call
Forward to an external DN (default).
LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS CFXA Allow Call Forward to an external DN.
CFXD = Deny Call Forward to an external DN (default).
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
141
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 141)
"Operating parameters" (page 143)
"Feature interactions" (page 143)
"Feature packaging" (page 147)
"Feature implementation" (page 147)
"Feature operation" (page 149)
Feature description
Second Level Call Forward No Answer enhances Flexible Call Forward
No Answer by forwarding unanswered calls twice. The following example
best illustrates this enhancement.
Party A places a call to extension 5000, which does not answer. Extension
5000 has Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) allowed and extension 6000
defined as its CFNA number. The call forwards to extension 6000. This is
the first level CFNA.
Extension 6000 also does not answer the call. This telephone has a Call
Forward No Answer and Second Level Call Forward No Answer allowed
Class of Service (FNA and SFA). As it has a CFNA number of 7000,
it forwards there. This is the second level of Call Forward No Answer.
Note that the forwarding DN is always obtained from the currently ringing
telephone.
If extension 7000 does not answer the call, one of two things may occur:
•If the original call is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or internal call, the
forwarded call continues to ring until answered or the calling party
disconnects.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
142 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
•If the original call is extended by the attendant console, Attendant Recall
occurs.
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the same customer-level timer
as Flexible Call Forward No Answer to determine the number of rings before
forwarding a call.
Telephones with a message waiting allowed (MWA) Class of Service
should have the Message Center DN defined as their FDN. Calls to these
telephones forward to the Message Center and are not eligible for Second
Level Call Forward No Answer.
Call Forward No Answer Second Level for Message Waiting Allowed
Telephones, enables an SFA Class of Service to be defined on telephones
with a Message Waiting Allowed (MWA) Class of Service. Thus, a message
waiting indication can be activated at the originally dialed DN for Second
Level CFNA calls terminating at a message center.
Requirements at the dialed DN for first-level CFNA are as follows:
•Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer
level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal).
•The telephone has an FNA Class of Service.
•The terminating call has rung for the number of rings specified for CFNA
or DFNA in the Customer Data Block (LD 15).
•The forwarding DN (Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN [FDN],
Coordinated Dialing Plan DN [CDP DN], External Flexible DN [EFD],
Hunting [HNT], or External Hunt [EHT]) must be distinct from the ringing
DN and be a valid number within the system.
Requirements at the originally called telephone DN for Second Level Call
Forward No Answer are as follows:
•Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer
level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal).
•The telephone has SFA and FNA Class of Service.
•Call Forward No Answer has occurred only once prior to ringing this
telephone.
•The forwarding DN (FDN, EFD, Hunt, or EHT) must be distinct from the
ringing DN and must be a valid number within the system.
The order of precedence for activation of first level Call Forward No Answer
is as follows:
•Call Forward All Calls
•Message Waiting
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 143
•Call Forward No Answer, and
•Attendant Recall.
The order of precedence for activation of Second Level Call Forward No
Answer is as follows:
•Call Forward All Calls
•Second Call Forward No Answer (CFNA calls only)
•Attendant Recall
Operating parameters
A maximum of two levels of Call Forward No Answer are allowed for an
unanswered call.
Calls directed to an attendant or Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Message
Center cannot have Second Level Call Forward No Answer.
Attendant Administration cannot change the SFA/SFD Class of Service.
Error messages are generated if changes made to the Forward No Answer
or Hunt Class of Service conflict with the SFA/SFD Class of Service.
Feature interactions
Automatic Timed Reminders
When Call Forward No Answer is activated on a telephone, the slow answer
timer begins only after the call reaches its final destination.
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does not
affect how these features operate; however, it does provide information
about the answering party in the CDR ID field if incoming calls have been
redirected by any one of these features.
Call Forward All Calls
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the final (ringing) telephone in
the chain to obtain Class of Service and forwarding DN information.
First level treatment operates in the following manner. Suppose that Party A
calls Party B, and Party B has programmed Call Forward All Calls to Party
C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a No Answer call at Party C
to the forwarding directory number associated with Party B, the dialed DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
144 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Call Forward by Call Type
To implement Call Forward by Call Type for Second Level Call Forward No
Answer eligible calls, the originating party’s call type is checked. If it is
internal, the call is forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN
(FDN). If it is external, the call is forwarded to the External Flexible DN
(EFD).
Call Forward No Answer
Second Level Call Forward No Answer applies to the Hunt and Flexible Call
Forward No Answer options. This is implemented by defining the FNAD,
FNAT, or FNAL prompts in LD 15 as FDN or HNT. If the attendant option is
defined, an unanswered call goes to the attendant queue and is not eligible
for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Existing Second Level CFNA allows unanswered calls to receive Call
Forward No Answer treatment twice. Call Redirection by Time of Day
(CRTOD) parameters are obtained from the last rung Directory Number. A
maximum of two levels of CFNA is allowed for an unanswered call.
Call Waiting Redirection
The existing Second Level CFNA treatment is applicable to Call Waiting
calls redirected by CFNA (first level) with the Call Waiting Redirection
feature which are still not answered at the last rung DN.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Directory Number Delayed Ringing
The Directory Number Delayed Ringer (DNDR) feature allows the SCN/MCN
(non ringing keys) to actually ring after a definable period of time (DNDR
prompt in LD 11). If the time before CFNA takes effect is less than the
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 145
DNDR time for a particular telephone, CFNA will forward this call before any
SCN/MCN keys can ring on this telephone. Note that CFNA is defined in
the number of rings and DNDR is defined in seconds.
If the Forward DN telephone is busy or invalid when the call is forwarded,
the call will return to the originally called telephone. However, the DNDR
delay timer is reapplied to the called telephone if DNDR is defined.
If a call is forwarded, as per existing operation, this call is treated as a
new incoming call to the forward DN. For example, if the forward DN has
a DNDR value defined, a new timer isgin timing according to the forward
DN’s DNDR delay.
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing
The ringing cadence for all telephones in a chain of call redirections remains
the same as for the original DN called.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer
If Second Level Call Forward No Answer is disabled, Flexible Call Forward
No Answer operates as described.
Group Hunt
Second Level Call Forward No Answer will not be applied to calls that are
Group Hunting.
Hunting
A forwarded call may be modified by Hunting if the Call Forward No Answer
DN is busy. This call is eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer if
the SFA Class of Service is allowed and a Call Forward No Answer DN has
been defined for the last rung DN.
If Group Hunting is active, Second Level CFNA is not applied.
Message Centers
There are three types of Message Centers:
•Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Calls forwarded to an ACD Message Center are queued, so that no
CFNA timeout occurs.
•Attendant
Calls forwarded to an Attendant Message Center are queued, so no
CFNA timeout occurs.
•DN
An indirect call forwarded to a DN Message Center and not answered by
an operator is forwarded to a second level if SFA for DN-MC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
146 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
It is recommended that DN Message Center stations be denied CFNA,
Call Forward Busy (CFB), Call Forwarding (CFW), and Call Hunting
(HUNT).
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers
Call redirection parameters like Hunt and Call Forward No Answer are
derived from the TN data block (LD 20 TNB) of the prime appearance of the
called Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN). If there is more than
one prime appearance, the parameters are selected from the last TN in the
DN block for the DN (LD 22 DNB).
If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following
information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection
parameters for MADNs.
The DN Block organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN
with the highest numerical value (000-0-06-03) is placed at the beginning of
the list. The list then continues in descending order with the lowest numerical
TN (000-0-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change activity affects the
organization of the DN list as described in the following paragraphs:
•If a telephone undergoes Service Change, its TN is moved to the
beginning of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This
telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another Service
Change or a SYSLOAD.
•If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as described
in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance of a DN
exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived from the TN of
the prime appearance telephone, even though it may not be at the end
of the list. A prime appearance is always the first TN used when the
system looks for call redirection instructions.
•If a DN appears on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian
1 proprietary telephones, the analog (500/2500 type) telephones are
listed in numerical TN order at the top of the list. Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A
service change to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone moves its TN to
the beginning of the list. A Service Change to a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone moves its TN to the end of the list.
•A SYSLOAD restructures the list with analog (500/2500 type) telephones
at the top and Meridian 1 proprietary telephones at the bottom. Call
redirection parameters continue to be derived as described in the
preceding paragraphs.
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 147
Slow Answer Recall
When a Call Forward No Answer call is unanswered at a telephone eligible
for Second Level Call Forward No Answer, and the call was extended by an
attendant, Second Level Call Forward No Answer takes precedence over
Slow Answer Recall. If the telephone has a Second Level Call Forward No
Answer Denied Class of Service, the system performs Slow Answer Recall
for the unanswered call.
Total Redirection Count
If a call has attempted Call Forward No Answer and was extended by the
attendant, the call will not be intercepted when the Total Redirection Count
limit has been exceeded. The call will continue to ring the telephone until
recalled to the attendant.
If Overflow (OVF), Busy (BSY), or Source (SRCx) is configured as Intercept
Treatments, a call attempting Call Forward No Answer, that exceeds the
Total Redirection Count limit, will not be intercepted. Further redirections
are prohibited and the call continues to ring the current telephone.
Trunk Barring
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Assign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting
indication." (page 148)
Assign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting indication.
2. "LD 10 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 148)
Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for Meridian
1 proprietary telephones." (page 148)
Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
148 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
LD 15 - Assign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting indication.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT (MCX) MCI (Exclude) include Message Center.
LD 10 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (FND) FNA
(MWD) MWA
(SFD) SFA
(Deny) allow Forward No Answer.
(Deny) allow Message Waiting.
(Deny) allow second level CFNA
SFA can be implemented with an MWA Class of Service.
FTR FDN xxxx...x Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN.
LD 11 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 149
Prompt Response Description
FDN xxx...x Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN.
CLS (FND) FNA
(MWD) MWA
(SFD) SFA
(Deny) allow Forward No Answer.
(Deny) allow Message Waiting.
(Deny) allow) Second Level CFNA
SFA can be implemented with an MWA Class of Service.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
150 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
151
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call
Forward No Answer
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 151)
"Operating parameters" (page 152)
"Feature interactions" (page 153)
"Feature packaging" (page 161)
"Feature implementation" (page 161)
"Feature operation" (page 164)
Feature description
Call Forward No Answer automatically forwards unanswered calls to another
DN. The customer can specify the number of rings (1 to 15) before the
system invokes Call Forward No Answer. The default is four rings.
Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:
•deny for all telephones
•route all unanswered calls to the attendant
•route all unanswered calls to the Hunt number defined for the telephone
•route all unanswered calls to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN
defined for the telephone
Flexible Call Forward No Answer allows the customer to specify, on a
per-telephone basis, where an unanswered call should be routed. This is
independent of the Hunt number assigned to the telephone. This capability
is implemented on a per-customer basis and can be specified for Direct
Inward Dialing (DID) and non-DID call types. When activated, a call to a
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
152 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
telephone that does not answer within the specified number of ring cycles
is forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) associated
with that telephone.
The Flexible Call Forward No Answer operation applies only to individual
DN calls of analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and not to Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) calls.
A call is forwarded under the following conditions:
•The Class of Service of the dialed telephone is Forward No Answer
allowed.
•Flexible Call Forward No Answer is enabled at the customer level.
•The call has rung the specified number of times.
•The Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) is valid and has been assigned.
System or telephone features such as Hunting and Call Forward All Calls
may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone that is different from
the dialed DN. In these cases, if the call is eligible for Flexible Call Forward
No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for the dialed DN, not the
ringing DN.
When you use Multiple Appearance DNs (MADNs), call redirection is
determined based on the Terminal Number (TN) order in your DN block. To
determine the TN order, print the DN block from LD 20 or LD 22 (TYPE
= DNB). When a call comes in to a MADN, the system begins a search
to determine how the call is handled. Using the TN list you printed, the
system performs the following search, beginning at the bottom of the TN
list and working up.
Step Action
1Search for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call
Forward All Calls activated.
2If there are no Prime DN appearances, the TN at the bottom of the
list controls call redirection.
The search does not necessarily determine the highest or lowest
numerical TN.
—End—
Operating parameters
Calls are forwarded one step only. For Call Forward No Answer
enhancements, refer to the Call Forward, Second Level module.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 153
Incoming calls on private lines with the Restricted Call Modification option
enabled are not forwarded.
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) can be assigned to telephones
with Message Waiting Allowed Class of Service. This is irrespective of the
telephone’s Class of Service and how forward no answer is specified in the
Customer Data Block. Message Center always uses the FDN associated
with the telephone to route unanswered calls.
Feature interactions
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either transferred, extended
or redirected to another telephone using Call Forward No Answer are
charged against the last telephone that answers the call and the controlling
telephone releases.
Attendant Administration
Attendant Administration can assign and change a Flexible Call Forward No
Answer DN with the function key on the attendant console.
Attendant Alternative Answering
When Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) DN does not answer, the
call can be forwarded by CFNA to the DN defined as the CFNA DN for the
originally dialed DN. If the originally dialed DN is the attendant, the call is
forwarded to the CFNA DN defined for the AAA DN.
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override the Call Forward No
Answer feature. If the blocked DN of the telephone has the Call Forward No
Answer feature active when the SACP key is pressed to ring the DN, the
DN will ring until answered or disconnected. No Call Forward No Answer is
done for the Attendant Blocking of DN call.
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls
The operation of Call Forward No Answer is overridden on a analog
(500/2500 type) telephone that has inadvertently been placed on-hook
during a Break-In conference to allow it to be re-rung by the attendant.
If the controlling party goes on hook in a Break-In conference, and is being
re-rung by the attendant, the ringing takes precedence over Call Forward
No Answer that may be applied to the telephone.
Attendant Overflow Position
A call rerouted through Attendant Overflow Position will Call Forward to
the forwarding DN only if it is the Prime DN or a single appearance DN on
that telephone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
154 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
Automatic Call Distribution
The Flexible Call Forward No Answer operation does not apply to Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) calls.
Automatic Set Relocation
Calls will not forward no answer to a telephone that is being relocated
Automatic Timed Recall
Flexible Call Forward No Answer timing takes precedence over Automatic
Timed Recall timing. Irrespective of the relative timeout intervals for each
feature, ringing continues as long as allowed by Call Forward No Answer.
Automatic Timed Reminders
When Call Forward No Answer is activated on a telephone, the slow answer
timer begins only after the call reaches its final destination.
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does
not affect how the Call Forward No Answer feature operates; however, it
does provide information about the answering party in the CDR ID field if
incoming calls have been redirected by any one of these features.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone
that is different from the dialed DN. In this case, if the call is eligible for
Flexible Call Forward No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for
the dialed DN, not the ringing DN.
Suppose that party A calls party B, and party B has programmed Call
Forward All Calls to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a
No Answer call at party C to the FDN associated with party B, the dialed DN.
After the call is forwarded, the MARP TN for the dialed DN controls the call
redirection for Flexible Call Forward No Answer.
Call Forward by Call Type
The sequence for forwarding unanswered calls is Call Forward All Calls,
Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer, then Attendant Recall (if the call
is attendant-extended). The same sequence is used when Call Forward by
Call Type is active for the customer.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Call Forward No Answer is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override
Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 155
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Second Level Call Forward No Answer applies to the Hunt and Flexible Call
Forward No Answer options. This is implemented by defining the FNAD,
FNAT, or FNAL prompts in LD 15 as FDN or HNT. If the attendant option is
defined, an unanswered call goes to the attendant queue and is not eligible
for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.
Call Page Network Wide
Call Page Network Wide (PAGENET) does not block a telephone from being
programmed to Call Forward No Answer to an external Paging trunk. At
call termination time, calls that are forwarded to an external PAGENET
uncontrolled trunk are not blocked. However, calls forwarded to an external
PAGENET controlled trunk are given access denied intercept treatment
at the Paging node.
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Call redirection parameters for Call Forward No Answer are obtained from
the originally dialed Directory Number. When Call Redirection by Time of
Day (CRTOD) is activated, unanswered calls given CRTOD treatment are
forwarded with CFNA according to the time of day. No changes are made to
the existing CFNA feature.
Call Waiting
If a call to a telephone gets CFNA treatment to another telephone that is
busy, Call Waiting and Camp-On do not apply. The call will attempt to
terminate on the original DN again.
Call Waiting Redirection
Per existing Call Forward No Answer feature operation, the call redirection
parameters for CFNA are obtained from the originally dialed DN for
redirected calls.
Existing Network CFNA treatment is applied to calls receiving Call Waiting
treatment on telephones with CFNA and the Call Waiting Redirection feature
enabled if the Call Waiting call is not answered before the expiration of the
CFNA timer and the CFNA DN is on another node.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
156 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Camp-On
When the Call Forward No Answer timer expires for a ringing camped-on
call, the call is given Attendant Recall treatment instead of Call Forward
No Answer treatment.
China - Attendant Monitor
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,
idle DN treatment is given.
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the
forwarding or hunting call is answered.
Dial Access to Group Calls
Call Forward No Answer cannot be applied to a Group Call.
Departmental Listed Directory Number
Call Forward No Answer to the attendant operates like Call Forward to 0,
and are routed to any idle attendant console in the customer group.
Directory Number Delayed Ringing
The Directory Number Delayed Ringing (DNDR) feature allows the
SCN/MCN (non ringing keys) to actually ring after a definable period of time
(DNDR prompt in LD 11). If the time before CFNA takes effect is less than
the DNDR time for a particular telephone, CFNA will forward this call before
any SCN/MCN keys can ring on this telephone. Note that CFNA is defined
in the number of rings and DNDR is defined in seconds.
If the Forward DN telephone is busy or invalid when the call is forwarded,
the call will return to the originally called telephone. However, the DNDR
delay timer is reapplied to the called telephone if DNDR is defined.
If a call is forwarded, as per existing operation, this call is treated as a
new incoming call to the forward DN. For example, if the forward DN has
a DNDR value defined, a new timer isgin timing according to the forward
DN’s DNDR delay.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 157
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer
Call Forward No Answer takes precedence over the Message Center
feature.
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines
For Call Forwarding, the COS and NCOS used for the forwarding call can be
taken from either the forwarding telephone or from the forwarded telephone,
depending on the option defined in the Customer Data Block.
For example, telephone B call forwards all calls to an external trunk.
Telephone A calls telephone B. If OPT = CFF in LD 15 (Call Forward
forwarded to party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone B
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk. If OPT = CFO (Call Forward
originating party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone A
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk.
Group Call
Group Call cannot be applied to Call Forward No Answer.
Group Hunt
Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) can optionally be configured to use a Pilot
DN. This option is available when the HUNT DN or the FDN is defined as
a Pilot DN.
If an idle station attempted for termination has CFNA defined, then the
station is rung. If the station does not answer within the customer specified
number of ring cycles, then group hunting will continue with the next DN
in the group. The calling party will continue to hear ring back tone until
one of the termination conditions mentioned in the "Group Hunt" feature
description (the last condition is not applicable in this case) is met, or until
they releases the call.
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement
An external call is made to the PLDN. An idle group hunt list member
station is rung but does not answer. If the member station has Call Forward
No Answer (FNA) or Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of
Service, then the call is transferred to the attendant after the number of ring
cycles defined for Call Forward No Answer has been reached. If the call
is an internal call, then the system searches for another idle group hunt
list member.
Hot Line
Any Hot Line telephone can be assigned Call Forward No Answer but it
applies only to the two-way Hot Line capability.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
158 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
Hunting
Hunting may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone that is
different from the dialed DN. In this case, if the call is eligible for Flexible
Call Forward No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for the dialed
DN, not the ringing DN.
Suppose that party A calls to busy party B, and party B has programmed
Hunting to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer forwards a No Answer
call at party C to the FDN associated with party B, the dialed DN.
After the call is forwarded, the MARP TN for the dialed DN controls the call
redirection for Flexible Call Forward No Answer.
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions
When a call redirected by Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,
Call Forward Busy, or Hunt terminates on an Intercept Computer (ICP)
position, a redirected message identification "50" is sent to the ICP
computer, when the call is answered.
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement
When a DID call to a station that is unrestricted from receiving DID calls
(UDI Class of Service) is forwarded to a UDI station due to Call Forward No
Answer, the call is not RDI-intercepted to the attendant. The dialed party
continues to ring. If the call has been forwarded to the attendant, the Call
Forward No Answer ICI lights up, and not the RDI-intercept ICI.
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide
A Listed Directory Number (LDN) that is assigned to an Incoming Call
Indicator (ICI) has a higher priority than a CFNA ICI. When a call is
forwarded to an LDN through Flexible DN, the call is presented on an LDN
ICI.
Meridian Mail Operator Revert
The Called Party ID can be passed along from the ACD Message Center
when Operator Revert is activated. The attendant can now activate the
Message Waiting key for the Called Party while active on the redirected call
by pressing the Message Indicator key.
For example, Party A calls Party B, which Call Forward No Answers to
Meridian Mail. Party A dials 0 and is transferred to a message center with
"live" agents. The agent receiving the call sees information for Party B along
with the information for Party A, the calling party.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 159
Multi-Party Operations
For Call Transfer with Ring No Answer (RGNA) if the user has selected an
option other than Standard, the optional treatment has priority over the
CFNA option selected in the LD 15. If the user has chosen the standard
option for RGNA, the call is treated as a normal CFNA call, and handled
according to the options selected for CFNA in LD 15. Once the call is routed
to a Night DN during recovery of a failed operation and the Night DN does
not answer, the call is treated according to the NFNA and FDN options
chosen for the Night DN. The Night DN can use flexible CFNA DN in two
levels. MPO misoperation does not change the operation of the DNFD timer
if one has been configured in LD 15.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime
The MARP TN always controls the call redirection for Call Forward No
Answer.
•If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as described
in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance of a DN
exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived from the TN of
the prime appearance telephone, even though it may not be at the end
of the list. A prime appearance is always the first TN used when the
system looks for call redirection instructions.
•If a DN appears on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian
1 proprietary telephones, the analog (500/2500 type) telephones are
listed in numerical TN order at the top of the list. Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A
service change to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone moves its TN to
the beginning of the list. A service change to a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone moves its TN to the end of the list.
•A SYSLOAD restructures the list back to numerical TN order with
analog (500/2500 type) telephones at the top and Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be
derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.
Network Intercom
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number
A Listed Directory Number (LDN) ICI has a higher priority than a Call
Forward No Answer ICI. When a call is forwarded to an LDN through
Flexible DN, the call is presented on an LDN ICI.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
160 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
Night Service enhancements
Any call which has been presented to the Attendant Overflow Position
cannot be removed from the console and re-queued by pressing the Make
Set Busy (MSB) key. The call will only be removed if the Attendant Forward
No Answer feature is active, and the Attendant Forward No Answer Timer
has timed out. In this case, the call is re-queued and the Attendant Overflow
Position is idled.
Periodic Pulse Metering
Metered calls transferred or extended from one station to another using the
Call Forward No Answer are charged against the last station at which the
call is answered as the controlling station releases. The last party to forward
a call onto a metered Periodic Pulse Metering trunk is charged.
Recall to Same Attendant
If the attendant does not answer a call and the Attendant Forward No
Answer feature is equipped, the console is forced into the Position Busy
state and the call routed to the first available idle attendant.
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX) is
activated if the call is forwarded to an outgoing external CO trunk with the
RANX feature active.
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward No Answer takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Ring Again on No Answer
If an unanswered call is forwarded to another station by Call Forward No
Answer, Ring Again on No Answer is applied to the originally dialed station.
Slow Answer Recall for Transferred External Trunks
If the ringing station to which the call has been transferred has Call Forward
No Answer active, the call is transferred to the call forward DN after the
specified number of ring cycles.
Total Redirection Count
If a call has attempted Call Forward No Answer and was extended by the
attendant, the call will not be intercepted when the Total Redirection Count
limit has been exceeded. The call will continue to ring the telephone until
recalled to the attendant.
If Overflow (OVF), Busy (BSY), or Source (SRCx) is configured as Intercept
Treatments, a call attempting Call Forward No Answer, that exceeds the
Total Redirection Count limit, will not be intercepted. Further redirections
are prohibited and the call continues to ring the current telephone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 161
Trunk Barring
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer." (page 161)
Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.
2. "LD 10 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 162)
Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1
proprietary telephones." (page 163)
Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
4. "LD 10 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on analog
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 163)
Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
5. "LD 11 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on Meridian
1 proprietary telephones." (page 163)
Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
LD 15 - Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: ATT_DATA Attendant console options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
162 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
Prompt Response Description
- ICI xx CFN Attendant Incoming Call Indicator for Call Forward No Answer,
where:
xx = key number (00-19).
TYPE RDR
- FNAD (HNT)
ATT
FDN
NO
Forward No Answer DID calls to the Hunt number.
Forward No Answer DID calls to the attendant.
Forward No Answer DID calls to the Flexible CFNA DN.
No Answer DID calls are not forwarded.
- FNAT (HNT)
ATT
FDN
NO
Forward No Answer external calls to the Hunt number.
Forward No Answer external calls to the attendant.
Forward No Answer external calls to the Flexible CFNA DN.
No answer external calls are not forwarded.
- FNAL (HNT)
ATT
FDN
NO
Forward No Answer local calls to the Hunt number.
Forward No Answer local calls to the attendant.
Forward No Answer local calls to the Flexible CFNA DN.
No Answer local calls are not forwarded.
- CFNA 1-(4)-15 Number of ringing cycles before No Answer calls are forwarded
(default is 4).
- CFN0 1-(4)-15 Number of normal rings for CFNA, Option 0.
CFNA has three ringing cycle options. Refer to the User
Selectable Call Redirection feature in this technical document
for more information.
- CFN1 1-(4)-15 Number of normal rings for CFNA, Option 1.
- CFN2 1-(4)-15 Number of normal rings for CFNA, Option 2.
LD 10 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (FND) FNA (Deny) allow Call Forward No Answer.
FTR FDN xxxx...x Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN Expansion
package is equipped, the DN can have up to 13 digits).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 163
LD 11 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FDN xxx...x Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN Expansion
package is equipped, the DN can have up to seven digits).
CLS (FND) FNA (Deny) allow Call Forward No Answer.
LD 10 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
HUNT xxxx Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the DN
Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to 10
digits).
CLS (FND) FNA (Deny) allow CFNA.
LD 11 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
164 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
Prompt Response Description
CLS (FND) FNA (Deny) allow CFNA.
HUNT xxxx Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the DN
Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to 10
digits).
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
165
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 165)
"Operating parameters" (page 165)
"Feature interactions" (page 165)
"Feature packaging" (page 166)
"Feature implementation" (page 166)
"Feature operation" (page 166)
Feature description
This feature enables telephones to have their Call Forward (CFW) status
saved as part of the data dump routine, thereby allowing the telephone to
have its CFW status reinstated following a SYSLOAD. Whether a telephone
has Call Forward activated following a SYSLOAD is dependant on the
response to the Call Forward Save (CFWS) prompt in LD 17, and the status
of the CFW as of the last successful data dump:
•If CFWS is set to NO (the default), no sets will have their CFW saved
and all sets will have CFW set to the default (deactivated) following
a SYSLOAD; or
•If CFWS is set to YES, all sets will have their CFW status saved and set
to the state they were in as of the last successful data dump following a
SYSLOAD.
Operating parameters
There are no operating parameters associated with this feature.
Feature interactions
Call Forward All Calls
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
166 Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD
Call Forward by Call Type
The Call Forward status of each telephone can be saved as part of the data
dump routine and reinstated following a SYSLOAD operation.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
LD 17 - Add or change Call Forward Save on data dump.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE PARM Systems Parameters
...
MSCL ...
- CFWS (NO) YES Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD.
Feature operation
If CFWS = YES, the Call Forward status of every set is saved at data dump.
Should a SYSLOAD occur, all sets are returned to the Call Forward state
that they were in as of the last successful data dump.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
167
Call Forward to Trunk Restriction
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 167)
"Operating parameters" (page 167)
"Feature interactions" (page 167)
"Feature packaging" (page 168)
"Feature implementation" (page 168)
"Feature operation" (page 168)
Feature description
The Call Forward to Trunk Restriction feature prevents stations from
forwarding calls from their station to a Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) trunk. This conforms with the regulatory requirements of certain
countries.
A second option of this feature allows calls to be forwarded to a PSTN trunk,
as in previous operation, while recording the internal DN of the originating
station (rather than the forwarding station) in the Call Detail Recording
(CDR) record.
Operating parameters
The CDR option can only be applied to calls originated by internal
telephones. Only the true originator’s DN is recorded.
Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.
CDP/UDP Calls
The CFW restriction will not apply if the call forward DN is a NARS DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
168 Call Forward to Trunk Restriction
Feature packaging
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131.
Feature implementation
LD 16 - Create or modify the data blocks for trunk routes.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
...
CFWR (NO) YES Call Forward Restriction (does not) does apply to the trunk route.
If NO is the response, the IDOP prompt follows.
- IDOP (NO) YES Identify Originating Party.
Responding YES modifies the trunk CDR for internal calls to
identify the originating party instead of the forwarding station. If
NO is the response, CDR is allowed to proceed as usual.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
169
Call Forward, Internal Calls
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 169)
"Operating parameters" (page 170)
"Feature interactions" (page 171)
"Feature packaging" (page 174)
"Feature implementation" (page 174)
"Feature operation" (page 175)
Feature description
The Internal Call Forward (Internal CFW) feature allows you to selectively
forward only internal calls to the Internal CFW DN.
Internal CFW is activated/deactivated on a per-telephone basis and is user
programmable when Internal CFW is activated. On a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone, the Internal CFW feature (ICF) key is the only access method.
On an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, Internal CFW can be accessed by
either dialing SPRE and the Internal CFW feature code (9914), or by the
appropriate Flexible Feature Codes (FFCs).
All internal calls terminating on the primary (or any single appearance)
DN of an Internal CFW active telephone are automatically forwarded to
the programmed Internal CFW DN (refer to the "Operating parameters"
(page 170) section for information on primary and secondary, and single
and multiple appearance DNs).
An internal call is defined by the Internal CFW feature as one of the following:
•an extension-to-extension call
•a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
170 Call Forward, Internal Calls
•an attendant-originated call
•a conference call
•a Group Call feature initiated call
•an incoming trunk call over a trunk route classified as internal (LD 16
where RCLS = INT), and
•an incoming Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk call using
private numbering.
Non-internal calls are not affected by the Internal CFW feature.
Operating parameters
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Internal CFW, but is not a
prerequisite for the Internal CFW feature. For example, if a telephone is
already CFW All Calls active, it will not be allowed to activate Internal CFW
at the same time. Internal CFW can only be activated if CFW All Calls is
explicitly deactivated.
Also, if Internal CFW is active when trying to activate CFW All Calls, Internal
CFW will automatically be deactivated.
Internal CFW operation is consistent with the CFW All Calls feature.
Therefore, when a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone activates Internal CFW,
the following DNs iscome Internal CFW activated:
•the primary DN (key 0), regardless of whether the DN is multiple
appearance or not, and
•all secondary DNs that are single appearance.
Consequently, if all the appearances of a multiple appearance DN are on
non-primary Meridian 1 proprietary telephone keys, calls to these DNs will
never receive Internal CFW treatment.
When an analog (500/2500 type) telephone activates Internal CFW,
regardless of whether the DN is multiple appearance or not, Internal CFW
becomes activated.
Internal CFW supports only the voice line on digital telephones that have
both voice and data options.
On 2317 telephones, the CFW programming screen (invoked by pressing
the CFW softkey) is not displayed when the ICF key is pressed. Instead, the
screen displays the previously programmed ICF number.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 171
If an Internal CFW call is rejected, a display message is given if the
telephone is digital and has a digit display module (this display message
is the same as that given to a failed CFW All Calls activation request).
Otherwise, overflow tone is given.
Internal CFW is not maintained through a SYSLOAD.
Internal CFW is not supported on Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephones.
Feature interactions
Attendant Administration
This feature does not support Internal CFW.
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override Internal CFW. If the
dialed DN of the set is idle, the DN can be blocked; if the DN is busy, busy
tone is heard.
Attendant Busy Verify
When the attendant is using this feature to call a telephone that is Internal
CFW active, the call will not receive Internal CFW treatment.
Attendant-Extended Calls
When the attendant extends a call on its SRC key to a telephone that is
Internal CFW active, the call on the SRC key will only receive Internal CFW
treatment if it is an internal call.
Attendant Night Service
When a call to the attendant is redirected to the Attendant Night DN that
is defined on an Internal CFW active telephone, the call will only receive
Internal CFW treatment if it is an internal call.
Attendant Overflow
If Attendant Overflow redirects an internal call to a telephone that is Internal
CFW active, the call will remain in the attendant queue, and will not receive
Internal CFW treatment.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward Reminder Tone
If Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed (CFRA) is in effect, whenever an
analog (500/2500 type) telephone with Internal CFW active goes off hook
to originate a call, the telephone sounds the reminder tone. The reminder
tone is either Call Forward Dial Tone (CFDT) or Call Forward/Message
Waiting Dial Tone (CFMW).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
172 Call Forward, Internal Calls
If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Denied (CFRD),
whenever an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with internal CFW active
goes off hook to originate a call, the telephone sounds either the normal dial
tone (DIAL) or the Message Waiting Dial Tone (MWDT).
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide
If a treated call is a transfer call and the transferring call is on the treating
node, the transferred party is considered. However, when the transferring
party is not on the treating node, the transferring party will determine the
treatment given.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Call Forward, Internal Calls is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override
Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Call Forward Internal Calls takes precedence over Call Redirection by Time
of Day.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Redirection
Internal CFW takes precedence over Call Waiting and Call Waiting
Redirection.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding set (for example, at
the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating set. In this case,
the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN (such as
*67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
If an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the outgoing trunk route on the
tandem node also has CCP provisioned.
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 173
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding set (for example, at
the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating set. In this case,
the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN (such as
*67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Camp-On
Internal CFW takes precedence over Camp-On.
China - Attendant Monitor
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,
idle DN treatment is given.
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the
forwarding or hunting call is answered.
Do Not Disturb
Hunting
Internal Call Forward take precedence over Do Not Disturb and Hunting.
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number
Voice calls directed to a dynamic voice/data Terminal Number are forwarded,
if either of these features are enabled. Data calls, to a dynamic voice/data
TN, are not forwarded.
Network Intercom
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)
Internal CFW cannot be enabled on a Phantom TN.
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX)
feature supports call forward to an outgoing external Central Office (CO)
trunk if the trunk has the RANX flag set and is located in a node with a
RAN trunk.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
174 Call Forward, Internal Calls
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.
Remote Call Forward
Remote CFW Activate (RCFA), Remote CFW Deactivate (RCFD), and
Remote CFW Verify (RCFV) FFCs can be used only to access CFW All
Calls; they cannot be used to access Internal CFW.
Trunk Barring
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.
Feature packaging
Internal CFW requires the following packages:
•Basic Call Processing (BASIC) package 1 (CFW package required but
does not have to be enabled)
•500 Set Dial Access to Features (SS5) package 73 for access to analog
(500/2500 type) telephones
•Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 to implement FFC
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 174)
Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Add/change CFW Internal Calls for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 175)
Add/change CFW Internal Calls for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
3. "LD 57 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones using a Flexible Feature Code." (page 175)
Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones using
a Flexible Feature Code.
LD 10 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 175
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
FTR ICF 4-(16)-23
XICF
Allow Internal CFW for the specified telephone and the maximum
forward DN length.
Remove Internal CFW from the telephone.
LD 11 - Add/change CFW Internal Calls for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
KEY xx ICF 4-(16)-23
<nnnn> Define an Internal CFW feature key for the telephone. The
command consists of:
xx = key number.
ICF = feature mnemonic.
4-23 = the maximum forward DN length.
nnnn = forward DN.
xx null Remove function/feature from a key.
LD 57 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones using a Flexible
Feature Code.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG OUT Add, change, or remove data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code.
CODE ICFA
ICFD
ICFV
Access Code for Internal CFW Activate.
Access Code for Internal CFW Deactivate.
Access Code for Internal CFW Verify.
ICFA xxxx Internal CFW Activate code.
ICFD xxxx Internal CFW Deactivate code.
ICFV xxxx Internal CFW Verify code.
Feature operation
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
To forward internal calls from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:
Step Action
1Press the ICF key.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
176 Call Forward, Internal Calls
2Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.
3Press the ICF key.
—End—
To cancel Internal CFW from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:
•Press the ICF key.
Analog (500/2500 type) telephone
To forward internal calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:
Step Action
1Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)
-or –
Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Activate (ICFA) FFC.
2Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.
—End—
To cancel Internal CFW from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:
•Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)
–or –
Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Deactivate (ICFD) FFC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
177
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and
Network Wide)
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 177)
"Operating parameters" (page 178)
"Feature interactions" (page 178)
"Feature packaging" (page 181)
"Feature implementation" (page 181)
"Feature operation" (page 185)
Feature description
Call Forward Remote (Attendant and Network wide) introduces the RCFW
feature across the Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN), while
also providing the attendant with RCFW capabilities. New ISDN FACILITY
messages are used to facilitate the RCFW feature operation in an MCDN.
The feature capabilities of the set-based (Flexible Feature Code activated)
network wide application of the RCFW feature match those of the current
standalone RCFW feature.
The attendant RCFW functionality is controlled by a new flexible Attendant
key (RFW). The attendant has the capability to view the current call forward
number and determine the call forward status of any station. It is also
possible for an attendant to activate or deactivate call forward for a particular
station. This functionality is applicable both local within the system and
network wide.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
178 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)
A new optional customer-based password is introduced for attendant RCFW
operation. This password is configured in LD 15 and is the only password
required for attendant RCFW operation. The station control password
previously used by the Flexible Feature Code (FFC) set-based RCFW is not
required when the attendant activates RCFW by pressing the RFW key.
Operating parameters
The network wide application of this feature is only applicable to nodes in an
MCDN environment. The nodes in the network must be system switches.
No other Central Office (CO) or circuit switched network type is supported
for this feature operation.
For set-based network operation of the Remote Call Forward feature, the
Station Control Password Length (SCPL) must be configured to be the same
length for all nodes in the network. Attempts to operate RCFW with different
SCPLs will result in overflow tone being presented to the user.
For network operation of the RCFW feature, the Private Network Identifier
(PNI) must be configured consistently for all nodes in the network.
The Attendant and Network Wide RCFW features use the existing RCFW
code to activate or deactivate call forward on stations. As such, all limitations
applicable to the local RCFW feature are applicable to the network and
attendant operation of the feature.
No new hardware is required for this feature.
Feature interactions
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Since ISDN BRI sets do not support Flexible Feature Codes, Remote Call
Forward cannot be activated from a BRI set.
Call Forward Activation from any Feature
Call Forward and Busy Status
There are no direct conflicts with either of these features and the RCFW
feature.
Call Forward Destination Deactivation
Remote Call Forward (RCFW) and Call Forward Destination Deactivation
(CFDD) provide the same functionality but are activated differently. CFDD
does not require the call forward station’s control password to deactivate the
call forward functionality on the call forward station.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 179
The call forwarded destination can use the Remote Call Forward
deactivation FFC as well as CFDD to deactivate the Call Forward All Calls
functionality on the call forward station.
Calling Party Privacy
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding set (that is, at the
tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating set. In this case, the
forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN (such, as *67
+ ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers
The RCFW feature only applies to the primary appearances of Multiple
Appearance DNs, and it is recommended that only one appearance of a
Multiple Appearance DN be configured as the prime DN.
For the case of multiple stations with the same prime DN and SCPW, the
RCFW operation will apply to the station that has the Multiple Appearance
Redirection Prime (MARP) assigned to it.
If none of the stations having the DN and SCPW assigned are configured
as the MARP TN for that DN, the RCFA and RCFD will apply to all stations
matching the DN and SCPW.
The attendant-based RCFW feature will only apply remote call forward
operation to the prime DN with MARP status. If the DN is not the prime DN
or does not have MARP status, overflow tone is received by the user.
Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO)
If the OPAO package is equipped, the octothorpe (#) is treated as any other
dialed digit and will not be used to signal end of dialing. The end of dialing
digits to be used are defined in LD 15.
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)
A Phantom TN does not physically exist. It is configured with no hardware
associated with it (that is, no telephones or line cards); however, all required
data blocks are configured.
The Phantom TN feature uses the RCFW feature to configure and
activate/deactivate the CFW DN on the Phantom TNs.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
180 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)
As the data blocks associated with Phantom TNs match those of standard
analog (500/2500 type) telephones configured within the system, the
operation of the RCFA and RCFD features on Phantom TNs is applicable
to the RCFW feature. As such, the set-based local and network RCFW
features can be used to configure and activate/deactivate the CFW DN
of Phantom TNs.
The Phantom TN feature uses a Default Call Forward (DCFW) DN. If call
forward is not active on the Phantom TN, all calls to the Phantom TN DN
are routed to the DCFW DN.
The Phantom TN feature modifies the set-based RCFW feature so that if
CFW is not active on the Phantom TN, and the CFW DN entered in the
RCFV operation matches the DCFW DN, confirmation tone is returned to
the RCFV user; if the CFW DN entered does not match the CDFW DN,
overflow is returned.
This change to the set-based RCFV operation is applicable to the network
RCFV operation. The operation of this feature network wide requires no
changes to the ISDN message passing for the set-based network RCFV
operation.
There is no Attendant RCFW operation which interacts with the DCFW
DN of Phantom TNs.
Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward
When Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward Allowed (PVCA) is defined in LD
15, a set within the same customer configuration cannot be call forwarded
to a set that is call forwarded back to it. Thus, CFW loops are prevented.
This feature applies when the CFW DN is changed by Remote Call Forward.
For network operation of the set- and attendant-based RCFW features,
entering an invalid CFW DN (under the rules of the PRCF feature) results in
overflow tone being returned and the CFW DN being ignored.
Traffic Measurements
The peg count, for the attendant RFW key, is generated on the first RFW
key press of the RCFW operation. While the RFW key may be pressed
multiple times during a single RCFW function, the peg count will only be
implemented once.
The RFW key peg count is included in the TFC005 feature key usage traffic
report.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 181
Feature packaging
The Attendant Remote Call Forward (ARFW) package 253 must be
provisioned to activate the Attendant-based RCFW feature.
For network operation the following software packages are required:
•Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) package 145
•Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) package 58
•Any other trunk or dialing plan packages, as required by the customer’s
configuration
The following are prerequisites for set-based RCFW:
•Optional Features (OPFT) package 1
•Flexible Feature Codes (FCC) package 139
•Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81
The following are prerequisites for implementation on analog (500/2500
type) telephones:
•Special Service for 2500 Sets (SS25) package 18
•500 Set Dial Access to Features (SS5) package 73
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Set the Station Control Password Length." (page 182)
Set the Station Control Password Length.
2. "LD 15 - Configure a Special Prefix Number (SPRE) for the customer."
(page 182)
Configure a Special Prefix Number (SPRE) for the customer.
3. "LD 57 - Define Remote Call Forward FFCs and set FFCT." (page 182)
Define Remote Call Forward FFCs and set FFCT.
4. "LD 10 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward."
(page 183)
Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.
5. "LD 11 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward."
(page 183)
Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.
6. "LD 12 - Configure the attendant console RFW key." (page 184)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
182 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)
Configure the attendant console RFW key.
7. "LD 15 - Configure the Attendant RCFW password." (page 184)
Configure the Attendant RCFW password.
Set-based configuration
LD 15 - Set the Station Control Password Length.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FFC Flexible Feature Code
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- SCPL 0-8 Station Control Password Length (must be consistent network
wide).
- FFCS YES Change end of dialing digits in FFC.
- - STRL 1-3 Number of digits to indicate FFC end of feature activation.
- - STRG (#) xxx One to three digits to indicate FFC end of a feature activation.
LD 15 - Configure a Special Prefix Number (SPRE) for the customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- SPRE xxx Special Prefix Number.
LD 57 - Define Remote Call Forward FFCs and set FFCT.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
FFCT (NO) YES Confirmation tone is (is not) to be given after an FFC.
CODE RCFA Remote Call Forward Activate.
RCFA xx xx = RCFA code.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 183
Prompt Response Description
CODE RCFD Remote Call Forward Deactivate.
RCFD xx xx = RCFD code.
CODE RCFV Remote Call Forward Verify.
RCFV xx xx = RCFV code.
LD 10 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
...
FTR CFW 4-(16)-23 Allow Call Forwarding and set the forwarding DN length.
LD 11 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
SCPW xxxxxxxx Station Control Password (0 to 8 digits, defined in LD 15).
KEY xx CFW 4-(16)-23 Assign Call Forward key (xx) and set the forwarding DN length.
Attendant-based configuration
A new Flexible Attendant feature key, RFW, has been added to this overlay.
Configuration of the key on the attendant console is required to allow
attendant access to the RCFW feature. Configuration of the RFW key is
only allowed if the ARFW package is equipped.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
184 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)
LD 12 - Configure the attendant console RFW key.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE 2250 Attendant console type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
...
KEY xx RFW Key number assigned as Attendant Remote Call Forward key.
LD 15 - Configure the Attendant RCFW password.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: ATT_DATA Attendant console options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
- IRFR (NO) YES Internal Remote Call Forward Password required.
An internal password is the password required to perform an
attendant RCFW operation within the same customer as the
attendant.
- - IRFP xxxxxxxx Internal RCFW Password (only prompted if the response to
IRFR is YES).
The password length is one to eight digits; the password is
numeric only.
- XRFR (NO) YES External Remote Call Forward Password required.
An external password is the password required to perform an
attendant RCFW operation on a different customer than the
attendant.
- XRFP xxxxxxxx External RCFW password (only prompted if the response to
XRFR is YES).
The password length is one to eight digits; the password is
numeric only.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 185
Feature operation
Network Wide Set-based Remote Call Forward
From the remote set dial:
Step Action
1FCC RCFA code.
2SCPW for the set to be forwarded.
3The complete DN of the set to be forwarded. This DN is the full
DN required to call the set to be forwarded from the user’s present
location.
Expected Result: Confirmation tone is delivered to the user.
From the remote set continue dialing:
4The CFW DN to be activated followed by the end of dial indicator (#).
Expected Result: Confirmation tone is delivered to the user.
Error Condition: If an error should occur during set-based RCFW,
the user is presented with an Overflow tone. To remove the error
condition, the user must release from the operation and begin again.
—End—
Attendant-based Remote Call Forward
From the attendant console, perform the following:
Procedure 1
Attendant-based Remote Call Forward
Step Action
1Press an idle loop key followed by the RFW key.
Expected Result: The RFW key is flashing and the Loop key is
steady lit.
2Dial the DN of the set to be forwarded.
Expected Result: If a password is required, the RFW key is winking,
and the console display shows "PWD –". If the console does not
support alpha characters, the display is blank.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
186 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)
If a password is not required, the console display will show the DN
of the set to be forwarded followed by the CFW DN stored on that
set. The RFW key lamp will display the status of the CFW DN. If the
RFW lamp is flashing, CFW is not active; if the RFW lamp is steady
lit, CFW is active. Proceed to Step 4.
3Dial the password followed by #.
Expected Result: The console display will show the DN of the
set to be forwarded followed by the CFW DN stored on that set.
The RFW key lamp will display the status of the CFW DN. If the
RFW lamp is flashing, CFW is not active; if the RFW lamp is steady
lit, CFW is active.
4The user can now enter a new CFW DN or press the RFW key to
activate or deactivate the stored CFW DN.
Expected Result: The console display will show the DN of the set to
be forwarded followed by the CFW DN. If the RFW lamp is flashing,
CFW is not active; if the RFW lamp is steady lit, CFW is active.
5When RCFW operation is in this state, the user has the following
three options:
•Press the Release or Release Source key to terminate RCFW
operation.
•Press the RFW key to reverse the CFW status.
•Enter a new CFW DN to begin the task of changing the CFW DN
programmed. The new CFW DN is not active until the RFW key
is pressed again.
Error Condition: If an error should occur during the attendant-based
RCFW, the user is presented with an Overflow tone. To remove
the error condition, the user must release from the operation and
begin again.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
187
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible
Feature Code
Contents The following are topics in this section:
"Feature description" (page 187)
"Operating parameters" (page 188)
"Feature interactions" (page 188)
"Feature packaging" (page 192)
"Feature implementation" (page 192)
"Feature operation" (page 194)
Feature description
Call Forward Override provides all telephone users (having a specific Class
of Service) and attendants with the ability to override Intercept Computer
Call Forward (ICP-CFW), Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,
Hunting and Make Set Busy by entering a Flexible Feature Code. In
order to use this feature, the originating set must have Call Forward Hunt
Allowed (CFHA) Class of Service. When this feature is enabled if override
is attempted, and the called party is idle, the set is rung regardless of any
diversion. If the dialed set is busy and has Hunt active, the calling party will
terminate on the wanted set and receive a busy indication. Sets without
Call Forward/Hunt Override denied (CFHD) Class of Service will not be
able to use the Call Forward/Hunt Override (CFHO) Via Flexible Feature
Code (FFC) feature.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC works in network environments with
system nodes and Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN) links.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
188 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Operating parameters
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be used in pre-dial mode
from a set (for instance, it must be dialed before dialing the DN that has Call
Forward All Calls, Intercept Call Forward, Call Forward No Answer, Internal
Call Forward, Hunt, or Make Set Busy active).
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be dialed from its own node
(that is, it must be dialed before any trunk access code).
On an ABCD set the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be
configured as a pre-dial FFC (ABCD sets are a type of German telephone).
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be used against extensions with
one of the following type: HOT/MCN/MCR/SCN/SCR/Basic Rate Interface
(BRI) DNs and analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
It is not possible for BRI extensions to dial a Call/Forward Hunt Override
FFC.
The Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature can only be used in
standalone and MCDN environments. If no MCDN links are involved, no
information about Call Forward/Hunt Override is passed on to other nodes.
To get the functionality of Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC in an MCDN
environment these enhancements must be integrated in the originating
node, terminating node and any intermediate nodes.
Feature interactions
Attendant Blocking of DN
Using Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC after activation of ABDN is not
allowed. Any attempt is canceled and overflow tone is returned.
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs are not overridden by Call
Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC. Any attempt is canceled and access denied
treatment is returned. Individual DNs on an ACD set are overridden by Call
Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC with the same limitations as for other sets.
Attendant Barge-in
Attendant Busy Verify
Attendant Break-in
Using Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC after activation of Barge-in,
Busy Verify or Break-in is not allowed. Attempts is canceled and overflow
tone is returned.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 189
Using post-dial Break-in after dialing the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC is
possible after encountering a busy set, if Break-in is enabled.
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
BRI sets are not supported; any attempt to dial Call Forward/Hunt Override
from a BRI set is ignored and access denied treatment is returned.
BRIT BRI TIE trunks in a Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN) are
supported.
Call Forward-older features
The following features are overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via
FFC feature, but there are no changes to the features themselves:
•Call Forward All Calls
•Call Forward No Answer
•Call Forward and Busy Status
•Call Forward, Internal Calls
•Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer
•Make Set Busy
•Secretarial Filtering
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC has precedence over Call Redirection
by Time of Day.
Call Transfer
A set can activate Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC when initiating a
transfer. If the transfer is completed while ringing, the Call Forward/Hunt
Override will still be active and passed on to the transferred party.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature has been activated. When a busy set with Call Waiting configured
is encountered, it will terminate on Call Waiting.
Call Waiting Redirection
There is no interaction with the Call Waiting treatment component of the
Call Waiting Redirection feature. However, Call Forward/Hunt Override Via
Flexible Feature Code does override CFNA, and thus the CFNA treatment
given to unanswered Call Waiting calls by the Call Waiting Redirection
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
190 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
feature is overridden by the CFHO feature. The incoming call will continue
to be given Call Waiting treatment as if the Call Waiting Redirection feature
is disabled when the CFHO feature is enabled by the calling party.
Camp-on
When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to Camp-on to the set, even if
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC has been activated.
Digital Private Network Signaling System One (DPNSS1)
DPNSS1 is only supported as an incoming trunk transferred to a MCDN
environment using Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC.
Direct Inward System Access
Direct Inward System Access is not supported. Any attempt to dial the
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC is ignored and access denied treatment
is returned.
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb is not overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via
FFC feature.
Flexible DN
External Flexible DN
It is not possible to store the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a Flexible
Directory Number or External Flexible Directory Number.
Group Call
It is not possible to use the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a Group
Call DN.
Group Hunt
Primary Line Directory Numbers (PLDNs) are not overridden by the Call
Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature. Any attempt is ignored and access
denied treatment will result.
Hunt This feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature. If a set activating Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC encounters
a busy set no hunt steps is performed; the call will terminate on the DN
and busy tone is returned.
Hunt DN/External Hunt DN
It is not possible to store the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a Hunt
or External Hunt DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 191
Idle Extension Notification
This feature can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature is activated. When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to place
an Idle Extension Notification request against the set.
Intercept Computer Call Forward
This feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature. The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC replaces the Intercept
Computer Override FFC.
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operations
Call Forward Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code can be dialed prior
to dialing the DN from the Intercept Computer.
Last Number Redial
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC and the dialed DN are stored under
Last Number Redial.
Multiple Appearance Multiple Call Arrangements (MCAs)
Multiple Appearance Single Call Arrangements (SCAs)
If the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC is used against an MCA (MCR/MCN)
or SCA (SCR/SCN) DN it will override any active forward and terminate on
all idle appearances. If all appearances are busy, busy treatment is returned.
Primary Line Directory Number (PLDN)
It is not possible to store the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a PLDN.
Phantom TN
If Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC is used against a Phantom TN, the
attempt is canceled and overflow tone is given.
Priority Override
It is possible to use Priority Override after using the Call Forward/Hunt
Override FFC and encountering a busy set.
Radio Paging
If Radio Paging is activated in a call where Call Forward/Hunt Override has
been used, the Call Forward/Hunt Override feature is deactivated.
Ring Again
Network Ring Again
Using the Ring Again feature is possible after using the Call Forward/Hunt
Override FFC and encountering a busy signal. Ring Again can be placed
against the set for which the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC was used
(that is, the set with CFW active should be rung by the Ring Again feature).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
192 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Ring Again No Answer
Network Ring Again No Answer
Using the Ring Again No Answer feature is possible after using the Call
Forward/Hunt Override FFC and encountering an idle set that does not
answer. Ring Again No Answer can be placed against the set for which the
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC was used (that is, the set should be rung
by the Ring Again No Answer feature).
Single Digit Access
It is not possible to store Call Forward/Hunt Override FFCs in a Single Digit
Access list.
Semi-automatic Camp-On
This feature can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature is activated. When encountering a busy set, it is possible to activate
Semi-automatic Camp-On, if it is applicable.
Speed Call
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC cannot be stored in a speed call list.
Feature packaging
In a standalone environment, the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) software
package 139 must be provisioned to activate this feature.
For network environments, Network Attendant Service (NAS) package 159
must also be provisioned. Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) package
56 must be restricted, as it is mutually exclusive with Network Attendant
Service.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 57 - Define FFC for Call Forward/Hunt Override." (page 193)
Define FFC for Call Forward/Hunt Override.
2. "LD 10 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature for analog (500/2500 type" (page 193)
Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for
analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature for Meridian 1 proprietar" (page 193)
Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 193
4. "LD 18 - Configure ABCD key for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature." (page 193)
Configure ABCD key for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature.
LD 57 - Define FFC for Call Forward/Hunt Override.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code.
...
CODE CFHO Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC.
CFHO nnnn Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC.
LD 10 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Type of telephone.
...
CLS (CFHD) CFHA Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC is (denied) or allowed.
LD 11 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
...
CLS (CFHD) CFHA Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC is (denied) or allowed.
LD 18 - Configure ABCD key for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE ABCD Modifying 16-button DTMF.
...
PRED YES Function table for pre-dial.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
194 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Prompt Response Description
A CFHO CFHO is assigned to key A.
B CFHO CFHO is assigned to key B.
C CFHO CFHO is assigned to key C.
D CFHO CFHO is assigned to key D.
Feature operation
Standalone
To activate the Call Forward/Hunt Override feature, the user dials the FFC
for Call Forward/Hunt Override and the DN of the wanted party. If the set is
idle, the set is rung regardless of any diversion (for example, Call Forward
All Calls, Intercept Call Forward, Call Forward No Answer, or Hunt) or Make
Set Busy on the set.
If the set(s) have displays, the display(s) are updated. If the display on the
originating set is updated when the call is answered, the Call Forward/Hunt
Override FFC will no longer be displayed.
If the dialed set is busy and Hunt is active, the calling party will terminate on
the wanted set and will receive busy indication.
If the dialed set is idle, but does not answer within the defined number of
ringing cycles for CFNA, the call is not forwarded (that is, it continues to ring).
If the dialed set is busy, the attendant can activate Camp-on, if Camp-on is
applicable. In addition, Ring Again can be placed against a set for which
Call Forward/Hunt Override was used and a busy set was encountered.
Network
The user gets the same functionality in a Meridian Customer Defined
Network (MCDN) as in standalone environments. The Call Forward/Hunt
Override information is transmitted from the originating node to the
terminating node using the Network Attendant Service (NAS) feature.
Activation of the service is call dependent; network-wide Call Forward/Hunt
Override is part of the NAS feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
195
Call Hold, Deluxe
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 195)
"Operating parameters" (page 196)
"Feature interactions" (page 196)
"Feature packaging" (page 197)
"Feature implementation" (page 197)
"Feature operation" (page 199)
Feature description
Deluxe Call Hold (DHLD) offers two options: Individual Hold and Exclusive
Hold.
Individual Hold indicates only those calls placed on hold on Meridian 1
proprietary telephones in a multiple appearance, single call arrangement.
When a user puts a call on hold, normal hold (winking) is indicated at the
user’s telephone only. A slow flicker is shown at all other telephones with
the multiple appearance.
With Exclusive Hold Class of Service, multiple appearances of a line remain
exclusive to the user’s telephone, even when the call is put on hold. While
hold (winking) is indicated at the telephone holding the call, the Directory
Number (DN) lamp is steadily lit on all other appearances of the held call.
The Privacy Release key must be used for access by other appearances of
the DN. Telephones with the Exclusive Hold capability can be held at any
single-line or Meridian digital telephone with an appearance.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
196 Call Hold, Deluxe
Operating parameters
Exclusive Hold has priority over Individual Hold. If a telephone is equipped
with Exclusive Hold, the other telephones receive the Exclusive, not
Individual, Hold indication.
Feature interactions
Attendant Administration
Deluxe Hold (DHLD) cannot be administered through the Attendant
Administration feature.
Attendant Break-In
The attendant cannot break in to a call on hold.
Camp-On, Forced
Override, Enhanced
Override, Priority
Neither held calls nor telephones with calls on hold can be camped on or
overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting
either Forced Camp-on or Priority Override.
Call Hold, Deluxe
When a call is retrieved from hold, the calling and called parties’ displays
reflect their individual DPD Class of Service options.
Calling Line Identification
In a trunk call for ISDN interfaces, if the originating party puts the call on
hold and then retrieves the call, the CLID at the originating party will reflect
the trunk access code and member number. This behavior is not applicable
to transferred call scenarios.
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
A Disconnect Timer applies to held calls on all trunks on the route. All
answered calls in the held state is disconnected if left in that state for an
extended period.
Call Party Name Display
When a call is put on hold, the holding telephone’s display clears. The held
telephone’s display does not change. When the telephone reestablishes the
call, the display returns the original DN and name.
Call Transfer
A consultation call can be placed on Hold.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 197
Called Party Control on Internal Calls
The calling party and called party can put either party on hold. However,
the calling party cannot release the call while the called party is on hold.
The called party is permitted to release the call.
Calling Party Privacy
When a user takes an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator off of
hold, no Calling Party Number or Name is displayed on the set.
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion
Executive Intrusion is denied if the requested party is put on hold by another
station at the same node. This restriction also applies to the unrequested
party if the unrequested party is located at the same node as the requested
party (standalone) or if the requested party and the unrequested party are
linked using DPNSS1.
Mixed DNs
If a call is put on Exclusive Hold in a mixed Directory Number (DN) group,
other telephones with an appearance of the DN that go off hook are not
included in the call, nor do they receive any tone. Privacy Release cannot
be used with exclusively held calls in a mixed-appearance DN group.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number
If two or more proprietary sets of the same Directory Number are in
conference due to privacy release or privacy override, then only one set can
hold the call at a given time.
Music, Enhanced
A caller placed on Hold by a member of a multiple appearance group
receives Music regardless of whether the call is on Hold or Exclusive Hold.
Predictive Dialing
If an established call is put on hold by the set initiating the Fast Transfer, the
switch will not be able to transfer the call. The switch can only transfer a
call if it is in the established state.
Feature packaging
Deluxe Hold (DHLD) package 71 has no feature package dependencies.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer." (page 198)
Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
198 Call Hold, Deluxe
2. "LD 10 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones" (page 198)
Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones" (page 198)
Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones
LD 15 - Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT (IHD) IHA (Disable) enable Individual Hold.
LD 10 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for analog (500/2500 type) telephones
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (XHD) XHA (Disable) enable Exclusive Hold.
LD 11 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (XHD) XHA (Disable) enable Exclusive Hold.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 199
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
200 Call Hold, Deluxe
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
201
Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 201)
"Operating parameters" (page 202)
"Feature interactions" (page 203)
"Feature packaging" (page 205)
"Feature implementation" (page 205)
"Feature operation" (page 207)
Feature description
Individual Hold Enhancement (IHE) expands the functionality of the
Individual Hold feature. This enhancement is part of Deluxe Call Hold.
Individual Hold Enhancement provides, in a single line Multiple Appearance
Directory Number (MADN) environment, the following options:
•Lamp Option
•Release Option
With the Lamp Option allowed (HLPA), if one of the single line MADNs is
on hold, all other appearances of the same single line MADN now remain
steadily lit.
With the Lamp Option denied (HLPD), the existing Individual Hold
functionality is retained.
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), if the user presses the Hold key
while another member of the same single line MADN is still active on the
call, the set that put the call on hold is now disconnected from the call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
202 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), if the user is the only active
member of the single line MADN on the call, pressing the hold key puts the
call on hold as per the existing operation.
With the Release Option denied (HRLD), the existing Individual Hold
functionality is retained.
"Lamp Status of a single line MADN with Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release
(HRLA/HRLD) Options configured" (page 202) shows the lamp status of a
single line MADN when the Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release (HRLA/HRLD)
Options are configured in LD 15.
Lamp Status of a single line MADN with Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release (HRLA/HRLD) Options
configured
OPT in LD 15 Held or Disconnected
Appearance Other Appearances
IHA, HLPD, HRLD (See Note 1) wink (held appearance) flicker
IHA, HLPA, HRLD wink (held appearance) steadily lit
IHA, HLPD, HRLA (See Note 2) steadily lit (disconnected
appearance) steadily lit
IHA, HLPD, HRLA (See Note 3) wink (held appearance) flicker
IHA, HLPA, HRLA (See Note 2) steadily lit (disconnected
appearance) steadily lit
IHA, HLPA, HRLA (See Note 3) wink (held appearance) steadily lit
In this situation, the existing functionality of Individual Hold is retained.
In this situation, a single line MADN member is disconnected from the active call. Another member
of the same single line MADN remains active on the call.
In this situation, a single line MADN member places a call on hold. No other member of the same
single line MADN is active on the call.
Operating parameters
For Individual Hold Enhancement to be activated, Individual Hold Allowed
(IHA) and the Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release (HRLA/HRLD) Options
must be defined in the Customer Data Block. Also, a single line MADN
must be defined for the sets.
The Lamp Option applies to Meridian 1 proprietary sets with a call on hold
and to analog (500/2500 type) sets which perform the Permanent Hold
operation.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 203
If the single line MADN member is an analog (500/2500 type) set, the lamp
option only applies when Permanent Hold is initiated from that set.
The Release Option only applies when two or more parties with the same
single line MADN are active in a conference call.
The Release Option (HRLA/HRLD) only applies to Meridian 1 proprietary
sets with a Hold key or to Meridian 1 proprietary sets with Automatic Hold
enabled (CLS = AHA) in LD 11.
For Meridian 1 proprietary sets with the Release Option allowed (HRLA),
the Conference (A03/A06) and Transfer (TRN) keys are ignored if more than
one single line MADN is active on a Conference call.
For analog (500/2500 type) sets, Transfer, Conference, and Permanent Hold
work as per the existing operation.
Feature interactions
Automatic Call Distribution
When an Individual Directory Number (IDN) on an Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) set is configured as a single line MADN, both the Lamp
and Release Options of the Individual Hold Enhancement feature are
applicable to that IDN.
Automatic Hold
When a proprietary set has Automatic Hold allowed and more than one
single line MADN (SCR/SCN/HOT/PVR/PVN) is active on a conference call,
if the user presses the hold key or presses the active single line MADN,
the following occurs:
•Without the Release Option enabled, the active call on the single line
MADN is put on hold. That is, the lamp on the single line MADN flashes
as per the existing operation.
•With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), the active call on the single
line MADN is disconnected.
If only one single line MADN is active on a conference call, the existing
operation is retained.
Multi-Party Operations
Call Join
If a conference is set up using Call Join, Individual Hold Enhancement still
functions.
When the Lamp Option is allowed (HLPA) and the user presses the Hold
key on an active single line MADN in Call Join operation, the lamps of all
other appearances of the same single line MADN are steadily lit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
204 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement
When the Release Option is allowed (HRLA) and the user presses the Hold
key on an active single line MADN in order to enlarge a conference using
the Call Join feature, the following occurs:
•The call is disconnected if another member of the same single line
MADN is still active on the call.
•The call is placed on hold if the active single line MADN is the only active
member of the single line MADN on the call.
Conference (A03/A06, C6A)
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), the Conference key is ignored on
the Meridian 1 proprietary set, when more than one Multiple Appearance
Directory Number (MADN) is active in the conference.
Exclusive Hold
The Exclusive Hold feature takes precedence over the Lamp Option of the
Individual Hold Enhancement feature. The lamps on all other single line
appearances of the MADN are steadily lit while the call is held on one of the
single line MADNs. When the Lamp Option is enabled (HLPA), the existing
Exclusive Hold functionality is retained.
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA) and more than one single line
MADN active in a conference, the call is disconnected when the hold key
is pressed.
Permanent Hold on an analog (500/2500 type) set
When an analog (500/2500 type) set puts a call on Permanent Hold, the
lamp status remains steadily lit on all other members of the same single line
MADN if the customer has the Lamp Option allowed.
With the Release Option configured, if an analog (500/2500 type) set with
the same single line MADN initiates Permanent Hold, the call is not dropped
even if other appearances are active on this call. This is as per the existing
functionality.
Switch Hook Flash
When a single line MADN member uses Switch Hook Flash to place a call
on hold, all other appearances of the same single line MADN remain lit as
per the existing operation.
When an analog (500/2500 type) set with the same single line MADN
initiates hold by Switch Hook Flash, the existing functionality is retained.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 205
Transfer (TRN)
For Meridian 1 proprietary sets with the Release Option allowed (HRLA),
the transfer feature is disabled on the single line MADN, while more than
one appearance is active in the conference.
For analog (500/2500 type) sets, transfers work as per the existing operation.
Feature packaging
Individual Hold Enhancement requires Deluxe Call Hold (DHLD) package
71.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure Individual Hold Allowed, the Individual Hold Lamp
Option and the Individual Hold R" (page 205)
Configure Individual Hold Allowed, the Individual Hold Lamp Option and
the Individual Hold Release Option in the Customer Data Block.
2. "LD 10 - Enable Call Transfer Allowed (XFA), Enhanced Hot Line Denied
(EHTD), Exclusive Hold Denied (" (page 206)
Enable Call Transfer Allowed (XFA), Enhanced Hot Line Denied (EHTD),
Exclusive Hold Denied (XHD), and Permanent Hold (PHD) for analog
telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Enable Privacy Override Allowed (POA) and Exclusive Hold
Denied (XHD) for Meridian proprieta" (page 206)
Enable Privacy Override Allowed (POA) and Exclusive Hold Denied
(XHD) for Meridian proprietary telephones.
LD 15 - Configure Individual Hold Allowed, the Individual Hold Lamp Option and the Individual
Hold Release Option in the Customer Data Block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options data.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
OPT IHA Individual Hold Allowed.
HLPA Individual Hold Lamp Option Allowed.
HLPD = Individual Hold Lamp Option Denied (default).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
206 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement
Prompt Response Description
HRLA Individual Hold Release Option Allowed.
HRLD = Individual Hold Release Option Denied (default).
...
LD 10 - Enable Call Transfer Allowed (XFA), Enhanced Hot Line Denied (EHTD), Exclusive Hold
Denied (XHD), and Permanent Hold (PHD) for analog telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Analog (500/2500 type) set data block.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
...
CLS XFA
EHTD
XHD
Call Transfer Allowed.
Enhanced Hot Line Denied.
Exclusive Hold Denied.
...
FTR PHD Permanent Hold.
...
LD 11 - Enable Privacy Override Allowed (POA) and Exclusive Hold Denied (XHD) for Meridian
proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
...
CLS POA
XHD Privacy Override Allowed.
Exclusive Hold Denied.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 207
Prompt Response Description
...
KEY xx SCR yyyy Single Call Ringing key, where:
xx = key number
SCR = Single Call Ringing
yyyy = DN
KEY may also be defined as HOT (Two-way), PVN, PVR, or
SCN.
Feature operation
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), the user of a single line MADN
disconnects from an active call by
•pressing the release key; or
•pressing the hold key to disconnect from the active call while another
member of the same single line MADN is still active on the call.
However, if a user is the only active member of the single line MADN on the
call with the Release Option allowed (HRLA), pressing the hold key puts the
call on hold as per the existing operation.
With the Release Option denied (HRLD), the existing functionality is
retained. Therefore, the user must press the release key to disconnect from
the active call. When the hold key is pressed, the call is not released.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
208 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
209
Call Hold, Permanent
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 209)
"Operating parameters" (page 209)
"Feature interactions" (page 210)
"Feature packaging" (page 211)
"Feature implementation" (page 212)
"Feature operation" (page 212)
Feature description
Permanent Hold holds an active call on a 2500 telephone without attendant
assistance. Calls cannot be originated or received while in the Permanent
Hold mode. Incoming calls receive a busy signal if Hunting is not defined for
the called telephone.
If the telephone user goes on-hook after activating Permanent Hold, the
telephone periodically receives a one-second ring burst as a reminder that
the call is on hold. This interval is defined at the customer level.
Operating parameters
Permanent Hold is allowed only when a call is active, and if the Class
of Service allows transfer.
If Busy Verify is attempted on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold,
busy tone is received.
Override cannot be used on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold.
Permanent Hold cannot be activated during a Conference call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
210 Call Hold, Permanent
Two parties, connected trunk-to-trunk, can activate Permanent Hold at the
same time if they both have the feature defined. After being placed on
Permanent Hold, the second party can flash the switchhook and dial #4 to
hold the call. After flashing the switchhook, any dialing sequence other than
the access code results in overflow tone.
Permanent Hold is not supported on station-to-station calls.
If the telephone activating Permanent Hold is part of a mixed arrangement
with another 2500, or Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, the following events
occur:
•If a different telephone with the same DN goes off hook, that telephone
connects to the held party.
•When Permanent Hold is activated, the DN lamp on the Meridian 1
proprietary telephone remains steadily lit.
If the telephone activating Permanent Hold goes off hook, it is automatically
reconnected to the held call.
If the held party disconnects, the hold reminder ring stops.
Feature interactions
Attendant Break-In
The attendant cannot break in to a call on hold.
Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH)
If Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) is enabled in LD 15, the Audible
Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) timer takes precedence over the Permanent
Hold timer.
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall
Call Hold Permanent is activated when the attendant presses the HOLD
key, then the Release (RLS) key, when extending a call; then the call is
held permanently on the Loop key. If the attendant retrieves the original
call on hold by pressing the Loop key, the recall timer is stopped. If the
attendant then presses the RLS key, the call is extended, and the recall
timer is restarted.
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
A Disconnect Timer applies to held calls on all trunks on the route. All
answered calls in the held state are disconnected if left in that state for
an extended period.
Calling Party Privacy
When a user answers a held incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator,
no Calling Party Number or Name are displayed on the telephone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature packaging 211
Camp-On, Forced
Override, Enhanced
Override, Priority
Neither held calls nor telephones with calls on hold can be camped on or
overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting
either Forced Camp-on or Priority Override.
China - Attendant Monitor
Monitoring is not affected if any caller involved in the monitor’s call activates
hold, except for the case of a simple call. For a monitored simple call,
activating hold deactivates monitoring. In all cases, activation of music on
hold deactivates monitoring.
An attendant monitoring a call cannot put the monitored DN on hold. The
attendant pressing the hold key has no effect while monitoring is enabled.
DECT and DCS telephones
With CS 1000 Release 4.5 and later, you cannot activate Permanent Hold
(PHD) from DECT and DCS telephones. Users hear overflow tone if they
attempt to activate the feature.
You cannot configure the PHD feature on these telephones as of CS 1000
Release 4.5 in LD 10.
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion
Executive Intrusion is denied if the requested party is put on hold by another
station at the same node. This restriction also applies to the unrequested
party, if the unrequested party is located at the same node as the requested
party (standalone), or if the requested party and the unrequested party
are linked using DPNSS1.
Predictive Dialing
If an established call is put on hold by the set initiating the Fast Transfer,
the switch cannot transfer the call. The switch can only transfer a call if
the call is in the established state.
PrivacyA call placed on Permanent Hold no longer has Privacy. Privacy is reinstated
when the call is removed from Permanent Hold.
Feature packaging
Special Service for 2500 Sets (SS25) package 18 includes Permanent Hold,
and has no feature package dependencies.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
212 Call Hold, Permanent
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold reminder ring timer for the
customer." (page 212)
Enable/disable Permanent Hold reminder ring timer for the customer.
2. "LD 10 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones." (page
212)
Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones.
LD 15 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold reminder ring timer for the customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: TIM Timers.
CUST Customer number.
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- PHDT 1-(30)-63 Permanent Hold reminder ring timing in two-second increments
(that is, 30 = 60 seconds).
LD 10 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number.
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS XFA Allow transfer.
FTR PHD Enable Permanent Hold.
Feature operation
To place a call on hold, follow these steps:
•While on an active call, flash the switchhook, or press the Link key.
•Dial #4, or the Flexible Feature Code (FFC), if enabled.
•Hang up.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 213
The Permanent Hold timer begins.
To retrieve a held call, lift the handset.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
214 Call Hold, Permanent
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
215
Call Park
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 215)
"Operating parameters" (page 216)
"Feature interactions" (page 217)
"Feature packaging" (page 223)
"Feature implementation" (page 223)
"Feature operation" (page 225)
Feature description
Call Park (CPRK) places a call in a parked state, similar to hold, where it
can be retrieved by any attendant console or telephone. A parked call must
have an access ID, also known as a Park DN. This is done by parking the
call on a System Park DN or on any telephone Directory Number (DN) in
the system. A parked call does not occupy a DN, nor is there a lamp to
indicate its presence.
Up to 50 System Park DNs are available per customer. There is no limit to
the number of DNs that can be used as a Call Park access ID. However,
only one call at a time can be parked against any particular telephone or
System Park DN.
In addition, the system can offer a default access ID. If System Call Park is
defined, the default access ID for attendant consoles and Meridian Digital
Telephones is the next available System Park DN.
If System Park DNs are not defined for the customer, the default access ID
is the DN of the telephone where the call was parked. An attendant must
press the Park key and enter a DN if System Park DNs are not defined.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
216 Call Park
Park the call, then page the person called. The person called then picks
up the call directly or through the attendant. Call Park also enables the
telephone that originally receives the call to park it so that another telephone
can retrieve it later. The telephone placing the call in Park is free to make
or answer other calls.
Calls can be parked from telephones or attendant consoles with the Park
key/lamp pair or Special Prefix (SPRE) code. Parked calls not retrieved
within a specified time (30 to 240 seconds) are recalled to the telephone
that parked it. Music for parked calls can be provided if Music (MUS)
package 44 is installed.
If a call is parked on a System Park DN, it is recalled to the attendant who
parked it if the parking attendant is idle. If the parking attendant is busy, the
call is presented to any idle attendant.
If a call is parked on a telephone DN, the recall is placed in the attendant
queue and presented to any available attendant. In all cases, parked calls
recalled to the attendant appear on the Recall Incoming Call Identification
(ICI) key, if defined.
The Park DN of the most recently parked call can be displayed again on
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones equipped with displays, a Park key, and a
Display key. This is done by pressing the Display key, then the Park key.
The attendant can display the last call parked by pressing the Park key
when no loop key is active.
Operating parameters
Call Park is not available for calls on Dial Intercom keys or for calls on
analog (500/2500 type) telephones designated as Dial Intercom telephones.
Call Park is not permitted when Privacy Release or Conference is active.
Calls parked from Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and analog (500/2500
type) telephones are recalled to the telephone that parked the call.
When a Multiple Appearance Single Call telephone mix (the same DN
appears on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, and single-line telephones)
is parked, other appearances are not automatically bridged to the parked
call when going off hook. The call can be retrieved by another Multiple
Appearance DN (MADN) telephone only by dialing the Call Park retrieval
code and the DN.
Remote access (for example, Centralized Attendant Service or Direct
Inward System Access) for parked parties is not permitted.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 217
Private lines, attendant DNs, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), and Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) DNs are not valid park numbers.
Trunks without disconnect supervision cannot be parked.
Parked calls are not retained during initialization or SYSLOAD.
Parked calls cannot be accessed with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
In-calls key. If parked access from Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
positions is required, a DN key must be provided.
A parked call recall cannot be placed on hold by the attendant.
A call transferred to the attendant by the Conference key on a Meridian 1
proprietary telephone cannot be parked by the attendant. A call transferred
to the attendant by the Transfer key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
can be parked by the attendant.
Feature interactions
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1
If Party Z parks the call initiated by Party X (an external caller), then the
AC15 Recall: Transfer cannot be used to call Party Y. Party Z can neither
park, selectively, one member of a split trunk nor park a whole split trunk.
This avoids a recall to an attendant on the recall originating node that would
not be able to send a recall to toggle from one party to another.
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar
Remote access to call park from AC15 TIE trunks is not permitted. It is not
possible to park an AC15 trunk if it has a call on hold. When an AC15 trunk
is parked, it is not allowed to initiate a consultation call.
Access Restrictions
A call can be parked on any DN, regardless of its Class of Service. Access
to a parked call is governed by the same Class of Service limitations for
normal trunk-to-telephone call processing. Table 1 "Accessing telephone
Class of Service" (page 217) details the limitations. These limitations can
be overridden with the Authorization Code.
Table 1
Accessing telephone Class of Service
Accessing telephone Class of Service
Parked call type FRE FR1 FR2
Telephone allowed allowed allowed
CO/FX/WATS denied denied denied
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
218 Call Park
Accessing telephone Class of Service
Parked call type FRE FR1 FR2
DID Trunk denied denied denied
TIE trunk allowed allowed denied
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
When a set parks a call charged with Advice of Charge, the calling party
continues to be charged until the call is answered by another set.
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
It is not possible to park an Attendant Blocking of DN call. If a Call Park call
recalls to a blocked DN, the recall is treated as if the DN is in a ringing state.
Attendant Break-In
The attendant cannot break in to a parked call.
Automatic Call Distribution
Calls parked by Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents are recalled to the
ACD DN queue and presented to any available agent.
Automatic Redial
When an Automatic Redial (ARDL) call is not accepted by the calling party,
the Call Park (PRK) key is ignored.
Attendant Consoles
The Call Park access code and the Park DN are displayed on the M2250
attendant console for parked call recalls.
Autodial
Speed Call
Autodial and Speed Calls can be programmed to park calls or access
parked calls.
Automatic Timed Reminders
A Call Park recall to an attendant appears on the Recall Incoming Call
Indicator.
Busy Lamp Field
A Busy Lamp Field can be equipped to display the status of System Park
DNs.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 219
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
Call Detail Recording (CDR) records for Call Park are similar to the start
and end records generated when a call is transferred or terminated. When a
call is parked, a Call Detail Recording (CDR) start record is generated if one
has not already been generated by another feature. A CDR record is not
generated when the parked call is accessed. A CDR end record is generated
when the trunk call is terminated or when a parked call disconnects.
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls
There is no interaction with Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming
Calls, as there is no "N" record generated in a Call Park scenario.
Call Forward
A recalled parked call to telephones with Call Forward, Call Forward Busy,
or Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) is not forwarded.
Call Page Network Wide
A station set or attendant console that parks an external Call Page Network
Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an external
PAGENET controlled call is blocked.
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
A 14-second Disconnect Timer applies to parked calls on all trunks on the
route. All answered calls in the parked state is disconnected if left in that
state for an extended period.
Call Party Name Display
Upon valid operation of the Park key, or dial-access if used, Call Party Name
Display (CPND) shows the SPRE code and the Park Access ID. Because the
Park Access Code is displayed, no CPND name is displayed. The only time
that the digit display shows the actual DN of the parked party is when the
parked party has been retrieved, put on hold, and then retrieved from hold.
Call Pickup
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user on a call can pick up a call by
parking the existing call, then activating the Call Pickup feature.
Call Pickup Network Wide
The Call Pickup Network Wide feature cannot be used to pick up parked
calls. A recall of a parked call can be picked up, in which case the call is
un-parked and answered by the requesting party.
Call Transfer
Conference
A parked call can be accessed after Call Transfer or Conference is activated.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
220 Call Park
Call Waiting
A recall of a parked call is not presented in the Call Waiting mode. If an
internal telephone is in the parked state, Call Waiting to that telephone
is not provided.
Centralized Attendant Service
Call Park is limited to the local system for systems equipped with Centralized
Attendant Service. Call Park cannot be accessed from release-link trunks.
China - Attendant Monitor
If a DN being monitored becomes parked by another party, the Attendant
Monitor feature is deactivated.
Conference
A parked call can be accessed after Conference is activated
Console Presentation Group Level Services
If the attendant who parked a call on the System Park DN is busy when
that call is recalled and the parking attendant does not belong to the same
Console Presentation Group (CPG) specified for the tenant of the calling
station, the parked call is presented to an idle attendant in the same CPG
specified for the calling station. If no attendant in that CPG is available to
receive the recall, the parked call is queued until one of the attendants
in the CPG becomes idle.
Tenant access checking between the set (A) who picks up a parked call and
the party (B) who parked the call, is enforced as follows:
•If B is a set, tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between A and B.
•If B is an attendant, A and B must belong to the same CPG for
tenant-to-tenant access.
•If access is denied, set A (who intends to pick up the access-denied
parked call) receives a blocking tone.
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion
Attempts to intrude into a parked call receive Executive Intrusion Denied
treatment.
Display of Calling Party Denied
When the Call Park timer expires on a parked call, a set’s display reflects the
Directory Number the call is parked against. The display does not include
the name and DN of the calling party. When a parked call is retrieved by
another set, display information is based on the DPD Class of Service of
the individual sets.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 221
Do Not Disturb
Calls can be parked on telephone DNs that are in the Do Not Disturb mode
(DND). Telephones in the DND mode can park a call or access a parked
call. Recall of a parked call to a DND telephone is recalled to the attendant.
Generic XFCOT Software Support
Call Park feature allows an attendant or telephone user to place a call in
parked state (connected to a parked DN) where it can be retrieved by
any attendant console or station set. If the call is not retrieved after a
customer-defined time, the call is recalled to the telephone user who parked
it.
Call Park is allowed on disconnect-supervised or unsupervised IPE
loopstart Central Office trunks. If a caller on an unsupervised loopstart
trunk disconnects while the call is in parked state is detected when the
parked call is recalled or answered.
Caller disconnection during park state is detected by a disconnect
supervised loopstart trunk on an XFCOT card. The disconnected caller is
then dropped from the parked DN.
Group Call
Call Park cannot be applied on a Group Call.
Held Call Clearing
A call put on hold during a Call Park is not cleared by an on-hook action
on that set.
Hot Line
Analog (500/2500 type) Hot Line telephones with EHTA and XFA Class of
Service are allowed to park calls using the established Call Park procedures.
Once a call is parked on an analog (500/2500 type) Hot Line telephone
and the telephone is placed on hook, it cannot be unparked. Parked calls
will recall to the parking telephone after the Call Park timeout. Two-way
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone Hot Line stations that are equipped with a
Call Park key/lamp pair are allowed to park calls in the normal fashion. As
with analog (500/2500 type) telephones, a call parked from a Hot Line key
cannot be picked up using the same key.
In-Band Automatic Number Identification
If an agent parks an In-Band ANI call and it times out and recalls the agent,
the ANI number is not displayed.
INIT ACD Queue Call Restore
Parked calls are restored by ACDR as new incoming calls to the ACD DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
222 Call Park
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operation
An attendant can park a call in the following manner:
•Press the Call Park key on the attendant console.
•Dial a DN from the Intercept Computer.
Terminate Call Park operation by pressing the Release key.
Make Set Busy
Recall of a parked call to a telephone in the Make Set Busy mode is
intercepted by the attendant.
Multi-Tenant Service
If the attendant who parked a call on the System Park DN is busy when
that call is recalled and the parking attendant does not belong to the same
Console Presentation Group (CPG) specified for the tenant of the calling
station, the parked call is presented to an idle attendant in the same CPG
specified for the calling station. If no attendant in that CPG is available to
receive the recall, the parked call is queued until one of the attendants
in the CPG becomes idle.
Tenant access checking between the set (A) who picks up a parked call and
the party (B) who parked the call, is enforced as follows:
•If B is a set, tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between A and B.
•If B is an attendant, A and B must belong to the same CPG for
tenant-to-tenant access.
•If access is denied, set A (who intends to pick up the access-denied
parked call) receives a blocking tone.
Music When a call is parked, music is not heard. When a trunk is parked, music
plays if music is enabled for the route.
Network Intercom
Private Line Service
Hot Type I and Private Line Service calls cannot be parked.
Periodic Pulse Metering
When a metered call is parked from one station to another, the controlling
station is charged until the call is answered.
Privacy Override
Calls in a Privacy Override conference state cannot be parked.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 223
Privacy Release
When a call from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone is parked, that
telephone cannot activate Privacy Release. For example, Party A calls
Party B. Party B parks the call. Party A cannot activate Privacy Release.
Recall After Parking
This enhancement to Call Park causes a parked call to be recalled to the
attendant or night DN if the attendant is in Night Service, rather than to the
parking telephone, if not answered within a customer-defined period of time
(two-minute maximum). The call may be external or internal.
The recall to the attendant appears on the Recall ICI key. If the attendant is
in Night Service, the recall occurs to the night DN. If the night DN is busy,
the call is queued if it is an external call.
Traffic measurements
TFC007 is included for Call Park. It provides traffic measurements for the
following:
•system park usage
•system park overflow
•telephone park usage
•park access
•park recall
•average waiting time
Feature packaging
Call Park (CPRK) is package 33 and has no feature package dependencies.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable or disable Call Park." (page 224)
Enable or disable Call Park.
2. "LD 50 - Add/change or print Call Park. This overlay must be defined for
Call Park operation." (page 224)
Add/change or print Call Park. This overlay must be defined for Call
Park operation.
3. "LD 10 - Allow or deny access to Call Park for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 224)
Allow or deny access to Call Park for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
224 Call Park
4. "LD 11 - Add or change a Call Park key on Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 225)
Add or change a Call Park key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
5. "LD 12 - Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles." (page
225)
Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles.
LD 15 - Enable or disable Call Park.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT CPA Enable Call Park.
LD 50 - Add/change or print Call Park. This overlay must be defined for Call Park operation.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE CPK Call Park data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CPTM 30-(45)-240
30-(45)-480 Call Park Timer (in seconds).
Call Park recall time (in seconds) if CPRK package 33 is
equipped.
The amount of time a call is held in the parked state before
recalling the parking set or the attendant.
SPDN (0)-50 xxxx Number of contiguous System Park DNs and the first System
Park DN. The default 0 (zero) disables System Park DN
capability, but allows Telephone Park DNs.
If the DN Expansion package is equipped, the System Park DN
can have up to seven digits.
MURT 0-511
0-127
Music route number for parked calls.
For Large Systems
For Small Systems
LD 10 - Allow or deny access to Call Park for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 225
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS XFA Allow access to Call Park.
LD 11 - Add or change a Call Park key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
KEY xx PRK Add a Call Park key (key number must be 17 for the M2317).
LD 12 - Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE 2250 Attendant console type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
KEY xx PRK Add a Call Park key (key number can be 00-19 on the M2250).
Feature operation
To park a call with the Park key:
Step Action
1Press Park twice.
If there is a System Park extension, the call is parked on it.
Otherwise, it is parked on your extension.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
226 Call Park
—End—
To park a call on an extension other than the System Park extension, follow
these steps:
Step Action
1Press Park.
2Enter the extension number.
3Press Park again.
—End—
To park a call using SPRE codes, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press Transfer or Conference.
2Dial SPRE 71.
You can dial an extension number to park the call, or you can use
the System Park extension, chosen automatically. It shows on your
telephone’s display, if equipped.
3Press Transfer or Conference again.
—End—
To retrieve a parked call, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Select a free extension.
2Dial SPRE 72.
3Dial the extension where the call is parked.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
227
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 227)
"Operating parameters" (page 227)
"Feature interactions" (page 228)
"Feature packaging" (page 228)
"Feature implementation" (page 228)
"Feature operation" (page 229)
Feature description
This enhancement to the Call Park feature allows Central Office (CO),
FEX, and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks, without disconnect
supervision, to be call-parked. All other trunk types without disconnect
supervision cannot be parked. The Disconnect Timer (DCTI) is used to
prevent phantom calls from ringing beyond the set time. Answered calls in
the held, parked, camped-on, or ringing state are disconnected when the
DCTI times-out.
This enhancement also allows Direct Inward System Access (DISA) on
CO, FEX, and WATS trunks without disconnect supervision. DISA on
unsupervised trunks does not intercept to the attendant, but is subject to
Timed Forced Disconnect Timer, which prevents the CO trunk from being
seized if the far end hangs up.
Operating parameters
The Disconnect Timer apples not only to Call Park but also to all trunks on
the route. All answered calls in the held, parked, ringing, or Camp-On states
is disconnected if left in that state for an extended period (this even applies
to calls in a call waiting queue type).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
228 Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
Feature interactions
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication
If all the attendants are busy and a Call Park Recall occurs, the recall is
placed in the calls waiting queue. If the recalled station is busy when the
recall occurs, the Disconnect Timer (DCTI) temporarily suspends timing
until the recall is presented. After the recall is presented, the Disconnect
Timer continues timing for the remainder of the period.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
If all the ACD agents are busy and a Call Park Recall occurs, the recall is
placed in the ACD DN queue.
Call Hold, Deluxe
Call Hold, Permanent
A Disconnect Timer applies to held calls on all trunks on the route. All
answered calls in the held state is disconnected if left in that state for an
extended period.
Call Park
A 14-second Disconnect Timer applies to parked calls on all trunks on the
route. All answered calls in the parked state is disconnected if left in that
state for an extended period.
Camp-On
A Disconnect Timer applies to camped-on calls on all trunks on the route.
All answered calls in the camped-on state is disconnected if left in that state
for an extended period.
Feature packaging
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks is included in Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) package 22.
Feature implementation
LD 16 - Set the disconnect timer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 229
Prompt Response Description
...
DCTI (0)-511 Time, in seconds, that an extension is allowed to ring or be on
hold or Call Park before the trunk is disconnected. 0, the default,
or <CR> means that the condition goes on indefinitely.
Respond with a value equal to the number of seconds a set is
to ring after recall, plus the value of the Call Park Recall Timer
(which is defined in LD 50 in response to the CPTM prompt).
The value stored, which is the closest lower multiple of four, is
echoed back upon entry.
Feature operation
Feature operation for Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks is the same as
that for Call Park.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
230 Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
231
Call Party Name Display
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 231)
"Operating parameters" (page 234)
"Feature interactions" (page 235)
"Feature packaging" (page 239)
"Feature implementation" (page 239)
"Feature operation" (page 245)
Feature description
Call Party Name Display (CPND) identifies the calling or called number in
addition to the DN. The identifier (for example, the name) associated with a
DN on telephones with an alphanumeric display is defined in LD 95.
Whenever the calling party’s DN displays on the terminating telephone, the
calling party’s name also appears. Likewise, on an internal call, the called
party’s name is appended to the displayed DN on the originator’s telephone,
as soon as a valid DN is completely dialed.
CPND displays the DN and name of the originally dialed party for redirected
calls. A Class of Service, DNDA/DNDD (Dialed Name Display Allowed or
Denied), is assigned on a per-telephone basis. The terminating telephone
must have DNDA to display the name of the originally dialed party.
The M2250 attendant console can extend a call to a DN requested by a
calling party.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
232 Call Party Name Display
Multi-Language CPND displays the party’s name in Roman/English or
Katakana (Japanese alphabet) characters on Meridian modular telephones.
The names are stored in the database under each character set and the
language is specified with the Meridian modular program keys.
Two languages can be stored in the database for any given name. For this
enhancement to work fully, both telephones involved must have the same
name in the same languages. (For example, John Smith calls Anne Jones.
Both John and Anne must have Katakana in their database for the name to
appear in Katakana characters. If John has Katakana enabled, but Anne
does not, Anne sees the English version.)
Entering Katakana, or any other non-ASCII Roman characters, requires a
system terminal that supports eight-bit, no-parity Input/Output.
The maintenance terminal must support ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 for the Roman
character mode.
Call Party Name Display assignment
A CPND name string can be assigned to internal DNs associated with any
of the following:
•analog (500/2500 type) telephones
•Trunk access codes
•Attendant DNs
•Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs
•Dial Intercom Group member numbers
As a customer option for multiple appearance DNs (MADNs), the assigned
CPND name can be linked with its member telephone’s designator (DES
field in the TN block) to further identify the party of a shared DN.
Call Party Name Display composition
A CPND name is the name used to identify a DN, entered in ASCII
alphanumeric character format. The maximum CPND length is the smaller
of two values: the maximum length configured in LD 95 or 27 characters,
including spaces and special characters.
The ASCII characters supported are A-Z, 0-9, space, Hex 20-127, and the
following special characters:
"()-#,
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 233
The NAME prompt in LDs 10, 11, and 95 accepts first name, a comma as
a separator, and last name (such as Mary,Smith). CPND also supports
names using a space separator (such as Mary Smith), treating the entire
name string as the first name. See Table 2 "Response formats for CPND
NAME prompt" (page 233) for examples.
Table 2
Response formats for CPND NAME prompt
Entered Data Displayed Result
Sue Smith <CR> Sue Smith
Sue,Smith <CR> Sue Smith
Sue <CR>
Sue, <CR> Sue
(Trailing comma is ignored.)
Sue,Smith, Dept. 410 <CR> Sue Smith, Dept. 410
Sue Smith, Joe Brown <CR> Sue Smith, Joe Brown
The default is to accept the names as entered, replacing the comma with a
space. Hence, a value entered as Mary,Smith displays as Mary Smith.
Do not enter leading spaces. LD 95 ignores them. When CPND information
is printed (using LD 10/11 or LD 20), the printout reflects what is in the
database, not what appears on the telephone display.
In addition to the caller’s name, a reason field can be provided to indicate
the cause of a redirection. This is a customer option and the actual
mnemonics are service changeable. The following call redirections have
a reason displayed:
•Call Forward All Calls
•Call Forward No Answer
•Hunting/Call Forward Busy
•Call Transfer with Network Call Redirection
•Attendant Alternative Answering
•Call Pickup
Display Devices and Capabilities
The M2317 has a display line of 40 characters, 33 available for displaying
DN-related information.
If there are more characters than the telephone’s display allows, the system
deletes letters to make the name fit.
The M2250 attendant console is equipped with four lines of LCD
alphanumeric display. Each line has 40 characters, and lines 2 and 3
are used to display DN-related information. If the number of characters
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
234 Call Party Name Display
displayed is more than 40, an arrow appears in the upper right corner
of the display. The arrow alerts the user that more information can be
retrieved using the scrolling keys. For complete information, refer to the
M1250/M2250 Attendant Console User Guide
The call type, originating or terminating telephone, and the Class of Service
all affect the display and CPND information. Three Classes of Service are
associated with the display function. CPND conforms to whichever Class of
Service is configured for the telephone.
•Automatic Digit Display (ADD)
•Digit Display Selection (DDS)
•Touch phone Digit Display (TDD)
No user interaction is required to display information on the call. On the
M2317 telephone, however, the user can press the SAVE # softkey to save
the name and number of the calling party. This applies to all outgoing and
answered incoming calls.
Operating parameters
CPND is not displayed if a live call is not involved (for example, while
programming a Speed Call key).
Attendant Administration does not support the entry of CPND class marks
for digital telephones.
CPND is not displayed on the calling telephone while making an outgoing
trunk call.
CPND is not supported on data calls.
CPND applies only to redirected calls on M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616,
and M2317 telephones.
For M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616, and M2317 telephones, CPND is
provided on a per-telephone basis, depending on the Class of Service.
DNDA (Dialed Name Display Allowed) and NDD (No Digit Display) Class
of Service are mutually exclusive.
Multi-Language CPND operates on Meridian modular telephones only.
An individual DN can have Roman/English, or Katakana, or both
programmed in the database if MLIO is equipped.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 235
If the call destination is a trunk or a telephone type other than Meridian
modular, the name is translated into the ASCII equivalent.
Multi-Language CPND applies to DNs on local switches only. CPND for
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) calls is displayed in English only.
The CPND feature uses JIS X 0201-1976, the RCode for Information
Interchanges, also known as JIS-Roman, which specifies the upper- and
lower- case letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols, and Katakana.
Feature interactions
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall
When the AC15 recall is presented to an attendant or a set with a display,
the source and destination names are shown beside the DNs or the ACODs.
ACD Routing by DNIS
When an incoming trunk call from a route with Routing by DNIS is presented
to a display telephone, the identification digits follow the regular trunk access
code and member number. It precedes the CPND name for the DNIS DN.
Attendant Recall
Attendant Recall using the Attendant Recall key or a switchhook flash
results in both source and destination information being displayed. No
redirection reason is displayed, however. In this type of recall, the party that
pressed the Attendant Recall key or switchhook is the destination party.
Attendant Recall using Call Transfer or Conference displays the recalling
party’s DN and CPND information on the attendant’s source line. No
redirection reason is displayed. If the recall is done with the Transfer key
the third party’s DN and CPND information are displayed on the source
line when the transfer is complete.
Attendant Recall with Splitting
For the M2250 attendant console, M2317, and Meridian Modular sets,
the appropriate DN and calling party’s name is correctly shown on the
digit display when the attendant presses either the Exclude Source or the
Exclude Destination key.
Autodial
Speed Call
No name information displays during the programming of Autodial and
Speed Call numbers.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
236 Call Party Name Display
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Dialed Number Identification Services
(DNIS) If an incoming trunk call from a route with DNIS is presented to a display
telephone, the identification digits follow the regular trunk access code
and member number. It precedes the CPND name for the DNIS incoming
trunk group.
Automatic Wake Up
All display information associated with Automatic Wake Up (AWU)
programming is directed to line three of the display. Names are appended
to DNs appearing on line three if they are different from those on line two,
or if no DN appears on line two. There is no DN information on line two if
the attendant has initiated the AWU process while not on an active call. No
DES information is appended, since AWU operates on a DN basis.
Call Hold, Deluxe
When a call is put on hold, the holding telephone’s display clears. The held
telephone’s display does not change. When the telephone reestablishes the
call, the display returns the original DN and name.
Call Park
Upon valid operation of the Park key, or dial-access if used, CPND shows
the SPRE code and the Park Access ID. Because the Park Access Code is
displayed, no CPND name is displayed. The only time that the digit display
shows the actual DN of the parked party is when the parked party has been
retrieved, put on hold, and then retrieved from hold.
Call Pickup
For Call Pickup, CPND applies when the call is answered.
Call Pickup Network Wide
Network Call Party Name Display information is exchanged during Call
Pickup Network Wide calls if the sets involved in the call would normally
exchange the information for calls over the routes that have been used for
the original call and the call pickup. Conversely, if Network Called Party
Name Display would not operate for a normal call from the originating party
to the terminating party, the service will not be supported when Call Pickup
Network Wide is involved.
Call Transfer
When the Transfer key is pressed during an active call, the display clears.
The call is in a held state. The DN and name of the transferred telephone
appear on the display when the DN is dialed. When the transfer is complete,
the transferring telephone’s display clears because the telephone is now
disconnected. The transferred telephone’s display changes to show the
name of the newly connected party.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 237
Calling Party Privacy
In current operations, if the International Supplementary Features (SUPP)
package 131 is not equipped in the system, an incoming ISDN call with
the Call Party Name Display (CPND) Indicator field set to "Presentation
Denied" still displays the Calling Party Name. If package 131 is equipped
in the system, the current operations will inhibit the Calling Party Name for
an incoming ISDN call with the CPND Indicator field set to "Presentation
Denied".
The CPP feature will inhibit the display of the Calling Party Name for an
incoming ISDN call with the CPND Indicator field set to "Presentation
Denied" if package 131 is not equipped.
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
When an attendant in the CAS mode extends a call to a remote station, the
display shows only the source line.
Conference
When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the
Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display. The telephones
involved in the conference have blank displays. If the conference returns
to a two-way only call, each telephone displays the DN and name of the
other telephone.
Dial Intercom
The display on telephones connected by Dial Intercom shows the group
member’s DIG number plus CPND information.
Dialed Number Identification Service
If an incoming trunk call from a route with Dialed Number Identification
Service (DNIS) is presented to a display telephone, the identification digits
follow the regular trunk access code and member number. It precedes the
CPND name for the DNIS incoming trunk group.
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access
Signaling System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working
The Call Party Name Display feature is supported in a DPNSS1 UDP
network. Names can be associated with the access codes of the DPNSS1
UDP routes defined in LD 95.
Display Key
When pressed during a call, the Display key clears the display until pressed
again. The original display reappears. When the telephone is inactive and
the DSP key is pressed, followed by a function key like Autodial, no CPND
information is displayed.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
238 Call Party Name Display
End-to-End Signaling
When entered after a call is answered, EES digits are displayed immediately
following the CPND name of the connected party. Leading DN digits and
name characters may be shifted out of the display window.
ISDN On incoming ISDN calls, the Calling Line ID number can be displayed
instead of a DN on the source party line. CPND applies to telephones
configured for ISDN when redirection is supported. CPND allows calls to
redirect across a network with Network Call Redirection. The CPND is
maintained through the redirection.
ISDN QSIG Name Display
Call Party Name Display and Calling Party Name Display Denied
interact with ISDN QSIG Name Display, depending on the Name Display
configuration in LD 16 for BRI or LD 17 for PRI. When a QSIG network is
interacting with an MCDN network providing network capability ND3, both
the MCDN and QSIG Name Display feature function on the same level.
Listed Directory Number
CPND is not supported for LDNs. If the LDN is an incoming trunk route, the
CPND assigned to the route access code is displayed.
Manual Signaling (Buzz)
If the Signal key is pressed to buzz another telephone, no digit or name
display appears on the telephone.
Meridian Hospitality Voice Services
The maximum length of a CPND name sent from the PMSI/Background
Terminal (BGD) is 27 characters. When the full 27 character length is used,
part of the CPND name may scroll off the screen. To avoid this problem, the
PMSI/Background Terminal (BGD) software has been updated to strip from
the screen all trailing blanks from the CPND name.
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration
There is significant interaction between the Meridian 1 Call Party Name
Display (CPND) database and the Meridian Mail VMB database. These
interactions are further described in the "Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox
Administration" description in Features and Services Fundamentals
(NN43001-106), Book 2.
Meridian 911
The Call Party Name Display feature can be used to configure and display
the incoming 911 route name.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 239
Network Intercom
Hot Type I calls display names the same as a normal call.
Hot Type I calls that become a normal call indicate on the originating
station’s display that the call is no longer a Hot Line call.
Override
When Overriding an established call, the displays of the other telephones
show the DN and name of the overriding party.
Slow Answer Recall
Slow Answer Recall results in displays showing source and destination
information. If a redirection occurs, the reason is displayed.
Voice Call
The telephone originating a Voice Call displays the called DN’s CPND. The
called telephone shows the caller’s DN and name on its display.
Feature packaging
Call Party Name Display (CPND) package 95 requires:
•Digit Display (DDSP) package 19
•M2000 Digital Sets (DSET) package 88
•M3000 Digital Sets (TSET) package 89 or
•M2317 Digital Sets (DLT2) package 91
•Aries Digital Sets (ARIE) package 170
Multi-Language CPND requires Multi-Language TTY Input/Output (MLIO)
package 211.
If the designator field is to be used for multiple-appearance DNs, CPND
requires:
•Office Data Administration System (ODAS) package 20
For Hotel/Motel applications configuring CPND, CPND requires:
•Background Terminal Facility (BGD) package 99
•Multi-Language TTY Input/Output (MLIO) package 211 to support
eight-bit, no-parity system terminals
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 95 - Create the CPND data block." (page 240)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
240 Call Party Name Display
Create the CPND data block.
2. "LD 95 - Add names to the CPND data block." (page 241)
Add names to the CPND data block.
3. "LD 10 - Allow names to be assigned to analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 242)
Allow names to be assigned to analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
4. "LD 11 - Allow names to display on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."
(page 242)
Allow names to display on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
5. "LD 12 - Allow names to display on attendant consoles." (page 242)
Allow names to display on attendant consoles.
6. "LD 95 - Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries."
(page 243)
Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries.
7. "LD 95 - Print information associated with entries in the CPND data
block." (page 244)
Print information associated with entries in the CPND data block.
8. "LD 10/11 - Add or change CPND name." (page 244)
Add or change CPND name.
Before name strings can be assigned to various telephones, the CPND
data block must be created in LD 95. The number and size of CPND
name strings is limited by available space in the Protected Data Store, so
it is recommended that you initially use a small number for the maximum
character length.
Enable CPND and add names to the CPND data block
LD 95 - Create the CPND data block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Create CPND database (or open existing database).
TYPE CPND CPND data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CNFG <CR> Standalone memory.
MXLN 5-(17)-27 Maximum number of characters allowed in each name string.
Once defined, this value can be changed only by removing the
CPND data block and recreating it.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 241
Prompt Response Description
STAL (NO) YES Static allocation of name storage. Must be YES if Background
Terminal is equipped, or whenever name strings change
frequently.
- DFLN 5-MXLN Average default character string length. Suggested default is 13
or the maximum length given to MXLN, whichever is less.
Prompted if STAL = YES.
DES
RESN
- CFWD
- CFNA
- HUNT
- PKUP
- XFER
- AAA
(NO) YES
(NO) YES
aaaa (F)
aaaa (N)
aaaa (B)
aaaa (P)
xxxx (T)
aaaa (A)
(Do not) allow designator for MADNs.
(Do not) allow display of reason for redirecting calls.
Mnemonic for Call Forward All Calls display.
Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display.
Mnemonic for Hunt/Call Forward Busy display.
Mnemonic for Call Pickup display.
Mnemonic for Call Transfer display for NCRD.
Mnemonic for Attendant Alternative Answering.
LD 95 - Add names to the CPND data block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Open CPND data block to add new entries.
TYPE NAME Create a new name string.
LANG (ROM) KAT <CR> Store the name in Roman or Katakana. <CR> stores the name
in English.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
DIG 0-2045 0-99 Dial Intercom Group number and member number. Each time
a name string is assigned to a Dial Intercom Group member,
the DIG prompt repeats, until a carriage return is entered to go
to the DN prompt.
<CR> Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to assign
names on a DN basis.
- NAME aaaa bbbb CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.
- XPLN xx Expected Length.
Range must be between the Input Name length and the MXLN,
or it defaults to DFLN.
<CR> Set XPLN to average default character string length (DFLN) or
the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.
DN xxx...x DN to which name string is linked.
- NAME aaaa bbbb CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
242 Call Party Name Display
Prompt Response Description
- XPLN xx Expected Length.
Range must be between the Input Name length and the MXLN,
or it defaults to DFLN.
<CR> Set XPLN to average default character string length (DFLN) or
the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.
DCNO xxx IDC conversion table number (0-254).
IDC nnn Existing complete or partial IDC number.
Prompted only when DCNO is valid.
NAME aaaa bbbb CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.
LD 10 - Allow names to be assigned to analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FTR CPND Allow CPND name assignment on this telephone.
LD 11 - Allow names to display on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (CNDD) CNDA
(DNDD) DNDA (Deny) allow display of CPND entries.
(Deny) allow display of CPND originally dialed entries.
LD 12 - Allow names to display on attendant consoles.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 243
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: 2250 Attendant console type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CPND (CNDD) CNDA (Deny) allow CPND name assignment.
DNDI (DNDD) DNDA (Deny) allow display of originally dialed CPND entries.
Change or remove names in the CPND data block
LD 95 - Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG OUT Change, or remove an existing entry.
TYPE NAME Change, or remove an existing CPND name string.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
LANG ROM KAT ALL Change or remove the name in Roman or Katakana. ALL is
used to remove all names stored for the DIG.
DIG 0-2045 0-99
ALL <CR> Dial Intercom Group number and member number. Each time
a name string is assigned to or removed from a Dial Intercom
Group member, the DIG prompt repeats, until a carriage return
is entered to go to the DN prompt. ALL removes all entries for
that DIG. <CR> bypasses DIG and goes to the DN.
- NAME aaaa bbbb
<CR>
CPND name string for this DIG; maximum of 27 characters.
Leave this entry unchanged.
DN xxx...x
ALL
<CR>
DN of name string being changed or removed.
Remove all DN-defined entries.
Return to REQ prompt.
- NAME aaaa bbbb CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.
DCNO xxx IDC conversion table number (0-254).
- IDC nnn Existing complete or partial IDC number.
Prompted only when DCNO is valid.
NAME aaaa bbbb CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
244 Call Party Name Display
Print entries from the CPND data block
LD 95 - Print information associated with entries in the CPND data block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ PRT Print entries in the CPND data block.
TYPE NAME CPND name strings.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
LANG ROM KAT Print names in Roman or Katakana.
PAGE (NO) YES Page headers and page numbers for multiple DNs and DIGs.
DIG ALL
0-2045 0-99
<CR>
Print information on all entries defined by Dial Intercom Groups.
Dial Intercom Group and member number. The DIG prompt
repeats until a carriage return is entered.
Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to print
information on a DN basis.
DN ALL
xxxx
<CR>
Print information on all DN entries.
DN to print information from. DN prompt repeats until a carriage
return is entered.
Return to REQ prompt.
DCNO xxx IDC conversion table number (0-254).
- IDC nnn
ALL
Existing complete or partial IDC number. Prompted only when
DCNO is valid.
All names defined are printed.
SHRT (NO)
YES
Short form.
Prints one IDC per single line.
Prints several IDCs on single line.
Add or change CPND name entry for a telephone
LD 10/11 - Add or change CPND name.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add or change CPND name information.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 245
Prompt Response Description
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CPND NEW CHG OUT Add, change, or remove the CPND information.
CPND_LAN
G(ROM) KAT Use Roman or Katakana characters.
NAME aaaa bbbb CPND name; maximum of 27 characters.
XPLN xx Expected name length.
DISPLAY_F
MT (FIRST) LAST First name; Last name (John Doe).
Last name; First name (Doe John).
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
246 Call Party Name Display
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
247
Call Pickup
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 247)
"Operating parameters" (page 248)
"Feature interactions" (page 248)
"Feature packaging" (page 250)
"Feature implementation" (page 250)
"Feature operation" (page 252)
Feature description
Call Pickup allows telephones to be arranged in groups consisting of
any combination of analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
Telephones can be specified as Call Pickup allowed or Call Pickup denied.
If the telephone’s Class of Service is Call Pickup allowed, the user can
answer calls made to any telephone within the Call Pickup group. If the
telephone’s Class of Service is Call Pickup denied, but the telephone is
assigned to a Call Pickup group, the user cannot answer calls directed to
other telephones. Calls to the denied telephone, however, can be answered
by other members of the group.
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones can dial-access this feature, or be
equipped with a Call Pickup key. An associated lamp is not required.
Central Office (CO) Trunk Priority, provides CO trunk calls priority over other
calls within the distinctive ringing and normal ringing queues. If the CO
Trunk Priority is implemented, calls are answered in the following order:
•Distinctive Ringing Queue CO call (Priority 1)
•Distinctive Ringing Queue non-CO call (Priority 3)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
248 Call Pickup
•Normal Ringing Queue CO call (Priority 2)
•Normal Ringing Queue non-CO call (Priority 4)
Operating parameters
The number of Call Pickup groups is 4095. The number of members
assigned to each group is unlimited, depending on available system
memory.
Feature interactions
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either transferred, extended or
redirected to another set using Call Pickup are charged against the last set
that answers the call and the controlling set releases.
Attendant Alternative Answering
The Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) DN can be assigned to a Call
Pickup group to allow members of the same group to answer the call.
Attendant Overflow Position
An Attendant Overflow Position Call presented to the AOP DN can be picked
up by any station belonging to the same Call Pickup Group.
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs are not supported by Call Pickup.
Call Park
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user on a call can pick up a call by
parking the existing call, then activating the Call Pickup feature.
Calling Party Privacy
If an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is picked up locally, the
display of the calling Party Number and Name are not displayed on the
terminating set.
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls
When an incoming call is picked up, the answering set is identified in the
Terminating ID. This operation remains the same.
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup can be assigned to a telephone independent of Directed Call
Pickup (DCP).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 249
Conference
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. Meridian 1
proprietary telephones can activate Call Pickup if an idle Directory Number
(DN) key is available. The conference call must be put on hold before
pressing the idle DN key to pick up the call.
Dial Intercom
Call Pickup may be used by Meridian 1 proprietary telephones if the
telephones are all in the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG) and Call Pickup
Group and the ring option is specified for the DIG
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access
Signaling System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working
Call Pickup is supported in a DPNSS1 UDP network.
Display of Calling Party Denied
When a call is picked up from another set, the terminating set’s display
is in accordance with the Class of Service of the dialed and calling sets.
The calling party’s display includes the dialed DN, the terminating DN and
the name of the terminated set. However, if the terminating set has Digit
Display Denied (DDGD), then both the dialed and terminating sets’ DNs
are blocked from the calling party’s display. The same occurs when Digit
Display Allowed (DDGA) is configured on the terminating set. Both the
dialed and terminating sets’ DNs are displayed on the calling party’s set,
regardless of the Class of Service of the dialed set.
Flexible Feature Codes
Flexible Feature Codes are not supported on a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone during an attempt to pick up a Dial Intercom ringing call.
Group Call
This feature can be used to answer a Group Call if it is activated by a valid
telephone in the same Call Pickup group, or by using Directory Number
(DN) Pickup or Group Pickup.
Hot Line
Telephones with two-way Hot Line keys, and analog (500/2500 type) Hot
Line telephones, can be assigned to pickup groups. Incoming Hot Line calls
may be picked up by group members. To prevent someone from picking up
a Hot Line call, do not put the Hot Line user into a Call Pickup group.
ISDN QSIG Name Display
An incoming QSIG call with name display presentation allowed has name
information displayed on the set that picks up the call. If the incoming QSIG
call has presentation denied, the calling party’s name is not displayed on
the set picking up the incoming call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
250 Call Pickup
Multi-Party Operations
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones with PUA and TSA Class of Service can
pick up a call only if they are not involved in another call. After picking up a
call, the user can form a Consultation connection and dial Programmable
Control Digits as normal.
Network Intercom
Hot Type I calls cannot be picked up. An attempt to pick up a Hot Type I call
results in an overflow tone.
Periodic Pulse Metering
Metered calls transferred or extended from one station and answered at
another station using the Call Pickup feature are charged against the station
where the call is picked up as the controlling party disconnects.
M3900 (Single Site) Virtual Office
The Call Pickup feature is not supported for Virtual Set TNs. A Virtual Set
cannot be a member of a call pickup group since the DPU and GPU keys
cannot be configured.
The RNPG prompt is blocked in LD 11. Dialing a SPRE code for Call Pickup
from a logged in Host Telephone results in overflow tone.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Implement CO Trunk Priority in the Customer Data Block."
(page 251)
Implement CO Trunk Priority in the Customer Data Block.
2. "LD 10 - Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 251)
Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key
for Meridian 1 proprietary t" (page 251)
Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key for
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 251
LD 15 - Implement CO Trunk Priority in the Customer Data Block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT (COX) COP CO Trunk Priority for the Call Pickup feature.
COX is no Priority.
LD 10 - Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
RNPG 0-4095 Call Pickup group number.
CLS PUA Allow Call Pickup.
LD 11 - Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key for Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
RNPG 0-4095 Call Pickup group number.
CLS PUA Allow Call Pickup.
KEY xx RNP Add a Call Pickup key.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
252 Call Pickup
Feature operation
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Lift the handset, or press a DN key.
2Press Call Pickup or dial SPRE + 3.
—End—
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Lift the handset.
2Dial SPRE 3 or PURN FFC.
You are connected to the caller.
If you are on a call when another call comes in for someone in your
Call Pickup group, you must end, park, or transfer the existing call
before you can answer the new call.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
253
Call Pickup, Directed
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 253)
"Operating parameters" (page 254)
"Feature interactions" (page 254)
"Feature packaging" (page 254)
"Feature implementation" (page 254)
"Feature operation" (page 256)
Feature description
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) allows a caller from one Call Pickup group to
pick up a ringing call in another Call Pickup group. The ringing call is picked
up by dialing either its Call Pickup Group number or the DN on which it is
ringing.
Directed Call Pickup adds two new methods of Call Pickup to the existing
Call Pickup feature:
•Group Pickup (GPU), and
•DN Pickup (DPU).
Group Pickup lets you pick up any ringing call in your own pickup group,
or any pickup group in the system.
DN Pickup allows pickup of a call ringing on a specified DN. If a DN is not
assigned to any group, it defaults to Group Zero (0). This prevents any
other group from picking up that DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
254 Call Pickup, Directed
Both GPU and DPU can be activated using programmable keys or Special
Prefix (SPRE) code dialing. Each pickup method can be assigned to a
telephone independent of the others.
The dialed digits (DN or group number) are displayed on the Digit Display as
dialed. Like the Call Pickup feature, the lamp is optional for the Call Pickup
and Group Call Pickup keys. No second dial tone is given after the key is
pressed, nor is it given after the SPRE code is dialed.
Operating parameters
Group 0 (zero) is not a valid group number. A telephone that is not part of
any group is assigned by default to group 0 (zero).
Feature interactions
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution DNs are not supported by Directed Call Pickup.
Call Pickup
Call Pickup can be assigned to a telephone independent of Directed Call
Pickup (DCP).
Flexible Feature Code
Flexible Feature Codes are not supported on a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone during an attempt to pick up a Dial Intercom ringing call.
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service
Users of analog (500/2500 type) telephones involved in a Three-Party
Service call cannot pick up another call by dialing the SPRE code.
Feature packaging
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) is package 115 and has no feature package
requirements.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups."
(page 255)
Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups.
2. "LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones to allow DCP
Class of Service." (page 255)
Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones to allow DCP Class of
Service.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 255
3. "LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to allow Directed
Call Pickup Class of Service." (page 255)
Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to allow Directed Call
Pickup Class of Service.
LD 15 - Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT Options.
(COX)
COP Central Office call No Priority for Ringing (default).
Central Office call Priority for Ringing.
- PKND (1)-4 Number of digits dialed for Group Pickup.
Prompted only if DCP is equipped.
LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones to allow DCP Class of Service.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
RNPG (0)-4095 Ringing Number Pickup Group.
0 = no pickup group.
CLS (GPUD) GPUA
(DPUD) DPUA (Deny) allow Group Pickup.
(Deny) allow DN Pickup.
LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to allow Directed Call Pickup Class
of Service.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
256 Call Pickup, Directed
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
RNPG 0-4095 Call Pickup Group.
0 = no pickup group.
CLS (GPUD) GPUA
(DPUD) DPUA (Deny) allow Group Pickup.
(Deny) allow DN Pickup.
KEY xx GPU
xx DPU Group Pickup key.
DN Pickup key.
Feature operation
To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Lift the handset.
2Press GRP Pickup or dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.
3Dial the pickup group number.
—End—
To answer a call on a specified DN from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:
Step Action
1Lift the handset.
2Press DN Pickup or dial SPRE + 95 or PUDN FFC.
3Dial the extension number.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 257
To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from an analog (500/2500
type) telephone, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.
2Dial the pickup group number.
—End—
To answer a call on a specified DN from an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone:
Step Action
1Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 95 or PUDN FFC.
2Dial the extension number.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
258 Call Pickup, Directed
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
259
Call Redirection by Day
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 259)
"Operating parameters" (page 260)
"Feature interactions" (page 260)
"Feature packaging" (page 262)
"Feature implementation" (page 262)
"Feature operation" (page 266)
Feature description
Call Redirection by Day (CRDAY) is an enhancement of the feature Call
Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD). The CRDAY feature allows you to
automatically redirect incoming calls on specified days of the week and/or
holidays. You can define the number of rings required before a call is
redirected, and the Directory Number (DN) to which the call is redirected.
Existing parameters that apply to the operation and redirection of DNs of
Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) and Hunting also apply to this feature.
The CRDAY feature also uses the alternate DNs introduced by the CRTOD
feature.
You can configure up to four alternate day lists, DAY0 – DAY3, for each
customer. Each day list can contain one or more days of the week. You can
also configure up to four holiday lists, HOLIDAY0 – HOLIDAY3, for each
customer. Each holiday list can contain up to 20 dates.
You can assign one alternate day list and/or one alternate holiday list for
each telephone. The maximum value of the year in a holiday date is 2104.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
260 Call Redirection by Day
There is a class of service (CLS) for each of CRTOD, CRDAY, and Call
Redirection by Holiday (CRHOL). Each CLS can be enabled or disabled
separately and are independent of each other.
At the CRDAY prompt, answering “YES” or “NO” does not fully enable or
disable the feature. To enable the feature, you must define at least one of
the alternate day lists (DAY0 - DAY3)—call redirection to the alternate DN
then takes place, even if you enter “NO” at the CRDAY prompt. Similarly,
to disable the feature, all alternate day lists must remain undefined—call
redirection does not take place, even if you enter “YES” at the CRDAY
prompt.
Operating parameters
CRDAY is not supported on Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) sets.
Feature interactions
Call Redirection by Time of Day
The CRTOD and CRDAY features can work together or separately. If all
three classes of service are enabled, CRHOL takes precedence over
CRDAY and CRTOD. When the CRDAY and CRTOD classes of service are
enabled, CRDAY takes precedence.
When incoming calls require redirection, the order of precedence for which
the system handles no answer and busy calls, is listed below:
Calls to Idle Stations:
Call Forward All Calls
Message Waiting
Call Forward No Answer
Attendant Recall
Calls to Busy Stations:
Call Forward All Calls
Hunting
Call Waiting or Camp-On
Message Waiting Forward Busy
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward, Internal
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 261
Call Forward No Answer
When Call Redirection by Day (CRDAY) is activated, calls unanswered
after a specified number of rings are sent to Call Forward No Answer
feature (CFNA) and forwarded to the alternate DN based on the alternative
days/holidays configured for the set.
Call Forward All Calls
All unanswered incoming calls are sent to the Call Forward All Calls feature
if there is no answer then the call is sent to the alternate CRDAY DN
specified for that day/holiday.
Call Waiting Redirection
When Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) occurs on a waiting call, the Call
Waiting Redirection (CWTR) feature redirects the call to a specified DN
based upon the alternate days and/or holidays configured for the set. If the
current day matches one of the busy set’s alternate days or holidays, then
the call is redirected to the CRDAY alternate DN.
Hunting
Hunting allows a call encountering a busy DN to route automatically to
another DN. When CRDAY is enabled and an incoming call reaches a busy
DN, the current day is checked against the alternate days and holidays
specified for that set. If the current day matches one of the alternate days,
the call begins the hunting route using the alternate redirection DNs defined
for the set.
Hunting by Call Type
The Hunt by Call Type redirects an incoming call to a HUNT DN. With
CRDAY enabled on the called DN, the incoming calls on specified Alternate
Days and Holidays are redirected to the assigned alternate HUNT DN.
Group Hunting
The Group Hunting feature provides a method of hunting DNs in a group.
The group is associated with a Pilot DN, that is, a DN with no associated
Terminal Number (TN). The hunting is done in the order of entry of DNs in
the group. If a set’s list of alternate days and/or holidays program matches
the current day, incoming calls are directed to Group Hunt. This feature
allows an incoming DID call to be redirected to a Hunt DN or External Hunt
(EHT) if Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled. To activate this
feature, the called DN must have the following class of service Hunting
Denied HTD with Hunting By Call Type Allowed (HBTA), and package 131
enabled.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
262 Call Redirection by Day
Multiple Appearance DN, Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime
When a call redirection feature is activated for a Multiple Appearance DN
(MADN), the TN information is required. Call redirection always refers to
the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) TN to determine the
feature operation. The CRDAY feature also uses the MARP TN to get the
alternate call redirection DNs.
Second Level Call Forward No Answer
The Second Level Call Forward No Answer (SFNA) allows unanswered calls
to receive Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) treatment twice. The CFNA
timer is configured in the customer data block (CDB) for the number of rings
before a call is redirected. If SFNA is allowed on the last DN rung, then
the incoming call is redirected based on the list of alternate days and/or
holidays configured for the set (day/holiday class of service).
User Selectable Call Redirection
The CRDAY feature does not support User Selectable Call Redirection
(USCR). Only the following redirection DNs can be changed from a set:
•CFNA DN (FDN)
•External CFNA DN (EDN)
•Hunt DN (HUNT)
•External Hunt DN (EHT)
The alternate redirection DNs cannot be changed with USCR.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure alternate days/holidays." (page 263)
Configure alternate days/holidays.
2. "LD 10 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for analog (500/2500-type)
telephones." (page 264)
Enable call redirection by day/holiday for analog (500/2500-type)
telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for a digital sets." (page
265)
Enable call redirection by day/holiday for a digital sets.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 263
LD 15 - Configure alternate days/holidays.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Redirection data
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
CRDAY
YES
Call Redirection by Day.
DAY0 is prompted if "YES" is entered.
(NO) = default.
If you enter "NO" or <CR> at this prompt, then subsequent
alternate day list prompts (DAYx) are skipped.
- DAY0 x x...x List of alternate days in list 0.
Where x = 1...7
Sunday = 1
Monday = 2
Tuesday = 3
Wednesday = 4
Thursday = 5
Friday = 6
Saturday = 7
To remove a day value precede the day number with an X.
- DAY1 x x...x List of alternate days in list one.
- DAY2 x x...x List of alternate days in list two.
- DAY3 x x...x List of alternate days in list three.
CRHOL Call Redirection by Holiday.
NEW
CHG
OUT
OUT ALL
Add new data.
Change existing data.
Remove existing data.
Delete all holidays in the list.
There are a maximum of 20 holidays allowed. The four holiday
options lists are created from these original 20 holidays.
- DATE dd mm yyyy Enter holiday date.
dd = day.
mm = month.
yyyy = year (optional, with maximum year value of 2104).
If the year is not entered, the holiday is repeated every year.
--HOL_OPT Holiday Option List to which entered date applies.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
264 Call Redirection by Day
Prompt Response Description
nnnn Where:
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
ALL Select all four holiday option lists.
Precede the holiday list with X to remove.
- DATE dd mm yyyy Continue to input holidays to maximum of 20.
<CR> Stop adding holidays and continue administration.
--HOL_OPT nnnn Holiday Option List to which entered date applies.
Where:
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Select all four holiday option lists.
Precede the holiday list with X to remove.
LD 10 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for analog (500/2500-type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500
2500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
CLS FNA
FBA
RBDA
RBHA
Call Forward No Answer Allowed.
Call Forward Busy Allowed.
Redirection By Day Allowed.
Redirection By Holiday Allowed.
...
ADAY (0) - 3 Alternate days in DAY list 0-3 are selected for the set.
Enter the list of alternate days listed in the Customer Data Block.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 265
Prompt Response Description
AHOL (0) - 3 Enter the list of alternate redirection holidays in Holiday list 0-3
as selected for the set defined in the Customer Data Block.
...
FTR AFD x...x Alternate forward DN to which all internal calls on an alternate
day and/or holiday are redirected upon no answer.
AHNT x...x Alternate hunt DN to which all internal calls on an alternate day
and/or holiday are redirected when set is busy or no answer.
(CFNA to HUNT).
AEFD x...x Alternate external forward DN to which all external calls on an
alternate day and/or holiday are redirected upon no answer.
AEHT x...x Alternate external hunt DN to which all external calls on an
alternate day and/or holiday are redirected when set is busy or
no answer (CFNA to HUNT).
LD 11 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for a digital sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
CLS FNA
FBA
RBDA
RBHA
Call Forward No Answer Allowed.
Call Forward Busy Allowed.
Redirection By Day Allowed.
Redirection By Holiday Allowed.
...
ADAY (0) - 3 Alternate days in DAY list 0 - 3 are selected for the DN.
AHOL (0) - 3 Enter the list of alternate redirection holidays in Holiday list 0-3
as selected for sets defined in the Customer Data Block.
...
AFD x...x Alternate forward DN to which all internal call forward DNs on
alternate days/and all holidays are redirected upon no answer.
AHNT x...x When the DN is busy all incoming calls in the HOLIDAY list are
redirected to the alternate hunt DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
266 Call Redirection by Day
Prompt Response Description
AEFD x...x Alternate external forward DN to which incoming calls are
redirected on alternate days.
AEHT x...x When the DN is busy, all incoming calls for the specified holiday
are redirected to the alternate external hunt DN.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
267
Call Redirection by Time of Day
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 267)
"Operating parameters" (page 268)
"Feature interactions" (page 268)
"Feature packaging" (page 269)
"Feature implementation" (page 270)
"Feature operation" (page 272)
Feature description
Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD) adds flexibility to the existing
operations of Call Forward No Answer, Hunting and Call Forward by
Call Type by allowing incoming calls to be automatically redirected to a
predefined Directory Number at a specified time of day.
When the Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD) feature is activated,
incoming calls are automatically redirected to a Directory Number through
Hunting, Flexible Call Forward No Answer, External Hunt or External Call
Forward No Answer. Depending on the time of day, an incoming call can
also be redirected to an alternate Directory Number using the Hunting, Call
Forward No Answer and Call Forward by Call Type operations.
This feature only changes which redirection Directory Number or alternative
Directory Number is used to redirect a call when possible.
At the CRTOD prompt, answering “YES” or “NO” does not fully enable or
disable the feature. To enable the feature, you must define at least one of
the four possible alternate time options (CRT0 - CRT3). Also, the defined
CRTx start time must not equal the defined end time. If you define one or
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
268 Call Redirection by Time of Day
more CRTx options (at least one with an unequal start and end time), then
call redirection to the alternate DN takes place, even when you enter “NO”
at the CRTOD prompt. Similarly, to disable the feature, all alternate time
options (CRT0 - CRT3) must remain undefined (or, if defined, the CRTx
start time must equal the defined end time). If you leave all CRTx options
undefined (or with equal start and end times), then call redirection does not
take place, even when you enter “YES” at the CRTOD prompt.
Operating parameters
All existing limitations that apply to the operation and redirection of Directory
Numbers of Call Forward No Answer and Hunting also apply to this feature.
Only one alternate time option is allowed per telephone at a given time.
This feature is not supported on Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals.
Feature interactions
When incoming calls require redirection, the order of precedence for which
the system handles no answer and busy calls, is listed below:
Calls to Idle Stations:
1. Call Forward All Calls
2. Message Waiting
3. Call Forward No Answer
4. Attendant Recall
Calls to Busy Stations:
1. Call Forward All Calls
2. Hunting
3. Call Waiting or Camp-On
4. Message Waiting Forward Busy
5. Call Forward Busy
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward, Internal
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
These features take precedence over Call Redirection by Time of Day
(CRTOD).
Call Forward by Call Type
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature packaging 269
Hunting by Call Type
If Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward No
Answer (CFNA) and Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD), unanswered
internal calls receiving CFNA are routed to the Flexible CFNA DN, Hunt
DN, Alternate Flexible CFNA DN or Alternate Hunt DNs. External calls are
routed in the same manner.
If CFNA is enabled with Hunting by Call Type and Call Redirection by Time
of Day (CRTOD), unanswered internal calls are redirected to the Hunt DN
or Alternate Hunt DN during the alternative time. External calls are routed
in the same manner. The alternate time is defined on the called DN’s
data block.
Call Forward No Answer
Call redirection parameters for Call Forward No Answer are obtained
from the originally dialed Directory Number. When CRTOD is activated,
unanswered calls given CRTOD treatment are forwarded with CFNA
according to the time of day. No changes are made to the existing CFNA
feature.
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
Existing Second Level CFNA allows unanswered calls to receive Call
Forward No Answer treatment twice. CRTOD parameters are obtained
from the last rung Directory Number. A maximum of two levels of CFNA
is allowed for an unanswered call.
Call Waiting Redirection
When Call Forward No Answer occurs on a waiting call, the redirected
Directory Number used depends on the time of day if CRTOD is activated.
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime
When CRTOD and Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime (MARP)
are activated, Call Forward or Hunt are dependent on the time of day and
follows the MARP feature for Call Forward No Answer or Hunt treatment.
Hunting
When CRTOD is enabled and an incoming call reaches a busy Directory
Number, the time is checked against the Alternate Redirection Time Option
range defined on the telephone.
User Selectable Call Redirection
User Selectable Call Redirection is not supported.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
270 Call Redirection by Time of Day
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure Alternative Redirection Time." (page 270)
Configure Alternative Redirection Time.
2. "LD 10 - Configure Terminal Number Block for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 271)
Configure Terminal Number Block for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Configure Terminal Number Block for proprietary telephones"
(page 272)
Configure Terminal Number Block for proprietary telephones
LD 15 - Configure Alternative Redirection Time.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Change Call Redirection.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
- CRTOD YES Call Redirection by Time of Day.
Alternate time option prompts are skipped if (NO) or <CR> is
entered
- - CRT0 SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 0, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23
and minute 00-59).
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time
and end time equal to 0.
- - CRT1 SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 1, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23
and minute 00-59).
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time
and end time equal to 0.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 271
Prompt Response Description
- - CRT2 SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 2, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23
and minute 00-59).
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time
and end time equal to 0.
- - CRT3 SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 3, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23
and minute 00-59).
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time
and end time equal to 0.
LD 10 - Configure Terminal Number Block for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Analog telephone can be defined or modified.
TYPE: 500 Analog (500/2500 type) telephone data block.
...
CLS RTDA Call Redirection by the Time of Day allowed.
If CLS = RTDD (denied) then RTDA, AEFD, AEHT, AFDN,
AHNT is removed and ARTO prompt is reset to 0.
...
ARTO (0)-3 Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection defined
in the Customer Data Block. Only prompted if CLS = RTDA.
Default value 0 is entered if request is new. The value is not
changed if request is CHG.
<CR> to enter CLS and ARTO data.
FTR xxxx yyyy Enter Feature Name and Related Data.
AFD Alternate Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.
AHNT Alternate Hunt DN up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.
AEFD Alternate External Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = CFTD or RTDD.
AEHT Alternate External Hunt up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = CFTD or RTDD.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
272 Call Redirection by Time of Day
LD 11 - Configure Terminal Number Block for proprietary telephones
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
...
CLS RTDA Call Redirection by the Time of Day allowed.
...
ARTO (0)-3 Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection defined in
the Customer Data Block. Only prompted if CLS = RTDA.
Default value 0 is entered if request is new. The value is not
changed if the request = CHG.
<CR> to enter CLS and ARTO data.
AFD xxxx Alternate Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits. Remove
by setting CLS = RTDD.
AHNT xxxx Alternate Hunt DN up to 13 digits. Remove by setting CLS =
RTDD.
AEFD xxxx Alternate External Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits.
Remove by setting CLS = CFTD or RTDD.
Requires Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of
Service.
AEHT xxxx Alternate External Hunt up to 13 digits. Remove by setting CLS
= CFTD or RTDD.
Requires Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of
Service.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
273
Call Transfer
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 273)
"Operating parameters" (page 274)
"Feature interactions" (page 274)
"Feature packaging" (page 282)
"Feature implementation" (page 282)
"Feature operation" (page 283)
Feature description
The Three-Party Service Allowed Class of Service, part of the Multi-Party
Operations feature, cannot be used together with the XFR Class of Service.
With the Restricted Call Transfer feature enabled, users of analog (500/2500
type) telephones cannot transfer calls. Attempted call transfers are not
routed to the attendant.
Call Transfer allows a telephone user on any two-party call to hold the
existing call and originate another call to a third party. The user may consult
privately or transfer the original call to the third party. A call is transferred
by pressing a dedicated key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones or by
flashing the switchhook on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Restricted Call Transfer
The Restricted Call Transfer feature provides the Call Transfer Restricted
(XFR) Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. By assigning
XFR Class of Service in LD 10, a call transfer attempt will not result in action.
This is different from the Call Transfer Denied (XFD) Class of Service, which
will route the call to the attendant when a transfer is attempted.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
274 Call Transfer
Operating parameters
A separate Call Transfer key/lamp pair must be assigned to Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
A transfer allowed Class of Service must be specified for analog (500/2500
type) telephones to access this feature.
If trunks are involved, successful completion of a transfer depends on the
access limitations assigned to the stations and trunks.
While the originating side of a call is linked to a transfer or conference key
(that is, the originator of a transfer/conference call has not yet completed
the transfer/conference), the terminating side cannot initiate a transfer or
conference. Conference calls cannot be transferred.
Feature interactions
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
When a set is connected to an ISDN CO trunk conveying AOC charging
information, the received call charging information is stored against this set.
If the user transfers the call while the dialed set is still ringing, call charging
information is stored against the transferring set until the call is either
answered or abandoned by the external party. If the user consults with the
dialed transfer set, charging information is stored against the transferring
set until the call is either answered or abandoned. If the transferred call
is redirected by a call redirection feature, the call is charged against the
transferring set until the call transfer is completed and the call is answered.
In all instances, if the call is answered, new call charging information is
stored against the set receiving the transferred call.
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar
A party involved in a consultation call (an active or held party) cannot initiate
a consultation call for preventing call chaining. This principle is maintained
in the following cases:
•the party is an AC15 trunk (if it attempts to initiate a consultation call,
the recall signal is ignored), and
•the party is a local set, but the consultation call is made by an AC15
trunk.
Attendant Break-In
Until a transferred call is connected, the attendant cannot break in to a
call that is being transferred.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 275
Automatic Redial
When an Automatic Redial (ARDL) call is not accepted by the calling party,
the Call Transfer (TRN) key is ignored.
Call Forward by Call Type
Calls modified by Call Transfer receive Call Forward by Call Type treatment.
If party A (telephone or trunk) calls party B, and B transfers to party C, the
forwarding DN and Class of Service are obtained from party C
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide
The treatment of a call following a call transfer (Call Forward/Hunt by Call
Type) is based on the transferring set and the call originator’s set. The set
display on network call modification or redirection does not change.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
A set can activate Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC when initiating a
transfer. If the transfer is completed while ringing, the Call Forward/Hunt
Override will still be active and passed on to the transferred party.
Call Hold, Deluxe
A consultation call can be placed on Hold.
Call Page Network Wide
A station set or attendant console that transfers an external Call Page
Network Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an
external PAGENET controlled call is blocked.
Call Party Name Display
When the Transfer key is pressed during an active call, the display clears.
The call is in a held state. The DN and name of the transferred telephone
appear on the display when the DN is dialed. When the transfer is complete,
the transferring telephone’s display clears because the telephone is now
disconnected. The transferred telephone’s display changes to show the
name of the newly connected party.
Call Pickup Network Wide
A call may be picked up before or after the transferring party has completed
the transfer.
For pickup before transfer completion, the transferring party is displayed
updated information by the Call Pickup Network Wide feature when the call
is picked up. Then, when the transfer is completed, normal call transfer
information is exchanged by each party involved in the final call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
276 Call Transfer
For pickup after call transfer completion, everything happens as if the
call had been made directly from calling to ringing party. After pickup is
performed, displays are updated as for normal Call Pickup.
Call Transfer
Call Completion notification is only presented to the Call Completion
originating set. This notification cannot be transferred to another station.
Once the second call is completed, the call can be transferred.
If a user encounters a busy or no answer situation during a transfer
operation, Call Completion can be activated.
Calling Party Name Display Denied
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating set.
This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of Service
of the calling set and the forwarding/transferring set. The name of the
forwarding/transferring set is not displayed on the calling and terminating set.
Calling Party Privacy
If an incoming non-ISDN call is being transferred or an incoming ISDN call
is transferred to a non-ISDN trunk, the Calling Party Name and Number will
not be passed on to the terminating set. The CPP feature will not change
this operation.
For cases where an incoming call with the Privacy Indicator is transferred
over an MCDN trunk, or to a local station, the name and/or number of the
originating party will not be displayed on the set of the final terminating party.
Charge Account and Calling Party Number
A Call Transfer call produces two records: a Call Detail Recording (CDR)
start record and a CDR end record.
Charge Account, Forced
If an FCA code is entered at the beginning of a call, the new unrestricted
Class of Service remains in effect for any transfer or conference made
during the call. If all FCA criteria are met, an account number entered after
activating the Conference key, Call Transfer key, or a switchhook flash is
interpreted as an FCA code.
China - Attendant Monitor
If any party at the customer location involved in a monitored call attempts to
activate call transfer, monitoring is immediately deactivated.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 277
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Toll pad switching is also provided after call transfer has been completed.
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the
forwarding or hunting call is answered.
Conference
Conference can be used to transfer calls, eliminating the need for a separate
Call Transfer key/lamp pair on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Calls in
the ringing state cannot be transferred with Conference. The third party
must answer before the transfer can be completed.
A conference can also be established after initiating a Call Transfer
operation. After the third party answers, pressing the Conference key
establishes a three-way conference.
When a switchhook flash transfers calls on analog (500/2500 type)
telephones with three-party conference (C6A) Class of Service, the
transferring party goes on hook, leaving the other two parties established.
Telephones with a C6A Class of Service involved in a conference having
more than three parties must add the last party to the conference, then flash
the switchhook and go on hook to complete the transfer.
Dial Intercom
When using Conference or Transfer, the voice option is not provided if the
call is terminated before the conference or transfer is completed. If an
analog (500/2500 type) telephone is part of a Dial Intercom Group (DIG),
the user of the telephone can conference only with another user whose
telephone is within the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG).
Display Calling Party Denied
When a set transfers a call, display information is updated according to the
Class of Service of the respective sets. This occurs for both internal and
ISDN network calls.
If an unsupervised call transfer occurs on an internal call, the DN of the
terminating set is displayed to the calling party regardless of the DPD Class
of Service options that are configured on the terminating set.
Dial Access to Group Calls
Group Call
Call Transfer cannot be applied to Dial Access to Group Calls or Group Call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
278 Call Transfer
Group Hunt
Any call may be transferred to a Group Hunt Pilot DN. If there are no idle
sets available for the call transfer, the call is queued to the Pilot DN and the
caller receives ring back tone. If the call cannot be queued because the
queue threshold has been reached, the caller receives busy tone.
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement
If a call is transferred to the PLDN, and all Group Hunt list members are
busy, the call is queued to the PLDN, if the number of queued calls is less
than the Group Hunt Threshold limit. If the number of queued calls has
reached the Group Hunt Threshold limit, the call is not queued and busy
tone is returned to the transferring party.
Held Call Clearing
Active Call Transfer calls are cleared by either an on-hook or Release key
action. Held Call Transfer calls are cleared only by an on-hook action, and
not by a Release key action.
Hold A consultation call can be placed on Hold.
In-Band Automatic Number Identification
If an agent transfers an In-Band Automatic Number Identification (IANI) call
to another Automatic Call Distribution DN, the ANI number is displayed on
the terminating set’s display.
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion
Call Completion notification is only presented to the Call Completion
originating set. This notification cannot be transferred to another station.
Once the second call is completed, the call can be transferred.
If a user encounters a busy or no answer situation during a transfer
operation, Call Completion can be activated.
ISDN QSIG Name Display
After the completion of a call transfer, an incoming QSIG call with name
display presentation allowed has name information displayed on the
destination set. If the incoming QSIG call has presentation denied, name
information is not displayed to the destination set.
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks
If an internal station user transfers an answered outgoing call to another
station in the ringing state, then any disconnect signal received from the far
end causes the trunk to be released and ringing of the internal set to stop.
This operation eliminates the problem of holding trunks and extensions due
to lack of supervision on Loop Start trunks.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 279
Meridian 911
Trunk priority associated with an incoming 911 call is only preserved if blind
transfer is used.
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon
M911 abandoned calls cannot be transferred.
Message Registration
The party that originates a call is charged. The charge cannot be moved to
another party using Call Transfer.
Multi-Party Operations
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones with TSA Class of Service can Call
Transfer by going on-hook after establishing a conference. This differs from
operation with XFA Class of service, where transfer can be achieved by
going on-hook during Consultation connection.
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with TSA Class of Service goes
on-hook during consultation connection, it is treated as misoperation of All
Other Cases and the recovery actions are done based on the CCDO and
AOCS options selected in LD 15. If CDOC = NO, an analog (500/2500
type) telephone can achieve a transfer by going on-hook after establishing a
conference.
During the Consultation connection, the non-controlling parties are restricted
from using Call Transfer, Conference and Three-party Service features.
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements
A party receiving Patience Tone or recall of misoperation ringback is not
able to Call Transfer.
Music, Enhanced
The held party receives Music when the other party presses the Call
Transfer key. The Music connection remains until the Call Transfer key or
the DN key is pressed, ending the Consultation Hold state.
Network Intercom
Hot Type I calls may be transferred to another Hot Line key or to a normal DN
key; likewise calls on a normal DN key may be transferred to a Hot Line key.
Off-Hook Alarm Security
A telephone receives the Off-Hook Alarm Security treatment if the telephone
has ASCA Class of Service and attempts to transfer a call and the ASTM
expires.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
280 Call Transfer
On Hold on Loudspeaker
It will not be possible to transfer the loudspeaker call to another party.
Periodic Pulse Metering
If the user of a station which is connected to a metered trunk transfers an
internal call to another internal station while the dialed station is still ringing,
the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) pulse count is accumulated against
the transferring station until the call is answered by the dialed party, or
abandoned by the dialing party. When the call is answered, the pulses are
counted against the station to which the call has been transferred. If the
station user transfers the call after consulting with the dialed station user,
then the PPM pulses are counted against the controlling station until the
call is transferred. When the call is transferred, the PPM pulses are counted
against the station to which the call has been transferred. If the transferred
call is redirected using any of the call redirection features such as Call
Forward or Hunting, the call is charged against the transferring station until
the call is transferred. The pulses are then counted against the answering
station. This method ensures that PPM meters are charged in a manner
consistent with the printing of CDR records.
Predictive Dialing
The application sends the Fast Transfer request on behalf of a Meridian
1 proprietary telephone, and then the switch initiates and completes the
transfer immediately which is similar to a normal call transfer from a
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.
In a Predictive Dialing scenario where the autodialer (origination DN)
is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, the Make Call message sent by
the application to the switch to make a call on behalf of the Meridian 1
proprietary telephone, and then the call transfer call, will interact with the
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone Call Transfer feature. The autodialer is
configured with Class of Service TRN so that the switch can transfer the
call to the target destination.
The application sends the Fast Transfer request on behalf of an analog
(500/2500 type) telephone. The switch will then initiate and complete the
transfer in one step.
In a predictive dialing scenario, the application will send the Make Call
request on behalf of the autodialer (analog (500/2500 type) telephone) to
have the switch make the call, and then transfer the call when the switch
receives the Fast Transfer message. The autodialer needs to be configured
with Classes of Service Dial Pulse (DIP) and Transfer Allowed (XFA) for 500
sets, or with Classes of Service Digitone (DTN) and XFA for 2500 sets.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 281
Privacy Override
Calls in a Privacy Override conference state cannot be transferred.
Station Activity Records
A Station Activity Record is generated when a set with Class of Service Call
Detail Monitoring Allowed (CDMA) transfers a trunk call. CDR "X" record
generation is not affected by this development. The set to which the call is
transferred also produces a Station Activity Record if it has Class of Service
CDMA and answers the call. When the second "D" record is produced (by
the set to which the call is transferred), the digits field of the "D" record
shows the digits dialed by the transferring set.
Supervised Analog Lines
China-Supervised Analog Lines
If more than one active call is extended to an analog line, the call type
associated with an analog line is determined by the first active call. The call
type is assumed to be incoming and hook flash supervision applies if a
terminal device answers an incoming call from an idle state. If the terminal
device performs a switch hook flash to put the first party on hold and
initiates a consultation call, the Battery Reversal feature is not supported;
no battery reversal answer signal is extended to the terminal device when
the second party answers.
If the first party disconnects while the terminal device is connected to
the second party, no disconnect supervision is extended to the terminal
device. However, hook flash disconnect supervision is extended to the
terminal device when the second party disconnects (that is, a disconnect
supervision signal is sent only when the last party connected to the terminal
disconnects).
If a terminal device originates an outgoing call, battery reversal answer
supervision is extended when the called party answers. The polarity of
the line remains reversed polarity when the terminal device performs a
switch hook flash and then initiates a consultation call to a second party.
The analog line is reverted to normal polarity when the terminal device
completes the transfer and drops out or when the last of either the held
party or the consultation party disconnects.
Three-Party Service
The party receiving the patience tone or the Misoperation ringback is not
able to make a call transfer.
Trunk Barring
The originator of a call transfer, unless otherwise restricted, is able to
connect to a denied party on a consultation basis. Operating the Transfer
key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone or going on hook on an analog
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
282 Call Transfer
(500/2500 type) telephone does not result in a call transfer if the Originating
Trunk Connection is barred. The user of a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
remains connected to the denied party until releasing the connection and
returning to the held Originating Trunk Connection. The user of an analog
(500/2500 type) telephone is re-rung by the Originating Trunk Connection
when transfer is attempted and denied.
Trunk to Trunk Connection
To transfer an external trunk on ringing across a supervised analog network
TIE trunk, the external trunk and internal TIE line must have both answer
and disconnect supervision, and the external call must be established. To
transfer one outgoing external trunk to another, both external trunks must
have answer and disconnect supervision, and both external calls must be
established.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Configure Call Transfer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones."
(page 282)
Configure Call Transfer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Add a Call Transfer key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."
(page 283)
Add a Call Transfer key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
3. "LD 10 - Restricted Call Transfer for an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone." (page 283)
Restricted Call Transfer for an analog (500/2500 type) telephone.
LD 10 - Configure Call Transfer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (XFD) XFA (Deny) allow Call Transfer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 283
LD 11 - Add a Call Transfer key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
KEY xx TRN Add a Call Transfer key (the M2317 must use key 26).
LD 10 - Restricted Call Transfer for an analog (500/2500 type) telephone.
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
REQ: 500 Telephone type.
...
CLS XFR Restrict call transfers and do not recall to attendant.
Feature operation
To transfer an active call on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, follow
these steps:
Step Action
1Press Transfer.
The call is on hold.
2Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.
3Press Transfer when you hear ringing or after your call is answered.
When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new
party before completing the transfer.
To cancel an incomplete transfer, press the key beside the fast
flashing indicator and you return to the call you tried to transfer. To
conference all three parties, press the Conference key, if equipped.
—End—
To transfer an active call on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, follow
these steps:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
284 Call Transfer
Step Action
1Flash the switchhook.
The call is on hold.
2Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.
3Flash the switchhook when you hear ringing or after your call is
answered.
When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new
party before completing the transfer. To cancel an incomplete
transfer, hang up, then lift the handset and flash the switchhook to
return to the call.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
285
Call Waiting Redirection
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 285)
"Operating parameters" (page 286)
"Feature interactions" (page 286)
"Feature packaging" (page 290)
"Feature implementation" (page 290)
"Feature operation" (page 293)
Feature description
Previously, Call Waiting notified an active set that a second call was
waiting to be answered on that Directory Number (DN). For non-attendant
extended calls, the incoming call received Call Waiting treatment until the
call was answered by the called party or the calling party disconnected. For
attendant-extended calls, the incoming call received Call Waiting treatment
until the Call Waiting Recall timer timed out, at which time the call was
recalled to the attendant. The attendant had to then extend the call to a
message center or voice mail. However, since the attendant was given no
indication as the reason for the recall (called party busy or not answering), it
was difficult for the attendant to redirect the call properly.
The Call Waiting Redirection feature follows the Call Forward No Answer
(CFNA) treatment defined for the DN. No modifications have been made; all
existing Call Forward No Answer functionality will apply to redirected calls.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
286 Call Waiting Redirection
Operating parameters
The existing Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer limitations apply to
the Call Waiting Redirection feature. The Call Forward No Answer feature is
used by the Call Waiting Redirection feature to redirect "no answer" calls
given Call Waiting treatment.
Although the Call Waiting treatment is applied to a busy DN, the CFNA
call redirection treatment given by the Call Waiting Redirection feature
is for a "no answer" presentation. The unanswered Call Waiting call is
treated as a call presented to an idle "no answered" DN. Calls redirected to
messaging services or sets with displays are provided with the "no answer"
call redirection reason.
The existing implementation of Call Forward No Answer is used to select
the TN with the CFNA DN for the "no answer" Call Waiting call. Calls are
redirected according to the call type (internal or external) as defined at the
designated call redirection TN chosen by CFNA.
Feature interactions
Automatic Timed Reminders
Automatic Timed Recalls
When CFNA is active, the Slow Answer Recall timer begins only after the
call reaches its final destination. CFNA has precedence over Attendant
Recall for attendant-extended calls. Irrespective of the relative timeout
intervals for each feature, ringing continues as long as allowed by CFNA
for sets with CFNA enabled.
Since the Call Waiting Redirection feature applies CFNA treatment to a
Call Waiting call, the Call Waiting Redirection feature also has precedence
over the Call Waiting recall timer.
Basic Rate Interface
The Call Waiting Redirection feature is not applicable to Basic Rate Interface
(BRI) terminals. However, an ISDN BRI terminal may redirect a call using
hunting or CFNA.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward, Internal
Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward both have precedence over
Call Waiting and the Call Waiting Redirection feature.
Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type
If Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward
No Answer and Call Waiting Redirection, "no answer" internal calls receiving
Call Waiting treatment are routed for CFNA treatment to the Flexible CFNA
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 287
DN (FDN) or Hunt DN, and "no answer" external calls are routed for CFNA
treatment to the External Flexible CFNA DN (EFD) or External Hunt DN
(EHT).
Call Forward/Hunt Override via Flexible Feature Code
There is no interaction with the Call Waiting treatment component of the
Call Waiting Redirection feature. However, Call Forward/Hunt Override via
Flexible Feature Code does override CFNA, and thus the CFNA treatment
given to unanswered Call Waiting calls by the Call Waiting Redirection
feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override via Flexible Feature
Code (CFHO) feature. The incoming call will continue to be given Call
Waiting treatment as if the Call Waiting Redirection feature is disabled when
the CFHO feature is enabled by the calling party.
Call Forward No Answer
Per existing Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) feature operation, the call
redirection parameters for CFNA are obtained from the originally dialed
DN for redirected calls.
Existing Network CFNA treatment is applied to calls receiving Call Waiting
treatment on sets with CFNA and the Call Waiting Redirection feature
enabled if the Call Waiting call is not answered before the expiration of the
CFNA timer and the CFNA DN is on another node.
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level
The existing Second Level Call Forward No Answer treatment is applicable
to Call Waiting calls redirected by CFNA (first level) with the Call Waiting
Redirection feature which are still not answered at the last rung DN.
Call Redirection by Time of Day
When Call Forward No Answer occurs on a waiting call, the redirected
Directory Number used depends on the time of day if Call Redirection by
Time of Day (CRTOD) is activated.
Call Pickup Network Wide
A call that is redirected by the Call Waiting Redirection feature to the active
set’s Call Forward No Answer DN may be picked up.
Call Waiting
The option selected for Call Waiting Redirection treatment also applies to
calls given Internal Call Waiting treatment.
Camp-On
There is no interaction as Call Waiting and Camp-On are mutually exclusive.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
288 Call Waiting Redirection
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer
The Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer is applied after
the last stage of CFNA or SFNA treatment resulting from the Call Waiting
Redirection feature for DID Call Waiting calls.
Distinctive Ringing/New Distinctive Ringing
Call Forward No Answer
The existing Distinctive Ringing Call Forward No Answer feature is applied
to calls from a Distinctive Ringing enabled trunk. If such an incoming call
is receiving Call Waiting treatment on sets with Distinctive Ringing, Call
Forward No Answer (CFNA), and the Call Waiting Redirection feature
enabled, the DFNA timer is applied to the call instead of the CFNA timer.
The Call Waiting warning tone, if enabled, is not changed by Distinctive
Ringing. If that call is not answered before the expiration of the DFNA timer,
CFNA treatment is given using the Call Waiting Redirection feature.
Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing
With the Call Waiting Redirection feature also enabled, the Call Waiting
Redirection feature takes precedence over Forward No Answer Call Waiting
Direct Inward Dialing (FCWD). The existing CFNA also takes precedence
over the existing Attendant Recall of Call Waiting calls. Since the Call
Waiting Redirection feature applies CFNA treatment to a Call Waiting call
while the FCWD feature applies an attendant recall timer, the Call Waiting
Redirection feature also has precedence over the FCWD timer.
Hunting
If Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward
No Answer and Call Waiting Redirection, "no answer" internal calls receiving
Call Waiting treatment are routed for CFNA treatment to the Flexible CFNA
DN (FDN) or Hunt DN, and "no answer" external calls are routed for CFNA
treatment to the External Flexible CFNA DN (EFD) or External Hunt DN
(EHT).
Internal or Station-to-Station Call Waiting
The option selected for Call Waiting Redirection treatment also applies to
calls given Internal Call Waiting treatment.
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration
Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment may now be allowed to
forward to Voice Mail through the activation of the Call Waiting Redirection
feature. The greeting given to the caller is for a "no answer" condition.
Message Center
Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment may now be allowed by the
Call Waiting Redirection feature to be forwarded to a CFNA DN which may
be a Message Center. The call redirection reason is "no answer".
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 289
Message Waiting
Message Waiting has precedence over CFNA and Attendant Recall for
attendant-extended calls. Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment are
forwarded to the Flexible CFNA DN by the Call Waiting Redirection feature.
Multi-Party Operations
Recovery on Misoperation of Call Transfer - Call Transfer with
Ring No Answer (RGNA)
If the transferring party goes on-hook to complete the Call Transfer (that
is, blind transfer) before the "transferred to" or called party answers the
Call Waiting call, an RGNA Misoperation of Call Transfer is detected by
Multi-Party Operations (MPO).
With the Call Waiting Redirection feature enabled, if the blind transfer
completes after the CFNA timer applied by Call Waiting Redirection has
expired, there is no interaction as the Call Waiting Redirection feature is
done and has already redirected the unanswered Call Waiting call to the
CFNA DN.
If the blind transfer completes before the Call Waiting Redirection CFNA
timer expires and the RGNA option is defined to be:
1. Standard (STD, that is, operation as it was prior to introduction of MPO),
there is no interaction, as Call Waiting Redirection will redirect the
unanswered Call Waiting call when the CFNA timer expires.
2. Non-STD (that is, ATN, DIS, OVF, AAR, or DAR), the RGNA option
has precedence over CFNA and thus has priority over Call Waiting
Redirection’s CFNA treatment.
Recovery on Misoperation of Call Transfer – Misoperation of Call Transfer
for All Other Cases
This type of misoperation occurs when the transferring party attempts to
complete the transfer in several other non-RGNA scenarios. There is no
interaction with these Multi-Party Operations scenarios and the Call Waiting
Redirection feature.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number
The Call Waiting Redirection feature applies to unanswered Call Waiting
calls which apply to single appearance DNs and primary appearance DNs
of Multiple Appearance.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime
If the Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime (MARP)
feature is activated, the Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) treatment given
by Call Waiting Redirection for an unanswered Call Waiting call follows the
MARP feature for CFNA treatment of calls to an idle DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
290 Call Waiting Redirection
Network Call Forward No Answer
Existing Network CFNA treatment is applied to calls receiving Call Waiting
treatment on sets with CFNA and the Call Waiting Redirection feature
enabled if the Call Waiting call is not answered before the expiration of the
CFNA timer and the CFNA DN is on another node.
Network Call Redirection
Incoming calls receiving Call Waiting Redirection treatment can be
redirected over the network only if the trunk-to-trunk connection is already
supported per the existing Network Call Redirection feature.
Night Restriction Classes of Service
The Call Waiting Redirection feature applies to unanswered calls given Call
Waiting treatment when the Night Restriction Classes of Service feature
allows Call Waiting.
Night Service
Night Service Enhancements
Night Service has the same interaction with the Call Waiting Redirection
feature as attendant-extended calls. Since the Call Waiting Redirection
feature applies CFNA treatment to a Call Waiting call, the Call Waiting
Redirection feature also has precedence over the Call Waiting recall timer.
Voice Mail
Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment may now be allowed to
forward to Voice Mail through the activation of the Call Waiting Redirection
feature. The greeting given to the caller is for a "no answer" condition.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure the CFNA treatment, the number of ringing cycles
for CFNA, and the Call Waiting Re" (page 291)
Configure the CFNA treatment, the number of ringing cycles for CFNA,
and the Call Waiting Redirection option.
2. "LD 10 - Configure Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 291)
Configure Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 291
3. "LD 11 - Configure Call Waiting, and Call Forward No Answer for
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones." (page 292)
Configure Call Waiting, and Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
LD 15 - Configure the CFNA treatment, the number of ringing cycles for CFNA, and the Call
Waiting Redirection option.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Call Redirection
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT CWRA Call Waiting Redirection Allowed.
Allow Call Forward No Answer treatment for unanswered Call
Waiting calls on a DN.
...
FNAD (HNT) ATT NO
FDN CFNA treatment for DID calls.
FNAT (HNT) ATT NO
FDN CFNA treatment for internal non-Direct Inward Dialing calls.
FNAL (HNT) ATT NO
FDN CFNA treatment for calls when Call Waiting Redirection is
enabled.
...
CFN0 CFN1
CFN2 1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
CFNA timers; number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA Options
0, 1, and 2.
DFN0 DFN1
DFN2 1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
1-(4)-15
Distinctive Ringing CFNA timers; number of distinctive ringing
cycles for CFNA Options 0, 1, and 2.
LD 10 - Configure Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
292 Call Waiting Redirection
Prompt Response Description
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
HUNT xxx..x Hunt DN. If the Call Forward No Answer treatments set up in LD
15 are set to HNT, the Hunt DN should be configured.
CLS (CWD) CWA Call Waiting external (denied) allowed.
(SWD) SWA Internal (Station-to-Station) Call Waiting (denied) allowed. If
SWA is defined, CWA must also be defined.
(WTA) WTD Warning tone (allowed) denied.
(FND) FNA Call Forward No Answer (denied) allowed.
FBA Call Forward Busy Allowed.
For customers with the United Kingdom (UK) package 190
configured, CLS must be set to FBA for calls over DASS/DPNSS
trunks.
RCO (0)-2 Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer. Prompted
when CLS = FNA, or MWA (or both). RCO must be set to a
value other than 0 for Call Waiting Redirection to operate.
FTR aaaa
FDN xxx..x Enter the feature and related data.
Flexible CFNA DN. If the CFNA treatments set up in LD 15 are
set to FDN, the Flexible CFNA DN should be configured.
LD 11 - Configure Call Waiting, and Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FDN xxx..x Flexible CFNA DN. If the Call Forward No Answer treatments
set up in LD 15 are set to FDN, the Flexible CFNA DN should
be configured.
CLS (SWD) SWA Internal (Station-to-Station) Call Waiting (denied) allowed. SWA
does not need to exist to have external Call Waiting.
(WTA) WTD Warning tone (allowed) denied.
(FND) FNA Call Forward No Answer (denied) allowed.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 293
Prompt Response Description
FBA Call Forward Busy Allowed.
For customers with the United Kingdom (UK) package 190
configured, CLS must be set to FBA for calls over DASS/DPNSS
trunks.
RCO (0)-2 Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer. Prompted
when CLS = FNA, or MWA (or both). RCO must be set to a
value other than 0 for Call Waiting Redirection to operate.
HUNT xxx..x Hunt DN. If the Call Forward No Answer treatments set up in LD
15 are set to HNT, the Hunt DN should be configured.
KEY xx CWT xx = key number.
Add a Call Waiting key.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
294 Call Waiting Redirection
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
295
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 295)
"Operating parameters" (page 296)
"Feature interactions" (page 297)
"Feature packaging" (page 302)
"Feature implementation" (page 302)
"Feature operation" (page 303)
Feature description
Call Waiting notifies a telephone user on an established call (internal
or external) that an external call is waiting to be answered. Meridian 1
proprietary telephones must have a Call Waiting key/lamp pair assigned
and a Class of Service that allows a warning tone. Call Waiting is applicable
to the Prime DN or any single appearance DN on the telephone. When
an external call comes into a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone and the
telephone user is on a call, the Call Waiting lamp flashes and a buzz sounds
through the telephone’s speaker.
To use Call Waiting, analog (500/2500 type) telephones must have a
Class of Service that allows Call Waiting and a warning tone. Two tone
bursts are received through the handset to advise an analog (500/2500
type) telephone user of a waiting call. Note that the two calls cannot be
conferenced together.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
296 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Call Waiting applies to Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Central Office (CO),
Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunk
calls extended to a busy telephone by the attendant. Call Waiting also
applies to calls on TIE and Common Control Switching Arrangement
(CCSA) trunks.
Internal Call Waiting
This feature provides Call Waiting for internal calls. This option, defined on
a per-telephone basis, allows Call Waiting for calls from other telephones
within the customer group. These calls include the following:
•direct telephone-to-telephone calls
•attendant-extended internal calls
•telephone-to-telephone call transfer of all trunk and internal calls
Call Waiting Flexible Feature Codes
A user may activate Call Waiting from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
with Call Waiting Class of Service by dialing the Call Waiting Activate
(CWGA) FFC (defined in LD 57). To deactivate Call Waiting, the user dials
either the Call Waiting Deactivate (CWGD) FFC (defined in LD 57) or the
general Deactivate (DEAF) FFC (also defined in LD 57).
If Call Waiting is deactivated using FFCs, then station-to-station call waiting
is also deactivated at the telephone.
If the Class of Service is CWA, ACTIV or DEACT is printed in brackets
when CWT is activated or deactivated.
The CWT FFCs do not affect Precedence Call Waiting.
Operating parameters
A Meridian 1 proprietary telephone can have only one working Call Waiting
key/lamp pair.
Telephones with internal telephone-to-telephone Call Waiting must also
have external Call Waiting (CWA) Class of Service.
A Call Waiting indication is not presented to a single-line telephone in the
transfer or conference mode.
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user receiving a second call can
connect alternately to the original call and the Call Waiting call by a
switchhook flash. The user cannot transfer or conference either call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 297
When a second call goes to a telephone that already has a Call Waiting
call, the second call is recalled to the attendant if it is not answered by the
number of rings defined in the Customer Data Block (RTIM prompt, field zz).
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user who has received a Call Waiting
call routed from the attendant cannot reconnect to the original call until it
has been released from the console.
Attendant Administration does not support the Internal Call Waiting feature.
If a call is waiting and Call Waiting is deactivated using the Call Waiting
Deactivate (CWGD) FFC, the call that is waiting is allowed to continue
waiting while any new calls will not be allowed to wait.
Feature interactions
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
When an Advice of Charge call is transferred to a busy set with Call Waiting
Allowed, the transferring station is charged until the call is answered.
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
If a set that has the Station-to station Call Waiting feature active (CLS SWA
and a Call Waiting (CWT) key for digital sets) is idle when an Attendant
Blocking of DN attempt is made, the Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is
allowed and processed as normal. If the DN is idle and there is an active
call on the Call Waiting key, the Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is allowed.
If a set has the Station-to-station Call Waiting feature active and the DN to
be blocked is busy when an Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is made, the
Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is canceled and busy tone is returned.
For a set that has the Call Waiting (or Station-to-station Call Waiting) feature
active and a DN is blocked due to the Attendant Blocking of DN feature, any
incoming call to the blocked DN will receive busy tone.
Attendant Break-In
If the destination DN has a camped-on incoming trunk call, the attendant
cannot extend the urgent incoming call as a Camp-On call.
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators
The ICI feature is used with the Call Waiting feature to recognize, answer,
and process incoming calls.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
298 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Attendant Queuing
Call Waiting options do not apply to calls queued to a specified attendant.
The exception to this is the display call waiting key, which shows the number
of calls in the overall attendant queue and the calls in the queue for a
specified attendant.
Automatic Line Selection
A call on the Call Waiting key is not selected.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Waiting.
Call Forward Busy - proprietary telephones
If Class of Service allows Call Forward Busy and Call Waiting Allowed, and
the proprietary telephone has a Call Waiting key, calls do not forward to the
attendant when the telephone is busy and another call is waiting.
Call Forward Busy - Analog (500/2500 type) telephones
If a telephone has Call Forward Busy and Call Waiting Allowed Class of
Service, calls are forwarded to the attendant when the telephone is busy
and has another call waiting.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
Call Waiting can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature has been activated. When a busy set with Call Waiting configured
is encountered, it will terminate on Call Waiting.
Call Forward, Internal Calls
Internal Call Forward takes precedence over Call Waiting.
Call Forward No Answer
If a call to a telephone gets Call Forward No Answer treatment to another
telephone which is busy, Call Waiting and Camp-On do not apply. The call
will attempt to terminate on the original DN again.
Call Park
A recall of a parked call is not presented in the Call Waiting mode. If an
internal telephone is in the parked state, Call Waiting to that telephone
is not provided.
Call Pickup Network Wide
Call Waiting calls cannot be picked up.
Call Waiting Redirection
The option selected for Call Waiting Redirection treatment also applies to
calls given Internal Call Waiting treatment.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 299
Camp-On
Call Waiting and Camp-On are mutually exclusive. If a Call Waiting Class of
Service or key is defined, Camp-On cannot be provided.
Camp-on, Station
Call Waiting takes precedence over Station Camp-On.
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control
An attendant cannot apply Call Waiting on an outgoing call that follows
Called Party Control.
Dial Intercom
Call Waiting does not apply to a Dial Intercom appearance.
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion
Executive Intrusion is permitted (consult-only state) into a requested party
having call waiting.
Directory Number Delayed Ringing
Call Waiting tones apply to SCN/MCN keys as per existing operation. The
Directory Number Delayed Ringing does not apply, and the user is informed
of the incoming call immediately.
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering
Call Waiting to a boss set with filtering active is routed to the secretary set.
Flexible Feature Code enhancement
The Call Waiting Deactivate (CWGD) FFC may be used to deactivate Call
Waiting. If a call is waiting when Call Waiting is deactivated, the call is
allowed to continue waiting while any new calls will not be allowed to wait.
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number
Call Waiting is not supported on data calls to a dynamic voice/data TN. Call
Waiting is supported for voice calls to dynamic voice/data TN.
Group Hunt
Call Waiting to a Pilot DN will not be supported.
Hunting
If a call comes into a busy DN, it begins the hunting route defined from the
called DN. If there are idle DNs on the hunting route, the call becomes a
Call Waiting call on the called DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
300 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Idle Extension Notification
This feature can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC
feature is activated. When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to place
an IEN request against the set.
ISDN Night Service
If a call is diverted to a third-party operator Night DN that is busy, Call
Waiting may be activated (if equipped). The call to the third-party operator
circuit switched network is released.
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion
On an Analog (500/2500 type) set, Call Completion notification waits until
the set has finished an active call. If Call Waiting is configured on a set,
notification is presented after the Call Waiting call. If an additional call is
queued while Ring Again free notification is waiting on a set, the waiting call
takes precedence over the Call Completion notification. An established Call
Completion call is also queued if a set has Call Waiting feature equipped
and is occupied on another call.
Message Center
Call Waiting calls are not forwarded to a Message Center.
Multi-Party Operations
A user of an analog (500/2500 type) telephone can answer a Call Waiting
call, thereby establishing a consultation connection. The user can dial
control digits, as normal. To toggle the calls, the toggle control digit must be
used rather than a switchhook flash.
Multi-Party Operations
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone may be assigned both CWA and TSA
Classes of Service. The user can establish a Consultation connection by
answering Call Waiting during an active established call. If this is done,
Control Digit features (CNFD, TGLD, and DISD) are available. Note that
Programmable Control Digit TGLD, rather than a switchhook flash, is used
to toggle the calls. Operation with XFA Class of Service is unchanged.
The Three-party Service feature changes the operation of Call Waiting for
all analog (500/2500 type) telephones as follows (regardless of whether the
sets have TSA Class of Service. If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
user activates Waiting during an active call so as to establish a Consultation
connection, and if the user goes on-hook during the Consultation
connection, the operation is treated as an AOCS misoperation. This
recovery of misoperation will take place even if the MPO package is not
equipped. In this case, the controlling party is re-rung by the held party
regardless of the CCDO and the recovery of misoperation options.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 301
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user attempts to set up a
Consultation connection by dialing a busy DN and if the Call Waiting
conditions are satisfied, the controlling party will hear ringback tone and
the active party will hear Call Waiting tone. If the controlling party goes
on-hook before the active party has answered, the held call is disconnected
regardless of the MPO options and Call Waiting tone is removed from the
active party.
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone cannot have Call Waiting during the
patience tone.
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone may be assigned both CWA and TSA
Classes of Service. The user can establish a Consultation connection by
answering Call Waiting during an active established call. If this is done,
Control Digit features (CNFD, TGLD, and DISD) are available. Note that
Programmable Control Digit TGLD, rather than a switchhook flash, is used
to toggle the calls. Operation with XFA Class of Service is unchanged.
The Three-party Service feature changes the operation of Call Waiting for
all analog (500/2500 type) telephones as follows (regardless of whether the
sets have TSA Class of Service. If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
user activates Waiting during an active call so as to establish a Consultation
connection, and if the user goes on-hook during the Consultation
connection, the operation is treated as an AOCS misoperation. This
recovery of misoperation will take place even if the MPO package is not
equipped. In this case, the controlling party is re-rung by the held party
regardless of the CCDO and the recovery of misoperation options.
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user attempts to set up a
Consultation connection by dialing a busy DN and if the Call Waiting
conditions are satisfied, the controlling party will hear ringback tone and
the active party will hear Call Waiting tone. If the controlling party goes
on-hook before the active party has answered, the held call is disconnected
regardless of the MPO options and Call Waiting tone is removed from the
active party.
Night Restriction Classes of Service
If Call Waiting and Night Restriction for Call Waiting Class of Service
(NRWA) are assigned, Call Waiting is operational for the set only when
Night Service is in effect.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
302 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Night Service Enhancements
This feature will terminate incoming Night calls to busy DNs by applying
Call Waiting. This is done even if the Night DN is an analog (500/2500
type) telephone with Call Waiting Denied (CWD) Class of Service, or if
the Night DN is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone without a Call Waiting
(CWT) key assigned.
All telephones (analog (500/2500 type) and Meridian 1 proprietary) is given
Night Call Waiting tone, if the NWT prompt in LD 15 was responded to with
"YES", regardless of the Warning Tone (WTA,WTD) Class of Service setting
of the set. Meridian 1 proprietary telephones is given Night Call Waiting
tone in the handset instead of the speaker buzz for Call Waiting.
On Hold on Loudspeaker
Call Waiting can be applied to a busy loudspeaker DN.
Ring Again
The user is notified that a previously busy line is free only when both the
original call and the waiting call have disconnected.
Station Camp-on
Call Waiting takes precedence over Station Camp-On.
Feature packaging
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting is included in base system software.
For Call Waiting FFCs, the following packages are required:
•Background Terminal Facility (BGD) package 99
•Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Allow Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones."
(page 302)
Allow Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Allow Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."
(page 303)
Allow Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
LD 10 - Allow Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 303
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (CWD) CWA
(SWD) SWA
(WTA) WTD
(Deny) allow Call Waiting.
(Deny) allow internal Call Waiting (if SWA is defined, CWA must
also be defined).
(Allow) deny warning tone.
LD 11 - Allow Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS SWA
WTD allow internal Call Waiting.
deny warning tone.
KEY xx CWT Add a Call Waiting key.
Feature operation
To answer a Call Waiting call on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, follow
these steps:
Step Action
1Press Hold when you hear a tone during a telephone call.
2Press Call Wait to answer the waiting call.
—End—
To return to your first call, follow these steps:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
304 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting
Step Action
1Press Hold if you want to put your second call on Hold.
2Press the extension key that has the first call on it.
—End—
To answer a Call Waiting call on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, follow
these steps:
•Flash the switchhook when you hear a beep during a telephone call.
Your current call is on Hold and you are connected to the waiting call.
To return to your first call:
•Flash the switchhook.
The following instructions are for using Call Waiting FFCs:
•Allow – The user must dial the Call Waiting Activate (CWGA) FFC.
•Disallow – The user must dial the Call Waiting Deactivate (ATDD) FFC
or the Deactivate (DEAF) FFC.
•Use prerequisites – To set Call Waiting, the telephone must have Call
Waiting Allowed (CWA) Class of Service.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
305
Called Party Control on Internal Calls
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 305)
"Operating parameters" (page 305)
"Feature interactions" (page 306)
"Feature packaging" (page 306)
"Feature implementation" (page 307)
"Feature operation" (page 308)
Feature description
The Called Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) feature allows the
called party with Class of Service Malicious Call Trace Allowed to activate
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) even after the calling party goes on-hook. When
enabled, the calling party is prevented from releasing a call until the called
party has initially released. If the calling party goes on hook, the call is put
on hold and both parties are given call hold treatment. When the called
party activates the call trace request, the calling party’s information is
printed in the call trace record.
This feature builds on the capabilities of the existing Called Party Disconnect
Control (CPDC) and Malicious Call Trace (MCT) features. Called Party
Control on Internal Calls is applicable on set to set calls and can be
activated during or after a malicious call has occurred.
Operating parameters
The feature is applicable to all systems.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
306 Called Party Control on Internal Calls
This feature is designed for stand alone application only and is not
supported across a network. On a set to set call, the calling and the called
party must belong to the same customer on the same system.
Called Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) is not supported on ISDN
BRI sets.
If an attendant console is the calling party and involved in a call with a set,
the CPCI feature functionality is not provided to the call.
The CPCI feature is not supported with features such as Attendant Recall,
Override, Call Park and Privacy Release.
If the system initializes during an established call, the call remains
established. Following initialization, the calling party can successfully
release from a connected call prior to the called party releasing.
For this feature, the called party must have a Malicious Call Trace Allowed
(MCTA) Class of Service configured in the Customer Data Block (LD 15).
The existing limitations of Malicious Call Trace apply to this feature. When
MCT is requested, the information is printed in the call trace record.
If the called party does not release the connection, then the calling party
remains established until the called party releases.
Feature interactions
Automatic Hold
If Called Party Control on Internal Calls is active, an established call is put
on hold regardless of the Automatic Hold Class of Service assigned to the
set when a second call is originated or answered.
Call Hold, Deluxe
The calling party and called party can put either party on hold. However,
the calling party cannot release the call while the called party is on hold.
The called party is permitted to release the call.
Held Call Clearing
With Called Party Control on Internal Call enabled, a call on hold is not
cleared when the calling party releases. This occurs whether or not the
Held Call Clearing feature has been activated.
Feature packaging
Called Party Control on Internal Calls requires the new package Called
Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) package 310 and also requires
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 307
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure Called Party Control on Internal Calls in the
Customer Data Block." (page 307)
Configure Called Party Control on Internal Calls in the Customer Data
Block.
2. "LD 57 - Configure Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code." (page
307)
Configure Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.
3. "LD 10 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Analog (500/2500 type) sets."
(page 308)
Enable Malicious Call Trace on Analog (500/2500 type) sets.
4. "LD 11 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Meridian 1 proprietary sets."
(page 308)
Enable Malicious Call Trace on Meridian 1 proprietary sets.
LD 15 - Configure Called Party Control on Internal Calls in the Customer Data Block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Change Features and options.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
- MCDC YES Malicious Call DN/CLID printing allowed.
CPCI YES Called Party Control on Internal Calls allowed.
NO = Called Party Control on Internal Calls denied.
LD 57 - Configure Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CODE MTRC Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.
MTRC xxxx Enter Flexible Feature Code.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
308 Called Party Control on Internal Calls
LD 10 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Analog (500/2500 type) sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Analog Set Type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
CLS MCTA Malicious Call Trace allowed.
MCTD = Malicious Call Trace denied.
LD 11 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Meridian 1 proprietary sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
CLS
KEY
MCTA
xxx TRC
Malicious Call Trace allowed.
MCTD = Malicious Call Trace denied.
Key Number, Malicious Call Trace.
For information on the implementation of the Malicious Call Trace feature,
refer to the Malicious Call Trace feature description in Features and Services
Fundamentals (NN43001-106), Book 2.
Feature operation
Feature operation is described in the following scenarios.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 309
Simple Call - Meridian 1 Proprietary Sets
Set A, the calling party, initiates a call to Set B, the called party. Set B has
Class of Service Malicious Call Trace Allowed (MCTA) configured. With
Called Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) activated, Set B can activate
Malicious Call Trace even after Set A has gone on-hook. This operation
is possible because Set A is not idled until Set B has gone on-hook.
Depending on the type of telephone, CPCI activation is done by completing
the following:
Step Action
1Enter the SPRE code and "83" access code;
2Dial the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) Flexible Feature Code (FFC) or
3Activate the Call Trace key.
—End—
With Called Party Control on Internal Calls, Set B can activate the Malicious
Call Trace feature during an active call between Set A and Set B as well as
after Set A has gone on-hook. Set A is not idled until Set B goes on-hook.
Simple Call - Analog (500/2500 type) Sets
Step Action
1Flash the switchhook. A special dial tone is heard that signifies the
call is on hold.
2Enter the SPRE code and "83" access code.
3Dial the Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.
4Go on-hook.
—End—
Conference Call
When the calling party and the called party both are involved in a conference
call then the following operation is observed:
1. A party that called a set with CLS MCTA is only allowed to release if the
called party has gone on hook and no other conferee has CLS MCTA or
all remaining conferees were originators of a CPCI call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
310 Called Party Control on Internal Calls
2. In a three party conference between the called party, calling party and
the recorder then the recorder is not considered as a conferee. The
recorder is treated as a simple call for called party control on internal
calls feature.
3. In a set to set call, if the called party establishes a conference with a
trunk then the called party control on internal calls feature functionality is
provided as long as the last called party (with CLS configured as MCTA)
which goes on hook is a set rather than a trunk.
Transfer Call
If calling party and the called party are both involved in a simple call
and either party tries to transfer the call to another set then the following
operation is observed:
1. If the called party in a CPCI call attempts to transfer the call to a set with
CLS MCTA, it is not allowed to complete its transfer.
2. If the called party transfers the call across the network then the called
party is allowed to complete its transfer across the network and the
transferred to party does not have any control on the calling party.
3. If the calling party in a CPCI call attempts to transfer the call to another
set, it is not allowed to complete its transfer regardless of that set’s
Class of Service.
Call on Hold
If calling party and the called party both are involved in a simple call and
either party tries to put the call on hold then the following operation is
observed:
1. If the calling party tries to release the call then the calling party is not
allowed to release from the call.
2. If the called party tries to release the call then the called party is allowed
to release from the call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
311
Called Party Disconnect Control
Content This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 311)
"Operating parameters" (page 311)
"Feature interactions" (page 312)
"Feature packaging" (page 313)
"Feature implementation" (page 313)
"Feature operation" (page 313)
Feature description
Called Party Disconnect Control allows the system to control the
disconnecting of calls on Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX),
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA), Direct Inward Dialing
(DID), TIE, Wide Area telephone Service (WATS), modem, and Centralized
Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks. The trunk route data
block has been modified so that a route can be specified for Called Party
Disconnect Control.
With Called Party Disconnect Control, an incoming trunk call answered
within the system is not disconnected until the system end goes on-hook. If
the calling party goes on-hook, the connection is held, allowing the call to
be traced in emergency situations. If the calling party goes off-hook again,
the call is not reestablished.
Operating parameters
An incoming call on a trunk route with Called Party Disconnect Control
allowed can be transferred to another telephone within the system, but
cannot be transferred to a trunk.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
312 Called Party Disconnect Control
An incoming call with Called Party Disconnect Control can be forwarded to
another telephone, but not to another trunk.
Tandem trunk connections are not allowed on incoming calls on trunks with
Called Party Disconnect Control allowed.
If Barge-In or Busy Verify is applied to trunks with Called Party Disconnect
allowed, the trunk is disconnected.
Force disconnect, through service change and maintenance, overrides
Called Party Disconnect Control.
Feature interactions
Automatic Answerback
Incoming calls on a trunk with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed
that terminate on a telephone with Handsfree Answerback are answered
automatically. They are not disconnected automatically, however, when the
calling party goes on-hook.
Conference
Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as trunks
without disconnect supervision when conferenced.
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) - Commonwealth of Independent States
(CIS) Called Party Disconnect Control may not be used in the CIS market because
of its signaling requirements.
Malicious Call Traced - Enhanced
Prior to this feature, the Called Party Control (CDPC) option was not
supported for conference calls. The CDPC option is now supported if the
conference contains exactly one recording trunk, one MCT activating party
and one other trunk. This is done to make the recorder transparent to the
user. The CDPC option remains unsupported for all other conference calls.
Meridian 911
The Called Party Disconnect (CPDC) feature is used to retain a 911 trunk
when a 911 call is disconnected by the caller. No modification to the feature
is required for Meridian 911, except lifting the CPDC and Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) NCFW limitation. 911 Calls, arriving through trunks with
CPDC defined, is allowed to NCFW, unlike non-911 ACD calls.
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon
There is no interaction with M911 Call Abandon and Called Party Disconnect
Control.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 313
Periodic Clearing Enhancement
Called Party Disconnect Control can exist on the same system and function
on the same route, but is not to be used in conjunction with Periodic
Clearing.
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music
This feature enhancement is not supported if used together with Toll
Operator Break-In.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
LD 16 - Define Called Party Disconnect Control for a trunk route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE CDB Customer Data Block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CNTL (NO) YES (Do not) change the controls or timers.
...
CPDC (NO) YES (Deny) allow Called Party Disconnect Control for the trunk route.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
314 Called Party Disconnect Control
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
315
Calling Party Name Display Denied
Content This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 315)
"Operating parameters" (page 317)
"Feature interactions" (page 317)
"Feature packaging" (page 318)
"Feature implementation" (page 318)
"Feature operation" (page 319)
Feature description
This enhancement to the Calling Party Name Display feature allows a
customer to define, on an originating set, whether or not to allow the display
of the calling and called party name and/or digits on the terminating set.
This option can be defined individually for each customer set, and applies
to all Meridian telephone types. The display of digits is controlled by "digit
display allowed on other set" (DIGA) or "digit display denied on other set"
(DIGD) Class of Service. The name display is controlled by the "name
display allowed on other set" (NAMA) or "name display denied on other set"
(NAMD) Class of Service.
The following scenarios are possible, where set A is the originating set and
set B is the terminating set. DIGA "Allowed" and "Denied" indicates whether
or not the called party digits display are allowed or denied on the set. If the
display of digits is denied, the digits are replaced by four dashes (for an
internal call) or seven dashes (for an external call). If the name display is
denied (that is, NAMD), the name is replaced by "XXXX".
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
316 Calling Party Name Display Denied
In the following example, originating set A has DIGA and NAMA Class of
Service, and terminating set B also has DIGA and NAMA Class of Service.
During an established call, the respective displays would be as follows:
Figure 2
Display of Calling Party Denied example
Figure 3
Example of displays when the originating and terminating sets both have Class of Service set
to DIGA and NAMA
If set A has DIGD and NAMD Class of Service, and set B also has DIGD
and NAMD Class of Service, the displays would be as follows (keep in mind
that set A displays the dialed digits even though set B has DIGD Class
of Service).
Figure 4
Example of displays when the originating and terminating sets both have Class of Service set
to DIGD and NAMD
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 317
Operating parameters
This enhancement pertains to both standalone and network environments.
The called party digits are displayed on the originating set, regardless of the
Class of Service of the terminating set.
Feature interactions
Attendant Consoles
The Calling Party Name Display Denied enhancement cannot be applied to
attendant consoles.
Call Forward
Call Transfer
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating set.
This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of Service
of the calling set and the forwarding/transferring set. The name of the
forwarding/transferring set is not displayed on the calling and terminating set.
Calling Party Privacy
For outgoing calls, if the Calling Party Privacy (CPP) package is equipped,
the CPP feature will take precedence over the Calling Party Name Display
Denied feature for restricting the Calling Party Name and Number. For
example, if an outgoing ISDN call is marked as a CPP call, the outgoing
SETUP message will include the Calling Party Number IE with the
Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation Restricted" and the Display IE
with the CPND Indicator set to "Presentation Denied", to inhibit both the
Calling Party Number and Name being displayed on the terminating set,
regardless of whether or not the Calling Party Name Display Denied feature
allows the display of the Calling Party Name and/or Number.
The Calling Party Name Display Denied feature takes precedence over
the CPP feature for displaying an incoming ISDN call. If International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped, an incoming
ISDN call with the Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation Restricted"
in the Calling Party Number IE or the CPND Indicator set to "Presentation
Denied" in the Display IE is marked as a CPP call, and will display "ACOD +
Member" or "XXXX" as for the Calling Party Name Display Denied feature.
Conference
Calling Party Name Display Denied does not apply to conference calls.
ISDN QSIG Name Display
Call Party Name Display and Calling Party Name Display Denied interact
with ISDN Q Interface Signaling Protocol (QSIG) Name Display, depending
on the Name Display configuration in LD 16 for BRI or LD 17 for PRI. When
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
318 Calling Party Name Display Denied
a QSIG network is interacting with an Meridian Customer Defined Network
(MCDN) network providing network capability ND3, both the MCDN and
QSIG Name Display feature function on the same level.
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers
For a ringing call to a Multiple Appearance Directory Number (DN), the
name on the calling set display can be suppressed by configuring any of
the Terminal Numbers with NAMD Class of Service. The digit display on
the calling set cannot be suppressed—the called digits are displayed even
though the Class of Service on any of the Terminal Numbers is DIGD.
The called set display is subject to the Class of Service of the calling
party. For an established call to a Multiple Appearance Directory Number
(DN), the calling set display is subject to the Class of Service configured
for the answering set. The answering set display only is subject to the
Class of Service of the calling party—the displays of the other sets in the
Multiple-appearance group are blank.
Office Data Administration System (ODAS)
Depending on the Class of Service of the originating set, the ODAS
designator is displayed or replaced by Xs, up to the maximum number of
characters that the designator may have.
Feature packaging
Calling Party Name Display Denied requires International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Configure the Calling Party Name Denied Class of Service for
analog (500/2500 type) telephon" (page 318)
Configure the Calling Party Name Denied Class of Service for analog
(500/2500 type) telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Configure the Calling Party Name Display Denied Class of
Service for proprietary telephones." (page 319)
Configure the Calling Party Name Display Denied Class of Service for
proprietary telephones.
LD 10 - Configure the Calling Party Name Denied Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 319
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
...
CLS (DDGA) DDGD
(NAMA) NAMD
(Allow) deny DN to be displayed on other set.
(Allow) deny name to displayed on other set.
LD 11 - Configure the Calling Party Name Display Denied Class of Service for proprietary
telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
...
CLS (DDGA) DDGD
(NAMA) NAMD
(Allow) deny DN to be displayed on other set.
(Allow) deny name to be displayed on other set.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
320 Calling Party Name Display Denied
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
321
Calling Party Privacy
The Calling Party Privacy (CPP) feature enables the system to support the
blocking of a Calling Party’s Number and Name from being displayed at the
terminating set on an individual call basis. Users can dial a Calling Party
Privacy code (for example, *67 from a proprietary set or 1167 from an analog
(500/2500 type) set) to prevent their telephone number and name from being
displayed on a receiving telephone across the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN). Internal calls within the system have originating numbers
or names displayed, even though the originating call has requested privacy.
This feature also allows a per-line blocking Class of Service to be
programmed for station sets for public network calls. This relieves the user
from having to dial the Flexible Feature Code (FFC) for every call, but in
every other way is equivalent to the per-call blocking.
Please refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface Fundamentals (NN43001-569)
for complete information.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
322 Calling Party Privacy
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
323
Calling Party Privacy Override
Content This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 323)
"Operating parameters" (page 326)
"Feature interactions" (page 327)
"Feature packaging" (page 336)
"Feature implementation" (page 336)
"Feature operation" (page 339)
Feature description
Calling Party Privacy Override (CPPO) enhances the functionality of the
Calling Party Privacy (CPP) feature. With Calling Party Privacy Override,
calling party information can be selectively unblocked on a per-call basis.
With the Calling Party Privacy Override feature, a circuit switched network
user can selectively unblock calling party information on a per-call basis
when Class of Service is set to CLBA. The user unblocks the calling party
information by dialing a Calling Party Privacy Override Flexible Feature
Code prior to dialing the destination number. When the CPPO Flexible
Feature Code is dialed before the destination number, the user’s calling
party information is displayed on the terminating set. The default for the
Calling Party Privacy Override Flexible Feature Code is "*82" for proprietary
sets and "1182" for analog (500/2500 type) sets. The Calling Party Privacy
Override Flexible Feature Code is defined in Overlay 57.
CPPO is provisioned on a trunk route basis. Any trunk type that can support
an outgoing call can request the CPPO feature (see "Operating parameters"
(page 326) for more information).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
324 Calling Party Privacy Override
When the CPPO Flexible Feature Code is dialed prior to the normal dialing
sequence, the call is marked as a CPPO call. The CPPO Flexible Feature
Code is then removed from the dialed digits stored in the call register. If the
outgoing trunk route provisions CPPO, then the Privacy Override Indicator
is sent to the far end, and the Calling Party Number and Name information
is displayed on the receiving telephone. If the outgoing trunk route does not
provision CPPO, the call does not carry the Privacy Override Indicator.
The following example illustrates Calling Party Privacy Override functionality:
Step Action
1Set A, a Meridian 1 proprietary set with Class of Service set to
CLBA, goes off-hook.
2Set A dials the Calling Party Privacy Override Flexible Feature Code,
defined in Overlay 57. Calling Party Privacy Override is initiated.
3Set A dials the destination number for Set B.
4The call rings on Set B.
5The calling party information of Set A is presented on the display
screen of Set B.
—End—
Outgoing calls
For an outgoing non-ISDN trunk call, the Privacy Override Indicator is
defined on the outgoing trunk route. The CPPO Flexible Feature Code is
outpulsed to the far end provided that the outgoing trunk route provisions
CPPO. If CPPO is not provisioned on the trunk route, then the call does not
carry the Privacy Override Indicator.
For an outgoing ISDN call from one system to another, the Privacy Override
Indicator is represented when the Presentation Indicator field is set to
"Presentation Allowed" in the Calling Party Number Information Element
(IE) and the Call Party Name Display (CPND) Indicator field is set to
"Presentation Allowed" in the Display IE.
For an outgoing ISDN call to the Central Office, the Privacy Override
Indicator is represented when the Presentation Indicator field is set to
"Presentation Allowed" in the Calling Party Number IE and when the CPND
information is included in the Display IE.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 325
Incoming calls
An incoming ISDN call is recognized as a CPPO call (that is, it carries
the Privacy Override Indicator) if the Presentation Indicator field is set to
"Presentation Allowed" in the Calling Party Number IE and if the CPND
Indicator is set to "Presentation Allowed" in the Display IE (if it exists).
When an incoming call is on a non-ISDN route, the system does not receive
the Privacy Override Indicator.
Tandem Calls
Incoming ISDN calls
ISDN to ISDN tandem For an incoming call tandeming through the
system, any incoming Privacy Override Indicator is only repeated to the
outgoing trunk route that also has CPPO provisioned.
When an incoming ISDN trunk call is tandemed through an ISDN trunk to a
system, the Presentation Indicator or the CPND Indicator, received from the
incoming ISDN trunk, is tandemed to the outgoing ISDN trunk.
When an incoming ISDN trunk call is tandemed through an ISDN trunk to a
CO, the Presentation Indicator received from the incoming ISDN trunk is
tandemed to the outgoing ISDN trunk. If the Display IE with the CPND
Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed" is received from an incoming ISDN
trunk, the Display IE, containing the Call Party Name, is sent across in the
SETUP message tandemed to the outgoing ISDN trunk.
ISDN to non-ISDN tandem When an incoming ISDN trunk call is
tandemed to a non-ISDN trunk, the incoming call is treated as a CPPO call
only if both the CLID and CPND Indicators are set to "Allowed". Otherwise,
the call is treated as a CPP call.
Incoming non-ISDN calls
For incoming non-ISDN calls, the system does not receive the Privacy
Override Indicator.
When a call on an incoming non-ISDN route is tandemed on the system,
the call is tandemed based on how the CPP flag (TCPP) prompt is defined
in the Route Data Block for the outgoing route.
When TCPP is set to YES, an incoming non-ISDN call tandemed to this
route is treated as a CPP call.
When TCPP is set to NO, an incoming non-ISDN call tandemed to this route
is treated as a CPPO call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
326 Calling Party Privacy Override
Non-ISDN to ISDN tandem Even though a Privacy Override Indicator
is not provided for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call, if the outgoing route
has TCPP set to NO, the Presentation Indicator field in the Calling Party
IE is set to "Presentation Allowed".
Non-ISDN to non-ISDN tandem A Privacy Override Indicator is not
provided for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call. If the outgoing route has
TCPP set to NO, the Privacy Override Indicator defined for that route is
outpulsed, provided that the outgoing route provisions CPPO.
Operating parameters
Central Office Trunks (COT), Foreign Exchange (FEX), Wide Area
Telephone Service (WATS), and Direct Inward Dial (DID) are the only trunk
route types (including ISA service routes) that can out-pulse the Privacy
Override Indicator for an outgoing non-ISDN call. All ISDN trunk routes
provision the CPPO feature.
A non-ISDN trunk route does not provision the CPPO feature if the out-pulse
asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) package (package 104) is configured.
During SYSLOAD, the CPPO database is removed from the non-ISDN trunk
routes if the OPAO package is configured.
The Privacy Override Indicator, defined for a non-ISDN trunk route
(dial-pulse or digitone), consists of any four arbitrary digits from 0-9. The
asterisk (*) or octothorpe (#) cannot be part of the Privacy Override Indicator
for dial-pulse trunks. For digitone trunks, the asterisk (*) can only be the first
digit of the Privacy Override Indicator Flexible Feature Code.
The asterisk and octothorpe are not outpulsed if the OPAO package is
configured. The asterisk signals a three second pause and the octothorpe
indicates end-of-dialing. The octothorpe cannot be used in a Privacy
Override Indicator.
The asterisk (*) used to introduce a pause while out-pulsing digits is
supported on analog and DTI trunks, but not supported on ISDN trunks. On
ISDN trunks, if the OPAO feature is enabled, the asterisk (*) is outpulsed
as a called party digit.
Privacy Override Indicators are not received from the CO or non-ISDN
DID trunks.
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code cannot conflict with any internal DN,
including the Special Prefix (SPRE) code.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 327
When a user dials the Flexible Feature Code defined for the CPPO feature
and if CPPO is not provisioned on the outgoing trunk route, the call proceeds
without carrying the Privacy Override Indicator.
The CPPO feature does not affect whether or not the Calling Party Number
and Name information is displayed for internal calls within the system, even
if the originator requests CPPO.
All incoming non-ISDN calls with the Privacy Override Indicator terminate
on the system. If the Privacy Override Indicator is not defined in the Flexible
Feature Code for CPPO, an overflow tone (unrecognized digits) is provided
to the user.
If the Stored Number Redial (SNR)/Last Number Redial (LNR) feature is
used by the originator of a CPPO call to store the dialed digits, the CPPO
Flexible Feature Code is stored against the SNR/LNR database. If the user
removes that CPPO Flexible Feature Code and then the SNR/LNR feature
is used to re-initiate the call, overflow tone is returned to the user.
ISDN implementation for this feature includes DMS100/250, SL-100, AT&T4,
AT&T5, TR-1268 (NI-2), Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN)
Private Networks, EuroISDN, QSIG, and BRI trunks.
The CPPO feature is supported on the following International PRI (IPRI)
connectivity: Ericsson AXE-10 CO Connectivity (Australia), Ericsson
AXE10-CO Connectivity (Sweden), French Numeris CO Connectivity, Japan
D70 CO Connectivity, Swissnet 2 CO Connectivity, SYS-12 CO Connectivity,
1TR6 CO Connectivity (Germany), and Asia Pacific ISDN Phase 2.
The CPPO feature supports the following North American connectivity:
DMS100/250, S1100, Lucent #4 ESS (ESS4), Lucent #5 EES (ESS5), and
TR-1268 (NI-2).
CPPO does not support R2MFC signaling.
Feature interactions
Attendant Consoles
A CPPO call can be originated from any Meridian 1 attendant console.
Attendant consoles request CPPO by preceding the normal dialing
sequence with the Flexible Feature Code for CPPO.
Attendant consoles can also initiate a CPPO call using the Autoline key.
An outgoing trunk call, initiated by pressing the Autoline key, carries the
Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code, followed by
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
328 Calling Party Privacy Override
the normal dialing sequence, is stored against the Autoline key. The CPPO
Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits
(currently 31) stored against the Autoline key.
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code can also be stored against the Autoline
key. An outgoing CPPO call can then be initiated by pressing the Autoline
key followed by manually dialing the destination number.
An outgoing CPPO call can also be initiated by dialing the CPPO Flexible
Feature Code followed by pressing the Autoline key, on which the normal
dialing sequence of digits for the destination number is stored.
Autodial
An outgoing trunk call, initiated by pressing the Autodial key, carries the
Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code followed by
the normal dialing sequence is stored against the Autodial key. The CPPO
Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits
(currently 31) stored against the Autodial key.
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code can be stored against the Autodial key. In
this case, an outgoing CPPO call can be initiated by pressing the Autodial
key followed by manually dialing the normal sequence of digits for the
destination number.
An outgoing CPPO call can also be initiated by dialing the CPPO Flexible
Feature Code followed by pressing the Autodial key on which the normal
dialing sequence of digits for the destination number is stored.
Automatic Call Distribution
Calls placed by means of Enhanced Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Routing, Enhanced Interflow, Enhanced Night Call Forward, Enhanced
Network Routing, and Network ACD recognize the originator’s CPPO
request.
Automatic Call Distribution MAX
If the CPP package is equipped, ACD MAX reports include the Calling
Line Identification (CLID) for incoming ISDN calls that have the CLID
Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed".
Basic Rate Interface
Although Basic Rate Interface (BRI) networking is not supported in North
America, CPPO treats BRI trunk calls in the same manner as an ISDN
trunk call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 329
Call Detail Recording
Call Detail Recording (CDR) records continue to include the Calling Party
Number even if the caller has requested CPPO. When the CDR record
is generated, the CPPO Flexible Feature Code dialed by the originator is
included in the DIGIT field (if it displays the dialed digits).
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code dialed by the originator is not included
in the DIGIT field if it displays the outpulsed digits. The Privacy Override
Indicator, outpulsed by an outgoing non-ISDN trunk route that provisions
CPPO, is included in the outpulsed digits.
Call Pickup Network Wide
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator is picked up
by a remote set (the requesting party), the Calling Party Number and Name
is displayed on the requesting set.
Call Hold
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator is taken
off hold, the Calling Party Number and Name information is displayed on
the set.
Call Forward All Types
Hunt
Network Hunt
The existing call redirection functionality is not changed by this feature.
When an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator is
forwarded into the public or private networks, the Privacy Override Indicator
is tandemed to the far end to allow the display of the Calling Party Number
and Name, provided that the outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has
CPPO provisioned.
When an incoming ISDN call with Calling Party Number and Name set
to "Presentation Allowed" is forwarded to a set within the same node, the
Calling Party Number and Name is displayed on the terminating set.
When an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded onto a trunk, the
outgoing trunk call from the tandem node carries the Privacy Override
Indicator, provided that the outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has
CPPO provisioned. Also, the TCPP prompt in the Route Data Block must
be set to NO.
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code can be stored on the forwarding Directory
Number (DN), including the forwarding DN for Call Forward All Calls, Hunt
DN and Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
330 Calling Party Privacy Override
If CPPO is requested on the forwarding DN and the call is forwarded across
an ISDN link, the outgoing SETUP message includes the Redirecting
Number IE (if it exists) with the Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation
Allowed".
If CPPO is requested on the forwarding DN and the call is forwarded
across a non-ISDN link, no Privacy Override Indicator is outpulsed to
the terminating node if the originating set did not request CPPO. This is
because no Redirecting Number information is sent across a non-ISDN link.
When an internal call is forwarded into the public or private networks, if the
originator requests CPPO and the outgoing trunk route provisions CPPO,
the Privacy Override Indicator is sent to the far end to allow the display of
the Calling Party Number and Name.
Call Pickup
With CPPO activated, when an incoming trunk call with the Privacy
Override Indicator is picked up locally, the Calling Party Number and Name
information is displayed on the terminating set.
Call Transfer
As per existing operation, if an incoming non-ISDN call is transferred or an
incoming ISDN call is transferred to a non-ISDN trunk, the Connect Party
Number and Name information is not passed to the terminating node. The
CPPO feature does not change this operation.
When an incoming call with the Privacy Override Indicator is transferred
across the MCDN network or to a local set, the originator’s calling party
information is displayed on the final terminating set.
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) sets do not support the Flexible Feature Code
(FFC) feature. CPPO can only be requested by applying the existing Calling
Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) Service option. This is done by setting
the soft key "ID PRES" (if it exists) to "Allowed" or the Presentation of CLID
to far end on outgoing calls (PRES) prompt to YES in Overlay 27. Then an
outgoing ISDN/non-ISDN trunk call carries the Privacy Override Indicator
if the outgoing trunk route provisions CPPO. However, if the Calling Party
Number Information Element (IE) with the Presentation Indicator set to
"Presentation Denied" is included in the SETUP message generated by
the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminal, then the BRI terminal does not
allow CPPO. This is because the Presentation Indicator, generated by the
BRI terminal, always overwrites the Calling Line Identification Restriction
(CLIR) service option.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 331
Calling Party Privacy
If the user requests both Calling Party Privacy and Calling Party Privacy
Override, then the feature last requested takes precedence. The Flexible
Feature Code dialed last determines the type of call.
If a set with Class of Service set to CLBA requests CPPO by dialing the
CPPO Flexible Feature Code, then the call is treated as a CPPO call. If a
set with Class of Service set to CLBD requests CPP by dialing the CPP
Flexible Feature Code, then the call is treated as a CPP call.
If a user dials the Flexible Feature Code for CPPO followed by the Flexible
Feature Code for CPP, then the call is treated as a CPP call. If a user dials
the Flexible Feature Code for CPP followed by the Flexible Feature Code for
CPPO, then the call is treated as a CPPO call.
Calling Party Privacy and Call Forward
Set A, requesting CPPO, calls Set B. Set B Call Forwards All Calls to Set C.
The CPP Flexible Feature Code is part of the forwarding DN. Set A’s number
and name is displayed on Set C as the Calling Party Number and Name;
although, no redirecting number is displayed on Set C. The tandem node
sends the Display IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed" and the
Redirecting Number IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Restricted".
Set A, requesting CPP, calls Set B. Set B Call Forwards All Calls to Set C.
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code is part of the forwarding DN. Set B’s
number is displayed on Set C as the Redirecting Number; although, no
Calling Party Number and Name is displayed on Set C. The tandem node
sends the display IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Restricted" and
the Redirecting Number IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed".
Calling Party Privacy and Call Transfer
Set A, requesting CPPO, calls Set B. Set B answers the call, requests CPP,
and initiates a transfer to Set D. After the transfer is complete, Set A’s
Calling Party Number and Name is displayed on Set D. The request made
by the connected party takes precedence over the transferring party while
displaying the Connect Party Number and Name.
Set A, requesting CPP, calls Set B. Set B answers the call, requests CPPO,
and initiates a transfer to Set D. After the transfer is complete, Set A’s
Calling Party Number and Name is not displayed on Set D. The request
made by the connected party takes precedence over the transferring party
while displaying the Connect Party Number and Name.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
332 Calling Party Privacy Override
Conference
The CPPO feature passes the Privacy Override Indicator to the terminating
set in order to display the Calling Party Number and Name, if the Conference
feature is used for the purpose of performing a transfer.
Display of Calling Party Denied
When the CPP package is equipped, the CPPO feature takes precedence
over the Display of Calling Party Denied (DPD) feature for allowing the
Calling Party Number and Name to be displayed. For example, when an
outgoing ISDN call is marked as a CPPO call, then the outgoing SETUP
message includes the Calling Party Number IE with the Presentation
Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed" and the Display IE with the CPND
Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed". This enables both the Calling Party
Number and Name to be displayed on the terminating set, regardless of
whether the DPD feature allows or denies the display of the Calling Party
Number and/or Name.
E.164 ESN Numbering Plan Enhancement
CPPO can be requested for ESN calls by preceding the dialing sequence
with the Flexible Feature Code defined for the CPPO feature. The CPPO
Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits
(currently 31) allowed for the destination DN.
Feature Group D
When an incoming Feature Group D (FGD) call terminates at a system
locally, the received 10 digit Automatic Number Identification (ANI) is
displayed on the terminating set if the Show ANI Digits on Terminal Displays
(SHAN) field is set to YES in the FGD data block that is associated with the
incoming trunk route. If the originator requests CPPO, the end office sends
the 10 digit ANI to the circuit switched network.
If an incoming FGD call is routed to another switch through ISDN Primary
Rate Interface (PRI) or ISDN Signaling Link (ISL), the outgoing SETUP
message includes the 10 digit ANI (if it exists) as the Calling Party Number
(CLID) with the Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed". This
occurs if the incoming call requests CPPO. CPPO takes precedence over
the SHAN field that is defined in the FGD data block and is associated with
the incoming trunk route to allow the 10 digit ANI display.
Hot Line
Hot line calls carry the Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible
Feature Code followed by the normal dialing sequence is stored in the Hot
Line DN. The CPPO Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum
number of digits (currently 31) allowed for the Hot Line DN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 333
Last Number Redial
The Last Number Redial (LNR) feature stores the CPPO Flexible Feature
Code in the LNR database if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code was included
in the last number dialed by the user. The outgoing re-dialed calls also send
the Privacy Override Indicator to the far end.
Incoming Trunk Programmable Calling Line Identification
When the incoming trunk route is a non-ISDN route, the billing number
(CLID) assigned by the incoming trunk route is passed to the CO with the
Presentation Indicator field set to "Presentation Allowed", if the outgoing
ISDN trunk route has the TCPP prompt set to NO.
When the incoming trunk route is an ISDN route, the "Allowed" Presentation
Indicator is tandemed to the outgoing trunk route. If the Presentation
Indicator is set to "Presentation Allowed" or no Calling Party Number IE is
received on the incoming trunk route, the billing number assigned by the
incoming trunk route is passed to the CO with the Presentation Indicator
field set to "Presentation Allowed", if the incoming trunk route has the Billing
Number Display (BDSP) prompt set to YES or NO.
ISDN Signaling Link
CPPO treats an ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) call in the same manner as an
ISDN trunk call.
Malicious Call Trace
An incoming call to a set with the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) feature
activated includes the Terminal Number (TN) of the calling party in the MCT
record, whether or not the caller has requested CPPO.
Meridian 911
An incoming 911 call with Automatic Number Identification (ANI) information
always displays the ANI digits on the terminating set or passes the ANI
information to the Meridian 911.
Meridian Interactive Voice Response
An incoming ISDN call with the CLID Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed"
sends the CLID to the Meridian Interactive Voice Response (IVR) if the
CPP package is equipped.
Meridian Link
If the CPP package is equipped, an incoming ISDN call with the CLID
Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed" includes the CLID in the Application
Module Link (AML) messages sent to the Meridian Link module.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
334 Calling Party Privacy Override
Meridian Mail
When an incoming ISDN call with the CLID Presentation Indicator set to
"Allowed" terminates on Meridian Mail, the CLID passed to Meridian Mail is
recorded. The call is treated by Meridian Mail as an external call.
Calls placed by means of Through Dial can request Calling Party Privacy
Override. These calls involve the person accessing Meridian Mail (mailbox
user or incoming caller) dialing 0 followed by any telephone number. The
caller is able to dial a CPPO Flexible Feature Code plus the normal dialing
sequence, following the 0. The asterisk (*) or octothorpe (#), as part of the
CPPO Flexible Feature Code, are rejected by Meridian Mail. Therefore, the
CPPO Flexible Feature Code can only consist of seven digits (0-9).
Meridian MAX
If the CPP package is equipped, an incoming ISDN call with the CLID
Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed" sends the CLID to Meridian MAX.
Network Call Redirection
If a set receives a call and is then redirected to the public network on an
ISDN trunk that supports call redirection, then the redirecting IE in the
outgoing SETUP message has the Presentation Indicator set accordingly.
For instance, if the call that had requested CPPO is redirected, the outgoing
SETUP message has the Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed".
Network Message Center
An incoming trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator displays the
Calling Party Number and Name on the Message Center operator’s terminal.
Network Ring Again
A call placed by means of the Network Ring Again feature recognizes the
CPPO request from when the call was originally dialed.
Nortel Symposium Call Center
As per existing operation, an incoming CPPO call routed to Nortel
Symposium Call Center contains the CLID.
Private Line Service
The Private Line Service feature out-pulses the Privacy Override Indicator
only if it is dialed by the originator. The asterisk (*) is outpulsed to the
far end only if it is an Out-pulse Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) call.
Otherwise, the asterisk (*) signals a three-second pause.
The asterisk (*) used to introduce a pause while out-pulsing digits is
supported on analog and DTI trunks, but not supported on ISDN trunks. On
ISDN trunks, if the OPAO feature is enabled, the asterisk (*) is outpulsed
as a called party digit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 335
Remote Virtual Queuing
The Remote Virtual Queuing feature has automatic retry capabilities that
are used when congestion is encountered within the network. The same
Calling Party Privacy Override considerations are provided to the "retries"
as were provided to the originally dialed call.
Ring Again - Busy Trunk
A call that is automatically re-dialed by the Ring Again - Busy Trunk feature
recognizes the CPPO requested when the call is originally dialed.
Speed Call
System Speed Call
When an outgoing trunk call is initiated by dialing a Speed Call code, the
Speed Call code carries the Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible
Feature Code followed by the normal dialing sequence is stored in the
Speed Call Entry represented by the Speed Call code. The CPPO Flexible
Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits (currently
31) allowed per Speed Call list entry.
The user can also store the CPPO Flexible Feature Code in the Speed
Call Entry (or Speed Call key). An outgoing CPPO call can be initiated by
dialing the Speed Call code (or pressing the Speed Call key), followed by
manually dialing the digits.
Stored Number Redial
In the Stored Number Redial (SNR) programming mode, the user can store
the CPPO Flexible Feature Code, followed by the normal dialing sequence
in the SNR database. The outgoing calls originated by the Stored Number
Redial feature send the Privacy Override Indicator to the far end. The
CPPO Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of
digits (currently 31) allowed by the SNR feature.
During an active call on a Meridian 1 proprietary set, the Stored Number
Redial feature stores the CPPO Flexible Feature Code in the SNR database
if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code is included in the number dialed by the
originator. The outgoing re-dialed calls also send the Privacy Override
Indicator to the far end.
Trunk Anti-Tromboning
When trunks are removed, due to the Trunk Anti-Tromboning (TAT)
operation, an ISDN call recognizes the CPPO/CPP requested by the
originator.
Trunk Optimization Before Answer
An optimized call, due to Trunk Optimization Before Answer (TRO)
operation, recognizes the CPPO/CPP requested by the originator.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
336 Calling Party Privacy Override
Virtual Network Services
CPPO treats Virtual Network Services (VNS) trunk calls in the same manner
as ISDN trunk calls. For instance, CPPO does not affect the existing VNS
operation. If CPPO was requested when originating a call, the Presentation
Indicator field of CLID is set to "Presentation Allowed".
VISIT The VISIT which connects to a set receives the Calling Party Number or
Name, since an incoming CPPO call sends the Calling Party Number or
Name to the set for display.
Feature packaging
The Calling Party Privacy Override feature requires the following package:
•Calling Party Privacy (CPP) package 301, which has the following
dependency:
— Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139.
For Calling Party Name Display, Calling Party Name Display (CPND)
package 95 is required. ISDN package 145 is required for ISDN routes.
Non-ISDN trunks must restrict the Outpulse Asterisk and Octothorpe
(OPAO) package 104 to provision the Calling Party Privacy Override feature.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 16 - Configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route."
(page 337)
Configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route.
2. "LD 16 - For an ISDN trunk route, set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem
non-ISDN calls on to this route." (page 337)
For an ISDN trunk route, set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem non-ISDN
calls on to this route.
3. "LD 57 - Define the Flexible Feature Code for the Calling Party Privacy
Override feature." (page 338)
Define the Flexible Feature Code for the Calling Party Privacy Override
feature.
4. "LD 10/11 - Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking."
(page 339)
Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 337
Configuration procedures require that the following conditions are met
before you configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route:
•CPPO is configurable on COT, DID, FEX, WAT and ISA routes.
•OAPO package 104 is restricted or unequipped.
•Route is either OGT (outgoing) or IAO (incoming and outgoing).
LD 16 - Configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
CPP YES Calling Party Privacy/Privacy Override (CPP/CPPO) flag.
Enable CPP/CPPO feature and configure parameters.
(NO) = CPP/CPPO feature is disabled is the default.
- TCPP
(NO)
YES
CPP/CPPO flag treatment for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call
tandemed to this trunk route.
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Override Indicator (default).
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Indicator.
- DTPI (*67) nnnn Digitone Trunk Privacy Indicator
nnnn = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.
- DPPI 0-(1167)-9999 Dial-pulse Trunk Privacy Indicator
- DTPO (*82) nnnn Digitone Trunk Privacy Indicator
nnnn = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.
- DPPO 0-(1182)-9999 Dial-pulse Trunk Privacy Indicator
Configuration procedures require that the following conditions are met before
you set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem non-ISDN calls on to this route:
•The CPP package 301 is equipped.
•Route is either OGT (outgoing) or IAO (incoming and outgoing).
LD 16 - For an ISDN trunk route, set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem non-ISDN calls on to
this route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
338 Calling Party Privacy Override
Prompt Response Description
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
All ISDN trunk routes are CPPO configurable.
...
CPP YES Calling Party Privacy/Privacy Override (CPP/CPPO) flag.
Enable CPP/CPPO feature and configure parameters.
(NO) = CPP/CPPO feature is disabled is the default.
- TCPP
(NO)
YES
CPP/CPPO flag treatment for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call
tandemed to this trunk route.
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Override Indicator (default).
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Indicator.
LD 57 - Define the Flexible Feature Code for the Calling Party Privacy Override feature.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Code.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15.
FFCT (NO)
YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone denied.
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone allowed.
...
CODE CPP CPP Flexible Feature Code
- CPP xxxx Calling Party Privacy code
xxxx = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.
The Flexible Feature Code may be up to 4 digits, or up to 7 digits
with the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package (150).
- CPP xxxx Change the CPP code or enter a <CR> to accept.
CODE CPPO CPPO Flexible Feature Code
- CPPO xxxx Calling Party Privacy Override code
xxxx = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.
The Flexible Feature Code may be up to 4 digits, or up to 7 digits
with the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package (150).
- CPPO xxxx Change the CPPO code or enter a <CR> to accept.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 339
LD 10/11 - Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
DES d...d Designator
The response d...d represents an Office Data Administration
System (ODAS) Station Designator of 1-6 alphanumeric
characters.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
CLS CLBA Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking.
CLBD = Deactivate Calling Party Number and Name per-line
blocking (default).
Feature operation
For a user to override the Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking
allowed (CLBA) Class of Service, the following steps must be performed.
Step Action
1The user goes off hook.
2The user initiates a call by dialing the Calling Party Privacy Override
Flexible Feature Code, defined in LD 57.
3The user dials the destination number.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
340 Calling Party Privacy Override
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
341
Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 341)
"Operating parameters" (page 342)
"Feature interactions" (page 342)
"Feature packaging" (page 343)
"Feature implementation" (page 343)
"Feature operation" (page 343)
Feature description
This feature allows a station or attendant to Camp-on an external trunk call
to another station that is in a ringback or dialing state. If the station on which
the call is camped on becomes idle without going into established state, the
camped-on call rings the station automatically.
This capability applies to standalone and networking environments. Within a
networking environment, the station affecting the Camp-on and the desired
party can be anywhere in the network.
If the Flexible Tones and Cadences package is equipped and periodic
Camp-on tones and cadences are defined, periodic Camp-on tone is given
to the desired station when it goes into established state indicating that a
call is camped on. For analog sets, this is in the form of a tone. For digital
sets, it is a periodic buzz. The Camp-on tone lasts for the duration of the
Camp-on. The desired station receives periodic Camp-on tone, if the station
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
342 Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing
has Warning Tone Allowed class of service and the customer has the
Camp-on Tone Allowed option. Music is provided to the camped-on station,
if the Music package is equipped and defined for the customer.
During Camp-on, as soon as the attendant releases the call or the station
completes the transfer, recall timing begins (the Recall Timer is configured
in LD 15). If the timer times out, the Camp-on is recalled to the attendant. If
the attendant is busy, the recall is queued against the attendant. The call
can no longer be camped on to the desired station without affecting another
Camp-on. If the attendant is in Night Service, the Camp-on receives night
treatment.
If the desired party is on a different node, and Network Attendant Service
(NAS) is equipped, the Camp-on is routed according to the NAS routing
table. If the Camp-on is recalled to the local attendant, and the local
attendant is busy, the recall is queued to the attendant. During this time, the
call may still be answered by the desired station (the call remains camped
on until the attendant answers the recall). This capability is that of the Slow
Camp-on Recall.
Operating parameters
Only one call at a time can be camped on to a station in dialing or ringback
state.
The cadence for Periodic Camp-on can be defined in LD 56. Periodic
Camp-on can be allowed or denied on a customer and set basis.
Feature interactions
Attendant Forward No Answer
Camp-on recall takes precedence over the Attendant Forward No Answer
recall. However, if during the recall the customer goes into Night Service
and the recall is not answered by the night DN, the call is disconnected
according to the Attendant No Answer feature processing.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Waiting
Call Waiting and Call Forward All Calls take precedence over Camp-on.
First-Second Degree Busy
If the First-Second Degree Busy Indication is equipped, and the attendant
attempts to Camp-on a call to a station in the ringing or dialing state, the
attendant receives first degree busy indication. If the attendant attempts to
Camp-on a call to a station that is second degree busy, Camp-on is not
allowed. The attendant receives second degree busy indication.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 343
Slow Answer Recall Modification
Slow Answer Recall Modification (SLAM) has an interaction after the
attendant answers the recall. If SLAM is configured, then the target set is
disconnected after the attendant answers the recall. The call is no longer
camped on.
Feature packaging
Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing requires Camp-on French Type
Approval (FRTA) package 197.
For network routing, the Network Attendant Service (NAS) package 159
is required.
If periodic Camp-on tone is desired, the Flexible Tones and Cadences
(FTC) package 125 is required.
If music to the camped-on station is desired, the Music (MUS) package 44
is required.
For a station to Camp-on a trunk, the Station Camp-on (SCMP) package
121 is required.
Feature implementation
No change to existing configuration is required for the Camp-On to a Set in
Ringback or Dialing feature.
Feature operation
See the Camp-On feature description contained within this document.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
344 Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
345
Camp-On to Multiple Appearance
Directory Number
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 345)
"Operating parameters" (page 346)
"Feature interactions" (page 346)
"Feature packaging" (page 347)
"Feature implementation" (page 347)
Feature operation
Feature description
The Camp-On to Multiple Appearance DN enhancement allows a call
camped on to an Multiple Call Ringing (MCR) or Multiple Call Non-ringing
(MCN) Directory Number (DN) to be camped on to all sets with that DN.
That is, any set with that MCR or MCN DN can receive the call when it idles.
The camped call will Camp-On to each set as allowed for by the existing
Camp-On feature. Also, each set with the MCR or MCN DN will receive
Camp-On tone as long the camped call is in the Camp-On Queue. Prior to
the introduction of the Camp-On to Multiple Appearance DN enhancement
Camp-On was applied to the first set in the TN list.
This enhancement applies to Station Camp-On and Network Camp-On
(regardless of where in the network the Camp-On originated).
An example of the sequence for multiple Camp-Ons to a single DN follows:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
346 Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number
Step Action
1Sets A, B, and C are Meridian 1 proprietary telephones with the
same MCR or MCN DN. All three sets are busy.
2The attendant extends an external call to the busy DN and releases.
Sets A, B, and C hear Camp-On tone.
3A goes on-hook and camped call is presented to set A. Camp-On
tone is removed from B and C.
4If B went on-hook in step 3, the call is presented to set B and
Camp-On tone is removed from sets A and C.
5Similar operations as in step 4if set C goes on-hook.
—End—
Operating parameters
The same feature requirements apply as for the Camp-On feature.
This Camp-On enhancement applies to Multiple-appearance Multiple-call
Ringing (MCR) or Non-ringing (MCN) DNs; it does not apply to
Multiple-appearance Single-call Ringing (SCR) or Non-ringing (SCN) DNs.
Feature interactions
Attendant Break-in
Camp-On will not be allowed on a set involved in an Attendant Break-in.
Centralized Multiline
This feature allows analog (500/2500 type) telephones to appear as MCR
DNs. This enhancement should apply to these sets.
Make Set Busy
Camp-On will not be allowed on a set with Make Set Busy active.
Network Camp-On
The Camp-On enhancement applies to all Camp-On attempts regardless of
where the Camp-On was originated.
Operator Call Back
Camp-On is not allowed on a set waiting for an Operator Recall signal.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 347
Single Call Ringing and Non-ringing
Multiple-appearance Single Call Ringing and Non-ringing (SCR and SCN)
DNs are not affected by the Camp-On enhancement.
Station Camp-On
The Camp-On enhancement applies to Station Camp-On.
Feature packaging
Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number requires International
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131.
Feature implementation
There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature.
Feature operation
For operating procedures, see the"Camp-On to Multiple Appearance
Directory Number" (page 345) feature description on "Camp-On to Multiple
Appearance Directory Number" (page 345).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
348 Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
349
Camp-On
Content This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 349)
"Operating parameters" (page 349)
"Feature interactions" (page 350)
"Feature packaging" (page 353)
"Feature implementation" (page 353)
"Feature operation" (page 354)
Feature description
The Camp-On feature routes one additional external call to a busy Directory
Number (DN). When the attendant extends a call to a busy DN, the external
call is camped-on to the telephone. If the Class of Service allows a warning
tone, the user hears a tone indicating that a call is camped on. If the user
frees the line within a specified time, the camped-on call rings the telephone
automatically. If not, the call returns to the attendant as a recall.
Camp-On Tone is allowed or denied on a per-customer basis. The time a
camped-on call waits is defined in LD 15 from 0 to 510 seconds, in multiples
of two seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Operating parameters
Camp-On applies to attendant-extended calls only. If the attendant hears a
busy tone, another call has already been camped on to the busy telephone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
350 Camp-On
Feature interactions
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number
Camp-on is denied for a DN that is blocked due to the Attendant Blocking of
DN feature.
Attendant Break-In
If the destination DN has a camped-on incoming trunk call, the attendant
cannot extend the urgent incoming call as a Camp-On call.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward, Internal Call
Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward take precedence over
Camp-On.
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code
When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to Camp-on to the set, even if
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code has been activated
Call Forward No Answer
When the Call Forward No Answer timer expires for a ringing camped-on
call, the call is given Attendant Recall treatment instead of Call Forward
No Answer treatment.
Call Park Network Wide
When an attendant attempts to extend a call to a busy station across the
network and the busy station returns a Camp-On allow signal, an attendant
has the option of camping on a call or continuing with Network Call Park.
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks
A Disconnect Timer applies to camped-on calls on all trunks on the route.
All answered calls in the camped-on state is disconnected if left in that state
for an extended period.
Call Waiting
Call Waiting Redirection
If a Call Waiting Class of Service or key is defined, Camp-On cannot be
provided.
Camp-On, Station
With Station Camp-On, any internal station can camp an external call on to
another internal station that is busy. Prior to the introduction of this feature,
attendants were the only parties that could camp calls on to busy internal
stations. The term internal station includes stations on other nodes within a
Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN). For more information, see
the Camp-On, Station feature description.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 351
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control
A local attendant cannot Camp-on a call to an analog (500/2500 type) set
that is on an outgoing trunk call that follows Called Party Control.
Enhanced Override
Forced Camp-On
Priority Override
Station-to-Station Camp-On and Attendant Camp-On are not affected
by Forced Camp-On or Priority Override. The new Classes of Service
(Camp-On From Another Telephone Allowed [CPFA], Camp-On From
Another Telephone Denied [CPFD], Camp-On To Another Telephone
Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On To Another Telephone Denied [CPTD])
affect only Forced Camp-On. The Station Camp-On (SCMP) package
(121) is required to return busy tone instead of ringback tone to the party
camping on.
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering
When an attendant is attempting to Camp-on a call to a boss set with
filtering active, the call is routed to the secretary set, if the filtering is active
for all calls. If filtering is active for external calls only, the call is routed to the
secretary set if the call is an external call.
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number
Camp-On is not supported on data calls to a dynamic voice/data TN.
Camp On is supported for voice calls to dynamic voice/data TN. However,
no tone is inserted during a Camp On attempt if the Terminal Number is
in a busy data mode.
Generic XFCOT Software Support
The Camp-On feature allows an attendant to route one additional call to a
busy DN so it can be rung when it becomes free. If the busy DN is not free
after a customer-defined time, the call is recalled to the attendant.
A call from a loopstart disconnect supervised or unsupervised loopstart
trunk can be camped on. If a caller on an unsupervised loopstart trunk
disconnects while the call is camped on, it is detected when the call is
recalled or answered.
Caller disconnection during Camp-On operation is detected by a
disconnect-supervised loopstart trunk on an XFCOT card and the camped
on call is dropped.
Group Hunt
Camping an incoming call on to a Pilot DN is not be supported
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
352 Camp-On
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation
No Camp-on tone is provided for Group Hunting Queuing Limitation.
Hunting
Hunting takes precedence over Camp-On.
Idle Extension Notification
When an extension is blocked for receiving calls due to the Idle Extension
Notification feature, Camp-on is not possible.
Multi-Party Operations
Camp-on to a controlling party DN which is involved in a Consultation
connection is not permitted. However, Camp-on is allowed at non-controlling
parties DN’s which are involved in the Consultation connection.
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements
Camp-on is allowed on a party receiving Patience Tone. Camp-on tone and
is not applied to the party during Patience tone. However, Camp-on tone
and is applied when the speechpath has been reestablished
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service
While Camp-On is allowed to the party receiving the patience tone, the
Camp-On tone is not applied to the party during the patience tone. The
Camp-On tone is applied, however, when the speech path has been
reestablished.
On Hold on Loudspeaker
Camp-On can be applied to a busy loudspeaker DN.
Override - Forced Camp-On and Priority Override
Override, Enhanced
Station-to-Station Camp-On and Attendant Camp-On are not affected
by Forced Camp-On or Priority Override. The new Classes of Service
(Camp-On From Another Telephone Allowed [CPFA], Camp-On From
Another Telephone Denied [CPFD], Camp-On To Another Telephone
Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On To Another Telephone Denied [CPTD])
affect only Forced Camp-On. The Station Camp-On (SCMP) package
(121) is required to return busy tone instead of ringback tone to the party
camping on.
Periodic Pulse Metering
Metered calls camped-on to a busy station by an attendant are charged
against the attendant until the call is answered and the attendant releases.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 353
Source Included when Attendant Dials
The source remains included while the attendant dials the destination.
Uninterrupted Line Connections
Warning Tone
Class of Service with warning tone denied allows a call to be camped on,
but with no warning tone.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable Camp-On tone for a customer." (page 353)
Enable Camp-On tone for a customer.
2. "LD 10 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 354)
Allow warning tone Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 354)
Allow warning tone Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
LD 15 - Enable Camp-On tone for a customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options data block.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- OPT CTA Enable Camp-On tone for the customer.
TYPE TIM Configure timers data block.
- RTIM xx yy zz Set recall timers.
yy = Camp-On recall timer, response is 0-(30)-510.
...
TYPE FTR Features and options
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
354 Camp-On
Prompt Response Description
- STCB (NO) YES Station Camp-On Busy allowed.
- NSCP (NO) YES Network Station Camp-On to sets on this node allowed.
LD 10 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal Number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS WTA Allow warning tone.
LD 11 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal Number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS WTA Allow warning tone.
Feature operation
To camp on an external call to a busy destination:
•Press Rls.
The call is camped on to the extension. If you hear a busy tone, a call is
already camped on the extension.
If the call is not answered within a specified time, it recalls to the
attendant. Both the Source and Destination indicators flash until the
recall is answered. The call can be camped on again or released.
To answer a camped-on call, follows these steps:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 355
Step Action
1When you hear a short beep indicating a camped-on call, hang up or
press Rls.
2When the telephone rings, lift the handset.
You are connected to the camped-on call.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
356 Camp-On
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
357
Camp-On, Forced
Content This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 357)
"Operating parameters" (page 358)
"Feature interactions" (page 359)
"Feature packaging" (page 361)
"Feature implementation" (page 361)
"Feature operation" (page 363)
Feature description
Forced Camp-On differs from normal Camp-On in that both internal and
external calls can be camped on, rather than just external calls as with
the Camp-On feature. The Forced Camp-On can be automatic or manual.
The manual operation requires the use of the Enhanced Override (EOVR)
key or Flexible Feature Code (FFC).
Forced Camp-On can be used as a feature by itself or in conjunction with
Priority Override. The combination of the two features is referred to as
Enhanced Override (EOVR).
For manual Forced Camp-On, an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user
has to dial the EOVR Flexible Feature Code (FFC), while a Meridian 1
proprietary telephone user has to use the EOVR key.
A second operation of the EOVR key or FFC executes Enhanced Override.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
358 Camp-On, Forced
Forced Camp-On is similar to station-to-station Camp-On except that
Forced Camp-On can be done with either no call on hold or an external or
internal call on hold. It can be done automatically or manually; whether it is
automatic or manual is determined by the response to the Automatic Forced
Camp-On (AFCO) prompt in LD 15.
For manual operation, once a busy telephone has been reached, the first
depression of the EOVR key or the first dialing of the EOVR FFC attempts
Forced Camp-On. If successful, Forced Camp-On introduces Camp-On
tone into the connection. If unsuccessful, overflow (fast busy) tone is
returned to the party attempting the Forced Camp-On.
For Forced Camp-On to be attempted, all other methods of call termination
must have been tried, the last of which was Camp-On. If station-to-station
Camp-On or automatic Forced Camp-On has occurred, or Forced Camp-On
has been excluded by the new telephone options, then the first depression
of the EOVR key or dialing of the EOVR FFC executes Enhanced Override.
If, however, Forced Camp-On is denied due to existing Camp-On limitations,
Enhanced Override is also denied.
Operating parameters
The Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package (139) must be equipped
for Forced Camp-On and Priority Override to be available from analog
(500/2500 type) telephones.
For analog (500/2500 type) telephone activation, the Multi-Party Operations
(MPO) package (141) must be equipped, with "YES" as the response to the
RALL prompt in LD 15 to ensure register recalls are required before dialing
control digits. The EOVF FFC defined must not start with the same digit as
one of the control digits. The control digits are defined in LD 15 and are
printed as part of the Customer Data Block (LD 21).
Telephones or trunks involved in any of the following cannot be camped
on to:
•Non established call
•Conference call
•Attendant call
•Attendant call using Centralized Attendant Service (CAS), Primary Rate
Interface (PRI), or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk
•Make Set Busy
•Do Not Disturb
•Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call
•Operator Call Back
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 359
•Hold
•Data call
•Release Link call, and
•Parked call.
Call Forward and Hunting take precedence over Call Waiting. If Call Waiting
is allowed, Camp-On is not attempted. If Call Waiting is not allowed,
station-to-station Camp-On is automatically attempted. If this succeeds,
Enhanced Override can still follow. If Camp-On fails because there is no
external call, Forced Camp-On and Enhanced Override may still work.
However, if Camp-On fails due to other limitations, Forced Camp-On and
Enhanced Override will also not work.
Even though Camp-On will still function when Warning Tone Denied (WTD)
Class of Service is defined, Forced Camp-On requires Warning Tone
Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.
Camp-On requires an external call on hold. Forced Camp-On can be done
without a call on hold, or with both internal and external calls on hold.
Camp-On Classes of Service (Camp-On From another telephone Allowed
[CPFA], Camp-On From another telephone Denied [CPFD], Camp-On To
another telephone Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On To another telephone
Denied [CPTD]) apply to Forced Camp-On and automatic Forced Camp-On
(AFCO) only. They do not apply to Station or attendant Camp-On.
If a telephone is denied Forced Camp-On by Class of Service, Enhanced
Override may still be attempted.
Feature interactions
Attendant Break-In
Telephones with a toll operator break-in call cannot be camped on to.
Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced Camp-on.
Attendant Calls
Telephones involved in attendant calls cannot be camped on to. Overflow
(fast busy) tone is returned to telephones on which Forced Camp-On is
attempted.
Automatic Call Distribution
Telephones involved in Automatic Call Distribution calls cannot be camped
on to. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced
Camp-On.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
360 Camp-On, Forced
Call Hold, Deluxe
Call Hold, Permanent
Hold Neither held calls nor telephones with calls on hold can be camped on to
with Forced Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting
Forced Camp-On.
Camp-On
Station-to-Station Camp-On and attendant Camp-On are not affected
by Forced Camp-On. The Classes of Service (Camp-On From another
telephone Allowed [CPFA], Camp-On From another telephone Denied
[CPFD], Camp-On To another telephone Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On
To another telephone Denied [CPTD]) affect only Forced Camp-On. The
Station Camp-On (SCMP) package (121) is required to return busy tone
instead of ringback tone to the party camping on.
Conference calls
Telephones involved in Conference calls cannot be camped on to. Overflow
tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced Camp-On.
Data calls
Data calls have Warning Tone Denied (WTD) Class of Service and therefore
cannot be camped on to. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting
Forced Camp-On.
Do Not Disturb
Telephones with Do Not Disturb enabled cannot be camped on to with
Forced Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting
Forced Camp-On.
Make Set Busy
Telephones with Make Set Busy active cannot be camped on to with Forced
Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced
Camp-On. Voice Call is blocked by Make Set Busy.
Multi-Party Operations
With Multi-Party Operations (MPO), when a consultation call is made on a
set equipped with Priority Override, a control digit has to be dialed from the
set to perform a recall and return the call on hold.
Night Restriction Classes of Service
If Forced Camp-on and Night Restriction for Forced Camp-on Class of
Service (NRCA) are assigned, Forced Camp-on is operational for the set
only when Night Service is in effect.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 361
Operator Call Back
Telephones involved in an Operator Call Back call or Toll Operator Break-In
cannot be camped on to with Forced Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned
to telephones attempting Forced Camp-On.
Override
When Priority Override is activated, it replaces normal override. Once
Priority Override has been performed on a set, its Digit Display shows the
DN of the overriding set.
Feature packaging
Forced Camp-On requires the following packages to function as described
in this document:
•Station Camp-On (SCMP) package 121
•Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139
•Priority Override/Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure the customer for Automatic Forced Camp-On and
Station Camp-On tone." (page 362)
Configure the customer for Automatic Forced Camp-On and Station
Camp-On tone.
2. "LD 57 - Configure Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Codes (FFC)."
(page 362)
Configure Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Codes (FFC).
3. "LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones for Forced
Camp-On." (page 362)
Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones for Forced Camp-On.
4. "LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones for Forced
Camp-On." (page 363)
Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones for Forced Camp-On.
5. "LD 14 - Configure trunks for Forced Camp-On." (page 363)
Configure trunks for Forced Camp-On.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
362 Camp-On, Forced
LD 15 - Configure the customer for Automatic Forced Camp-On and Station Camp-On tone.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: MPO Multi-Party Options
...
- AFCO (NO) YES Automatic Forced Camp-On.
Enter YES if Forced Camp-On is to be applied automatically.
Enter NO if Forced Camp-On is to be applied manually.
...
TYPE: FTR Features and options
- STCB (NO) YES Station Camp-On Busy tone.
Enter NO if Busy Tone is not to be given to the transferring
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.
Enter YES if Busy Tone is to be given to the transferring
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.
LD 57 - Configure Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Codes (FFC).
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes.
...
CODE EOVR Enhanced Override (programmable only when the Priority
Override package 186 is equipped).
EOVR y...y y...y is a one- to seven-character input that the user must dial
to use the FFC. Valid inputs are digits 0 through 9, asterisk (*),
and octothorpe (#).
LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones for Forced Camp-On.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
CLS (CPFA) CPFD
(CPTA) CPTD
WTA
Forced Camp-On from another telephone to this telephone
(Allowed) Denied.
Forced Camp-On to another telephone from this telephone
(Allowed) Denied.
Warning Tone Allowed.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 363
LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones for Forced Camp-On.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal Number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (CPFA) CPFD Forced Camp-On from another telephone to this telephone
(Allowed) Denied.
(CPTA) CPTD Forced Camp-On to another telephone from this telephone
(Allowed) Denied.
WTA Warning Tone Allowed.
...
KEY xx EOVR Add an Enhanced Override key, where;
xx = the key number (allowed to be programmed only if Priority
Override package 186 is equipped).
LD 14 - Configure trunks for Forced Camp-On.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
...
CLS WTA Warning Tone Allowed.
Feature operation
Forced Camp-On can be used when making either a simple or consultation
call (that is, having a call on hold while calling another party). The following
feature operation descriptions use telephone A (an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone) or telephone E (a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone) to call
telephone B, which is connected to party C.
The telephones are configured as follows:
1. Telephone A is an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with Warning Tone
Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.
2. Telephone B has Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
364 Camp-On, Forced
3. Party C has Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service and can be
any telephone type or a Direct Inward Dial (DID), TIE, or Central Office
(Public Exchange) (COT) trunk.
4. Telephone E is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone with Warning Tone
Allowed (WTA) Class of Service and an Enhanced Override (EOVR)
key equipped.
For the following examples:
1. Telephones A and E both have Camp-On From another telephone
Allowed (CPFA) Class of Service.
2. Both telephone B and telephone C are involved in a simple call, not a
conference call.
3. Telephone B has Camp-On To another telephone Allowed (CPTA) Class
of Service.
4. Call Forward, Hunting, and Call Waiting are not in use.
In the following feature operation descriptions, the term "recall" refers to
performing a register recall, which can be performed in a number of different
ways. Some typical examples are:
•Flash the switchhook. (This is the equivalent of hanging up the handset
and picking it back up. This on hook, off hook is performed in a time
period that is less than what the system would consider to be a valid
disconnect.)
•Press the flash or LINK button if equipped.
The Camp-On tone is always provided for Forced Camp-On since Warning
Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service is a prerequisite. This tone can be
a buzz for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones or a single burst of tone for
analog (500/2500 type) telephones if the customer (LD 15) option Periodic
Camp-On Tone Denied (CTD) is selected. If the customer (LD 15) option
Periodic Camp-On Tone Allowed (CTA) is selected, the Camp-On Tone as
defined in the Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) (LD 56) in response to
the CAMP prompt is used.
While camping on, the party attempting the Camp-On, either telephone A
or E, receives ringback if the Station Camp-On (SCMP) package (121) is
not equipped, or either ringback or busy tone, as defined by the response
to the Station Camp-On Busy tone (STCB) prompt in LD 15, if the SCMP
package is equipped.
Forced Camp-On with an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned off; response to AFCO in LD 15
was "NO":
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 365
ACTION RESPONSE
1B and C are connected in a simple
call.
2A dials B. A receives busy tone.
3A performs a recall. A receives special dial tone (SDT).
4A dials EOVR FFC to attempt
Forced Camp-On. If telephone B or C has
disconnected, telephone A
receives overflow (fast busy) tone.
Otherwise B receives Camp-On
tone and A receives ringback or
busy tone depending on the options
equipped. A is manually Forced
Camp-On to B.
5B disconnects from the call. Telephone A rings telephone B.
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned on; response to AFCO in LD 15
was "YES":
ACTION RESPONSE
1B and C are connected in a simple
call.
2A dials B. A attempts Forced Camp-On to B.
3If Forced Camp-On was successful. A receives ringback or busy
tone depending on the options
equipped. A is automatically
Forced Camp-On to B.
4B disconnects. A rings B.
Forced Camp-On with a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned off; response to AFCO in LD 15
was "NO":
ACTION RESPONSE
1B and C are connected in a simple
call.
2E dials B. E receives busy tone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
366 Camp-On, Forced
ACTION RESPONSE
3E presses EOVR key to attempt
Forced Camp-On. If telephone B or C has
disconnected, telephone E
receives overflow (fast busy) tone.
Otherwise B receives Camp-On
tone and E receives ringback or
busy tone depending on the options
equipped. E is manually Forced
Camp-On to B.
4B disconnects from the call. Telephone E rings telephone B.
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned on; response to AFCO in LD 15
was "YES":
ACTION RESPONSE
1B and C are connected in a simple
call.
2E dials B. E attempts Forced Camp-On to B.
3If Forced Camp-On was successful. E receives ringback or busy
tone depending on the options
equipped. E is automatically
Forced Camp-On to B.
4B disconnects. E rings B.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
367
Camp-On, Station
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 367)
"Operating parameters" (page 368)
"Feature interactions" (page 368)
"Feature packaging" (page 369)
"Feature implementation" (page 369)
"Feature operation" (page 370)
Feature description
With this feature, any internal station can camp an external call on to
another internal station that is busy. Prior to the introduction of this feature
attendants were the only parties that could camp calls on to busy internal
stations. The term internal station includes stations on other nodes within
a Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN).
When a transferring party reaches a busy internal party, the transferring
telephone will receive Ringback tone (providing certain conditions are met).
When the transferring party completes the transfer, the external (calling)
party will Camp-On to the desired party and the external party (an external
party is any CO, DID, FEX, or WATS call) will receive ringback tone or music.
This feature applies to both standalone and network environments.
Within a network environment, the transferring and camped on to stations
may be on the same or different nodes, as long as all nodes are configured
with Network Station Camp-On.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
368 Camp-On, Station
Operating parameters
The limitations that currently apply to the operation of the Camp-On feature
from an attendant console also apply to Station Camp-On.
These limitations are:
•Camp-On is not permitted if the desired station is in a state other than
established (that is, ringing, dialing).
•Only one call at a time can Camp-On to a busy station.
•Calls cannot Camp-On to a station with the Call Waiting feature
configured.
•The station camped on to is given Warning tone only if the customer
has Camp-On Tone Allowed (CTA) in the Customer Data Block (LD
15) and the station has Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service
assigned. If the station has Warning Tone Denied (WTD) Class of
Service assigned, the Camp-On will take effect without giving any
Camp-On tone to the camped on to (desired) party.
•The transferring station will receive Busy tone only if the response to
the STCB prompt in the Customer Data Block (LD 15) of the camped
on to (desired) telephone is YES. Otherwise, the transferring station
will receive Ringback tone.
Camp-On indication
When a call is extended from an attendant to a busy station there is a
specific combination of tones and indicator states to identify the Camp-On
state.
When an inquiry call is made from a station, there is only one way for
the user to distinguish between a busy telephone and an idle ringing
telephone. That way is to ensure that the response to the STCB prompt in
the Customer Data Block (LD 15) of the camped on to (desired) telephone
is YES. Otherwise, Ringback tone is provided in both cases.
Feature interactions
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward Busy
Call Waiting
Hunting
Call Waiting, Call Forward Busy (for DID calls only), Call Forward All Calls,
Call Waiting and Hunting all take precedence over Station Camp-On.
Camp-On
With Station Camp-On, any internal station can camp an external call on to
another internal station that is busy. Prior to the introduction of this feature,
attendants were the only parties that could camp calls on to busy internal
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 369
stations. The term internal station includes stations on other nodes within a
Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN). For more information, see
the Camp-On, Station feature description.
Dial Impulse Set
A Dial Impulse (DIP Class of Service) station must have TSA Class of
Service to perform a Station Camp-On.
Network Attendant Service
For network-wide Station Camp-On, NAS must be equipped at each node
of the network.
Feature packaging
For standalone environments, the Station Camp-On (SCMP) package 121
is required.
For network environments, the Station Camp-On (SCMP) package 121 and
the Network Attendant Service (NAS) package 159 are required.
For Music (MUS), package 44 is required.
Feature implementation
LD 15 - Configure Station Camp-On for both standalone and network environments.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
...
- STCB (NO) YES Station Camp-On Busy tone.
Enter NO if Busy tone is not to be given to the transferring
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.
Enter YES if Busy tone is to be given to the transferring
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.
- NSCP (NO) YES Network Station Camp-On.
Enter NO if telephones on this node are not allowed to have
calls camped on by telephones in other nodes.
Enter YES if telephones on this node are allowed to have calls
camped on by telephones in other nodes.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
370 Camp-On, Station
Feature operation
Standalone case
Any station, not necessarily the Night DN, attempting to transfer an external
call may, during the associated inquiry call, camp the trunk on to a busy
station.
The Camp-On will take effect from the moment the transferring station has
completed the transfer to the desired DN.
The transferring station will hear Ringback tone or Busy tone depending
on the option entered in response to the STCB prompt in the Customer
Data Block (LD 15). This prompt applies to any telephone, not just the
Night DN. By default (STCB is set to NO), the transferring party will hear
Ringback tone.
The desired station will hear Camp-On tone if it has WTA Class of Service
assigned. Otherwise, if it has WTD Class of Service, the Camp-On will take
effect without the desired party being informed a call is camped on.
When the transfer is completed, the external party is camped on to the
desired station and receives either Ringback tone or an announcement.
Network case
Any station, not necessarily the Night DN, attempting to transfer an external
call across an MCDN network may, during the associated inquiry call,
Camp-On the trunk to a busy station.
The location of the transferring party has no effect on the Station Camp-On
capability.
The Camp-On will take effect from the moment the transferring station has
completed the transfer to the desired DN.
The transferring station will hear Ringback tone or Busy tone depending on
the option entered in response to the STCB prompt in the Customer Data
Block (LD 15). This prompt applies to any telephone, not just the Night DN.
By default (STCB is set to NO), the transferring party will hear Ringback
tone. The tone given, either ringback tone or Busy tone, is determined by
the node in which the desired (camped on to) party resides.
The desired station will hear Camp-On tone if it has WTA Class of Service
assigned. If it has WTD Class of Service, the Camp-On will take effect
without the desired party being informed a call is camped on.
When the transfer is completed, the external party is camped on to the
desired station and receives either Ringback tone or an announcement.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 371
Recall timing on Camp-On calls
When any station extends an external call, recall timing is initiated if the
call is camped on to a busy station.
The recall timing will start from the moment that the extending station
"releases" the call. The value of the recall timer is set by the prompt RTIM in
the Customer Data Block (LD 15).
At the recall, the camped on call is routed to the attendant. If the attendant
is in Night Service, Night treatment is given; if NAS routing is active, the call
is routed according to the NAS configuration.
Standalone case
When the recall to the attendant occurs, the Camp-On is canceled. If the
attendant is busy during the recall, the recall is queued.
Network case
When the recall occurs and the attendant has answered the recall, the call
will still be camped on to the desired party. If during the recall the attendant
is busy, the recall is queued.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
372 Camp-On, Station
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
373
Card LED Status
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 373)
"Operating parameters" (page 373)
"Feature interactions" (page 374)
"Feature packaging" (page 374)
"Feature implementation" (page 374)
"Feature operation" (page 374)
Feature description
This feature allows the use of Swedish Televerket (TVT) Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment on the system. This is accomplished by defining
individual terminal loops as TVT type in LD 17. The system software is
modified to allow the status (on/off) of the LED on the faceplate of the
TVT cards to be opposite of the LED on NT cards. The TVT peripheral
cards (standard extension line, off-premises extension and Multi Frequency
Receiver [MFR]) are equivalent to the NT 500-type line card and Digitone
Receiver (DTR). Since the TVT off-premises extension line card must be
treated as a local extension by the system, the OPX Class of Service is
prohibited for this card in LD 10.
Operating parameters
The system software supports the following TVT cards:
•single-density standard extension line card (TPC60)
•dual-density extension line card (TPC451)
•two-wire Off-premise Extension (OPX) line card (TPC22)
•four-wire Off-premise Extension (OPX) line card (TPC23), and
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
374 Card LED Status
•multi-frequency receiver (MFR) card (TPC15).
Feature interactions
Card LED Status does not interact with other features.
Feature packaging
Card LED Status requires International Supplementary Features (SUPP)
package 131.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 17 - Configure the system hardware and software parameters."
(page 374)
Configure the system hardware and software parameters.
2. "LD 10 - Create or modify data blocks for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 374)
Create or modify data blocks for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
LD 17 - Configure the system hardware and software parameters.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE CEQU Common Equipment parameters
...
CEQU (NO) YES Change CE parameters.
TERM T0-T159 TVT single density local terminal loops.
LD 10 - Create or modify data blocks for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
...
CLS OPN Allows Swedish TVT off-premise line card to be treated as
a local extension by the system.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
375
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 375)
"Operating parameters" (page 375)
"Feature interactions" (page 376)
"Feature packaging" (page 376)
"Feature implementation" (page 376)
"Feature operation" (page 377)
Feature description
The Centralized Multiple Line Emulation (CML) feature allows a mixed group
of telephones (analog (500/2500 type) telephones, or Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones) to answer calls ringing at a central DN (referred to as the CML
DN). This function is provided by using the Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) and Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN) features, and
making modifications to the Call Pick-up feature.
Large queues to the CML DN (up to 15 calls) are handled by the ACD
feature, which distributes the calls to members of the CML group.
Small queues to the CML DN (one or two calls) are handled using MADNs
configured on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.
Operating parameters
The Centralized Multiple Line Emulation feature is not supported by
Attendant Administration.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
376 Centralized Multiple Line Emulation
Call Pick-up groups assigned at the key level cannot be given a group
number containing ACD DNs, since calls ringing in an ACD queue cannot
be picked up.
Calls cannot be picked up from a station having direct-termination-denied
Class of Service.
Normal tenant-service calling limitations apply. If a station cannot receive a
ringing call, then the call cannot be picked up for that station. A station that
cannot direct dial another station cannot pick up a call from that station.
Calls ringing on the CML priority station are picked up before ringing Central
Office trunk calls in the same Call Pick-up group.
Feature interactions
Digit Display
The digit display of the station picking up a parked call recall shows the
parked call’s access code followed by the parked call’s access-identification
code. If the picked-up call is a group member call, the display shows the
group number of the picked-up station.
Feature packaging
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation requires International Supplementary
Features (SUPP) package 131.
The following packages are also required:
•Basic Automatic Call Distribution (BACD) package 40
•Network Priority Queuing (PQUE) package 60
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Configure the Required Classes of Service." (page 376)
Configure the Required Classes of Service.
2. "LD 11 - Assign ringing number pickup groups to keys." (page 377)
Assign ringing number pickup groups to keys.
LD 10 - Configure the Required Classes of Service.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 377
Prompt Response Description
...
CLS (PRSD) PRSA
(CRD) CRA
(MCRD) MCRA
Priority Call Pick-up station (denied) allowed.
Continuous Ringing (denied) allowed.
Multiple Call Arrangement (denied) allowed.
LD 11 - Assign ringing number pickup groups to keys.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
...
RNPG (0)-4095 Ringing Number Pick-up Group. Respond with the number
of the Ringing Number Pick-up group for which the set is
to be assigned.
To remove a telephone from a group, enter 0 in response
to the RNPG prompt.
...
CLS (PRSD) PRSA Priority Call Pick-up station (denied) allowed.
...
KEY xx RNP yyyy xx = Key number
RNP = Ringing Number Pick-up
yyyy = Ringing Number Pick-up group number (optional).
If the group number is not entered, the key will pick-up the
group number assigned to the station. If the group number
is entered, the key will pick-up calls in the specified group
yyyy.
Feature operation
The ability to notify a large group that a CML is ringing is provided through
modification of the Call Pick-up feature. A ringer, centrally mounted on a
wall, rings whenever a call comes into the CML DN, and continues to ring
until the call is answered. The ringer is configured as a priority 500-type set,
which ensures that a call ringing on the CML DN is answered before any
other station ringing in the Call Pick-up group.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
378 Centralized Multiple Line Emulation
Step Action
1To answer a CML call using a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone,
press the RNP key.
—End—
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Lift the handset.
2Dial the PURN FCC.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
379
Centrex Switchhook Flash
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 379)
"Operating parameters" (page 380)
"Feature interactions" (page 381)
"Feature packaging" (page 382)
"Feature implementation" (page 382)
"Feature operation" (page 385)
Feature description
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) permits the user to signal the Central
Office (CO)/Public Exchange during an established CO call, requesting
activation of a Central Office based service. Such services can include Call
Transfer, Three-way Calling, Malicious Call Trace, Conference, or Autodial
Tandem Transfer. For more information on these services, please refer to
the feature descriptions contained within this document.
The feature is useful when Centrex is the backbone of the service network.
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) is supported by the following trunk types:
•Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)
•Common Control Switching Arrangement, Automatic Number
Identification (CCSA ANI)
•Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA)
•Central Office (CO)
•Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)
•Direct Inward Dial (DID)
•Foreign Exchange (FX)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
380 Centrex Switchhook Flash
•Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)
•CO trunks located at a remote node connected via ISDN Meridian
Customer Defined Network (MCDN) TIE trunks, and
•Analog, Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), and DT12 CO trunks.
Whenever Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) is invoked, the system checks
for the following:
•With analog (500/2500 type) telephones, that the Class of Service
supports THF. With Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, the feature
cannot be activated if a corresponding key is not equipped.
•That the telephone is on an active two-way trunk call.
•That THF is enabled in the trunk’s Class of Service.
If any of the above checks fails, the user hears an overflow tone. After the
tone times out, the original connection resumes.
Operating parameters
This feature is not supported on Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephones.
THF is not supported on Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or BRI Central Office
trunks.
On Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, once the THF key has been pressed,
all other function keys are blocked. While waiting for the Centrex connection,
only the RLS key or on-hook connection is operative. Pressing the RLS
key or hanging up terminates the original connection as well as the THF
message.
For the analog (500/2500 type) telephones, another switchhook flash is not
allowed once THF has been invoked. A second switchhook flash is treated
as an on hook disconnection.
Only voice calls are supported on THF.
In Italy the DTI2 register recall signal is currently only supported for Type
Approval and is not commercially available.
The 1.5 or 2 Mbit Digital Trunks Interface pack is required.
Because the software cannot recognize which type of Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment (IPE) CO line card (for example, XCOT, or XFCOT) is in use, CO
trunks belonging to different card types should not coexist on the same
Route Data Block (RDB).
•The minimum value of the range for the Flash-length (FLH) timer for a
Centrex Switchhook Flash, defined in LD 16 in response to the TIMR
prompt, is 60-1536 milliseconds.
•Attendant consoles can activate the feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 381
•The THF feature can be activated on DTI2 Central Office trunks and
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Central Office trunks.
•The Centrex Switchhook timing on the Extended Flexible Universal
Trunk (EXUT) is performed using firmware, offering a significant
improvement in trunk timing accuracy.
Feature interactions
Autodial Tandem Transfer
Because Autodial Tandem Transfer uses Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF), it
is affected by any modification to the THF enhancement feature.
China - Attendant Monitor
If any set at the customer location involved in the monitored call switchhook
flashes or performs a Centrex switchhook flash, Attendant Monitor is
immediately deactivated.
Collect Call Blocking
A Centrex Switchhook Flash cannot be invoked by another feature while the
Collect Call Blocking answer signal is being sent.
Conference
THF allows conference calls through the CO. It can be invoked only if there
is an established call connected to an outside trunk. If the telephone is
engaged in internal conference calls, THF cannot be used.
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone is part of an Executive Intrusion
conference, any Switchhook Flash is ignored.
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced
Interaction with the Centrex switchhook flash results because the flash
range is changed for this feature. Communication to the CO (trunk hook
flash) is performed by using the Centrex switchhook flash feature base
code. The enhanced range is available for the Centrex switchhook flash.
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music
This feature enhancement is not supported if used together with Centrex
Switchhook flash.
Secrecy
If secrecy is not allowed in LD 15 (OPT = SYD), the attendant must use the
EXCL DEST or EXCL SRC keys to select the Central Office trunk on which
the THF has to be sent. The THF is not activated when both SRC and
DEST are included.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
382 Centrex Switchhook Flash
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software. Centrex Switchhook
Flash (THF) package 157 has no package dependencies. The End-to-End
Signaling (EES) package 10 is recommended for users with Meridian 1
proprietary telephones, and attendant consoles.
If both THF and the 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129 are
present, this feature can also be applied to digital Central Office trunk
connections.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Enable Centrex Switchhook flash for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 382)
Enable Centrex Switchhook flash for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 383)
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
3. "LD 12 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for attendant consoles."
(page 383)
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for attendant consoles.
4. "LD 14 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk." (page 383)
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk.
5. "LD 16 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk route." (page
384)
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk route.
6. "LD 73 - Activate the THF on digital trunks for incoming and outgoing
calls." (page 384)
Activate the THF on digital trunks for incoming and outgoing calls.
LD 10 - Enable Centrex Switchhook flash for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 383
Prompt Response Description
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
CLS THFA
THFD Allow Centrex Switchhook Flash.
THFD = Default
LD 11 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
KEY xx THF Add a Centrex Switchhook Flash key; xx is the key number.
LD 12 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for attendant consoles.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE 2250 Attendant console type.
...
KEY xx THF Add a Centrex Switchhook Flash key; xx is the key number.
LD 14 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE AID Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) trunk
data block.
CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement Automatic
Number Identification (CCSA ANI) trunk data block.
CAM Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk
data block.
COT Central Office (CO) trunk data block.
CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data
block.
DID Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk data block.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
384 Centrex Switchhook Flash
Prompt Response Description
FEX Foreign Exchange trunk data block.
WAT Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block.
CLS THFA
THFD Allow Centrex Switchhook Flash.
THFD = Default
LD 16 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
CNTL YES Change controls or timers
- TIMR FLH <space>
60-(510)-1536 Flash timer in msec.
The range of the Centrex switchhook flash timer is
60-(510)-1536. The FLH value is rounded down to the
nearest 10 msec. tick. If the value entered is 128 or 129,
then it is set to 130 msec.
Software controlled flash
60-127 msec. Digit 1 is sent.
128-1536 msec. software controlled switchhook flash.
A FLH timer value of 127 msec. or less is not supported
by the XFCOT card. The firmware controlled flash must
be used.
Firmware controlled flash
The user can enter any value from 60 to 1536 msec. 90
msec. is the hard coded firmware flash for an XFCOT card;
the technician should enter 90 msec.
The FWTM prompt must be set to YES for the trunk
associated with this route in LD 14, if firmware timing is to
be used.
LD 73 - Activate the THF on digital trunks for incoming and outgoing calls.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG New
Change
TYPE DTI2 2 Mbits DTI
FEAT ABCD Digital signaling category.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 385
Prompt Response Description
SICA XX Signaling category table.
...
...
P RRC(S) ABCD Register Recall signal.
TIME 10-(100)-630 Duration of RRC Pulse in msec.
Feature operation
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones
To use Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) from an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Flash the switchhook to receive a special dial tone.
2Enter the Special Prefix (SPRE) code, then the THF feature access
code (96). Alternatively, the appropriate Flexible Feature Code
(FFC) should be used.
—End—
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, flash the
switchhook.
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones
To use Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) from a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone, press the key configured for THF.
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, press the DN key
or the key establishing the original call.
Attendant Consoles
Attendant consoles must use the THF key. Dial access is not supported on
these consoles.
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, press the DN key
or the key establishing the original call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
386 Centrex Switchhook Flash
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
387
Charge Account and Calling Party
Number
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 387)
"Operating parameters" (page 388)
"Feature interactions" (page 389)
"Feature packaging" (page 390)
"Feature implementation" (page 391)
"Feature operation" (page 392)
Feature description
Used in conjunction with Call Detail Recording (CDR), Charge Account bills
calls directly to specific accounts or charge numbers instead of Directory
Numbers (DN).
Charge Account supports fixed-length numbers of 0 to 23 digits (default
is 0), specified on a per-customer basis. The charge account number is
validated by the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits
entered is part of CDR downstream processing.
On Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, this feature can be activated by a
separate Charge key/lamp pair, or dial accessed. On attendant consoles,
it is activated by a separate key/lamp pair. On single-line telephones, it
is dial-accessed.
When a Charge Account number is used, the entire call is billed to that
number. The number can be entered either before or during a call, or when
Consultation Hold, Call Transfer, or Conference is activated.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
388 Charge Account and Calling Party Number
The Charge Account feature is not supported for internal calls. A Charge
Account number entered through the Charge key/lamp pair is blocked for
established internal calls.
Charge Account can be used to charge an entire conference call or portions
of the call. Portions of the call are assigned to different accounts by
entering the account number when adding trunks to a conference, before
the conference is completed.
•When using analog (500/2500 type) telephones, enter the account
information immediately after the switchhook flash, before the new
trunk is dialed.
•When using Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, enter the number after
pressing the Conference key the first time, and before dialing.
The charge record shows the identity of the user who made the entry and
the trunk that was added to the call. If the new call is not added to the
conference, the record shows a simple two-party call.
An entire call is charged to the same account by entering the charge
number while active on the conference. When using Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones, press the Charge key and enter the number in the usual
manner. When using analog (500/2500 type) telephones, enter the number
after a switchhook flash.
The call is reestablished without dialing additional trunks; a record is
produced for each trunk involved in the conference. In all these records, the
telephone user entering the number is considered the originating party.
When an entire call is charged to only one account number, it must be
entered while all trunks are connected to the conference.
Calling Party Number (CPN) is an extension of Charge Account that allows
entry of the calling party’s number on collect calls. Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones are assigned a separate Calling Party Number (CPN) key/lamp
pair to activate this feature. When the calling party’s number is entered,
a Calling Party Number (CPN) record is produced. This record may be
compared to a telephone company billing for collect calls. Calling party
numbers can be up to 23 digits, and may include an asterisk (*) and
octothorpe (#). A CPN record is generated on the Call Detail Recording
(CDR) device similar to a normal Charge record.
Operating parameters
A valid charge account number is recognized when the number of dialed
digits matches the account length, or when the octothorpe (#) indicates
end of dialing. After a valid charge account number has been entered, the
system returns a dial tone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 389
If too few digits are dialed, no response is given until the interdigit timeout
occurs. Overflow tone is returned for 15 seconds after timeout; then the
user is locked out.
If Call Transfer or Conference is used to consult with a third party and
returns to the original call without completing the transfer or conference, the
charge account number is applied to the Consultation call only.
Attendant use of Charge or CPN is restricted to situations in which there is
only one account party involved in the call (source side). When the calling
party number is used, the attendant must transfer the call, or the Call Detail
Recording (CDR) record does not reflect it.
Feature interactions
Attendant Barge-In
Attendant Busy Verify
A charge account number cannot be entered when Barge-In or Busy Verify
is active. Barge-In cannot be used to connect to a trunk after an account
number has been entered.
Call Transfer
A Call Transfer call produces two records: a Call Detail Recording (CDR)
start record and a CDR end record.
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring
Digits dialed after a charge account are checked against the active Outgoing
Call Barring level.
Conference
Conference calls produce multiple Call Detail Recording (CDR) records.
Whenever a new trunk is added to a conference, the connection between
the connected telephone and the trunk is recorded, and a connection to the
conference loop is established. This causes CDR to generate a start record
with the telephone and trunk identified as the involved parties. As trunks are
removed from a conference, CDR end records are produced. These records
may identify different telephones or conferences as the local parties.
Music, Enhanced
The Charge Account (CHG) and Calling Party Number (CPN) keys place
the far end party on Hold while a charge number is entered. The held party
receives Music during this period.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
390 Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Override
When Charge Account is used during active Override, some digits may be
lost. When entered with Override in conference, a Charge Account number
is accepted and no digits are lost.
Ring Again
When Ring Again is activated, no charge record is generated, but the
information is stored for future use. If Ring Again is canceled before a
trunk is seized, the charge number is deleted and no record is produced.
If a trunk is seized later by Ring Again, the charge record is generated in
the usual manner. The use of Ring Again with Charge Account ties up
system resources because an auxiliary call register must be maintained in
the Ring Again queue.
Speed Call
Charge account numbers, including the Charge Account access Special
Prefix (SPRE) code, can be stored as Speed Call or Autodial numbers. All
current limitations of these features apply, such as a maximum of 23 digits
per entry, including the access code. An Autodial number or dialed digits
can follow, but not precede, a Speed Call number. The digits generated by
an Autodial key during feature operation are accepted as Charge Account
digits.
Telephone keys
A Charge Account entry is aborted with any of the following keys:
•DN
•Page
•Voice Call
•In-Calls
•Call Waiting
•Call Pickup
•Release
•Not Ready
•a loop key
•Release Destination, and
•Release Source.
Feature packaging
CDR with Charge Account (CHG) package 23 requires:
•Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 391
•Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Add or modify the customer Charge Account." (page 391)
Add or modify the customer Charge Account.
2. "LD 10 - Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge
Account." (page 391)
Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge Account.
3. "LD 11 - Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge
Account." (page 392)
Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge Account.
4. "LD 12 - Allow attendant console access to Charge Account." (page 392)
Allow attendant console access to Charge Account.
5. "LD 15 - Add or modify the customer Charge Account." (page 391)
6. "LD 10 - Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge
Account." (page 391)
7. "LD 11 - Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge
Account." (page 392)
8. "LD 12 - Allow attendant console access to Charge Account." (page 392)
LD 15 - Add or modify the customer Charge Account.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: CDR Call Detail Recording Gate Opener.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- CHLN (0)-23 Maximum number of digits that can be entered as a
charge account number.
LD 10 - Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge Account.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
392 Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Prompt Response Description
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
where c = card and u = unit.
CLS (XFD) XFA (Deny) allow call transfer.
LD 11 - Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge Account.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible
responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
where c = card and u = unit.
xx CPN Add a Calling Party Number key (must be key 24 for
the M2317).
KEY
xx CHG Add a Charge key (must be key 25 for the M2317).
LD 12 - Allow attendant console access to Charge Account.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE 2250 Attendant console type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
where c = card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
KEY 0-9 CPN
0-9 CHG Add a Calling Party Number key.
Add a Charge key.
Feature operation
This section explains Charge Account feature and Calling Party Number
feature operation for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, analog (500/2500
type) telephones, and attendant console.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 393
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Select a free extension.
2Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.
—End—
To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press Charge.
2Dial the Charge Account number.
3Press the extension key to return to your call.
—End—
To use a SPRE code to charge a call in progress, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press Transfer or Conference.
2Dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4Press the extension key to return to your call.
—End—
To charge a call to an account when you transfer a call, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press Transfer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
394 Charge Account and Calling Party Number
The call is on hold.
2Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4Dial the number where the call is to be transferred.
5Press Transfer.
—End—
To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,
follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press Conference.
The call is on hold.
2Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4Call the party that you want to add to the conference.
5Press Conference.
—End—
To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press Calling No.
The other party is on hold.
2Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.
3Press Calling No. again to return to the call.
—End—
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 395
Step Action
1Select a free extension.
2Dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the charge account number.
4When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.
—End—
To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Flash the switchhook or link.
2Dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.
—End—
To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,
follow these steps:
Step Action
1Flash the switchhook or link.
2Dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4Call the party that you want to add to the conference.
5Flash the switchhook or link.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
396 Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Attendant Consoles
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press the loop key.
2Press Charge.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.
—End—
To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:
Step Action
1While the source call is active on a loop key, press Charge.
2Dial the Charge Account number.
The voice connection remains active.
3Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.
—End—
To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:
Step Action
1While the source call is active on a loop key, press Calling No.
The other party is on hold.
2Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.
3Press Calling No. again to return to the call.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
397
Charge Account, Forced
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 397)
"Operating parameters" (page 398)
"Feature interactions" (page 398)
"Feature packaging" (page 400)
"Feature implementation" (page 400)
"Feature operation" (page 402)
Feature description
Forced Charge Account (FCA) temporarily overrides Class of Service
limitations for toll-denied users. Use Forced Charge Account long distance
calls to an account number when calling from a telephone that is restricted
from making long distance calls. The unrestricted Class of Service provided
by FCA applies for the duration of the call.
When the account number is entered, a charge record is produced on a
Call Detail Recording (CDR) device.
FCA supports variable-length numbers of 1 to 23 digits. The minimum value
for the account number is specified at the customer level.
A valid account number equals or exceeds the minimum value defined, and
is validated by the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits
entered is part of Call Detail Recording (CDR) downstream processing.
FCA can be allowed or denied at both customer and user levels. Users
include any station or TIE and Common Control Switching Arrangement
(CCSA) type trunks assigned a Toll-Denied (TLD), Conditionally Toll-Denied
(CTD), or Conditionally Unrestricted (CUN) Class of Service.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
398 Charge Account, Forced
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones activate this feature by using a separate
Charge key/lamp pair. Any user can access this feature by dialing SPRE + 5.
A distinction is made between normal CDR Charge Account processing and
FCA. If all the following conditions are met, the account number is treated
as an FCA code:
•The telephone from which the number is entered has a TLD, CTD, or
CUN Class of Service.
•The station or trunk from which the number is entered is in a state
to originate a call (press a Directory Number [DN] key or flash the
switchhook).
•FCA is enabled at the customer level.
•FCA is allowed for the station or trunk from which the number is entered.
•A valid account number is entered at the beginning of the call.
The unrestricted Class of Service provided by FCA, as described above,
applies for the duration of the call only. The account number must be
reentered for each successive toll call placed by the station or trunk.
Operating parameters
An octothorpe (#) dialed after the account number indicates that the
subsequent digits are part of the dialed number.
CDR charge account numbers are fixed-length codes for which a maximum
value is specified by the customer. This is also the maximum allowed for
the FCA account number.
Because 500 telephones cannot dial an octothorpe (#), they are restricted
to fixed-length account numbers.
FCA does not apply to attendant calls.
Feature interactions
Autodial
Speed Call
FCA numbers (including the SPRE code and the Charge Account access
code) can be entered in Speed Call lists or stored as Autodial numbers. The
digits can also be stored, provided that the account number, regardless of
its length, is followed directly by an octothorpe (#).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 399
Authorization Code Security Enhancement
If the Authorization Code is used to change the Class of Service of the user,
the new Class of Service must be TLD, CTD, or CUN. If an Authorization
Code entered after FCA has altered the Class of Service to unrestricted
(UNR), the change made by the Authorization Code still comes into effect.
If the originator’s Network Class of Service (NCOS) has been changed by
an Authorization Code prior to an applicable FCA entry, the new NCOS is
replaced by the FCA NCOS, provided the new Facility Restriction Level
(FRL) is not lower than the existing FRL. Similarly, if the originator’s NCOS
has been changed by an FCA entry, the NCOS is changed again by a valid
Authorization Code entry.
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS)
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS)
If BARS or NARS is equipped, a Network Class of Service (NCOS)
associated with FCA must be defined in the Customer Data Block.
Call Detail Recording
Normal Call Detail Recording (CDR) charge account numbers can still be
entered before or after an FCA code. If the criteria for an FCA call are not
met, (CDR) charge account numbers function in the normal manner.
Call Transfer
Conference
If an FCA code is entered at the beginning of a call, the new unrestricted
Class of Service remains in effect for any transfer or conference made
during the call. If all FCA criteria are met, an account number entered after
activating the Conference key, Call Transfer key, or a switchhook flash is
interpreted as an FCA code.
Last Number Redial
These codes are not stored in Last Number Redial (LNR). To use these
features when calling the number stored in LNR, the code must first be
dialed manually. When dial tone is returned, LNR can be used to complete
the dialing.
Pre-translation
The first digit dialed after a valid Charge Account Code is sent to the
pre-translator.
Scheduled Access Restrictions
FCA can be used to override Scheduled Access Restrictions (SAR) on a
per-call basis, provided the current Class of Service (COS) of the telephone
or trunk is CUN, TLD, or CTD. The current COS is the COS in force
according to the SAR schedule. If an Authorization Code that sets the COS
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
400 Charge Account, Forced
to CUN, TLD, or CTD is dialed before the FCA, the call is allowed. FCA sets
the COS to UNR and the Network COS (NCOS) to the NCOS defined in LD
15, provided that FCA is enabled on both a customer and telephone/trunk
basis.
Stored Number Redial
The Forced Charge Account code is not stored. To store a code, dial the
code prior to using Stored Number Redial to dial the call.
Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR)
Trunk Group Access Restrictions apply to the telephone or trunk entering
the account number.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software. Forced Charge Account
(FCA) package 52 requires:
•Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24
•Charge Account (CHG) package 23
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable Forced Charge Account for a customer." (page 400)
Enable Forced Charge Account for a customer.
2. "LD 10 - Enable Forced Charge Account for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 401)
Enable Forced Charge Account for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
3. "LD 11 - Enable Forced Charge Account for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 401)
Enable Forced Charge Account for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
4. "LD 14 - Enable Forced Charge Account for each incoming TIE or CCSA
trunk." (page 401)
Enable Forced Charge Account for each incoming TIE or CCSA trunk.
LD 15 - Enable Forced Charge Account for a customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: CDR Call Detail Recording.
CUST Customer number
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 401
Prompt Response Description
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- CHLN (0)-23 Maximum number of digits that can be in an FCA code (default
is 0).
- FCAF (NO) YES (Disable) enable FCA for the customer.
- CHMN xx Minimum number of digits that can be in an FCA code (must be
less than CHLN).
- FCNC xx NCOS to be assigned to FCA codes.
LD 10 - Enable Forced Charge Account for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FCAR (NO)
YES FCA can be used by this telephone.
FCA is restricted from use by this telephone.
LD 11 - Enable Forced Charge Account for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FCAR (NO)
YES FCA can be used by this telephone.
FCA is restricted from use by this telephone.
LD 14 - Enable Forced Charge Account for each incoming TIE or CCSA trunk.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE TIE CAA Trunk type (must be TIE or CCSA).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
402 Charge Account, Forced
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
FCAR (NO)
YES FCA can be used by this trunk.
FCA is restricted from use by this trunk.
Feature operation
To use FCA, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Select a free extension.
2Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.
3Dial the Charge Account number.
4When you have a dial tone, dial the long distance number.
—End—
For operating procedures from particular telephones or consoles, see the
Charge Account and Calling Party Number module in this document.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
403
Charge Display at End of Call
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 403)
"Operating parameters" (page 404)
"Feature interactions" (page 404)
"Feature packaging" (page 404)
"Feature implementation" (page 405)
"Feature operation" (page 405)
Feature description
This feature allows the set display of a charged party to show the charged
amount of a metered call, along with the normal call-display information. To
give you time to read and transcribe the charges, the feature maintains this
display for ten seconds after call completion, unless you do something with
the set such as make another call or use another feature.
The currency (for instance, pound sterling, mark, and dollar) displayed is
the currency specified in the feature configuration (LD 15 and LD 16). The
charge information is received from the Central Office (generated from a
Periodic Pulse Metering trunk or an Integrated Services Digital Network
(ISDN) trunk).
This feature is operational in a standalone environment, and is available
on modular digital sets and M2317 sets. For M2317 sets, the charge
information is appended to the standard call-display information. On
modular sets, the charge information is scrolled to the second line (there are
two lines of display on these sets).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
404 Charge Display at End of Call
When a call is transferred, the Advice of Charge display appears on the set
to which the call is transferred. It does not appear on the display of the
set that transferred the call.
M2317 charge display
For M2317 sets, the charge information is appended to the standard
call-display information. In the example below, the dialed DN
(90113145078400) is displayed followed by the cost charged to the call
($22.45).
90113145078400 2245
=====>
Modular Set charge display
On modular sets, which have two lines of display, the charge information is
scrolled to the second line. In the example below, the name of the caller is
displayed on the first line. The dialed DN (90113145078400), followed by
the cost charged to the call ($12.75), is displayed on line two.
LOIS LANE
90113145078400 1275
Operating parameters
The charge is displayed only if all of the following conditions are met:
•the customer to which the set belongs has the Charge Display at End of
Call (CHDA) option defined
•the set has a display with Message Registration Allowed Class of
Service.
•the trunk is configured with buffered or non-buffered Periodic Pulse
Metering.
Feature interactions
There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
The following packages are required for Charge Display at End of Call:
•International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131
•Periodic Pulse Metering/Message Registration (MR) package 101
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 405
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 17 - Implement Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)." (page 405)
Implement Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM).
2. "LD 15 - Allow or deny Charge Display at End of Call for a customer."
(page 405)
Allow or deny Charge Display at End of Call for a customer.
LD 17 - Implement Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM).
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE PARM System Parameters.
...
MTRO PPM Periodic Pulse Metering
LD 15 - Allow or deny Charge Display at End of Call for a customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: FTR Features and options.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
OPT CHDA
CHDD Enter CHDA to allow Charge Display at End of Call. CHDD =
Default
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
406 Charge Display at End of Call
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
407
China - Attendant Monitor
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 407)
"Operating parameters" (page 408)
"Feature interactions" (page 408)
"Feature packaging" (page 411)
"Feature implementation" (page 411)
"Feature operation" (page 412)
Feature description
Attendant Monitor Function
Attendant Monitor is a customer defined option which allows the attendant
to monitor, in listen only mode, any established call involving a set or
trunk on the customer’s switch with or without the connected parties being
aware that monitoring is taking place (depends on the configuration of the
customer tone option).
The differences between the existing Busy Verify and Barge-In features and
the Attendant Monitor feature are the following:
•Attendant Monitor provides a listen only path for the attendant.
•There is no click sound given to the connected parties upon attendant
connection when the no tone option is configured.
•The tone to the connected parties may or may not be given depending
on the new customer tone option for Attendant Monitor.
•The display (if there is one) on any parties involved in the call does not
indicate that the attendant is monitoring.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
408 China - Attendant Monitor
Operating parameters
Since Attendant Monitor is based on Busy Verify and Barge-In, it has the
same limitations which apply to Busy Verify and Barge-in unless otherwise
stated in this feature description.
This feature has been developed exclusively for use in China.
Attendant Monitor is strictly a standalone, same-customer feature which
is not supported over networks. A customer equipped with the Attendant
Monitor feature can only monitor a DN or trunk defined for that customer
without going over the network.
The toggle function between having a one-way speechpath and a two-way
speechpath during monitoring is not supported.
This feature is not supported for attendants monitoring other attendants.
Monitoring an M2216 or M5317 is not supported.
The attendant may be blocked from monitoring a DN or trunk due to a limit
on the number of conference time slots.
Feature interactions
Attendant Barge-In
When China (CHINA) package 285 is equipped, the normal operation of
Barge-In changes slightly. The repeatable tone is now configurable with the
(TOA)/TOD option in LD 15.
If an attendant is monitoring a trunk, a second attendant defined at the
same customer location is blocked from Barging In to any trunk involved
in the monitored call.
If an attendant is Barged-In with a trunk, a second attendant defined at
the same customer location is blocked from monitoring any party involved
in the monitored call.
Attendant Break-In
If an attendant is monitoring a DN, a second attendant defined at the
same customer site is blocked from Breaking In to any party involved in
the monitored call.
If an attendant is in a Break-In situation with a DN, a second attendant
defined at the same customer site is blocked from monitoring any party
involved in the monitored call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 409
Attendant Busy Verify
When China (CHINA) package 285 is equipped, the normal operation of
Busy Verify changes. The repeatable tone is now configurable with the
(TOA)/TOD option in LD 15.
If an attendant is monitoring a DN, a second attendant defined for the same
customer is blocked from Busy Verifying any party involved in the monitored
call.
If an attendant is Busy Verifying a DN, a second attendant defined for
the same customer is blocked from monitoring any party involved in the
monitored call.
Automatic Call Distribution
The attendant cannot monitor a call in which an Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) DN is involved.
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward, Internal Calls
Call Forward No Answer
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,
idle DN treatment is given.
Call Hold, Permanent
Monitoring is not affected if anybody involved in the monitor’s call activates
hold, except for the case of a simple call. For a monitored simple call,
activating hold deactivates monitoring. In all cases, activation of music on
hold deactivates monitoring.
An attendant monitoring a call cannot put the monitored DN on hold. The
attendant pressing the hold key has no effect while monitoring is enabled.
Call Park
If a DN being monitored becomes parked by another party, the Attendant
Monitor feature is deactivated.
Call Trace
If a Call Trace is performed on the attendant, the output will consist of the
existing Call Trace information elements for an attendant loop. In addition,
"MON" is printed immediately after "ATTN" to indicate that this attendant is
monitoring.
If a Call Trace is performed on any other party involved in the monitored call,
the output will consist of the existing information elements for a DN or trunk,
as well as "MON" being printed immediately before "ACTIVE".
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
410 China - Attendant Monitor
Call Transfer
If any party at the customer location involved in a monitored call attempts to
activate call transfer, monitoring is immediately deactivated.
Centrex Switchhook Flash
If any set at the customer location involved in the monitored call switchhook
flashes or performs a Centrex switchhook flash, Attendant Monitor is
immediately deactivated.
Conference
If any party involved in a monitored call attempts to activate conference,
monitoring is immediately deactivated. With Attendant Monitor active, the
attendant cannot create a conference without first disabling the Attendant
Monitor feature.
Do Not Disturb
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Do Not Disturb activated
and is idle, idle DN treatment is given.
Make Set Busy
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Make Set Busy activated
and is idle, idle DN treatment is given.
Malicious Call Trace
If a party involved in a monitored call activates the TRC key, monitoring
is immediately deactivated.
Multiple Appearance DN
If Attendant Monitor is attempted on a Multiple Appearance DN, the Multiple
Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) TN becomes the desired party.
Override
A set may operate override to join into a desired call. If the desired call is
being Attendant Monitored at the time, one of the following occurs:
•If the desired call is a conference call, the override attempt is blocked
as per existing operation.
•If the call is a simple one with the Attendant Monitoring with no tone, the
override attempt is successful and Attendant Monitor is deactivated.
•If the call is a simple one with the Attendant Monitoring with tone, the
override attempt is blocked.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 411
Override, Enhanced
A set may operate enhanced override on a desired call. If the desired call
is being Attendant Monitored at the time, existing operation occurs for the
first time the Enhanced Override key is pressed. The second time the
key is pressed, the interaction with Attendant Monitor is the same as with
regular override.
Privacy Release
If Privacy Release is activated on a set that is involved in a monitored call,
Attendant Monitor is deactivated.
Private Line
Attendant Monitor is blocked from monitoring a Private DN.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then
either allow or deny the tone o" (page 411)
Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then either
allow or deny the tone option.
2. "LD 12 - Define the Barge-In/Attendant Monitor key and the Busy
Verify/Attendant Monitor key on an at" (page 412)
Define the Barge-In/Attendant Monitor key and the Busy Verify/Attendant
Monitor key on an attendant console.
LD 15 - Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then either allow or deny
the tone option.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: ATT_DATA Attendant console options
- OPT (AMD) AMA (Deny) allow Attendant Monitor.
(TOA) TOD (Allow) deny Attendant Monitor Tone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
412 China - Attendant Monitor
LD 12 - Define the Barge-In/Attendant Monitor key and the Busy Verify/Attendant Monitor key
on an attendant console.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE 2250 Attendant console type.
...
KEY 00 BVR Allow both Busy Verify and Attendant Monitor on key 00.
01 BIN Allow both Barge-In and Attendant Monitor on key 01.
Feature operation
Monitor a DN
Step Action
1Press an idle Loop key on the attendant console. The Loop indicator
is lit.
2Press the Busy Verify key. The Busy Verify lamp is lit.
3Press the Busy Verify key again to enable Attendant Monitor. The
Busy Verify lamp is in the flashing state indicating that the Attendant
Monitor option is enabled.
4Dial the extension desired to be monitored. One of the following
happens:
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is maintenance
busy or disabled.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is vacant.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is in some
transient state (for example, Conference or Transfer)
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is idle, receiving
busy tone, or receiving overflow tone.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is involved with
another attendant.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension has activated
the Hold key.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is already
involved in a monitored call by another attendant.
•Attendant Monitor is active when the extension is busy. The
attendant is able to listen to all connected parties. If the
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 413
Attendant Monitor Customer tone is denied (TOD), there is no
indication given to the connected parties that the attendant is
monitoring. If the Attendant Monitor Customer Tone is allowed
(TOA), a burst of tone is sent to the connected parties every 16
seconds. When the monitored DN disconnects from the call,
Attendant Monitor is deactivated.
In all of the above situations, the display on the parties involved
in the call does not indicate that the attendant has attempted to
monitor. With TOD configured, upon the attendant successfully
joining the connection there is no click sound given to the monitored
parties that could indicate that the attendant has joined in.
5When Attendant Monitor is deactivated, the attendant is released
from monitoring and is free to process calls. Deactivation occurs
due to the following:
•The RLS key on the attendant console is pressed.
•Any DN involved in the monitored call disconnects.
•Any DN involved in the monitored call at the customer location
activates some form of call modification.
—End—
Monitor a Trunk
Step Action
1Press an idle Loop key on the attendant console. The Loop indicator
is lit.
2Press the Barge-In key. The Barge-In lamp is lit.
3Press the Barge-In key again to enable Attendant Monitor. The
Barge-In lamp is in the flashing state indicating that the Attendant
Monitor option is enabled.
4Dial the trunk access code and the route member number, then
press (#). One of the following happens:
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is disabled.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is idle.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is not assigned.
•Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is already being
monitored by another attendant.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
414 China - Attendant Monitor
•Attendant Monitor is active when the trunk is busy. The attendant
is able to listen to all parties on the trunk. If the Attendant Monitor
Customer tone is denied (TOD), there is no indication given to
the connected parties that the attendant is monitoring. If the
Attendant Monitor Customer tone is allowed (TOA), a burst of
tone is sent every 16 seconds.
5When Attendant Monitor is deactivated, the attendant is released
from monitoring and is free to process calls. Deactivation occurs
due to the following:
•The RLS key on the attendant console is pressed.
•The trunk disconnects.
•Any party at the customer location performs some form of call
modification or activates hold.
•Any party at the customer location disconnects.
•Any trunk involved in the monitored call disconnects.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
415
China - Busy Tone Detection
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 415)
"Operating parameters" (page 415)
"Feature interactions" (page 416)
"Feature packaging" (page 416)
"Feature implementation" (page 416)
"Feature operation" (page 418)
Feature description
In many countries, loop start trunks are not supervised. Therefore, many
Public Exchanges/Central Offices send a busy tone to the system when the
external party has disconnected. A tone detector must be used to detect
this tone.
The China - Busy Tone Detection (BTD) feature allows a technician to
enter the characteristics of the busy tone to be detected in overlay 97.
This information is downloaded to the system trunk for use during call
processing. Once the busy tone is detected, the trunk sends a message
to the system software, which then disconnects the call, and the trunk
is free for other uses.
An option is provided to allow Busy Tone Disconnect to occur only for
incoming calls. This option is also programmed in LD 97. Cadence
information is downloaded on a card basis.
Operating parameters
The Busy Tone Detection functionality is implemented on the Enhanced
Extended Universal Trunk Card for China (NTRA10AA).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
416 China - Busy Tone Detection
The system will disconnect any call once busy tone is detected on the
incoming side of the trunk. If the user on the far end causes busy tone to
be generated by any means, the call is disconnected whether or not that
was the intention.
The BTD characteristics are downloaded on a card basis only (not on a unit
basis) and thus all units on the trunk card must go to Public Exchanges that
produce the same busy tone cadence.
Busy Tone Detection may not work with conference bridges in certain
situations. This is due to the nature of conference bridges in such that all of
the trunks are incoming. In the situation where two or more loop start trunks
with BTD disconnect simultaneously, the resulting busy tone from each
trunk may be detected by the BTD inhibitors of the other trunks. The result
would be a stalemate where all trunks remain connected.
If a trunk card is not designed to support the Busy Tone Detection feature
(for example, for future BTD hardware implementation), the functionality
can still be configured in software.
To change Busy Tone Detection assigned to a trunk card, all trunks on the
card must first be removed using LD 14.
Feature interactions
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks
The interaction with Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) trunks occurs
because Busy Tone Supervision (BTS) can be configured in conjunction
with any existing supervision type. For the EXUT, BTS can now be
configured with a supervision type of BST (both incoming and outgoing
battery reversal) and Polarity Insensitive (PIP). These supervision type’s
call processing methods are not changed, except that now the first type of
supervision received is the one acted upon.
Feature packaging
China - Busy Tone Detection requires Busy Tone Detection (BTD) package
294, which depends upon Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (XPE) package
203.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
•"LD 97 - Busy Tone table configuration." (page 417)
Busy Tone table configuration.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 417
•"LD 14 - Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision
assignment." (page 417)
Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision assignment.
For China, the BTD table and its assignment to the various routes is
automatic and does not require configuration in LD 97 or LD 14, as long
as the BTD package is equipped. Only the configuration of Busy Tone
Supervision in LD 14 is required.
LD 97 need only be changed if the values other than the default are required.
If table 0 is modified, rather than creating a new one, the assignment
to the trunk in LD 14 is not required. After the BTD table is created, or
changed, the data must be dumped and the system reloaded in order for
the information to be downloaded.
LD 97 - Busy Tone table configuration.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE BTD Busy Tone Detection.
BTDT (0)-7
X1-X7 Busy Tone Detection Table.
BCAD Ph1 Ph2
(350 350) Busy Tone Cadence. The input values are rounded to
the nearest multiple of 25 ms.
BTDD (BOTH) Busy Tone Detection allowed on both incoming and
outgoing calls.
INC Busy Tone Detection allowed on incoming calls only.
LD 14 - Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision assignment.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Create or change a route.
TYPE COT Central Office trunk.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B
where c = card and u = unit.
XTRK EXUT Extended Universal Trunk.
...
SIGL LOP Loop Start signaling.
...
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
418 China - Busy Tone Detection
Prompt Response Description
SUPN (NO) YES Supervision.
STYP
(PIP)
BTS
BST
Supervision type, where:
PIP = Polarity Insensitive
BTS = Busy Tone Supervision
BST = Both way Supervision Trunk (BST) (that is, PIP
on both incoming and outgoing calls) PIP
PIP BTS
BST BTS BTS = PIP and BTS, and
BST BTS = BST and BTS.
BTDT (0)-7 Busy Tone Detection Table number.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
419
China - Flexible Feature Codes
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 419)
"Operating parameters" (page 420)
"Feature interactions" (page 421)
"Feature packaging" (page 424)
"Feature implementation" (page 424)
"Feature operation" (page 431)
Feature description
Three Flexible Feature Code (FFC) features have been developed to meet
the requirements of the Chinese Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications
for the rural switch market in China, these features can be used in other
markets. The three features are Busy Number Redial (BNR), Customer
Call Forward (CCFW), and Outgoing Call Barring (OCB). With all three
of these features, there is an option to provide a confirmation tone upon
feature activation.
Busy Number Redial
Busy Number Redial enables a user of an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
encountering a busy condition to automatically re-dial the busy number by
performing a switchhook flash and dialing the Busy Number Redial FFC.
When the user goes off-hook next without dialing any digit, the busy number
is automatically re-dialed. This feature remains in effect until the desired
Directory Number (DN) is reached, up to a maximum of 20 minutes.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
420 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Customer Call Forward
Customer Call Forward allows users of analog (500/2500 type) telephones
to forward their telephones to a central answering position by dialing the
Customer Call Forward FFC. This feature activates the Call Forward All
Calls function without having to specify the forward DN.
Outgoing Call Barring
Outgoing Call Barring allows a set to be blocked from making some or all
outgoing calls. Three levels of barring are available which can be selected
by dialing the Outgoing Call Barring FFC, the barring level desired, and the
Station Control Password (SCPW).
The three levels are each associated with a New Flexible Code Restriction
(NFCR) tree in the Customer Data Block. When a DN is dialed, the digits
dialed are compared to the associated NFCR tree and busy tone is given if
the call is barred. An FFC is also available to verify that the feature is active.
The active level cannot be changed without first deactivating the feature
and reactivating it with a new level.
Operating parameters
Although designed for China, the China – Flexible Feature Codes feature
can be used in other markets.
Busy Number Redial is only available for internal calls and for trunk calls
that provide a busy signal when busy tone is given.
Busy Number Redial and Customer Call Forward are only available for
analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Outgoing Call Barring does not apply to BRI sets.
The Reply DN for CCFW is limited to 16 digits.
OCB will only process asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#) according to the active
NFCR tree if the digits are to be outpulsed on a route with OPR active
(including all necessary conditions for OPR). If they are dialed as part of
an FFC, the call is allowed; otherwise, an octothorpe will cause the call to
be blocked. An asterisk (*) is ignored, except during digit counting. Thus,
FFCs containing an asterisk (*) or an octothorpe (#) cannot be blocked by
this feature.
OCB will not prevent calls from terminating when there are too few dialed
digits to traverse the full NCFR tree (for example, if the active tree is set
up to bar 2001, but a DN of 200 exists, calls to 200 is allowed with no
error message).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 421
The maximum number of digits that is processed by OCB is 32. If the call is
not allowed or denied by that point, the call is barred.
OCB can bar feature access codes such as Special Prefix (SPRE) codes
and numeric FFCs. It will not bar the digits dialed after a feature access
code.
Feature interactions
Busy Number Redial
Autodial
Activation of Busy Number Redial changes the activation of Autodial. The
DN that is auto dialed becomes the DN that was busy. When the BNR
activation timer expires or the busy DN is re-dialed when it is idle, the
autodial capability is deactivated, but the number saved is not cleared. If
Autodial is then activated without entering a DN, the number used is the
formerly busy DN.
Activation of Autodial when BNR is active deactivates BNR.
Automatic Set Relocation
Busy Number Redial is deactivated when a set is relocated.
Deactivate Feature FFC
The Deactivate Feature (DEAF) FFC deactivates Busy Number Redial.
Hot Line
Busy Number Redial cannot be used on Flexible Hot Line or Enhanced
Hot Line sets.
Off-Hook Alarm Security
Busy Number Redial cannot be used on a set with Off-Hook Alarm Security
Allowed, since autodial cannot be configured on these sets.
16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Sets
Busy Number Redial (BNR) activate can be a post-dial function, and BNR
deactivate can be a pre-dial function. Both FFCs may be dialed normally
from a 16-button DTMF telephone.
Customer Call Forward
Customer Call Forward (CCFW) is another way of activating Call Forward
All Calls (CFWAC), therefore all interactions with CCFW not specified below
are the same as with CFWAC.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
422 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Call Forward All Calls
When CCFW is active Call Forward All Calls (CFWAC) cannot be activated
by Flexible Feature Code, but can be activated by SPRE. When CFWAC is
active, CCFW cannot be activated.
CCFW can be deactivated by deactivating CFWAC. CFWAC can only be
deactivated by the CCFD FFC if the current CFW DN is the same as the
current CCFW DN.
Deactivate Feature FFC
The Deactivate Feature FFC deactivates Customer Call Forward.
Make Set Busy
Customer Call Forward takes precedence over Make Set Busy if both are
active.
16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Sets
CCFA and CCFD are allowed as predial ABCD functions. They may also be
dialed normally from 16-Button DTMF telephones.
Outgoing Call Barring
Outgoing Call Barring is an additional feature that may block a call. All other
call blocking features still apply as usual.
Authorization Code Security Enhancement
Digits dialed after an Authorization Code are checked against the active
OCB level.
Call Forward All Calls
When a set with Outgoing Call Barring active activates CFWAC with a new
CFW DN, the CFW DN is checked against the current barring level. If the
DN is not allowed to be dialed, it can also not be used as a Call Forward
DN. This is to prevent a set from forwarding to a barred DN and then dialing
its own DN to bypass the limitations.
Charge Account and Calling Party Number
Digits dialed after a charge account are checked against the active OCB
level.
Digit Display
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones with displays do not display the OCB level
and the Station Control Password (SCPW) when OCB FFCs are dialed.
This protects the security of the SCPW.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 423
Flexible Feature Codes
Flexible Feature Codes containing an asterisk (*) or an octothorpe (#) will
always be allowed by OCB. Therefore, FFCs which can be used to make a
call should be entirely numeric if barring of them is required.
Some FFCs are equivalent to Special Prefix functions and these is subject
to barring based on the equivalent Special Prefix codes, even if the FFC is
entirely numeric.
Last Number Redial
Barred DNs is stored by Last Number Redial (LNR). DNs re-dialed using
LNR are checked against the active OCB level.
OCB Flexible Feature Codes are not stored as the last number dialed.
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS)/Basic Alternate Route
Selection (BARS)
Calls made through NARS or BARS that result in local termination may
not be barred based on the full dialed digits. They is barred based on the
resulting local digits. Calls to a Local Steering Code will use the full dialed
digits, as well as the resulting termination. Calls to the Home Location
Code (HLOC) is barred based on the AC1 and HLOC, and then barred
separately based on the local DN. Other local terminations include calls to
an Numbering Plan Area (NPA) or Home Numbering Plan Area (HNPA)
that use Supplemental Digit Restriction and Recognition to recognize a
Local Direct Inward Dialing (DID) number, and calls using a Route List Block
which terminate using the LTER option.
New Flexible Code Restriction
Outgoing Call Barring uses New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) trees to
define the digit sequences that are not allowed for each level of barring.
However, OCB analyses all dialed digits, whereas NFCR only analyses
digits outpulsed on trunks. This means that the same tree will not normally
be usable for both features, unless only Coordinated Dialing Plan trunk calls
are to be blocked for both features and no digit manipulation is done.
Outpulsing of Asterisks and Octothorpes
The NFCR trees used for Outgoing Call Barring are allowed to contain
asterisks and octothorpes when the Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe
(OPAO) package 104 is equipped. These special digits will only be used for
processing dialed digits on routes with OPAO allowed.
Remote Call Forward
Activation of CFW to a barred DN by Remote Call Forward is permitted,
since the user has had to dial the Station Control Password, which could
also have been used to deactivate OCB.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
424 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Ring Again
Ring Again cannot be activated after a call is barred by Outgoing Call
Barring. Sets with display will not offer Ring Again.
Saved Number Redial
DNs re-dialed using Saved Number Redial (SNR) are checked against the
active OCB level.
M2317 sets will offer a "Save #" after a call to a barred DN.
Speed Call
Digits dialed using Speed Call are checked against the active OCB level.
This includes calls made using the Dial Access to Speed Call feature (that
is, using Pilot DNs).
Speed Call, System
Digits dialed using System Speed Call are checked against the active OCB
level.
16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Sets
The Outgoing Call Barring FFCs are not allowed as ABCD functions. They
may be dialed normally from 16-Button DTMF telephones.
Feature packaging
China – Flexible Feature Codes is contained in base system software. The
following packages are required for feature activation:
•Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139
•Busy Number Redial also requires the Autodial functionality that is
contained in Optional Features (OPT) package 1
•Customer Call Forward also requires the Call Forward All Calls
functionality contained in Optional Features (OPT) package 1 and
Special Service for 2500 Sets (SS25) package 18
•Outgoing Call Barring also requires the New Flexible Feature Code
Restriction (NFCR) package 49
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Define the basic setup for all three of the FFC-based features."
(page 425)
Define the basic setup for all three of the FFC-based features.
2. "LD 56 - Define Confirmation Tone." (page 425)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 425
Define Confirmation Tone.
LD 15 - Define the basic setup for all three of the FFC-based features.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FFC Flexible Feature Codes
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- FFCS (NO) YES (Do not) change Flexible Feature Code end-of-dialing
indicator.
- STRL 1-3 String Length of end-of-dial indicator.
- STRG xxx String to indicate end-of-dialing. Up to three digits as
defined by STRL. Digits 0-9 and "#" are valid entries.
REQ CHG Change.
TYPE FTR Features and options.
- SPRE nnnn Special Function Prefix (required for FFCs to operate).
LD 56 - Define Confirmation Tone.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences.
TABL 0-31 FTC Table Number.
HCCT YES Hardware controlled cadences and tones.
...
- FFCT Configure Confirmation Tone.
- - XTON 0-(4)-255 XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code.
- - XCAD (0)-255 XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number (FCAD
cadence number).
Busy Number Redial
Task Summary List
Complete the following steps to configure the Busy Number Redial feature:
1. "LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial."
(page 426)
Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial.
2. "LD 15 - Set the Autodial Delay time used by Busy Number Redial."
(page 426)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
426 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Set the Autodial Delay time used by Busy Number Redial.
3. "LD 10 - Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 426)
Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
FFCT (NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.
CODE Change code.
- DEAF xxxx Deactivate Feature.
- BNRA xxxx Busy Number Redial activation code.
- BNRD xxxx Busy Number Redial deactivation code.
LD 15 - Set the Autodial Delay time used by Busy Number Redial.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FFC Flexible Feature Codes
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- ADLD (0)-20 Number of seconds to delay before auto-dialing the saved
busy number (0 will make the feature unavailable). Odd
entries are rounded up to the next even number.
LD 10 - Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 427
Prompt Response Description
CLS (BNRD) BNRA (Deny) allow Busy Number Redial for this telephone.
FTR ADL xx Autodial, where:
xx = the maximum number of digits that can be stored.
Customer Call Forward
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Customer Call Forward."
(page 427)
Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Customer Call Forward.
2. "LD 15 - Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward."
(page 427)
Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward.
3. "LD 10 - Configure the Call Forward feature to allow Customer Call
Forward for analog (500/2500 type)" (page 428)
Configure the Call Forward feature to allow Customer Call Forward for
analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Customer Call Forward.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
FFCT (NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.
CODE Change code.
- DEAF xxxx Deactivate Feature.
- CCFA xxxx Customer Call Forward activation code.
- CCFD xxxx Customer Call Forward deactivation code.
LD 15 - Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: RDR Call Redirection
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
428 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Prompt Response Description
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- CCFWDN dd..dd X Customer Call Forward DN (maximum of 16 digits). X to
delete.
LD 10 - Configure the Call Forward feature to allow Customer Call Forward for analog (500/2500
type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
FTR CFW nn Call Forward (nn must be the same number of digits as
the CCFW DN).
Outgoing Call Barring
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 57 - Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call
Barring." (page 429)
Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call Barring.
2. "LD 15 - Specify NFCR trees and Station Control Password length for
Outgoing Call Barring." (page 429)
Specify NFCR trees and Station Control Password length for Outgoing
Call Barring.
3. "LD 49 - Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring." (page 429)
Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring.
4. "LD 10 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 430)
Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
5. "LD 11 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 430)
Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 429
LD 57 - Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call Barring.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
FFCT (NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.
CODE Change code
- OCBA xxxx Outgoing Call Barring activation code.
- OCBD xxxx Outgoing Call Barring deactivation code.
- OCBV xxxx Outgoing Call Barring verification code.
LD 15 - Specify NFCR trees and Station Control Password length for Outgoing Call Barring.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: FCR New Flexible Code Restriction options
NFCR (NO) YES (Disable) enable New Flexible Code Restriction.
- MAXT 1-255 Maximum number of NFCR trees.
- OCB1 0-MAXT NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 1. Enter 255
to deactivate.
- OCB2 0-MAXT NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 2. Enter 255
to deactivate.
- OCB3 0-MAXT NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 3. Enter 255
to deactivate.
TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- SCPL 0-8 Station Control Password Length.
LD 49 - Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Add new data.
TYPE FCR Flexible Code Restriction.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CRNO (0)-254 New Flexible Code Restriction tree number.
INIT ALOW DENY Allow or deny digit strings not in tree.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
430 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Prompt Response Description
ALOW xxxx
xxxx y...y
Digit sequence to be allowed unconditionally.
Digit sequence to be conditionally allowed and maximum
number of digits that can follow.
UPDT (YES), NO Data is correct and NFCR tree can be updated.
DENY xxxx
xxxx y...y
Digit sequence to be denied unconditionally.
Digit sequence to be conditionally denied and maximum
number of digits that can follow.
UPDT (YES) NO Data is correct and NFCR tree can be updated.
LD 10 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
SCPW xxxx Station Control Password. Length must match SCPL in
LD 15.
CLS (OCBD) OCBA (Deny) allow Outgoing Call Barring.
LD 11 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
SCPW xxxx Station Control Password. Length must match SCPL in
LD 15.
CLS (OCBD) OCBA (Deny) allow Outgoing Call Barring.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 431
Feature operation
Busy Number Redial
To activate Busy Number Redial, a switchhook flash is done, and the BNRA
FFC is dialed. The number to be re-dialed is stored in the set’s storage area
for Autodial. Confirmation tone is given if configured.
When the user goes off-hook and does not dial within the number of
seconds configured for the Autodial Delay timer (ADLD) the busy number
is automatically re-dialed. If the DN is idle when retailed, the feature is
deactivated, otherwise it remains available for 20 minutes. The feature
can be deactivated manually by dialing the BNRD FFC, or the Deactivate
Feature FFC. The user again hears confirmation tone. Deactivating the
feature when it is not active will still cause confirmation tone to be heard,
since the feature may have just timed out when going off-hook to dial the
deactivation code.
Customer Call Forward
Customer Call Forward is activated by dialing the CCFA FFC. Confirmation
tone is given if activation is successful. When Customer Call Forward
is activated, the CFWAC feature is activated with the CFW DN set to the
Reply DN.
CCFW is deactivated by dialing the Customer Call Forward Deactivate
FFC, or the Deactivate Feature FFC (it will also be deactivated by the
activation of certain other features, see the Feature interactions section of
this description).
Outgoing Call Barring
Outgoing Call Barring can be activated from a set with OCBA Class of
Service. To activate OCB, the subscriber dials the OCBA FFC, the barring
level desired, and the Station Control Password. An octothorpe must also
be dialed from Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and analog (500/2500
type) telephones. If activation is successful confirmation tone is given. If
the feature is not activated overflow tone is given.
The feature is deactivated by dialing the OCBD FFC, then the active level,
and the Station Control Password. An octothorpe must also be dialed from
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
The subscriber may dial the OCBV FFC to verify that OCB is active.
Confirmation tone is heard if OCB is active, otherwise overflow tone is heard.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
432 China - Flexible Feature Codes
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
433
China - Supervised Analog Lines
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 433)
"Operating parameters" (page 434)
"Feature interactions" (page 435)
"Feature packaging" (page 436)
"Feature implementation" (page 436)
"Feature operation" (page 437)
Feature description
The China - Supervised Analog Lines feature provides two types of call
supervision signaling capabilities: battery reversal answer/disconnect
supervision and hook flash disconnect supervision. These forms of
supervision are provided to terminal devices connected to analog ports in
the system.
Battery Reversal Supervision
Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision signaling is used for
calls originating from the terminal device. It provides both far-end (the called
party) answer supervision and far-end disconnect supervision signals to
the terminal device. It does not apply to incoming calls terminating at the
terminal device.
In the idle state, the analog port in the system provides ground signal on
the tip lead and battery on the ring lead. This polarity is maintained during
dialing and ringing at the far end. When the far end answers, the battery
and ground connections are reversed. The reverse battery is maintained
while the call is established. When the far end disconnects, the battery and
ground connections are reverted to the idle state to signal that the far end
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
434 China - Supervised Analog Lines
has disconnected. If the terminal device disconnects first, the system sends
the Deactivate Battery Reversal Scan Signal Distribution (SSD) message
to the firmware after receiving the on-hook status to revert the polarity to
its idle state.
Two types of battery reversal are supported. Battery Reversal for Absolute
Answer Only provides an answer supervision signal to the terminal device
only when the system detects an absolute answer. Battery Reversal for
Absolute and Assumed Answer provides an answer supervision signal to
the terminal device even when an assumed answer is detected and the far
end is not capable of indicating definite answer (for example, an outgoing
call on an unsupervised loop start trunk).
Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision
Hook flash disconnect supervision is used for incoming calls terminating at
the terminal device. The disconnect signal is indicated by the removal of
the ground connection to the tip lead for a specific period of time, which
is provided by firmware ranging from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a
maximum of 2.55 seconds. The analog port is held busy for incoming calls
while hook flash is in progress.
Operating parameters
This feature applies to Intelligent Peripheral Equipment that support the
Supervised Analog Line feature only.
Disconnect supervision is not provided to the terminal device if the system
does not receive any indication of the far end releasing.
If the system does not receive any answer indication, and answer
supervision is not extended to the terminal device following an assumed
answer condition, disconnect supervision cannot be extended when the
far end disconnects.
If the Battery Reversal Supervision feature is configured for an analog
line on an analog card that does not support battery reversal, the battery
reversal SSD messages from the system software are ignored by the analog
card firmware. In this case, no battery reversal signal is extended to the
terminal device.
If the Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision feature is configured for an
analog line on an analog card that does not support hook flash, the hook
flash SSD messages from the system software are ignored by the analog
line card firmware. In this case, no hook flash signal is extended to the
terminal device.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 435
If the system initializes while an outgoing call originating from an analog line
is established and battery reversal is activated, unprotected data for the
call is lost. In this case, battery reversal remains activated when the call is
cleared down by either party. However, the line status is reverted to normal
when the next outgoing call is answered and then cleared down.
If the hook flash timer is set equal to or greater than the on-hook timer,
activation of the hook flash disconnect signal also causes the card to send
an on-hook message and then an off-hook message to the system. In this
case, if the user remains off-hook after the far end disconnects, dial tone
is received and an outgoing call can be initiated.
Battery reversal supervision is supported on the following cards:
•The Enhanced Extended Analog Line Card for China NTRA08AA or
later vintage.
•The Off-Premise Station Line Card NT1R20AB or later vintage, and
•The Off-Premise Station Line Card for China NTRA06AB or later vintage.
Hook flash disconnect supervision is supported on the following cards:
•The Off-Premise Station Line Card NT1R20AB or later vintage, and
•The Off-Premise Station Line Card for China NTRA06AB or later vintage.
Feature interactions
Call Transfer
If more than one active call is extended to an analog line, the call type
associated with an analog line is determined by the first active call. The call
type is assumed to be incoming and hook flash supervision applies if a
terminal device answers an incoming call from an idle state. If the terminal
device performs a switch hook flash to put the first party on hold and
initiates a consultation call, the Battery Reversal feature is not supported;
no battery reversal answer signal is extended to the terminal device when
the second party answers.
If the first party disconnects while the terminal device is connected to
the second party, no disconnect supervision is extended to the terminal
device. However, hook flash disconnect supervision is extended to the
terminal device when the second party disconnects (that is, a disconnect
supervision signal is sent only when the last party connected to the terminal
disconnects).
If a terminal device originates an outgoing call, battery reversal answer
supervision is extended when the called party answers. The polarity of the
line remains reversed when the terminal device performs a switch hook
flash and then initiates a consultation call to a second party. The analog
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
436 China - Supervised Analog Lines
line is reverted to normal polarity when the terminal device completes
the transfer and drops out or when the last of either the held party or the
consultation party disconnects.
Conference
If a terminal device answers an incoming call and then initiates a conference,
no battery reversal answer supervision signal is extended to the terminal
device when new parties of the conference answer. However, a hook flash
disconnect supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when the
last party in the conference disconnects.
If a terminal device initiates a conference, battery reversal answer
supervision is extended to the terminal device when the first party answers.
No polarity change is made when additional parties are added to the
conference. The polarity is reverted to normal when the terminal device
disconnects or when the last party in the conference disconnects.
Multi-Party Operations
As in the cases with Call Transfer and Conference, the call type of the first
active call determines whether battery reversal or hook flash supervision
applies. Also, supervision signaling is not supported for the second call.
A disconnect supervision signal is extended only when the last party
disconnects.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Enable battery reversal supervision." (page 436)
Enable battery reversal supervision.
2. "LD 10 - Enable hook flash disconnect supervision." (page 437)
Enable hook flash disconnect supervision.
LD 10 - Enable battery reversal supervision.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 437
Prompt Response Description
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
...
FTR OSP (1) Outgoing call supervision. Answer and disconnect
supervision for outgoing calls with absolute and assumed
answer indication. If the numeric parameter is not entered
and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 1. Otherwise it
remains unchanged.
OSP 2 Answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with
absolute answer supervision only.
XOSP Enter XOSP to disable battery reversal answer and
disconnect supervision.
LD 10 - Enable hook flash disconnect supervision.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
...
FTR ISP 1...(75)...255 Enable hook flash disconnect supervision with flash timer
in 10 millisecond units. If the numeric parameter is not
entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 75.
Otherwise it remains unchanged.
XISP Enter XISP to disable hook flash disconnect supervision.
Respond to the FTR prompt in LD 10 with OSP 1, and then with ISP
1...(75)...255 to enable both battery reversal supervision and hook flash
disconnect supervision.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
438 China - Supervised Analog Lines
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
439
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 439)
"Operating parameters" (page 440)
"Feature interactions" (page 440)
"Feature packaging" (page 441)
"Feature implementation" (page 441)
"Feature operation" (page 443)
Feature description
The China – Toll Call Loss Plan feature provides the requirement of 7 dB
loss for 2.0 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) toll calls from a system,
acting as a Class 5 (C5) office. It is only applicable for a DTI2 trunk
connection using MFC signaling to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone.
Feature specific losses on the DTI2 card and 500/2500 line card are
provided if the call is recognized as a toll call and the local party is using
an analog (500/2500 type) telephone. The loss levels for toll calls are
configured in LD 73 by using the TOLT and TOLL prompts.
With this feature, when a toll condition is detected, loss levels are sent to
the ONS line card. When the call is terminated, the original loss levels are
sent to the ONS line card.
The outgoing toll call is recognized by defining the toll digits as a Special
Service List number in LD 18 and specifying it in the DTI2 Route Data
Block. For incoming calls, the toll status is provided by the Multifrequency
Compelled (MFC) signaling. When the toll status is determined, the
appropriate pad values are used on the DTI2 card and 500/2500 line card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
440 China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Operating parameters
The Toll Loss Plan is only supported when a pure Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment (IPE) Loss Plan for China is used. Existing pad levels for DTI2
toll calls with Hybrid Loss Plan for China are unchanged.
This feature is only supported for a Class 5 system.
The Toll Loss Plan is only supported on DTI2 MFC trunks.
If an initialization occurs, the toll call stays connected, but the toll status is
lost. The pad levels are reinserted as if it is for a non-toll call.
The Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference call is in progress.
China specific IPE 500/2500, DTI2, and MFC line cards are required.
Feature interactions
Call Diversion (Call Transfer, Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward Busy,
Call Forward, Internal Calls, Call Forward No Answer, Hunting)
Toll pad switching is also provided after call diversion has been completed.
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the
forwarding or hunting call is answered.
Conference
Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference is in progress. When
a local party connecting to a toll call makes a conference call, the pad
levels on the ONS line card are switched back to their original (non-toll
call) values. Then, the existing Conference algorithm takes care of the
necessary pad switching. This would not alter the existing conference call in
terms of loss levels.
When a conference call joins in a toll call, the Toll Loss Plan is not effective.
When a conference call involving a toll call becomes a two-party call, the
Toll Loss Plan is applied on the set and DTI2 trunk.
The conference pad switching algorithm is not changed for the Toll Loss
Plan, since the 7 db requirement does not apply to a Conference call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 441
Digitone Receiver Pads
When a Digitone Receiver (DTR) is connected to the DTI2 call (receive
only), the pad value to be used on the DTI2 pack is defined in LD 73. There
is no interaction with this since the Toll Loss Plan is only supported on a
DTI2 trunk with MFC signaling.
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Pads
There is no interaction with this operation, since the Toll pad switching
is only performed when the call is established and the Multifrequency
Compelled signaling has terminated.
Multi-Party Operations
When a user toggles between one party and another, the Toll Loss Plan is
inserted on the active call if it is a toll call. If the user toggles to a non-toll
call, the Toll Loss Plan is removed.
Feature packaging
The China Toll (CHTL) package 292 must be provisioned to activate this
feature.
In addition the China – Toll Call Loss Plan feature requires:
•Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128
•2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129
•International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 for the
Special Service List functionality.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 18 - Define toll digits for China." (page 441)
Define toll digits for China.
2. "LD 16 - Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data
Block of the DTI2 trunk." (page 442)
Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data Block of
the DTI2 trunk.
3. "LD 73 - Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2." (page 442)
Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2.
LD 18 - Define toll digits for China.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG Add, or change.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
442 China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Prompt Response Description
TYPE SSL Special Service List.
SSL 1-15 Enter Special Service List number.
SSDG 0China national toll call.
- TOLL YES The SSDG entry is a toll number.
...
SSDG 00 China international toll call.
- TOLL N YES The SSDG entry is a toll number.
...
SSDG <CR> End entry.
LD 16 - Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data Block of the DTI2 trunk.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG Add, or change.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block
...
SSL 1-15 Enter the SSL number defined in LD 18.
LD 73 - Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG PRT Add, change, or print.
TYPE DTI2 2.0 Mbps DTI data block.
FEAT PAD Pad category.
PDCA 1-16 Pad category table.
TNLS (NO) YES Terminal Number list.
DFLT (1)-16 Default table.
...
TOLT Rx Tx
(0) (0) Toll call pad data on DTI2 card, where:
Rx = Receive, and
Tx = Transmit.
The default values are 0 dB receive, and 0 dB transmit.
TOLL Rx Tx
(16) (30) Toll call pad data on line card, where:
Rx = Receive, and
Tx = Transmit.
The default values are 0 dB receive, and 7 dB transmit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 443
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
444 China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
445
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and
Gateways Enhancements
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 445)
"Operating parameters" (page 455)
"Feature interactions" (page 456)
"Feature packaging" (page 457)
"Feature implementation" (page 458)
"Feature operation" (page 471)
Feature description
This chapter describes the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Digits Manipulation and Gateways
Enhancements features. The features are presented together because they
share many common characteristics.
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements features allow
the ANI to be built in a more flexible way when the call is originated from a
set and from a route.
ANI Definition
The Automatic Number Identification (ANI) information is a string of digits
sent to the Central Office (CO), which it uses to identify the calling subscriber
for billing purposes, Malicious Call Trace (MCT) purposes, and for immediate
information about the subscriber when reaching some vital service such as
fire brigade, emergency medical care, or law enforcement officials. The ANI
information is sent over the speech path whenever the CO requests it.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
446 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
ANI is sent on the following CIS trunks on the system:
•CIS three-wire analog trunk
•CIS digital trunk interface Dial Pulse (DP) and Multi-Frequency Shuttle
(MFS)
Shared functionality
When configuring outgoing CIS routes, the feature is activated using the
prompt ANIC to enable composition of a new ANI.
Two similar ANI tables are configured in the customer data block. One is
used when call is originated from a set. The second table is used when call
is originated from a route.
Up to 2000 entries can be configured in the ANI table for sets. Up to 512
entries can be configured in the ANI table for routes.
An ANI entry contains the following data:
•DNLG (DN Length): it gives the number of digits of the calling number
that is used for building the ANI DN (for example calling party DN =
342390 and DNLG = 4 will give an ANI DN = 2390).
•LEC: Local Exchange Code.
•ANDN: used as ANI DN if DNLG=0.
•ADDG: additional digits.
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation introduction
The CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature enhances the system CIS ANI
digits manipulation capabilities by increasing flexibility and ensuring greater
accuracy. The feature modifies the length of outgoing ANI and it allows the
building of outgoing ANI using the table configured in customer data block.
CIS Gateway Enhancements introduction
The purpose of the gateways enhancement feature is to enhance several
gateways with Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) trunks.
CIS gateways considered are with all route types with an emphasis on
connectivity that can receive a Calling Number: R2MFC, ISDN interfaces
and incoming CIS DTI2.
ANI Digits Manipulation feature functionality
The ANI may be built in two ways with the enhancements introduced by
the CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature as described in the list below (see
Figure 5 "Example of how ANI is built in call originating from a set (using
enhanced functionality)" (page 447))
1. The ANI may be built with the following modifications:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 447
•The length of the ANI information built by the software is configurable
on a per route basis and may reach 15 digits (for LEC+ANI DN).
•The part of the ANI DN to be truncated (in case the truncation can’t
be avoided) is the beginning (that is the most significant digits).
•The system has the option to work without LEC, that is the response
to the prompt LEC in LD 16 is not mandatory anymore.
•In the case of LEC+ANI DN smaller than the programmed length,
additional digit(s) (ADDG) is (are) added at the beginning of the ANI
DN (between the ANI DN and the LEC), in compliance with the CIS
standards. ADDG can be more than one digit long.
2. Optionally, the ANI data may be retrieved from entries configured in LD
15. It provides much more flexibility in building the ANI. An ANI entry
number can be assigned to each circuit switched network set, BRI set
and BCS DN key.
Figure 5
Example of how ANI is built in call originating from a set (using enhanced functionality)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
448 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation examples
This section provides diagrams and tables that show how CIS ANI Digits
Manipulation feature operates. Example 1 is presented in Table 3 "DN on
key 1 is to be used in ANI" (page 448). Example 2 is shown in "Example 2 -
DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI" (page 448).
Example 1 - DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI
Table 3
DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI
ANI entry Entry X Entry Y
DNLG, length of DN to use in ANI 40
LEC, Local Exchange Code 940 940
ADDG, additional digits 89 8
ANDN, used as ANI DN if DNLG is 0 7676
Example 2 - DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI
Table 4
DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI
ANI entry Entry X Entry Y
DNLG, length of DN to use in ANI 40
LEC, Local Exchange Code 940 940
ADDG, additional digits 89 8
ANDN, used as ANI DN if DNLG is 0 7676
Gateways Enhancement feature functionality
The gateway enhancements are composed of the following new functionality,
described in this section:
•Mapping of the received calling number to ANI:
— Mapping CNI to ANI, ANI to CNI
— Mapping CLID to ANI and OLI to ANI
— Mapping ANI to ANI in gateway CIS to CIS
•Building ANI for interfaces without calling number
Mapping of the received calling number to ANI To map any Calling
number to ANI the idea is to be able to manipulate the received Calling
Number when tandeming it into ANI. In a gateway situation the incoming
trunk is the originator of the outgoing call. So the Calling Number is
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 449
manipulated by assigning an ANI table entry to the incoming route. An ANI
table entry is also assigned to route types whose connectivity does not give
the possibility to receive a Calling Number. For these routes, the ANI table
entry allows to build the outgoing ANI using only information pertaining
to the incoming route.
CIS Gateway Enhancement introduces a list of ANI entries applicable to
incoming route considered for the gateway with CIS, or incoming and
outgoing route. When package CIST is equipped, an ANI entry is attached
to each applicable route. An entry for routes is configured with prompt:
R_ENTRY.
Some of the fields defined in ANI table entry were already existing in route
configuration. ANI table entry fields that were already existing on route
(RDNL, ANDN) are suppressed from the route. It must be noticed that
prompt RDNL of Route Data Block is replaced by prompt DNLG in ANI
table entry. A new prompt is added on Route data configuration to defined
ANI table entry: ANIE. During upgrades, former Route Data Block prompt
values are moved into an ANI table entry and this table entry is assigned
to the route.
Several routes can have the same tandeming information configured. The
data has been moved from Route Data Block to Customer Data Block. In
case no ANI table entry is configured, the default table entry (0) is used.
ANI is built as follows:
If outgoing route does not allow use of ANI table entry assigned on incoming
route (ANIC prompt of outgoing CIS route is set to NO), Calling number is
built as before. Notice that part of the received Calling Number (DNLG) and
ANDN INC route are configured in ANI table entry of the incoming route.
1. If outgoing route allows to use ANI table entry assigned on incoming
route (ANIC is set to yes on CIS outgoing route), ANI is built as LEC inc
route + ADDG inc route + (part of) received Calling Number or, when
calling Number not available.
With new implementation "part of received calling Number" indicates N
least significant digits of received Calling Number, where N is the value
configured against prompt DNLG in the ANI table entry associated to
the incoming Route Data Block.
2. LEC inc route + ADDG inc route + ANDN inc. route
ANI has a predetermined size, configured on outgoing CIS route. It can
happen that ANI built is smaller or longer than the ANI configured size. This
is handled the same way as for ANI built when call originator is a set.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
450 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
When the ANIC of the outgoing route is set to yes, data from the ANI table
entry configured for the incoming route is used, even if empty. Thus it is up
to the craftsman to ensure that the ANI built using the ANI table entry is
correct.
Mapping CNI to ANI, ANI to CNI On MFC routes, prompt ANDN is
currently defined. This prompt is removed and replaced by prompt ANIE
which allows configuring the ANI table entry number.
Both CNI and ANI contain a CAC field. The value and meaning of the field
in both cases are not the same.
On the gateway side of the R2MFC to CIS, the purpose of this mapping
is to convert the 10 MFC CAC meanings into CIS CAC meanings, or to
define a default CIS CAC value. For this, a conversion table is defined.
Conversion tables are defined in LD 15. Up to 32 tables can be configured.
A conversion table can be assigned on each MFC route. For this, the prompt
CAC_CONV is added to the MFC incoming route configuration. If no CAC
conversion table is configured on the MFC route, default table (number 0)
will apply to the MFC incoming route.
A CAC conversion entry contains the following data:
•CAC0 to CAC9: against CAC0 prompt is configured the CIS CAC value
to be sent if an R2MFC CAC of value 0 has been received.
•DFLT: against this prompt is configured the CIS CAC value to be sent if
the R2MFC CAC has not been received or is not in the correct range.
When CNI has not been received at the time ANI is built, a default value
must also be used. This default value is defined in the CAC Conversion
table. On CIS trunks, 10 CAC values can be sent, from 0 to 9. Each one
has a particular meaning (see "CAC conversion table entry 0 for R2MFC
route" (page 451)).
Default table is number zero and is configurable. After upgrade this table
is defined in memory as shown in table below. The craftsman must be
aware that modifying this default table after conversion will modify the CAC
generated for all gateway cases where the incoming route had a CAC set
to three (before upgrade).
In this default table all fields are set to three, as it is the current CIS CAC
default value. A value of three for CIS Category Code means the caller
is residential, business or hotel subset with the access to local network
and without access to automatic regional, toll, international network and to
chargeable service numbers.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 451
CAC conversion table entry 0 for R2MFC route
MFC CAC CIS CAC CIS CAC description
CAC0 3CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT0
CAC1 3CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT1
.... 3
CAC8 3CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT8
CAC9 3CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT9
Default 3CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been
received, or MFC CAC received is not in the MFC
CAC list of this table
MFC routes were given a CAC prompt on which was configured the CAC
value of incoming route when tandeming to CIS. This data has no more
utility on incoming MFC route as a CAC conversion table is configured
against prompt CAC_CONV. Thus, CAC prompt is removed from MFC
incoming routes. On upgrade, former CAC prompt value is moved into a
CAC conversion table, and this table is assigned to the route.
In the gateway side CIS to R2MFC, the purpose of this mapping is to
convert the 10 CIS CAC meanings into R2MFC CAC value. For this, a
conversion table is defined.
Prior to upgrading, the CAC sent was defined in the R2MFC table (LD 94).
In this R2MFC table, it is the same value for all non-tie incoming trunks. In
LD 15, for CAC conversion table, the same range (1-10) and default value
(6) than in LD 94 are used. The value 0 is also allowed, it means that the
value defined in R2MFC table for incoming non-Tie trunk has to be used.
CAC conversion tables must be defined by the craftsperson in LD 15. Up
to 32 tables can be configured. Then a configured conversion table entry
can be assigned on each incoming DTI2 CIS route. For this, new prompt
CAC_CONV is added to the CIS incoming route configuration. If no CAC
conversion table is configured on the CIS route, the default table entry
number 0 will apply on CIS incoming routes.
Default table entry is number 0 and is configurable. During upgrades, this
table is defined in memory as shown in "CAC Conversion table entry 0 for
CIS incoming DTI2 route" (page 452). As all values of default tables are set
to 0, the R2MFC table is used until default table number 0 is configured.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
452 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
CAC Conversion table entry 0 for CIS incoming DTI2 route
CIS CAC MFC CAC Description and CIS CAC meaning
CAC0 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 0
"Reserved"
CAC1 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 1
"Residential or business subset with the access
to automatic regional, toll and international
network"
CAC2 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 2
"Hotel subset with the access to automatic
regional, toll international network"
CAC3 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 3
"Residential, business or Hotel subset with the
access to local network only"
CAC4 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 4
"Business subset with the access to regional,
toll, international network and to special service
numbers; preferential access to regional and
toll network"
CAC5 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 5
"Business subset of telecommunications
administration with the access to automatic
regional, toll, international network and to
special service numbers free of charge"
CAC6 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 6
"Toll Coin box and public call paystation with the
access to automatic regional and toll network
also the general purpose coin box with the
access to local and toll network (paying in cash)
and the coin box with access to special services
only"
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 453
CIS CAC MFC CAC Description and CIS CAC meaning
CAC7 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 7
"Business or residential subset with automatic
access to regional, toll and international network
plus to chargeable service numbers"
CAC8 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 8
"Business subset for data, facsimile and
electronic mail with automatic access to
regional, toll and international network."
CAC9 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 9
"Local call coin box"
DFLT 0MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 0
"Reserved"
Mapping CLID to ANI and OLI to ANI The feature implements mapping
of CLID on Euro-ISDN and enhances it on other ISDN interfaces.
The ANIE prompt in LD 16 configures an ANI table entry for the trunk route.
Building ANI for interfaces without calling number The title of this
subsection refers to routes whose connectivity does not give the possibility
to receive a calling number (DTI2, Analog,...).
This case is similar to the situation where an Incoming route with calling
number does not receive the calling number.
Mapping ANI to ANI in gateway CIS DTI2 to CIS The feature CIS ANI
Reception is developed concurrently to this one for incoming CIS DTI2
routes (see CIS ANI Reception in this document). For the gateway DTI2
CIS to CIS, on the outgoing CIS route the ANI is built using the ANI received
on incoming route. The received ANI can be manipulated using ANI table
entry configured on incoming CIS route.
The CAC used on outgoing route is the one received in incoming ANI. This
CAC is copied into outgoing ANI without any modifications. If no ANI has
been received on incoming CIS route. The CAC used is the one configured
against CAC_CIS prompt on incoming CIS route.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
454 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Examples of Gateways Enhancements
The following pages contain examples of how to implement gateways
enhancements.
Table 5
CAC conversion table, entry 1 content
MFC CAC CIS CAC
CAC0 9
CAC1 8
CAC2 7
CAC3 6
CAC4 5
CAC5 4
CAC6 3
CAC7 2
CAC8 1
CAC9 0
Default 3
Example 1 - Gateway call through node 3 to CO C In this example,
Received CNI on route 320 is 1234, with CAC translated to DGT5. Outgoing
ANI is 555 1 7476 4.
Table 6
Example 1 - Detail of built CAC
LEC Outgoing Additional Digit ANI DN Incoming Category Code
555 1 7476 4
Example 2 - Gateway call through node 2 to CO B In this example,
received CNI on route 230 is 647678, with CAC translated to DGT 8.
Outgoing ANI is 555 123 7678 1.
Table 7
Example 2 - Detail of built CAC
LEC Incoming Additional digit DNLG*CNI Category Code
555 123 7678 1
Example 3 - Gateway call through node 1 to CO A In this example,
received CLID on route 120 is 25. Outgoing ANI is 444 123456123 25 5.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Operating parameters 455
Table 8
Example 3 - Detail of built CAC
LEC Incoming Additional digit DNLG*CLID Category Code
444 123456123 25 5
Operating parameters
This section lists the operating parameters for CIS ANI Digits Manipulation
and CIS Gateways Enhancements.
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation operating parameters
The data in ANI is built only once at the beginning of the call. The data is not
changed or re-downloaded for any kind of operation during a call. Therefore,
if the call goes through any type of modification such as a transfer or call
forward for instance, the ANI information sent when requested is of the
original originator of the call.
This feature does not allow the user to associate ANI entry to attendant
consoles. When an outgoing call is originated by an attendant, the ANI
message is built using the old mechanism.
The ANI size flexibility is not supported by the analog trunks (E3W, X3W).
For these type of trunks, the prompt ANSZ (LD 16) must be answered with
seven. CIS standards recommend setting ANSZ to seven for CIS DTI2
ANSZ prompt.
CIS Gateways Enhancements operating parameters
ANI is downloaded to the card only once and immediately after trunk
seizure. Thus calling number can be tandemed into ANI only if received
before trunk is seized. That means that the calling number must be received
at the same time that the called number or before enough digits of the
called number are received to seize the CIS trunk. In case of gateway ISDN
interface/CIS calling number (CLID) is always received before or at the
same time as the called number. In case of gateway R2MFC/CIS calling
number (CNI) can be received after trunk has been seized. Then incoming
MFC route must be configured to request CNI before enough digits of called
number are received to seize CIS trunk.
There is no cross checking of the ANI R_ENTRY associated with the route
against the ANI R_ENTRY in the customer Data Block. If an ANI R_ENTRY
is removed from the ANI table and the ANI R_ENTRY is stilled assigned to
a route, ANI in this case is built using the default R_ENTRY, R_ENTRY
number 0 and ERR9044 message is issued at call processing time.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
456 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
While default R_ENTRY number 0 has not been configured, all its fields are
empty except ADDG whose default value is 8. Thus the ANI built using this
table is a repetition of 8. It is strongly recommended to configure this default
table as soon as ANIC prompt is set to yes on an outgoing CIS route.
It is possible to associate an undefined ANI R_ENTRY to a route. Then,
when constructing ANI if R_ENTRY is still undefined, default R_ENTRY
number zero is used and ERR9044 message is issued at call processing
time.
Due to the independence between ANI table and outgoing CIS route, it is
possible to define a LEC, or ANDN greater than ANI size configured on
outgoing route. Then most significant digits is truncated. The way it is done
is similar in case of call originated from a set or a trunk.
There is no cross checking of the CAC Conversion table entries associated
with a CIS or R2MFC route against the CAC Conversion table in the
customer Data Block. If a CAC Conversion table entry is removed from the
CAC Conversion table and this entry is still assigned to a route, CAC in this
case is built using the default CAC Conversion table entry, CIS_ENT number
0 for an incoming CIS route and MFC_ENT number 0 for an incoming MFC
route. Additionally ERR9051 message is issued at call processing time.
It is possible to associate an undefined CIS_ENT or MFC_ENT to a route.
Then, when constructing CAC if CIS_ENT or MFC_ENT is still undefined,
default CIS_ENT or MFC_ENT (number 0) is used and ERR9051 message
is issued at call processing time.
Feature interactions
This section identifies feature interactions for CIS ANI Digits Manipulation
and Gateways Enhancements.
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature interactions
CIS Three Wire Analog Trunk
CIS ANI digits manipulation feature modifies Automatic Number
Identification.
CIS Digital Trunk Interface
CIS ANI digits manipulation feature modifies Automatic Number
Identification.
CIS MF Shuttle
CIS ANI digits manipulation feature modifies Automatic Number
Identification.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature packaging 457
CIS Gateways Enhancements
Some changes introduced in CIS ANI digits manipulation feature will impact
on CIS Gateways Enhancements feature. These changes are listed below:
•The size of the ANI is configurable on a per outgoing CIS route basis.
•Valid responses for LEC, ADDG and ANDN programmed on the
outgoing CIS route are modified.
•The additional digit(s) is/are inserted between LEC and ANI DN when
necessary to complete the ANI DN.
•Prompt ANIC (ANI Composing) added in LD 16 is also used in CIS
Gateways Enhancements.
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interactions
CIS Three Wire Trunk Analog
This development interacts with the feature CIS Three Wire Trunk Analog by
changing how ANI is built in case of gateway from ISDN/DPNSS/R2MFC to
CIS Analog.
CIS Digital Trunk Interface
The CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interacts with CIS Digital
Trunk Interface by changing how ANI is built in case of gateway from
ISDN/DPNSS/R2MFC to CIS Digital.
CIS ANI Digits manipulation interaction
These interactions are already described in "CIS ANI Digits Manipulation
feature interactions" (page 456).
Feature packaging
No new packages are introduced for these features.
The existing Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks (CIST) package
221 is required for these features to be operable.
CIS Multi Frequency Shuttle package is required if MF Shuttle signaling is
to be used but is not mandatory for the CIS ANI digits manipulation and
Gateways Enhancements functions.
The CIS DTI2 feature (including MF Shuttle) requires:
•Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125
•International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131
•2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129
•Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160
CIS Analog Three Wire Trunks feature requires:
•International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
458 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
•Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160
•Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125
•Trunk Fail Monitor (TFM) package 182
•IPE package (XPE) package 203 (required for outgoing X3W packs)
•Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FAST_TDS) package 87 (required for
outgoing E3W package)
Feature implementation
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature
This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature. The "CIS Gateways Enhancements
feature implementation" (page 466) section begins on "CIS Gateways
Enhancements feature implementation" (page 466).
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure ANI Table for telephones" (page 459)
Configure ANI Table for telephones.
2. "LD 16 - Create or modify outgoing CIS route data block." (page 460)
Create or modify outgoing CIS route data block.
3. "LD 10 - Define ANI entry for analog (500/2500) sets." (page 462)
Define ANI entry for analog (500/2500) sets.
4. "LD 10 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for analog
500/2500 sets." (page 463)
Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for analog 500/2500 sets.
5. "LD 11 - Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets." (page 463)
Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets.
6. "LD 11 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for digital sets."
(page 464)
Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for digital sets.
7. "LD 27 - Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines." (page
465)
Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines.
8. "LD 27 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for BRI sets."
(page 466)
Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for BRI sets.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 459
9. "LD 15 - Configure the ANI route table and CAC conversion table."
(page 466)
Configure the ANI route table and CAC conversion table.
10. "LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for
incoming R2MFC route." (page 469)
Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for incoming
R2MFC route.
11. "LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for
Incoming CIS DTI2 route." (page 469)
Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming
CIS DTI2 route.
12. "LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN,
incoming CIS analog, incoming" (page 470)
Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN, incoming
CIS analog, incoming DTI2 and DPNSS).
13. "LD 88 - Configure the CAC for CIS signaling." (page 471)
Configure the CAC for CIS signaling.
LD 15 - Configure ANI Table for telephones
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data
TYPE: ANI Automatic Number Identification
... ... ...
ANLD xx...xx ANI listed directory number (for North American trunk)
CIS_ANI YES (NO) CIS ANI option.
If CIS_ANI=YES, the next sub-prompts is prompted, allowing the
configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message composing.
If CIS_ANI=NO, the following sequence of subprompts is
skipped.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
460 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Prompt Response Description
- S_SIZE (0)-2000 Maximum number of ANI entries for sets that can be configured.
If S_SIZE=0, next prompts are skipped.
If <CR> is entered when REQ=NEW, it defaults to 0 and next
prompts are skipped.
The S_SIZE can’t be decreased if the entries between the old
size and the new one are not empty.
- S_ENTRY aa
Xaa
Xaa Xbb
ANI entry for a set to be created or modified.
ANI entry for a set to be deleted.
ANI entries (aa-bb) for a set to be deleted.
Prompted only if S_SIZE is greater than 0.
ANI entries must be between 1 and S_SIZE.
If REQ=NEW, this prompt and its subprompts are given only
once. If REQ=CHG, they are repeated until S_ENTRY is
answered with <CR>.
- - DNLG 0-(4)-15 Directory Number Length.
- - LEC 0-99...99
X
Local Exchange Carrier.
Delete LEC.
- - ADDG 0-(8)-99...99 Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits long.
- - ANDN 0-99...99
X
Used as ANI DN if DN Length = 0.
Delete ANDN.
... ... ...
LD 16 - Create or modify outgoing CIS route data block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 461
Prompt Response Description
TKTP DID
COT
Direct Inward Dial.
Central Office Trunk.
ICOG OGT Outgoing Route.
... ... ...
CCBA (NO) YES Deny/Allow collect call blocking.
CISR YES (NO) CIS Route
- ANSZ (7)-15 ANI information size. Response is length of LEC+ANI DN.
For analog routes, the only valid response is seven (7).
- ANIC (NO) YES ANI Composing
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
If ANIC=NO, old ANI composing is used: if the originator of the
call is a set, ANI message will consist of the CAC of the originator
+ the LEC of the outgoing route + the DN of the originator or
the ANDN of the outgoing CIS route, depending on the class of
service (DNAA/DNAD) of the set. If the originator of the call is
an incoming route, the components of the ANI message are
retrieved from default ANI entries and/or from the data block of
the outgoing CIS route ("CIS Gateways Enhancements feature
implementation" (page 466))
If the outgoing CIS route requires new ANI composing to be
used (prompt ANIC=YES), the following is done:
If no entry is associated to the calling set (ANIE=0), then old
ANI composing is used.
If an ANI entry is associated to the calling set (ANIE has a
non-zero value), but the associated ANI entry is not configured,
then old ANI composing is used.
If an ANI entry is associated to the calling set (ANIE has a
non-zero value), and the associated ANI entry is configured,
then ANI table is used for building the ANI message: none of
the components of the ANI message is retrieved from the data
block of the outgoing CIS route.
- LEC 0-99...99 Local Exchange Code of the route. It can be from 0 digit long up
to ANSZ digit long. Prompted for outgoing CIS route. Used for
building ANI message if ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI
entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
462 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Prompt Response Description
X Remove LEC.
- ADDG 0-(8)-99...99 Additional digits used in ANI message if ANIC is NO or if
ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of
the call is not configured.
It is used to complete ANI DN if LEC+ANI DN consists of less
than ANSZ digits.
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
It can be from 1 digit long up to ANSZ digit long.
- ANDN 0-99...99 Default ANI DN. It can be from 0 digit long up to ANSZ digit long.
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.
Used for building ANI message if ANIC=NO and DN of set is not
allowed to be sent (CLS DNAD).
Also used if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the
originator of the call is not configured, and DN of set is not
allowed to be sent (CLS DNAD).
X Remove ANDN.
LD 10 - Define ANI entry for analog (500/2500) sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 500 set.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
... ... ...
DN xxxx ccc Directory Number, CLID entry.
- MARP (NO) YES Deny/Allow Multi Appearance Redirection Prime.
- CPND aaaa Calling Party Name Display.
- VMB aaaa Voice Mailbox.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 463
Prompt Response Description
- ANIE (0)-N ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set. The old
mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
If ANIE is of 1-N:
•If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call
takes place, then the components of the ANI message are
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if
configured.
•If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC = NO for
the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the
old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
... ... ...
LD 10 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for analog 500/2500 sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Type of data block for analog (500/2500) set.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
... ...
SFLT a..a Secretarial Filtering.
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI Category Code.
CAC_MFC (0)-10 MFC CNI Category Code.
LD 11 - Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
464 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Prompt Response Description
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
... ... ...
KEY xx AAA yyyy...
ccc xx = key number.
AAA = Key Function.
yyyy = DN or other data related to key function.
ccc = CLID entry.
- MARP (NO) YES Deny/Allow Multi Appearance Redirection Prime.
- CPND aaaa Calling Party Name Display.
- VMB aaaa Voice Mailbox.
- ANIE (0)-N ANI Entry:
It is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key. The old
mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
If ANIE is of 1-N:.
•If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call
takes place, then the components of the ANI message are
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if
configured.
•If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC=NO for
the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the
old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
LD 11 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for digital sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 465
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
... ...
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI Category Code.
CAC_MFC (0)-10 MFC CNI Category Code.
LD 27 - Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE TSP Administer Terminal Service Profile on Digital Subscriber Loop.
... ... ...
SPID xxxx Service Profile ID.
DN xxxx ccc Directory Number (DN) and Calling Line
Identification (CLID) entry.
xxxx = DN
ccc = CLID
-CT aaaa Call Types for DN
aaaa = VCE or DTA.
- MCAL 1-(4)-8 Maximum Calls allowed per DN
- CLIP (YES) NO Allow/Deny Calling Line Identification Presentation for incoming
calls.
- PRES (YES) NO Allow/Deny Presentation of CLID to far end on outgoing calls.
- ANIE (0)-N ANI entry. It is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key. The old
mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
If ANIE is 1-N:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
466 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Prompt Response Description
•If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call
takes place, then the components of the ANI message are
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if
configured.
•If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC=NO for
the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the
old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.
LD 27 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for BRI sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE DSL Digital Subscriber Loop.
DSL l s c dsl
c u dsl
Digital Subscriber Loop
For Large Systems
For Small Systems
... ...
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI category code.
CAC_MFC (0)-10 MFC CNI category code.
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature implementation
This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the CIS
Gateways Enhancements feature.
Feature implementation for R2MFC route
In case of gateway R2MFC/CIS it must be noticed that to be tandemed CNI
must be received on R2MFC route before outgoing CIS trunk is seized. This
is possible using an up-front CNI request. Up-front CNI request is defined
on R2MFC route by giving a non zero value to prompt NCNI. Configure the
ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming CIS DTI2 route
using LD 16.
LD 15 - Configure the ANI route table and CAC conversion table.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
REQ = NEW, default table R_SIZE (0) is created.
REQ = NEW, default table CACC(0) is created.
REQ = NEW, R_SIZE defaults to number of ANI entries.
for incoming route created during conversion.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 467
Prompt Response Description
TYPE: ANI Automatic Number Identification
.... ... ....
ANLD xx...x ANI Listed Directory Number. Only included here for clarification
if this prompt appears. Only applies to North American ANI.
CIS_ANI (NO) YES Deny/Allow configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message.
... ...
- R_ SIZE (1)-512 Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for
incoming routes.
This maximum number is limited to 512 as it is the maximum
number of routes. Entries must be empty to decrease R_SIZE.
- R_ENTRY aa
Xaa
Xaa Xbb
ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified.
ANI entry for an incoming route to be deleted.
ANI entries for an incoming route between aa and bb to be
deleted.
<CR> Exit.
R_ENTRY is repeated until <CR> is entered. ANI entries must
be between 0 and (R_SIZE-1). For REQ=NEW, only default
table 0 is configurable. An R_ENTRY can be deleted even if still
assigned on an incoming route.
- - DNLG 0-(4)-15 DN Length
Number of digits of the Calling Line ID (CLID), Originating Line
Identifier (OLI), Calling Number Identification (CNI) to use in the
ANI message, starting with the less significant digits.
- - LEC 0-99..99
X
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.
Remove LEC.
- - ADDG 0-(8)-99...99 Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. Used to complete ANI Directory
Number (ANDN) if Local Exchange Carrier (LEC)+ANDN is less
than ANSZ digits defined in LD 16.
- - ANDN 0-99...99 Used as ANI DN if calling number is not available or DNLG=0.
Up to 15 digits may be entered.
X Remove ANDN.
CACC (NO) YES Deny/Allow Calling Party Category Code (CAC) Conversion
table option.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
468 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Prompt Response Description
-MFC_ENT <CR> CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC
for use on R2MFC routes.
aa
Xaa
Xaa Xbb
CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified.
CAC conversion table entry to be deleted.
CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be
deleted.
<CR> Exit MFC CAC conversion table, gives CIS_ENT prompt.
This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.
It is prompted if CACC=YES.
CAC conversion table entries must be between 0 and 31.
For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable.
An ENTRY can be deleted even if still assigned on an incoming
route.
-- CAC0 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT0
-- CAC1 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT1
-- CAC2 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT2
-- CAC3 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT3
-- CAC4 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT4
-- CAC5 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT5
-- CAC6 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT6
-- CAC7 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT7
-- CAC8 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT8
-- CAC9 0-(3)-9 CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT9
-- DFLT 0-(3)-9 CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or MFC
CAC received is not in the MFC CAC list of this table
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 469
LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for incoming R2MFC route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Add new data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
... ... ...
MFC YES Configure Multifrequency Compelled signaling.
- MFCI xMFC Incoming Table.
- MFCO xMFC Outgoing Table.
... ...
ICOG IAO
INC
Incoming and Outgoing.
Incoming.
NCNI 1Request CNI after the defined number of digits are
received. CNI is requested during incoming MFC call after
the first digit of dialed number has been received.
ANIE (0)-x ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt
R_ENTRY, OVL 15).
x = R_SIZE-1.
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be
configured. (R-SIZE is defined in LD 15).
CAC_CONV (0)-31 CAC conversion table number for CIS Gateway. Configured
against MFC_ENT in LD 15.
Prompted only for non "outgoing only" R2MFC route.
LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming CIS DTI2 route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Add new data.
TYPE RDB Route data block
... ... ...
DGTP DTI2 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface.
... ...
ICOG INC Incoming route.
... ... ...
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
470 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Prompt Response Description
ANIE (0)-x ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt
R_ENTRY, OVL 15).
x = R_SIZE-1.
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be
configured. (R-SIZE is defined in OVL 15).
Default table entry is number 0.
CISR YES CIS Route
... ... ...
- CAC_CONV (0)-31 CAC conversion table number for CIS-to-R2MFC gateway,
configured against CIS_ENT in CDB.
Prompted only for incoming CIS DTI2 route.
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI Category Code
LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN, incoming CIS analog,
incoming DTI2 and DPNSS).
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Add new data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
... ...
ISDN YES Enable ISDN
... ... ...
ICOG IAO
ICT
Incoming and outgoing.
Incoming.
... ...
ANIE (0)-x ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt R_ENTRY,
LD 15).
x= R_SIZE-1.
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be
configured.
... ... ...
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI Category Code
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 471
LD 88 - Configure the CAC for CIS signaling.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE AUB Authcode Data Block
... ... ...
CLAS (0)-115 Classcode value assigned to authcode (NAUT).
... ... ...
NCOS (0)-99 Network Class of Service group number.
CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9 CIS ANI category code.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
472 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
473
CIS ANI Reception
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 473)
"Operating parameters" (page 480)
"Feature interactions" (page 480)
"Feature packaging" (page 480)
"Feature implementation" (page 481)
"Feature operation" (page 485)
Feature description
The Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) Reception feature allows the system to receive the
Automatic Number Information from the CIS Central Office (CO) calling
party on incoming local calls. The CIS Public Telephone Network does not
provide ANI information on the incoming toll calls.
The CIS ANI Reception feature works on the CIS Digital Trunk Interface
(DTI) feature. It requires CIS DTI2 card, vintage NTCG01AC (Large
Systems) or NTCG02AC (Small Systems).
The ANI digits received from the CIS CO are used by the system as the
R2MFC Calling Number Identification (CNI) digits. A list of uses for the
ANI digits is found on page 1104. The ANI digits are also displayed on the
display of the proprietary set or on the attendant console display.
ANI Reception is performed in one of two ways:
•ANI request is issued automatically by the incoming local CIS DTI2
trunk during the call setup.
•ANI request is issued by the incoming local CIS DTI2 trunk upon a
manually solicited request from the proprietary set with display or from
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
474 CIS ANI Reception
the attendant console. The request to receive the ANI information is
invoked by pressing a calling number display key on the attendant
console source key or on the proprietary set by pressing the display key
followed by the trace key. Press trace key for active call for Proprietary
sets and attendant consoles. The trace key can be used instead of the
source key for Malicious Call Trace (MCT) for sets and consoles. An ANI
request can also be made by 500/2500 sets by entering the Flexible
Feature Code (FFC) assigned for MTRC in LD 57.
Automatic ANI request
The automatic ANI request is sent by the CDTI2 card to the CIS CO before
the incoming local call is answered. If the incoming trunk operates in the
decadic, or Dial Pulse (DP) mode, the ANI request is sent to the CIS CO
after all dialed digits have been collected from the CIS CO (see Figure 6
"Automatic ANI request for incoming local call (decadic dial pulse mode)"
(page 476)). If the trunk operates in the MF Shuttle mode, the ANI request
is sent after the end of the MF Shuttle dialing (see Figure 7 "Automatic
ANI request for the MF shuttle call" (page 477) on Figure 7 "Automatic ANI
request for the MF shuttle call" (page 477)). The ANI digits are uploaded to
the system.
The Automatic ANI request option may be used only in conjunction with the
DN Size Feature. The DN Size Flexible (using the SSL tables) or Fixed
should be defined for the incoming CIS DTI2 DID route before setting the
automatic ANI option to "Yes".
The ANI digits are used in the following way:
•They are tandemed as the Calling Line Identification (CLID) Originating
Line Identifier on DPNSS (OLI) to the (ISDN) Integrated Services Digital
Network/Digital Private Network Signalling System (DPNSS) gateways,
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) gateways
•They are mapped into the Multifrequency Compelled Signaling
complying with CCITT R2 specification (R2MFC) Calling Number
Identification R2MFC (CNI)
•They are displayed on the display of the proprietary sets and on the
attendant consoles
•They are stored in the Call Detail Recorder
•They are sent through the Meridian Link and the ICCM link using the
fields dedicated for the R2MFC CNI digits
The translation of the dialed number which is received from the CIS CO
is postponed until the CDTI2 card informs the system that the ANI digits
have been received. If the ANI reception report does not arrive from the
card, the call is treated after the ANI timer expires. The treatment for
the call that failed to provide the automatic ANI is configured on the
route data block level.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 475
Solicited ANI request
The solicited ANI request is issued upon a manual request from the Meridian
1 proprietary set using the display key or from the attendant console using
the trace key. The received ANI information is displayed on the display of
the proprietary set or attendant console and it is also used for the CDR, call
trace. If the request is performed using the Trace key, the MCT record is
printed also on the MCT TTY. The system sends the ANI request message
to the CDTI2 card when a user presses the DN key after the set has entered
display mode using the Digit Display key or after the Trace key was pressed.
The CDTI2 card performs the ANI interaction and uploads the received ANI
to the system (see Figure 8 "Manually solicited ANI request" (page 478)).
The ANI is stored in the unprotected trunk data block. The solicited ANI
request may be performed an unlimited number of times during a single
call. Each time, the new ANI replaces the previously received ANI (if there
is one).
When solicited ANI request is initiated using the Trace key, the Malicious
Call Trace feature functionality remains unchanged, the ANI request is
sent in addition to the normal MCT activities. The ANI information, when
received from the card, is also printed on the MCT TTY as MCT ticket.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
476 CIS ANI Reception
Figure 6
Automatic ANI request for incoming local call (decadic dial pulse mode)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 477
Figure 7
Automatic ANI request for the MF shuttle call
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
478 CIS ANI Reception
Figure 8
Manually solicited ANI request
ANI Gateways
The ANI digits which are received from the CIS CO party as a response to
the automatic ANI request are propagated to the system terminating party if
it is capable of receiving the CNI digits.
The ANI digits are propagated to the following terminating types:
•R2MFC trunks - the ANI to R2MFC CNI mapping is performed in
the following way: all the ANI digits except for the ANI Calling Party
Category Code (CAC) are used for the CNI composition, the ANI CAC is
converted to the Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) CNI CAC according
to the CAC conversion tables.
•ISDN trunks - Meridian Customer Defined Integrated Services Digital
Network (MCDN), EuroISDN: European Integrated Services Digital
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 479
Network (EURO), Q Signaling (QSIG), DPNSS - the ANI to CLID/OLI
mapping is based on the R2MFC CNI to CLID mapping.
•CIS trunks - the ANI to ANI mapping is implemented in the framework
of the CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements
feature described in this document. The ANI information that is
received from the incoming CIS DTI2 trunks is used by the CIS
Gateways Enhancements feature to compose the ANI information to be
downloaded to the outgoing CIS trunks.
ANI Digits Display
The ANI digits are displayed on the display of the proprietary set or of the
attendant console. The ANI digits are displayed starting from the left side of
the display. The CAC display option is configured on the route data block
level and it may be set to one of the following options (see Figure 9 "ANI
Display options" (page 479)):
•display CAC before the ANI number
•display CAC after the ANI number
•do not display CAC
The CAC digit is separated from the ANI number by the minus sign. When
displaying ANI, there are several options available for CAC display. If ANI
request is repeated several times during a single call, each time new ANI
digits overwrite old ANI digits on the display. If the DN key that requested
the ANI information is placed on hold when the ANI digits arrive from the
CDTI2 card, the ANI digits are not displayed. In this case, when the call is
returned from hold, the ANI digits are displayed.
Figure 9
ANI Display options
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
480 CIS ANI Reception
ANI Digits in CDR
The ANI digits are placed in the CDR at the place intended for the R2MFC
CNI digits. The CAC may be stored in the CDR together with the ANI digits.
The presentation of the CAC in the CDR is configured at the route data
block level as shown in the dash list below. The CAC may be either:
•placed before the ANI digits
•placed after the ANI digits
•not placed in the CDR
The CDR records containing ANI are generated only if the CDR options are
configured in the customer data block (LD 15) as described in the CDR
technical document.
The feature does not change the CDR output formats. The ANI digits are
stored in the CDR in the same way as the R2MFC CNI digits.
Operating parameters
This feature requires the CIS DTI2 card NTCG01 vintage AC for Large
Systems, and the CIS DTI2 card NTCG02 vintage AC for Small Systems.
Feature interactions
CIS Digital Trunk Interface and CIS Multifrequency Shuttle (MFS)
The feature is based on the CIS DTI2 interface features. The feature
enhances the capabilities of CIS DTI2 but does not change previous
functionality.
Malicous Call Trace (MCT)
The feature allows MCT to receive ANI digits on incoming local CIS DTI2
calls. There is no MCT feature that can be activated from the system on the
CIS CO. When the ANI digits are received from the CO, they are printed
on the MCT TTY and displayed on the display of the set or console that
activated the MCT feature.
Feature packaging
No new package is introduced for this feature. The following packages
are required:
•2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129
•International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131
•Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks (CIST) package 221
•Optional - Malicous Call Trace (MCT) package 107
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 481
Feature implementation
This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the ANI
Reception feature.
If Malicious Call Trace is used, turn to the Software Features Guide for
detailed MCT implementation instructions.
•LD 73 - The response MFA - Multifrequency Advanced has been added
to the CISFW prompt to support the ANI Reception and the Firmware
Dial Tone Detection features on the NTCK01AC and NTCK02AC cards.
When operating in the CIS mode, the NTCG01AA/02AA cards should be
configured as DP, and the NTCG01AB/02AB cards should be configured
as MFS.
•LD 14 - The CNA may be defined for the incoming DID DTI2 trunk if it
is configured on the CDTI2 loop with the CIS Firmware version set to
MultiFrequency Advanced in LD 73.
•LD 16 - Set the prompt CISR to YES to allow access to the CIS Route
prompts.
The following options are added for the CIS DTI2 routes:
•The Automatic ANI (AANI) option determines if the automatic ANI
request should be sent to the CIS CO party at the end of dialing on
incoming local calls. If the ANI information is required for gateway calls
this option should be set to YES.
•The ANI Failure Treatment (ANFT) option defines the treatment for
incoming calls which failed to provide ANI (see Note). The possible
options are:
— to provide the call to the required destination using the alternative
ANI to indicate the ANI Reception failure
— to drop the call
— to transfer the call to the predefined intercept DN using the
Alternative ANI to indicate the ANI Reception failure
•The Intercept DN (ITDN) prompt defines the intercept DN if the intercept
treatment option is selected.
The Alternative ANI is composed from the access code of the incoming
CIS DTI2 DID route and the number of the incoming trunk within the
route.
•The ANI TimeOut (ATO) timer which was used only for Outgoing CIS
trunks is now also used for incoming CIS trunks to define timeout for
the automatic ANI digits reception. The termination of the incoming
call is delayed until either the ANI digits are received from the CDTI2
card, the ANI failure report is received from the CDTI2 card or the ATO
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
482 CIS ANI Reception
expires. The ATO timer should be set at least twice as large as the
following ARD timer.
•ANI Request Duration (ARD) timer is added to the route timers, the
timer defines how long the CDTI2 card waits for the ANI information
after sending the ANI REQUEST line signal. When the ARD timer
expires for the first time the CDTI2 card performs an additional attempt
to request the ANI information from the CIS CO. If the timer expires after
the second attempt the ANI reception failure is reported to the system.
The ARD timer is downloaded to the CDTI2 firmware. The timer should
not exceed half of the ATO timer.
•CAC Display (CACD) option defines how the Category Access Code
(CAC) is displayed on the proprietary set or attendant console. The
possible options are:
— to display CAC before the ANI
— to display CAC after the ANI or
— not to display CAC
•CAC in CDR (CACC) option defines how the Category Access Code
(CAC) is stored in the CDR. The possible options are to:
— store CAC before the ANI
— store CAC after the ANI
— not store CAC.
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 73 - Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type
definition." (page 482)
Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type definition.
2. "LD 14 - Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class
of service for incoming Direct In" (page 483)
Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class of service
for incoming Direct Inward Dial (DID) CIS DTI2 trunks.
3. "LD 16 - Define the CIS Route." (page 483)
Define the CIS Route.
LD 73 - Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type definition.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE DTI2 Digital Trunk Interface loops.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 483
Prompt Response Description
FEAT LPTI Loop Timers and additional definitions.
CDTI2 YES CDTI2/CSDTI2 card
... ...
CISFW MFA Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling + ANI Reception +
Firmware Dial Tone Detection capabilities are supported by the
card.
- MFSL (0)-3 The MFS signals transmission level. The prompt appears when
CISFW is set to MFS or MFA and the CISMFS package is
equipped.
The transmission level may be set to the following values:
0 = -7.3 dB
1 = -5.0 dB
2 = -3.5 dB
3=0dB
- 500L (0)-1 ANI request tone (500 Hz) transmission level. The prompt
appears when CISFW is set to MFA.
The transmission level may be set to the following values:
0 = -7.3 dB
1 = -3.5 dB
LD 14 - Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class of service for incoming
Direct Inward Dial (DID) CIS DTI2 trunks.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE DID Direct Inward Dial trunks.
... ... ...
CLS CNA Class of Service.
Allow Calling Number Identification for incoming CIS DTI2 DID
trunks.
LD 16 - Define the CIS Route.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
484 CIS ANI Reception
Prompt Response Description
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
TKTP DID Direct Inward Dial.
... ... ...
DTRK YES Digital Trunk Route
- DGTP DTI2 Digital Trunk Type
... ... ...
ICOG ICT Incoming Trunk.
... ... ...
CNTL YES Allows change to controls or timers.
TIMR ARD
512-(1024)-2048
ANI Request Duration timer, defines duration of the ANI request
signal. The timer is stored as increments of the 256 ms.
TIMR ATO
2048-(2560)-5120
ANI Timeout timer. Defines how long the system waits for the
ANI information from the CIS CO. If timer expires before the ANI
is uploaded from the CDTI2 card, the system treats the call as it
is defined in the ANI Failure Treatment option.
The ATO should be at least twice as large as the ARD.
CISR YES CIS Route
- CACD The option defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of
the set or console. The option also controls presentation of the
CAC in the messages to the auxiliary processors. The options
are:
(NO)
BEF
AFT
NO = do not display CAC.
BEF= display CAC before ANI.
AFT= display CAC after ANI.
- CACC
(NO)
BEF
AFT
Defines how CAC is stored in CDR.
NO = do not store CAC
BEF = store CAC before ANI
AFT = store CAC after ANI
- AANI The option defines if the Automatic ANI request should be sent
to the CIS CO when the incoming calls are originated from the
CIS CO to the trunks within this route.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 485
Prompt Response Description
(NO)
YES
NO = do not send automatic request.
YES = send automatic request.
- ANFT The prompt defines the ANI Failure Treatment option. It is
prompted only if the AANI is set to YES. The possible options
are:
(CONT)
FAIL
ITDN
Provide call to the required destination.
Drop call.
Transfer call to intercept DN.
- - ITDN <DN> Intercept DN (up to 8 digits) defines the DN to transfer the
incoming calls which failed to provide ANI. The prompt appears
if the ANFT option is set to ITDN.
Feature operation
Manual ANI request is made by pressing a calling number display key on the
attendant console or on the proprietary set followed by pressing the SCR
key or by pressing the TRC key on the proprietary set or attendant console.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
486 CIS ANI Reception
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
487
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 487)
"Operating parameters" (page 490)
"Feature interactions" (page 490)
"Feature packaging" (page 490)
"Feature implementation" (page 491)
"Feature operation" (page 492)
Feature description
The Commonwealth of Independent states (CIS) Toll Dial Tone Detection
feature allows the system to detect a dial tone from a CIS Toll Central Office
(CO) on outgoing toll calls. When received, the tone indicates that the CIS
CO is prepared to collect dial pulse (decadic) digits from system for outgoing
toll calls. The feature is implemented only for CIS DTI2 trunks.
The CIS DTD feature introduces CIS toll out-pulsing criteria, which are
terms that define conditions that need to be satisfied to allow the system to
start the out-pulsing of the decadic digits on the outgoing Toll CIS DTI2 calls
(see Figure 10 "CIS network block diagram" (page 488)).
The criteria is composed as a combination of two events: dial tone detection
and ANI interaction. It may include only dial tone detection, only ANI
Interaction, dial tone or ANI, dial tone and ANI. The criteria is defined at the
route data block level. The detection is performed by the CIS DTI2 cards
(NTCG01AC and NTCG02 AC) and when the criteria is satisfied the system
receives a report from the card. The system postpones the out-pulsing of
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
488 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection
the digits until the report. If the report does not arrive before the ATO timer
expiration, defined in LD 16, the out-pulsing may continue, or the call may
be disconnected and busy tone provided to customer.
Outgoing toll CIS DTI2 calls can be made using the indirect or direct
connection method (see Figure 11 "Indirect outgoing toll call with dial tone
detection" (page 489) and Figure 12 "Direct toll call with dial tone detection"
(page 490)).
Figure 10
CIS network block diagram
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 489
Figure 11
Indirect outgoing toll call with dial tone detection
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
490 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection
Figure 12
Direct toll call with dial tone detection
Operating parameters
This feature requires the CIS DTI2 card NTCG01AC for Large Systems.
Card NTCG02AC is used in Small Systems. These CIS DTI2 cards have
increased functionality that allows detection of the CIS toll dial tone.
Feature interactions
CIS 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (CIS DTI2)
CIS DTD feature improves the reliability of outgoing CIS DTI2 toll calls by
adding the ability to use the dial tone provided by the CIS CO as criteria to
start out-pulsing the decadic digits to the toll CIS CO.
Feature packaging
No new package is introduced for this feature. The following packages
are required:
•2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 491
•International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131
•Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks (CIST) package 221
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 73 - Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type."
(page 491)
Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type.
2. "LD 16 - Specify CIS route information." (page 491)
Specify CIS route information.
LD 73 - Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change existing data.
TYPE DTI2 Digital Trunk Interface loops.
FEAT LPTI Loop timers and additional definitions.
CDTI2 YES CDTI2/CSDTI2 card
... ...
CISFW MFA Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling + ANI Reception +
firmware dial tone detection capabilities are supported. MFA
capabilities are supported by CIS CDTI2 card (NTCG01AC for
Large Systems, or NTCG02AC for Small Systems).
LD 16 - Specify CIS route information.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
TKTP COT Central Office Trunk
... ... ...
ICOG OGT Outgoing only trunk.
... ... ...
CNTL (NO) YES Deny/Allow changes to controls or timers.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
492 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection
Prompt Response Description
- TIMR ATO 128-(4992)-
65408 ANI timeout timer in milliseconds. For CIS outgoing trunk routes
this defines the time delay performed after the out-pulsing
of the toll access code. During this delay further out-pulsing
is temporarily halted until the special message from the card
firmware confirms the satisfaction of the CIS Toll out-pulsing
criteria. If the timer expires before satisfaction the behavior of
the system depends on the COAT prompt. If COAT is set to
YES the out-pulsing continues on timeout. If COAT is set to
NO the call is dropped.
... ... ...
CISR YES CIS Route
- DTOC (NO) YES Deny/Allow Direct Toll Connection.
- CTOC (DTDO)
AADT
ANIO
AODT
CIS Toll Outpulsing Criteria.
DTD Only.
ANI And DTD.
ANI Only.
ANI Or DTD.
- COAT (NO) YES NO = Drop Call when ATO timer expires.
YES = Continue Outpulsing when ATO timer expires.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
493
CLASS: Calling Number and Name
Delivery
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 493)
"Operating parameters" (page 513)
"Feature interactions" (page 514)
"Feature packaging" (page 518)
"Feature implementation" (page 519)
"Feature operation" (page 522)
Feature description
The Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) Calling Number and
Name Delivery (CND) feature enables the system to send the calling
number and/or calling name to a CLASS set when a call is presented to
it, per the Bellcore CLASS CND standard. Once the system delivers the
CLASS CND information, it is completely up to the CLASS set to determine
how the information is to be displayed. The CLASS set can even choose
to ignore certain information by not displaying it.
A CLASS set is, by definition, any non-proprietary analog set with an
integrated display and a Frequency Shift Key (FSK) modem receiver, or with
a FSK modem receiver built-in display attachment. The CLASS sets are
configured on the system as analog (500/2500 type) sets using LD 10, and
are supported by the existing 500/2500 type peripheral line cards.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
494 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
The calling number and/or calling name data is delivered from the system
to the CLASS sets using FSK signaling by a CLASS modem (CMOD) unit.
The CMOD units are configured using LD 13. They are supported by an
Extended CLASS Modem (XCMC) IPE line card, the NT5D60AA.
Up to 255 CMOD units may be configured on a system that is equipped
with the CLASS CND feature. Once configured, the CMODs are shared
throughout a multi-customer system. When a call is presented to a CLASS
set, an available CMOD is automatically allocated.
Upon reaching the CND delivery interval, the appropriate CND information
is delivered to the CLASS set. The CND delivery interval is the first silent
interval, after ringing has been applied for a new call, that is greater
than two seconds. The allocated CMOD unit is released when ringing
resumes on the CLASS set after the CND delivery interval, or when the
call is disconnected, answered, or redirected. If the call is disconnected,
answered, or redirected before the CND delivery interval has been reached,
then no CND information is delivered. If the call is disconnected, answered,
or redirected while the CND information is being delivered, the CND delivery
is immediately terminated. Figure 13 "System allocation when a CLASS set
is idle" (page 494) to Figure 16 "System resource allocation after the CND
delivery interval" (page 496) depict a typical call processing and system
resource allocation scenario for a new call being presented on a CLASS set.
Figure 13
System allocation when a CLASS set is idle
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 495
Figure 14
System resource allocation when a new call begins to ring on the CLASS set
Figure 15
System resource allocation during the CND delivery interval
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
496 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
Figure 16
System resource allocation after the CND delivery interval
Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS sets
In LD 10, the system administrator may configure a CLASS set to deliver
both Calling Number Delivery, Calling Name Delivery, or both.
To activate only Calling Number Delivery, the station set is to be configured
with one of the following class of service:
•CLASS Calling Number Single Data Message Format Allow (CNUS) or
•CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Message Format Allow (CNUA)
Subsequently, whenever a call is presented to that set, the software will
deliver the date and time stamp information (see the "Date and time stamp
information" (page 497) section which follows below) and the calling number
information (see the "Calling number information" (page 497) section which
follows on "Calling number information" (page 497)) per the Bellcore CLASS
CND delivery standard.
To activate only Calling Name Delivery, the station set is to be configured
with the Calling Name Multiple Data Message Format Allow (CNAA) class of
service. Subsequently, whenever a call is presented to that set, the system
software will deliver the date and time stamp information and the calling
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 497
name information (see the "Calling name information" (page 498) section
on "Calling name information" (page 498)) per the Bellcore CLASS CND
delivery standard.
To activate both Calling Number Delivery and Calling Name Delivery, the
station set is to be configured with both the CLASS Calling Number Multiple
Data Message Format Allow (CNUA) and the CLASS Calling Name Multiple
Data Message Format Allow (CNAA) class of service. Subsequently,
whenever a call is presented to that set, the system software will deliver the
date and time stamp information, the calling number information, and the
calling name information, per the Bellcore CLASS CND delivery standard.
Date and time stamp information
The date and time stamp information delivered to a CLASS set is in the
format mm dd hh mm, where mm is a two-digit number for the month, dd
is a two-digit number for the day of the month, hh is a two-digit number for
the military hour of the day, and mm is a two-digit number for the minute
of the hour. It is up to the CLASS set to display the date and time stamp
information.
Calling number information
For a non-ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the
CLASS set is the incoming In-Band ANI, or if no ANI is passed on, then the
calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.
The calling number unknown indicator, per Bellcore CLASS CND delivery
standard, refers to the ASCII "O" that is sent in place of the calling number.
For an ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the
CLASS set is the CLID received from the incoming ISDN trunk (if the CLID
is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is delivered). If the incoming
CLID is defined as display denied (the originating set has Display Digit
Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification Restriction
active), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered instead of the
calling number, or, if no CLID is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the
calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.
The calling number privacy indicator, per Bellcore CLASS CND delivery
standard, refers to the ASCII "P" that is sent in place of the calling number.
For a station (set)-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the
CLASS set is one of the following:
•If the originating set has Display Digit Denied active (CLS = DDGD in
LD 10 or 11), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered in
place of the calling number.
•If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified
by its internal DN (CLASS_FMT = DN in LD 15), then the originating
DN is delivered.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
498 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
•If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified
by its local number (CLASS_FMT = LCL in LD 15), then the local public
number associated with the originating DN is delivered, (if the CLID is
longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is delivered). The local public
number is composed by the ISDN CLID Enhancements feature, which
forms the calling number by concatenating the customer defined home
local number (HLCL in LD 15) and the originating DN.
•If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified
by its national number (CLASS_FMT = NTN in LD 15), then the national
public number associated with the originating DN is delivered (if the
number is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is delivered). The
national public number is composed by the ISDN CLID Enhancements
feature, which forms the calling number by concatenating the customer
defined home national number (entered using prompt HNTN and HLCL
in LD 15) and the originating DN.
•If the originating set is assigned with an undefined CLID entry, then the
originating DN is delivered.
For a station (attendant)-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to
the CLASS set is one of the following:
•If CLID entry 0 specifies that it is to be identified by its internal DN
(CLASS_FMT = DN in LD 15), then the customer’s attendant DN (the
ATDN in LD 15) is delivered.
•If CLID entry 0 specifies that it is to be identified by its local number
(CLASS_FMT = LCL in LD 15), then the local public number associated
with the customer’s Listed Directory Number 0 (the LDN0 in LD 15)
is delivered (if the number is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is
delivered).
•If CLID entry 0 specifies that it is to be identified by its national number
(CLASS_FMT = NTN in LD 15), then the national public number
associated with the customer’s Listed Directory Number 0 (the LDN0
DN in LD Overlay) is delivered (if the number is longer than 10 digits,
only the first 10 is delivered).
•If CLID entry 0 is not configured, then the customer’s attendant DN
(the ATDN in LD Overlay) is delivered. The calling number for calls
originated by an attendant is composed using CLID entry 0, as per the
ISDN CLID Enhancements feature.
Calling name information
For a non-ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling name unknown indicator
is delivered to the CLASS set in place of the calling name. The calling name
unknown indicator, per Bellcore CLASS CND delivery standard, refers to
the ASCI "O" that is sent in place of the calling name.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 499
For an ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling name delivered to the
CLASS set is the calling name received from the incoming ISDN trunk (if the
calling name is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 is delivered). If
the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating set has
Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification
Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator is delivered in
place of the calling number, or, if no calling number is passed on by the
incoming trunk, then the calling name unknown indicator is delivered in
place of the calling name. The calling name privacy indicator, per Bellcore
CLASS CND delivery standard, refers to the ASCI "P" that is sent in place
of the calling name.
For a station (set)-to-CLASS set call, the calling name delivered to the
CLASS set is one of the following:
•The calling name associated with the originating DN (if the calling name
is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 is delivered).
•If no name is defined with the originating DN, then the calling name
unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.
•If the originating set has Display Name Deny Class of Service
(CLS=NAMD in LD 10 or 11), then the calling name privacy indicator is
delivered in place of the calling name.
For a station (attendant)-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to
the CLASS set is one of the following:
•The calling name associated with the customer’s attendant DN (if the
calling name is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 is delivered).
•If no name is associated with the customer’s attendant DN, then calling
name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.
Network engineering for CLASS sets
In a system with a single group network, the network internal blocking
is determined by the concentration ratio of equipped ports on Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment and the number of interfaced loops or superloops.
Depending on traffic engineering, a non-blocking network is achievable.
In a multi-group system, intergroup junctors are required to switch calls
between two network groups. Due to the concentration of time slots from
a network group to that of intergroup junctors, blocking may occur. This is
true for a multi-group system with or without CLASS sets. However, since
the CLASS feature depends on a voice path to deliver Calling Name and
Number Delivery (CND) to a set, excessive congestion at the intergroup
junctor could block the delivery of CND and diminish the usefulness of the
feature, as well as impact the grade of service of the existing equipment
on the system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
500 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
This engineering section examines the inter-group junctor blocking issue
and provides recommend engineering rules to alleviate potential network
congestion problems.
In general, the engineering effort for CLASS feature can be classified into
three categories:
A new site following engineering rules (see "General engineering guidelines
for non-Call Center applications" (page 505)) requires no inter group junctor
traffic check-off.
An existing or new site with relatively low intergroup junctor traffic, will
require only one XCMC (Extended CLASS Modem Card) IPE pack that can
serve all CLASS sets in a multi-group system.
An existing site with heavy intergroup junctor traffic will require either moving
trunks/sets around between network groups when only one XCMC pack is
equipped or providing an XCMC pack (or packs) for each group.
System multi-group network
This section is only relevant to a system multi-group network. A single group
system does not have intergroup junctors. Therefore, special engineering
on the junctor is not applicable. The Cabinet system have network
architectures that are different from other systems.
It has a non-blocking network and does not require any network engineering,
except to use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) CMOD (Class
MODem) capacity table to find the number of modems needed.
In general, intergroup junctor blocking is most severe when there are only
two groups, since under typical traffic distribution assumptions, 50% of calls
will stay in the originating group and 50% will terminate on the second group
through junctors, unless a Community Of Interest (COI) is known and taken
into consideration in engineering to minimize intergroup traffic.
Under the assumption of even distribution of traffic, the percentage of traffic
to an intergroup junctor will drop to 33.3% of the total group traffic for a
three-group system. Similarly, the junctor traffic is 25% of group traffic for a
four-group system and 20% for a five-group system.
A simplified system with two-group network and CLASS sets is shown by
Figure 17 "A system with a two-group network" (page 501).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 501
Figure 17
A system with a two-group network
Note that traffic to a CLASS set can be originated from a non-CLASS set,
another CLASS set or an incoming trunk. Since trunks have more traffic
impact on junctor blocking, they are used to illustrate the feature operation,
however, both sets and trunks can be traffic sources to CLASS sets.
The maximum size system comprises of 5 network groups. Each group has
32 loops of which 28 can be terminal loops, the rest are service loops (TDS
loops for tones, conference and music).
From Group 0 to Group 1, as shown in Figure 17 "A system with a
two-group network" (page 501), there are 8 one-way junctors. Similarly,
there are another 8 one way junctors from Group 1 to Group 0. For practical
purposes, they can be treated as 8 two-way junctors. A two-way path is
equal to a voice channel. A junctor has 30 voice traffic channels as on a
loop. Each two-way channel represents a conversation path. A channel is
also used to deliver the CND from the CMOD to a CLASS set.
CLASS feature operation
A call originated from Set A (or trunk A) seeks to terminate on a CLASS set
B. When B starts to ring, A will hear ringback. A unit in CMOD (CLASS
Modem) is assigned to collect originator’s CND information and waits for
the CND delivery interval. After the first ring at B, a silence period (deliver
interval) ensues, the CMOD unit begins to deliver CND information to the
CLASS set.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
502 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
The CND information of a traffic source (A) is a system information, which is
obtained by the system when a call is originated. During the two-second
ringing period of the CLASS set B, A’s CND is delivered to CMOD through
SSD messages (using a signaling channel only). When the CND information
is sent from CMOD to CLASS set B, it is delivered through a voice path
during the four-second silence cycle of set B. The CMOD unit is held for
a duration of six seconds.
If the XCMC (Extended CLASS Modem Card) IPE pack, which provides
up to 32 CMOD units, is located in the IPE of Group 0, the CMOD unit in
the pack will receive CND data through the SSD messages and use one
of the voice channels of the intergroup junctor to deliver it to CLASS set B
in Group 1.
If the XCMC IPE pack is located in Group 1, the system will deliver SSD
messages containing CND information to CMOD and then send it to Set
B during the delivery interval through a voice path, which is an intragroup
channel not involving an intergroup junctor.
When CMOD units and CLASS sets are co-located in the same network
group, there are no voice paths on the intergroup junctor required to deliver
CND information; when they are equipped on different groups, intergroup
junctors must carry CND traffic. The resource allocation algorithm will
search for a CMOD unit located in the same group as the terminating
CLASS set first before it attempts to use a CMOD unit from a different group.
Intergroup junctor capacity
The time slot allocation algorithm for intergroup junctors is somewhat
different from regular network loops, however, it is a close approximation to
use the network loop capacity for junctor capacity, since they each have 30
traffic channels.
In order for the connection between a CMOD unit and the remote set (on
a different group) to meet the Grade Of Service (GOS) of the system for
internal call setup, traffic on the loop and intergroup junctor should meet
normal GOS requirements, that is 660 CCS per loop or junctor.
If we let an intergroup junctor be loaded to 660 CCS like a loop, the total
allowed traffic at eight junctors is 5280 CCS (=660x8). At 6 CCS per
CLASS set, the allowed number of sets generating intergroup traffic is 880
(=5280/6). If half of set traffic is intra-group, and the other half inter-group,
the allowed number of CLASS sets in Group 1 is 1,760 (=880/0.5). On per
loop basis, each loop can be equipped with 62 (=1760/28) CLASS sets.
Similarly, a 3-group network is likely to have 1/3 of traffic remaining in the
group, 1/3 of traffic going to the next group, and another 1/3 of calls going
to the third group. By using this inverse proportion approach to breakdown
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 503
traffic flow at junctors, the capacity of a network group in terms of CLASS
sets is summarized in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503). The entry in the Table 9
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)" (page 503) is the threshold for inter-group junctor traffic check-off.
The table entry indicates that in a two group system, the second group
is allowed to have 1760 CLASS sets or a combination of CLASS and
equivalent sets without a need to move sets or trunks around to reduce
inter-group junctor traffic. Due to higher traffic, an agent set or a trunk
is counted to be equal to four regular sets. The conversion needs to be
done before using Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503).
If the number of equipped sets (CLASS or otherwise) or equivalent sets
(sets converted from trunks and agent sets) is less than the threshold,
the junctor traffic is expected to be low. There is no special engineering
necessary for CLASS sets (other than providing required modems).
Note that the junctor traffic issue can be ignored if each group is fully
equipped with sufficient CMOD units to handle CLASS sets within the
group. It is the attempt to use one XCMC pack to serve multiple groups that
requires special attention to inter-group traffic. As long as CLASS service is
not impacted by a traffic in-balance already existed in the system, it is not
the objective of this engineering guideline to solve that problem.
Once the threshold is exceeded, re-configuration of the system is necessary
to reduce junctor congestion. The detailed engineering rules are given
later in this document.
Table 9
Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)
No. of Groups Sets/Group
2 1760
3 2933
4 3520
54080
Convert a trunk or an agent set to four equivalent sets before applying Table
9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)" (page 503)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
504 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
A single group system can have as many CLASS sets as each loop allows.
The engineering of the system is not different from that of non-CLASS sets,
since there is no intergroup junctor involved. The only engineering required
is to find the required number of CMOD units from Table 10 "CMOD unit
capacity" (page 504) to serve a given number of CLASS sets.
Note that the capacity per group for multi-group systems assumes no
trunking in that particular group (or trunks have been converted to equivalent
sets). Therefore, the total system capacity, by taking into account trunks,
agent sets and service circuits, will not be as large as a straight multiple of
number of groups by the number of sets per group.
The number of allowed CLASS sets per group in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS
sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page
503) is strictly a function of intergroup traffic (except for five-group systems).
When a system becomes five-group, the junctor capacity is no longer a
bottleneck under the assumption of even traffic distribution. The system
capacity iscome unrealistic if it is purely based on the intergroup junctor
capacity, therefore, other system resources, particularly the system CPU,
need to be checked. The number 4080 is based on loop traffic (28 loops/7
superloops), not junctor capacity.
If a group comprises of both regular sets and CLASS sets, the total number
of sets in the group should not exceed the quoted number in the table. If
trunks and agent sets are included in the group, convert them to "equivalent
sets" before using Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503). More details are
described in the engineering guide.
Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) shows the CMOD capacity. It
provides the number of CMOD units required to serve a given number of
CLASS sets with the desired grade of service. The required number of
CMOD units should have a capacity range whose upper limit is greater than
the number of CLASS sets equipped in a given configuration.
The procedure to use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) is further
illustrated in engineering examples starting on "Engineering examples for
non-Call Center applications" (page 506).
Table 10
CMOD unit capacity
CLASS Set 1-2 3-7 8-27 28-59 60- 100 101-
150 151-
200 207- 267
CMOD Unit 12345678
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 505
CLASS Set 268-
332 333-
401 402-
473 474-
548 549-
625 626-
704 705-
785 786- 868
CMOD Unit 9 101112131415 16
CLASS Set 869-
953 954-
1039 1040-1
126 1127-1
214 1215-1
298 1299-1
388 1389-1
480 1481-1572
CMOD Unit 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CLASS Set 1573-1
665 1666-1
759 1760-1
854 1855-1
949 1950-2
046 2047-2
142 2143-2
240 2241-2338
CMOD Unit 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CLASS Set 2339-2
436 2437-2
535 2536-2
635 2637-2
735 2736-2
835 2836-2
936 2937-3
037 3038-3139
CMOD Unit 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
CLASS Set 3140-3
241 3242-3
344 3345-3
447 3448-3
550 3551-3
653 3654-3
757 3768-3
861 3862-3966
CMOD Unit 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
CLASS Set 3967-4
070 4071-4
175 4176-4
281 4282-4
386 4387-4
492 4493-4
598 4599-4
704 4705-4811
CMOD Unit 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
CLASS Set 4812-4
918 4919-5
025 5026-5
132 5133-5
239 5240-5
347 5348-5
455 5456-5
563 5564-5671
CMOD Unit 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
General engineering guidelines for non-Call Center applications
In a non-call center application, there is no significant number of agent sets.
Therefore, no agent set to regular set conversion is needed. The only type
of port requiring special treatment is trunk.
Configurations following engineering rules (no re-configuration
required) The following engineering rules should be followed to avoid the
need to re-configure a switch to accommodate the CLASS feature.
1. Provide the number of CMOD units serving all CLASS sets in the system
based on the capacity table (Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504)).
2. Equip all CLASS sets in one network group.
3. Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with CLASS sets.
If the system is a single group system, or if above rules are fully met, no
further engineering is necessary. However, in case of an existing multi-group
site upgrading to provide CLASS feature, we may need to re-configure the
system in order to satisfy rule (2).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
506 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
When the above rules are not fully met, continue the system engineering by
following the procedure in the next subsection.
Re-configuration may be required (when engineering rules are not
fully followed) When above rule (2) can not be satisfied in a new site or
an existing one, the following guidelines are designed to minimize network
blocking, and to determine whether a re-configuration (to move trunks and
sets around) or to provide an XCMC pack per group is necessary.
•To use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) to estimate CMOD unit
requirements, consider only CLASS sets (no trunks or non-CLASS sets).
•If CLASS sets are equipped in more than one group, locate the XCMC
IPE pack in the group with most CLASS sets.
•Use Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group
junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) to decide whether re-configuration
is required. For a network group with trunks, regular sets and CLASS
sets, convert trunks to sets by using the formula: 1 trunk = 4 sets (called
equivalent sets), and then add up the total.
Check threshold in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based
on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503), if the number of
equivalent sets is less than 1760 (for example, for a two-group system),
there is no need to re-configure the system.
If the number is greater than 1760, we need to move some of the CMOD
units to a second XCMC IPE pack on another group (when CLASS sets
are scattered in two groups), or move some sets or trunks from one
group to another group to satisfy the threshold.
The following examples will show some of the engineering details of dealing
with various alternatives.
To simplify discussion, the network group 0 has minor number of CLASS
sets. The majority of CLASS sets are in group 1 (refer to Figure 17 "A
system with a two-group network" (page 501)).
Engineering examples for non-Call Center applications
One XCMC pack serving a single group system No special engineering
rule is needed for a single or half group system (CS 1000M SG, Meridian
1 PBX 61C, and CS 1000M HG). Look up Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity"
(page 504) to find the required number of CMOD units to serve the given
CLASS sets. For example, to serve a CS 1000M SG with 400 CLASS sets,
use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) to find the number of CMOD
units serving a range including 400 sets. The result is 10 units which can
serve 333 to 401 CLASS sets.
One XCMC pack serving a 2-group system
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 507
1. Example 1: No re-configuration
A 2-group system serving an office is expected to convert 400 analog
sets to CLASS sets. Currently, 100 of them are located in group 0,
where all incoming trunks are located, and the remaining 300 sets are in
group 1. Assume that group 1 is also equipped with 800 non-CLASS
sets. How many CMOD units are needed to serve this application and
does the customer need to re-configure the switch (move sets and
trunks between group 0 and group 1) to do the upgrade?
Solution:
The table lookup indicates that 400 CLASS sets need 10 CMOD units.
Since one pack provides 32 units, one XCMC pack is sufficient for this
customer.
Group 1 is equipped with 300 CLASS sets which is greater than the 100
sets in group 0, the pack should be installed in group 1.
The total equipped ports in group 1 is 1100 (=800+300). For a 2-group
system, the second group is allowed to have 1760 sets (from Table 9
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)" (page 503)) without junctor traffic concerns, therefore, there
is no need for the customer to re-configure the switch.
2. Example 2: Re-configuration
A similar application as in the last example, except that there are 1600
non-CLASS sets and 100 trunks in group 1.
Solution:
The same number of CMOD units (10), since the number of CLASS sets
in the system is the same.
The number of total equivalent sets in group 1 is 2300 (=1600 +300
+100x4) which is greater than the 1760 threshold in the Table 9
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)" (page 503) for a 2-group system.
The customer will have a number of alternatives to resolve the junctor
blocking issue, depending on the situation:
(1) move the 100 CLASS sets from group 0 to group 1, so all CLASS
sets are served by the XCMC pack in group 1, or
(2) move the 300 CLASS sets and the XCMC pack to group 0, or
(3) move 540 non-CLASS sets (=2300-1760) from group 1 to group 0, or
(4) move 100 CLASS sets from group 1 to group 0 and split the 10
CMOD units to 5 for group 0 and 5 for group 1. However, this will
require another XCMC pack to be equipped in group 0. The cost of this
approach is not trivial. It can be justified only when growth plan indicates
a need for a second pack in the near future anyway.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
508 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
The final decision depends on the specific situation of a site.
General engineering guidelines for Call Center applications
Configurations following engineering rules (no re-configuration
required) The following engineering rules should be followed to avoid the
need to re-configure a switch to accommodate the CLASS feature for call
center environment.
1. Convert an agent set to regular set by using 1 agent CLASS set = 4
sets (called equivalent sets)
2. Sum up the total number of regular CLASS sets and equivalent CLASS
sets and find the number of CMOD units required based on the capacity
table (Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504)).
3. Equip CLASS agent sets in the group where trunks carrying incoming
traffic to agent sets are located.
4. Equip non-agent CLASS sets in the same group as the agent CLASS
sets.
5. Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with CLASS sets.
If the system is a single group system, or if above rules are fully met, no
further engineering is necessary.
In case of an existing multi-group site upgrading to provide CLASS feature,
re-configuring the system may be necessary to satisfy rules (3) and (4).
When above rules are not fully met, continue the system engineering by
following the procedure in the next subsection.
Configurations do not fully meet engineering rules (re-configuration
may be required) When above rules can not be satisfied in a new site
or an existing one, the following guidelines are designed to (1) minimize
network blocking, (2) determine whether a re-configuration (to move trunks
and sets around) is necessary, or (3) whether separate XCMC packs are
necessary to serve the multi-group system.
1. Convert an agent set to regular set by using 1 agent CLASS set = 4 sets.
2. Sum up the total number of equivalent CLASS sets and find the number
of CMOD units required based on the capacity table (Table 10 "CMOD
unit capacity" (page 504)).
3. Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with most CLASS sets
(or equivalent sets).
4. Limit the number of agent CLASS sets to be 200 or less per group.
5. Limit the number of regular CLASS sets in a group without XCMC pack
to be 100 or less.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 509
6. Convert trunks (1 trunk = 4 sets), and agent set (1 agent set = 4 sets)
to equivalent sets before using Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per
group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) to
find junctor traffic threshold.
7. If the threshold in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) is greater than the
total number of equivalent sets, traffic in the system is balanced, there is
no need for further network engineering.
8. If the number of equivalent set is greater than the threshold, one or all
of the following engineering rules should be followed to reduce junctor
traffic:
a. Move sets (CLASS or non-CLASS) or trunks to another group to
satisfy the above engineering rules.
b. Equip XCMC pack in more than one group to serve local CLASS
set traffic.
9. When a trunk route is known to serve only agent sets, and these trunks
and agent sets are in the same group, exclude them from the set count
in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group
junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) threshold (for example, do not
include trunks and agent sets with known COI to use Table 9 "Maximum
CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)"
(page 503); they do not generate traffic to junctors).
The following examples will show some of the engineering details of dealing
with various alternatives.
To simplify discussion, the network group with most trunks is called group 0,
consequently, a majority of CLASS sets, if not all, are in group 1. If most
agent CLASS sets and XCMC pack are in group 0, there is no need for
further engineering.
Engineering examples for Call Center applications
One XCMC pack serving a single group system No special engineering
rule is needed for a single group system. Look up Table 10 "CMOD unit
capacity" (page 504) to find the required number of CMOD units to serve
the given CLASS sets. For example, to serve a CS 1000M SG or Meridian 1
PBX 61C with 300 agent CLASS sets, use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity"
(page 504) to find the CMOD units that can serve 1200 equivalent sets
(=300x4). The result is 20 units.
One XCMC pack serving a 2-group system
1. Example 1: No re-configuration required
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
510 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
A two-group system serving a call center is expected to upgrade 300
analog sets (100 administrative sets and 200 agent sets) to CLASS
sets. The 100 administrative sets are located in group 0, where are also
located all incoming trunks. The 200 agent sets are in group 1, which
will continue to be used as agent sets after upgrading. Assume that
group 1 is also equipped with 500 non-CLASS sets. How many CMOD
units are needed to serve this application and does the customer need
to re-configure the switch (move sets and trunks between group 0 and
group 1) to do the CLASS feature upgrade?
Solution:
The table lookup indicates that 900 equivalent CLASS sets
(=100+200x4) need 17 CMOD units. Since one pack provides 32 units,
one XCMC pack is sufficient for this customer.
Group 1 is equipped with 200 agent CLASS sets or 800 equivalent
sets which is greater than the 100 sets in group 0, the pack should be
installed in group 1.
The total equipped ports in group 1 is 1300 (=200x4+500). For a 2-group
system, the second group is allowed to have 1760 sets (from Table 9
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)" (page 503)) without junctor traffic concerns, therefore, there
is no need for the customer to re-configure the switch.
In addition, both "100 CLASS sets in a group without CMOD units (group
0)", and" 200 agent CLASS sets in a group separate from incoming
trunks (group 1)" statements are within engineering rules, therefore,
no re-configuration is necessary.
2. Example 2: Re-configuration required
A similar application as in the last example, but there are 1600
non-CLASS sets in group 1.
Solution:
The same number of CMOD units (17) is required, since the number of
equivalent CLASS sets (900) in the system is the same.
Equip the 17 CMOD units in group 1, since the XCMC pack should be
equipped in the group with most CLASS (equivalent) sets.
The number of total equivalent sets in group 1 is 2400 (=1600+200x4)
which is greater than the 1760 threshold in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS
sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page
503) for a two-group system.
The customer will have a number of alternatives to resolve the junctor
blocking issue, depending on the situation:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 511
Move the 100 CLASS sets from group 0 to group 1, or
Equip the 200 CLASS agent sets and the XCMC pack in group 0, or
Move 640 non-CLASS sets (=2400-1760) from group 1 to group 0 to
avoid threshold violation, or
Move 100 CLASS sets from group 1 to group 0 and split the 17 CMOD
units to 10 for group 0 and 7 for group 1; however, this will require
another XCMC pack to be equipped in group 0, or
Move 160 trunks with COI to agent sets from group 0 to group 1, so that
the total equivalent sets in group 1 iscome 1760 (=1600+(200-160)x4),
since this way the 160 trunks and an equal number of agent sets will
not generate traffic to junctors.
The final decision depends on the specific situation of a site.
3. Example 3: Mixed sets, trunks in both groups and re-configuration
required
A two-group system serving a call center is expected to equip 200
administrative CLASS sets in group 0 and 400 CLASS agent sets in
group 1. 500 trunks carrying incoming traffic to agents are located in
group 0, 60 trunks serving local CO non-ACD traffic are equipped in
group 1. Assume that group 1 is also equipped with 300 non-CLASS
sets. Can this configuration meet engineering rules? How many CMOD
units are needed?
Solution:
The equivalent CLASS sets in system = 200 + 400x4 = 1800. From
Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504), 27 CMOD units are needed.
It requires the XCMC pack to be equipped in group 1.
When we equip the XCMC pack in group 1, there are three violation
of rules: (1) the number of CLASS sets in the group without CMOD
units (group 0) is greater than 100, (2) the number of agent sets in a
group without incoming trunks (group 1) is 400 which exceeds the 200
per group limit, and (3) the violation of threshold in Table 9 "Maximum
CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)"
(page 503) for group 1 (=400x4+60x4+300=2140>1760). Several
alternatives are available to make this configuration meeting engineering
rules:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
512 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
Move 100 CLASS sets and 400 incoming trunks from group 0 to group
1; all above 3 violations are removed by this re-configuration: (1)
CLASS sets in group 0 is 100, (2) 400 CLASS agent sets and 400
incoming trunks with COI are in the same group (group 1), (3) the
number of equivalent sets in group 1 for threshold check-off is reduced
to 640 (=100+60x4+300=640) which is certainly within the limit (1760).
However, it is impractical to put almost all trunks and agent sets in
one group (group 1). With so many rule violations, the most realistic
approach is to move 200 CLASS agent sets to group 0 and equip
approximately 15 CMOD units in group 0 and 12 units in group 1.
One XCMC pack serving a 3-5 group system Chances of groups larger
than three requiring special engineering are slim, since the threshold (Table
9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity
limitation)" (page 503)) limiting the number of sets per group is much higher.
If the rule of co-locating CLASS sets and CMOD units in the same group
is not fully met, as long as basic rule like putting XCMC pack in the group
with most CLASS sets is followed, perhaps, no re-configuration between
any two groups is necessary.
However, if in doubt, isolate any two groups at one time, and go through the
two-group engineering procedure to re-configure the system two groups at
a time. Ignore the rest of system during the engineering process, except for
calculating the total number of CMOD units, which should cover the need of
all CLASS sets in the system. However, during a two-group engineering,
only the number of CMOD units attributable to the two-group at hand should
be used in calculations.
Also remember to use 2933 (equivalent) sets per group for threshold
check-off for the three-group system, and their respective number for four-
and five-group systems (Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based
on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503)).
The complete check-off of set threshold between any two groups in a
multi-group system can be represented by the following combinations (a
number denotes the group number: for example, 1-2 represents group
one-group 2):
three-group: 1-2, 1-3, 2-3.
four-group: 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 3-4.
five-group: 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 3-4, 3-5, 4-5.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Operating parameters 513
It should be noted that although CMOD units are equipped according to the
traffic requirement of CLASS sets in a network group for the intergroup
junctor traffic consideration, they are a system resource shared by the
whole system.
Operating parameters
Dialed Number Identification System (DNIS) is not supported by the CLASS
feature.
This feature has been developed for the North American residential market,
as well as for the small business, hospitality, schools and universities,
nursing homes and hospitals, and mobile home markets.
This feature applies to a standalone environment, and to an ISDN
networking environment supporting CLID and a non-ISDN networking
environment with or without In-Band Automatic Number Identification (ANI).
If the CLASS Calling Number Delivery and CLASS Calling Name Delivery
data to a CLASS set is lost, there is no indication, such as an error
message, provided. The call is presented in the normal manner, as if the
CLASS CND function has not been activated.
A maximum of 10 digits can be delivered as the calling number, and a
maximum of 15 characters can be delivered as the calling name. These are
Bellcore limitations.
The 16 port Analog Message Waiting line card (QPC789A) is not supported
for CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery.
Up to 255 CLASS modems can be configured on a system, and up to 32
CLASS modem units can be configured on any Extended CLASS Modem
card.
No CLASS CND traffic measurement is supported.
The CND delivery interval is the first silent interval, after ringing has been
applied for a new call, that is greater than two seconds. If the ringing applied
to the CLASS set uses a cadence with a ring-off cycle that is more than
four seconds in duration, then the CLASS set might view the call as having
been disconnected and might clear the CND display as a result. This is a
CLASS set firmware limitation.
Due to firmware limitations on some types of CLASS sets, after a call has
been disconnected, the CND information associated with the disconnected
call may still appear on the CLASS set’s display for several seconds. During
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
514 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
this time, the CLASS set cannot display new CND information. Though the
system delivers the CND information pertaining to a new call, there is no
guarantee that the CLASS set will display the delivered information.
Feature interactions
Attendant Call Extension
When an attendant extends a call to a CLASS set, the Calling Name and
Number of the attendant is delivered to the CLASS set, and not that of
the extended station.
Automatic Wake Up
When an Automatic Wake Up call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling
Name Delivery activated, then the calling name unknown indicator is
delivered in place of the calling number.
Blind Transfer
When a Meridian 1 proprietary set completes a Blind Transfer to a CLASS
set, the Calling Name and Number of the transferring set is delivered to
the CLASS set, and not that of the set being transferred. When an analog
(500/2500 type) set completes a Blind Transfer to a CLASS set, the transfer
is presented as a new call to the CLASS set. Therefore, the Calling Name
and Number of the transferred set is delivered to the CLASS set.
Call Forward All Calls
When a call is redirected to a CLASS set using Call Forward All Calls, the
Calling Name and Number of originating set, and not that of the forwarding
set, is delivered to the CLASS set.
Call Forward, Internal
When a call is redirected to a CLASS set using Internal Call Forward, the
Calling Name and Number of originating set, and not that of the forwarding
set, is delivered to the CLASS set.
Call Transfer
When a Call Transfer has been completed, the Calling Name and Number
of the transferred party will not be delivered.
Calling Line Identification Restriction for ISDN BRI sets
When an ISDN BRI set, with Calling Line Identification Restriction active,
makes a nodal call to a CLASS set with Calling Name Delivery active, the
calling name privacy indicator is delivered as the calling name.
Conference/No Hold Conference
When a set initiates a conference call to a CLASS set, the Calling Name
and Number of the initiating set is delivered to the CLASS set.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 515
Dial Intercom
The CLASS Calling Name and Number class of service cannot be
configured on Dial Intercom Group sets.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
If a call is made to a CLASS set using DISA dialing, then the Calling Name
and Number delivered to the CLASS set is that of the incoming trunk and
not the DISA DN. This is consistent with the normal display function for
DISA calls.
Display of Calling Party Denied
When a set with Display of Calling Party Denied active makes a nodal call
to a CLASS set with Calling Number Delivery active, then the calling name
privacy indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.
Distinctive Ringing
The normal delivery cycle for Calling Name and Number Delivery applies to
calls presented to a CLASS set with distinctive ringing, that is, the Calling
Name and Number Delivery information is delivered during the first silent
period that is longer than two seconds.
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) Enhancement
For a customer equipped with the FNP package 160, the calling number
delivered to the CLASS set can be of any length, up to 10 digits.
For a customer not equipped with FNP, the following apply:
•For a station (set or attendant) making a call to a CLASS set, if the local
public number is to be delivered to the CLASS set as the calling number
of the calling station, then the system software will pad or truncate the
calling number to be exactly seven digits long.
•For a station (set or attendant) making a call to a CLASS set, if the
national number is to be delivered to the CLASS set as the calling
number of the calling station, then the system software will pad or
truncate the calling number to be exactly 10 digits long.
•For an incoming trunk call to a CLASS set, the incoming Calling Number
Identification/Automatic Number Identification that is passed to the
CLASS set be of any length, up to 10 digits.
Group Call
When a set makes a Group Call to a CLASS set with Calling Number
Delivery active, the calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place
of the calling number.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
516 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
When a set makes a Group Call to a CLASS set with Calling Name Delivery
active, the calling name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling
name.
HotlineWhen a Hotline call is made to a CLASS, then the Calling Name and
Number is delivered in the same manner as when a call is presented to
the CLASS set using normal dialing.
Hunt When a call is redirected to a CLASS set using Hunt, the Calling Name and
Number of originating set, and not that of the redirecting set, is delivered to
the CLASS set.
Incremental Software Management
While no new License limit is introduced by the CLASS feature, each
CLASS modem unit TN is counted against the system TN limit and is
reflected in the overlay banner.
Feature Group D
When an incoming Feature Group D trunk call is presented to a CLASS set
with Calling Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the
CLASS set is one of the following:
•If the Feature Group D trunk route is configured so as to not show
the incoming ANI (SHAN = NO in LD 19), the calling number privacy
indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.
•If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is
delivered in place of the calling number.
•Otherwise, the incoming Feature Group D trunk ANI is directly delivered.
In-Band ANI
When an incoming In-Band ANI trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with
Calling Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the CLASS
set is one of the following:
•If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is
delivered in place of the calling number.
•Otherwise, the incoming In-Band ANI is directly delivered.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 517
Integrated Services Digital Network
When an incoming Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk call is
presented to a CLASS set with Calling Number Delivery active, the calling
number delivered to the CLASS set is one of the following:
•If the incoming CLID is defined as display denied (the originating set has
Display Digit Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification
Restriction active), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered
in place of the calling number, or, if no CLID is passed in from the
incoming trunk, then the calling number unknown indicator is delivered
in place of the calling number.
•If no CLID is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the calling number
unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.
•Otherwise, the CLID received from the incoming ISDN trunk is directly
delivered. If the CLID is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is
delivered.
When an incoming ISDN trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling
Name Delivery active, the calling name delivered to the CLASS set is one
of the following:
•If the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating
set has a Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line
Identification Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator
is delivered instead of the calling name.
•If no calling name is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the calling
name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.
•Otherwise, the calling name received from the incoming ISDN trunk is
directly delivered. If the calling name is longer than 15 characters, only
the first 15 is delivered.
Meridian 911
When an incoming M911 trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling
Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the CLASS set is
one of the following:
•If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is
delivered in place of the calling number.
•Otherwise, the incoming ANI is directly delivered.
Private Line Service
When a Private Line Service call is made to a CLASS, then the Calling
Name and Number is delivered in the same manner as when a call is
presented to the CLASS set using normal dialing.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
518 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
VIP Automatic Wakeup
When an attendant makes a VIP Automatic Wakeup call to a CLASS, then
the Calling Name and Number is delivered in the same manner as when the
attendant makes a call to the CLASS set using normal dialing.
Virtual Network Services (VNS)
When an incoming VNS trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling
Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the CLASS set is
one of the following:
•If the incoming CLID is defined as display denied (the originating set has
Display Digit Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification
Restriction active), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered
in place of the calling number.
•If no CLID is passed on by the incoming VNS trunk, then the calling
number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.
•Otherwise, the CLID received from the incoming VNS trunk is directly
delivered. If the CLID is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is
delivered.
When an incoming VNS trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling
Name Delivery active, the calling name delivered to the CLASS set is one
of the following:
•If the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating
set has a Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line
Identification Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator
is delivered in place of the calling name.
•If no calling name is passed on by the incoming VNS trunk, then the
calling name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.
•Otherwise, the calling name received from the incoming VNS trunk is
directly delivered. If the calling name is longer than 15 characters, only
the first 15 is delivered.
Feature packaging
The following packages are required for the CLASS Calling Name and
Number Delivery feature:
•Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95
•CLASS Calling Number Delivery (CNUMB) package 332
•CLASS Calling Name Delivery (CNAME) package 333 and
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 519
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data
Block." (page 519)
Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data Block.
2. "LD 10 - Configure the CLASS Calling Name and Calling Number
Delivery Class of Service for Analog (50" (page 520)
Configure the CLASS Calling Name and Calling Number Delivery Class
of Service for Analog (500/2500 type) sets.
3. "LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem
units may be configured per system)." (page 521)
Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may
be configured per system).
LD 15 - Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data Block.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change or delete existing data.
TYPE: NET Networking data.
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
...
CLID CLID option.
(NO) NO = (the default) do not configure a CLID table. In this case,
the remaining prompts are not generated, and no CLID is sent
for the customer.
YES YES = configure a CLID table for the customer.
- SIZE 0-(256)-4000 Number of CLID entries required.
...
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
520 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
Prompt Response Description
- ENTRY aaaa
Xaaaa
Xaaaa Xbbbb
<CR>
aaaa = CLID entry to be configured.
Xaaaa = CLID entry to be deleted.
Xaaaa Xbbbb = CLID entries to be deleted.
aaaa and bbbb must be a value between 0 and (SIZE-1).
The action for the entry is saved to system memory after the
CLID entry has been completely configured. If an existing
CLID entry is changed, the message "ENTRY aaaa SAVED" is
displayed. If a CLID entry or CLID entries is/are deleted, the
message "ENTRY aaaa DELETED" or "ENTRIES aaaa-bbbb
DELETED" is displayed.
...
- LSC 0-9999999
XLocal steering code, 1-7 digits.
X = delete digits.
- - CLASS_F
MT (DN)
LCL
NTN
Send internal DN to a CLASS set as the calling number.
Send local number to a CLASS set as the calling number.
Send National Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.
ENTRY aaaa SAVED
ENTRY aaaa DELETED
ENTRIES aaaa-bbbb DELETED
Displayed message. Refer to the ENTRY prompt description.
...
You may print the CLASS_FMT information included in the CLID using LD
21.
You may print or count the station sets class of service using LD 81. This
information would typically be used for billing purposes, to bill set users for
calls according to the assigned class of service.
LD 10 - Configure the CLASS Calling Name and Calling Number Delivery Class of Service for
Analog (500/2500 type) sets.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 521
Prompt Response Description
...
DN x..x yyyy Directory Number for this set (x..x) and CLID entry associated
with this set (ENTRY configured in LD 15).
(CNUD)
CNUA
CNUS
(CNAD)
CNAA
CLASS Calling Number Delivery Denied.
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Format Allowed.
CLASS Calling Number Single Data Format Allowed.
CLASS Calling Name Delivery Denied.
CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data Format Allowed.
Refer to the section "Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS
sets" (page 496) for details.
These Class of Service entries are not valid for a Dial Intercom
Group (DIG) set
CLS
...
LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured
per system).
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data
Change existing data.
TYPE CMOD CLASS modem unit.
DMOD 1-127 Default Model number for this route for Small System and Media
Gateway 1000B.
TN Terminal number
Note: Since the CLASS modem unit uses the octal-density
Extended CLASS Modem Card (XCMC), up to 32 units can be
configured on any XCMC card.
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
While no new License limit is introduced by the CLASS feature, each
CLASS modem unit TN is counted against the system TN limit and is
reflected in the overlay banner.
You can print the CMOD unit information using LD 20.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
522 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
523
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting
Indicator
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 523)
"Operating parameters" (page 527)
"Feature interactions" (page 528)
"Feature packaging" (page 529)
"Feature implementation" (page 529)
"Feature operation" (page 531)
Feature description
The Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) Visual Message Waiting
Indicator (VMWI) feature allows a CLASS set to receive a visual indication
that messages are waiting. The visual indicator may be in the form of a
lighting or flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED), or a special message on a
liquid crystal display, or both. The type of visual indicator depends on the
firmware of the CLASS set being used.
For a non-Class set, lighting the Message Waiting Lamp through a high
voltage message (Voltage Message Waiting) is still supported and operates
in the same way as it did before.
The visual indication message (an "ON/OFF" CLASS VMWI specific
message) is delivered from the system to the CLASS sets using Frequency
Shift Keying (FSK) signaling based on Bellcore specifications, using a
CLASS modem (CMOD) unit. The CMOD units are configured using LD 13.
Once configured, the CMOD units are shared throughout a multi-customer
system. When an FSK message is presented to a CLASS set, an available
CMOD unit is automatically allocated.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
524 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator
After all messages are retrieved, the visual indicator is cleared. The CLASS
VMWI feature will not be able to turn off the message waiting indicator
until the CLASS set has returned to the idle state, even though all of the
messages have been retrieved by the user.
The CLASS VMWI feature supports the Bellcore Single Data Message
Format (SDMF) and Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF) messaging.
These formats are configured in the system database using LD 10. To use
SDMF, a Class of Service of CNUS is required. For MDMF, a Class of
Service of CNUA and/or CNAA is required.
The following description outlines the general functionality of the CLASS
VMWI feature.
The following scenarios affect the sending of an ON or OFF message
indicator to a CLASS set.
If the CLASS set is idle:
•the ON/OFF message is sent immediately to the set.
If the CLASS set is busy:
•as soon as the CLASS set becomes idle (goes on-hook), the system
immediately sends the VMWI message to the set.
If the CLASS set or CMOD unit is disabled (using LD 32 or 30), or no
CMOD unit is available:
•the CLASS VMWI feature will automatically abort the VMWI message.
The CLASS set is then checked every 10 seconds, for up to 2 1/2
hours, until the set is detected to be idle. At that time, the system will
immediately deliver the VMWI message.
If a CLASS set is in the middle of receiving a VMWI message, and the
CLASS set goes off-hook:
•the VMWI message is aborted. The CLASS set is checked every 10
seconds, for up to 2 1/2 hours, until the set is detected to be idle. At that
time, the system will immediately deliver the VMWI message.
Note that, if the CLASS VMWI feature is waiting to send an "ON/OFF"
message and another "ON/OFF" message is requested, only the last
"ON/OFF" message is actually sent to the CLASS set.
The CLASS VMWI feature supports Nortel and third party CLASS sets, if
these sets are Bellcore VWMI compliant.
The following figures depict a typical feature operation and system resource
allocation scenario for a CLASS Visual Message Waiting Indication being
presented to a CLASS set. Note that the representation is for an ON
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 525
message being delivered to the CLASS set. The same operation and
system resource allocation applies for an OFF message being sent, except
that the contents of the message would be different.
Figure 18
CLASS set is in idle state
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
526 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator
Figure 19
CLASS VMWI ON message in the process of being delivered to the CLASS set
Figure 20
CLASS VMWI has been delivered to the CLASS set
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Operating parameters 527
Operating parameters
This feature has been developed for the North American residential market,
as well as for the small business, hospitality, schools and universities,
nursing homes and hospitals, and mobile home markets.
When a craftsperson uses LD 10 to administer a service change to a
CLASS set, if the system software identifies, during overlay wrap-up, that
the CLASS VMWI feature is waiting to send a visual indication to the set
being serviced, a SCH1099 message is generated, indicating that the VMWI
pending message is lost and no retry is attempted. The service change
itself does not trigger any messages to the set.
Some CLASS sets, like Nortel’s M9000 series of sets, support both voltage
and CLASS (FSK) Message Waiting. However, once the CLASS set is
configured in LD 10, then the system will no longer send voltage messages
to the set.
If a CLASS set that previously used FSK messaging to receive Visual
Message Waiting Indication has the Class of Service changed to be a
non-CLASS set that uses Voltage Message Waiting, the visual indicator will
not operate correctly. The following will occur:
•Voltage Message Waiting will work if the set is returned to the no
message waiting state (visual indicator is dark) before switching over
from FSK to voltage.
•Voltage message waiting will not work if the set is left at the message
waiting state (visual indicator is lit) before switching from FSK to voltage.
It is up to the craftsperson to ensure that a CLASS set is correctly configured
to support the CLASS VMWI feature.
Up to 255 CMOD units may be configured on a system. Once configured,
the CMOD units are shared throughout a multi-customer system. When
an FSK message is transmitted to a CLASS set, an available CMOD unit
is automatically allocated.
If a CLASS set with a lit message waiting indicator retrieves all of its
messages, the CLASS VMWI feature will not be able to turn off the message
waiting indicator until the CLASS set has returned to the idle state.
Lamp audit does not apply to the CLASS VMWI feature.
There is a 2 1/2 hours time limit for a retry in the case of a pending message.
Up to 255 CLASS modem units can be configured on a system, and up
to 32 CLASS modem units can be configured on any Extended CLASS
Modem card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
528 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator
Feature interactions
Attendant Console
When a CLASS set that is on a call with the attendant goes on-hook, the
call will not be released until the attendant releases the call. The CLASS
VMWI feature will wait until the call is actually disconnected before sending
the VMWI message to the CLASS set that had already gone on-hook
Call Party Control Incoming
When a CLASS set on an active call is placed in Call Party Control Incoming
(CPCI) state, the set will not be presented with any other incoming call. The
CLASS VMWI feature will not send the VMWI message to the CLASS set to
turn the visual indication ON or OFF, until the set releases the active call.
Make Set Busy
When a CLASS set is in the Make Set Busy state, the set will not be
presented with incoming calls. Although no incoming calls are presented to
the set, VMWI message can still be sent to the CLASS set to turn the visual
indication ON or OFF, as long as the set is in the idle and on-hook state.
Meridian Mail
The CLASS VMWI feature makes use of Meridian Mail by having the
Meridian Mail functionality communicate with the system to inform the
CLASS set to turn the visual message waiting indicator ON or OFF. The
system software determines the appropriate type of protocol based on the
configuration of the CLASS set, and sends it to the set to turn the visual
message waiting indicator ON or OFF.
Message Waiting
In order to support the CLASS VMWI functionality on a CLASS set, the
Message Waiting feature has been enhanced to turn the message waiting
indicator ON or OFF on the CLASS set through FSK signalling.
In addition, the CLASS VMWI feature can interwork with Stuttered Dial Tone.
The Stuttered Dial Tone functionality (which is part of the Flexible Tones
and Cadences feature) provides an audible indication, rather than a visual
one, that a message is waiting. It is configured separately from the CLASS
VMWI feature, using the Class of Service (CLS) prompt in LD 10. If the LPA
(Lamp Allowed) response is entered, then a CLASS visual indication is sent.
If the LPD (Lamp Denied) response is entered, then Stuttered Dial Tone is
sent instead. Note that the Stuttered Dial Tone and CLASS visual indication
are mutually exclusive. A CLASS set may receive either Visual or Stuttered
Dial Tone as a message waiting indicator, but not both.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 529
Permanent Hold
When a CLASS set is placed on permanent hold, the set is still treated as
though it is presented with a telephone call. The CLASS VMWI feature will
not send the VMWI message to the CLASS set to turn the visual indication
ON or OFF, until the set actually goes on-hook or the call is not presented to
the set. At this time, VMWI message is sent to the CLASS set to update
the visual message waiting status.
Set Relocation
When a CLASS set is relocated, the CLASS VMWI feature will lose the
message when the set finishes the relocation. An SCH1099 error message
is printed to indicate that the CLASS VMWI message is lost and no
automatic retry is attempted.
Feature packaging
The following packages are required for the CLASS VMWI feature:
•Message Waiting Center (MWC) package 46
•CLASS Calling Number Delivery (CNUMB) package 332, or
•CLASS Calling Name Delivery (CNAME) package 333, and
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and
configure the required Class of " (page 529)
Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and configure
the required Class of Service for the set.
2. "LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem
units may be configured per system)." (page 530)
Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may
be configured per system).
LD 10 - Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and configure the required
Class of Service for the set.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change existing data.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
530 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator
Prompt Response Description
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
DN xxxx Directory Number for the set
...
CLS Class of Service for the CLASS set
MWA
LPD Message Waiting Allowed.
Visual Indication (Lamp) Denied.
At least one of the following CLASS CLS must be allowed.
CNUA
CNUS
CNAA
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Format Allowed.
CLASS Calling Number Single Data Format Allowed.
CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data Format Allowed.
...
LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured
per system).
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add new data
Change existing data.
TYPE CMOD CLASS modem unit.
DMOD 1-127 Default Model number for this route for Small System and Media
Gateway 1000B.
TN Terminal number
Since the CLASS modem unit uses the octal-density Extended
CLASS Modem Card (XCMC), up to 32 units can be configured
on any XCMC card
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
You may print the CMOD unit information using LD 20.
Feature maintenance and diagnostics
LD 30 and LD 32
LD 30 and LD 32 handle CLASS VMWI messaging, in the case that a
CMOD unit or a CLASS set is in the state of being disabled. Any CLASS
VMWI message that is in progress is aborted. A check every 10 seconds,
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 531
for up to 2 1/2 hours, is done on the CLASS set until another CMOD unit is
found or the CLASS set is enabled, before a VMWI message is actually sent
to the set to perform visual indication.
LD 77
LD 77 is used to monitor CLASS VMWI messaging.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
532 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
533
CLID Name Enhancement and CLID B
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
534 CLID Name Enhancement and CLID B
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
535
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong
(A-CLID)
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 535)
"Operating parameters" (page 538)
"Feature interactions" (page 539)
"Feature packaging" (page 540)
"Feature implementation" (page 540)
"Feature operation" (page 541)
Feature description
With the Calling Line Identification on Analog Trunks (A-CLID) feature and
the DXUT-A card (NTRB37AA), on an incoming Central Office (CO) call, the
system can extract information such as:
•Calling Party Number
•Calling Party Name
•Reason for absence of Calling Party Number or Name (if necessary)
The A-CLID information is treated similar to ISDN CLID for delivery to other
modules and applications in the system, including the display on digital
telephones and consoles at the local node and other network nodes (if any).
You can enable or disable A-CLID on an individual trunk port basis.
The A-CLID information passes to the terminating party, which includes:
•Trunks — ISDN (PRI/BRI/QSIG), R2MFC (DTI/DTI2, Analog)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
536 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)
— Calling Party Number information can be tandemed over all ISDN
and R2MFC interfaces
— Calling Party Name information can be tandemed only on SL1 and
QSIG ISDN interfaces. R2MFC does not support name information.
•Terminals — attendant consoles, telephones (CLASS, 2208 with display,
2216, 2616, 2317, 5317, M3902, M3903, M3904, M3905)
•Applications — CallPilot, Customer Controlled routing, Meridian Mail,
Meridian Link, Symposium Call Center Server (calling party number
only)
Figure 21 "System structure for CLID delivery" (page 537) describes the
feature operation.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature description 537
Figure 21
System structure for CLID delivery
Table 11 "Format of CLI information" (page 538) shows the display format
for different combinations of analog CLI information.
If you do not receive the calling number ("P" or "O" is received as the reason
for absence), the display shows the P/O route access code number and
member number.
If you do not receive the calling name ("P" or "O" is received as the reason
for absence), then the display shows "PRIVATE" or "UNAVAILABLE".
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
538 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)
If you do not receive either the calling name, or its reason for absence, then
the display shows "UNAVAILABLE".
Table 11
Format of CLI information
Calling Number Reason for
Absence of
Calling
Number
Calling Name Reason for
Absence of
Calling Name
Display Format
491893021 -JOHN SMITH -JOHN SMITH
491893021
-"O " PAY PHONE -PAY PHONE
O-8015-1
-"O " --UNAVAILABLE
O-8015-1
-"O " -"O " UNAVAILABLE
O-8015-1
-"P " --UNAVAILABLE
P-8015-1
-"P " -"P " PRIVATE
P-8015-1
P = Private O = Other
Operating parameters
The A-CLID feature is only for incoming loop start trunks (both supervised
and non-supervised) in Hong Kong.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks do not support the A-CLID feature.
A-CLID requires one mode: On-hook data transmission with ring.
If you initialize the system while the CLID information is transferring from the
DXUT-A card to software:
•you lose all CLID information not sent.
•you lose the unestablished call (a call is established after the software
receives the complete CLID information).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 539
If the call is established, and you initialize the system, the call is restored.
However, maintaining the displayed information is not guaranteed.
If system initialization occurs after the A-CLID call is in the agent queue, the
ACD module must display the CLID information after the call is established.
If the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) fails, the call terminates without
displaying the CLID ("UNAVAILABLE" and "O-Route access code number -
Member number" for name and number display).
If data transmission stops halfway, the call terminates without displaying
the CLID ("UNAVAILABLE" and "O-Route access code number - Member
number" for name and number displays).
The system can receive, process, and display alphanumeric characters as
CLI information. No CLI information displays if the CO transmits information
in another format.
A maximum display of 20 digits and 27 characters is possible with this
feature.
When the call is tandemed to an ISDN/MFC trunk, only the first 16 digits
of A-CLID passes on.
This feature does not change the functionality of R2-MFC trunks. R2-MFC
trunks display the route access code number when the CLI information is
not available, and not the member number.
If the system receives unrecognized messages or parameter types, the call
terminates without displaying the CLID ("UNAVAILABLE" and "O-Route
access code number - Member number" for name and number displays).
The A-CLID feature delays the occurrence of the first ring. The terminating
set rings when the complete FSK message is received, or the software
times out waiting for the FSK message.
When a DISA call is abandoned, the CO trunks is busy for a short period of
time before disconnecting. This is characteristic of CO trunks.
Feature interactions
Attendant Call Extension
If an attendant extends a call from an incoming A-CLID CO trunk, the
terminating set receives the analog CLI information.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
540 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
The analog CLI information is given to the XCMC service pack to provide
number and name display to analog CLASS telephones. The CLASS
telephones can only display the CLI information when the incoming CO call
is auto-terminated on that telephone.
For calls terminating on a CLASS set, only the:
•calling party number and name information display.
•first 15 characters of the information display.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
If a user connects to the system through Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) dialing, the incoming trunk information is passed, not the DISA DN
information.
Information Notification Service for Japan
The A-CLID feature does not work with the Information Notification Service
for Japan (INS-J) feature.
Private Line Service
A-CLID information does display on the telephone.
Feature packaging
This feature requires Analog Calling Line Identification (ACLI) package 349.
Feature implementation
Use the Calling Line Identification Allowed (CLIA) Class of Service (CLS) in
LD 14 to activate the A-CLID feature on an individual port basis.
If EXUT is configured on a DXUT-A card pack, and the ACLI package is
equipped, then the default CLS is Calling Line Identification Denied (CLID)
for all incoming CO trunks to that card.
LD 14 - Configure analog CLI.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG
NEW x Change existing data block.
Add new data block to the system. Follow NEW with a
value of 1-255 to create that number of consecutive trunks.
TYPE COT Central Office Trunk data block.
.... ....
XTRK EXUT Enhanced Extended CO trunk card.
.... ....
SIGL LOP Loop start
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 541
Prompt Response Description
.... ....
CLS CLIA
(CLID)
Class of Service options for trunks.
Calling Line Identification Allowed
Calling Line Identification Denied (default)
.... ....
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
542 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
543
Collect Call Blocking
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 543)
"Operating parameters" (page 545)
"Feature interactions" (page 546)
"Feature packaging" (page 548)
"Feature implementation" (page 549)
"Feature operation" (page 553)
Feature description
In Brazil an automatic long distance collect call service called DDC is
available. The Collect Call Blocking feature enables a system administrator
to block DDC calls on incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and Public
Exchange/Central Office trunks (analog or DTI2). Under the following
conditions, the system sends a special answer signal to the Central Office
to indicate to the Central Office that collect calls cannot be accepted:
•The Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is enabled
•The incoming route has CCB enabled using the CCB prompt in the
Route Data Block, and
•The call is answered by a CCB user (that is, Collect Call Blocking
Allowed Class of Service or option).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
544 Collect Call Blocking
Classes of Service and prompts have been introduced to inhibit specific
users from receiving collect DID and Central Office calls. These can be
configured for the following:
•analog (500/2500 type) telephones and Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones through the Collect Call Blocking Allowed/Denied
(CCBA/CCBD) Class of Service.
•Attendant and Network Alternate Route Selection calls on a per
customer basis through CCBA/CCBD option.
•Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) queues through the CCBA prompt.
•Direct Inward System Access (DISA) through the CCBA prompt.
•Tandem calls dialed with Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) (Trunk
Steering Code, Distant Steering Code) through the CCBA prompt.
•Tandem non-CDP calls through the CCBA prompt in the Route Data
Block from the outgoing trunk route.
The system sends the CCB answer signal in place of the regular signal
for incoming DID/CO calls from routes with CCB enabled, when a call is
answered by a CCB user. If the call is a collect call, the CO will disconnect
the call.
Figure 22
Collect Call Blocking answer signal compared to regular answer signal
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Operating parameters 545
Operating parameters
The Collect Call Blocking feature supports both analog and DTI2 trunks,
and the following Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) cards:
•the NTCK16BB Extended Flexible COT Trunk Card (XFCOT) with
firmware flash timing
•the NT8D14BA Enhanced Extended Universal Trunk Card (EXUT)
containing the Centrex Switchhook Flash function in the firmware, and
•the NT8K14AK Extended Universal Trunk Card (XUT) which may be
used if the Centrex Switchhook Flash is configured with software timing.
The Collect Call Blocking answer signal can only be sent in cases where
answer supervision is provided by the system.
Once the modified answer signal is sent to the CO, the system has no
control over how the call is handled by the CO.
If a CCB user answers a call from a CO/DID route with Collect Call Blocking
activated, the CCB answer signal is sent to the CO for all incoming DID and
CO calls. For analog trunks, the user will experience clicking on the line
and a temporary break is speechpath (0.5 to 2.5 seconds) while the CCB
answer signal is being sent.
If the XFCOT and EXUT cards do not have flexible firmware timing, the
CCB flash portion of the CCB answer signal is ignored by firmware, and the
regular answer signal is returned to the CO. However, software controlled
signaling can be done with EXUT cards.
In a standalone environment, all input from a set (except from the Release
key) is ignored while the Collect Call Blocking answer signal is being sent.
Collect Call Blocking is applied to attendants on a customer basis only; it
cannot be applied on a tenant basis.
The answer signal returned for a call from a route with CCB enabled and that
is Network Attendant Service (NAS) routed is determined by the customer
option on the source node. Thus, NAS routing can be configured across
any Meridian Customer Defined Network environment, but the source node
determines the answer supervision sent to the CO.
Call Detail Recording (CDR) record timing begins on the first answer of the
CCB answer sequence. For this reason, CDR records is generated for
incoming calls to CCB users across routes on which CCB is enabled. If
the call is collect, and is dropped, a CDR record of approximately CCB1 +
CCB2 length is generated.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
546 Collect Call Blocking
For data calls, all calls is answered with the CCB answer signal, if CCB is
enabled. This may have an effect on data protocols, while CCB signaling
is taking place.
If firmware timing is used (FWTM = YES in Overlay14) for sending the
CCB flash, the CCB2 timer is downloaded to the card before sending the
firmware flash. If the CCB2 timer is changed in the Route Data Block, either
the card has to be enabled or the switch has to be initialized to get the new
CCB2 timer downloaded to the card.
Feature interactions
Automatic Answerback
The Automatic Answerback (AAB) feature, when assigned to a Meridian 1
proprietary telephone, allows any incoming call to a single-appearance
Prime Directory Number (PDN) to be answered automatically. If an
incoming DID or CO call terminates on a set with the AAB feature enabled,
the call is automatically answered after one ring. If the set has a CCBA
Class of Service, the CCB answer signal is provided in the place of the
regular answer signal.
Automatic Call Distribution
Collect Call Blocking can be enabled on an ACD queue basis. Hence, if
an incoming CO or DID call is answered by an ACD agent, the answer
supervision signal that is returned to the CO is determined by the value of
the CCBA prompt in LD 23. While the CCB answer signal is being sent, the
same limitations apply to ACD as apply to sets with CCBA Class of Service.
Automatic Call Distribution Interflow
If an ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is diverted to an interflow DN,
and answer supervision has not already been provided, the answer signal
returned to the CO depends on the source ACD queue. The CCB answer
signal is returned to the CO if the source ACD queue has CCB enabled.
Automatic Call Distribution Night Call Forward
During Night Call Forward (ACD) call processing, the source ACD queue is
removed or overwritten. Therefore, the CCB treatment given is based on
the queue the call happens to be in at the time the call is answered.
Automatic Call Distribution Night RAN Route Announcement
If an ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is diverted to a Night RAN
route (defined by NRRT in the ACD block), the CCB signal returned to the
CO depends on the source ACD queue. If the source ACD queue has CCB
enabled, the CCB answer signal is sent to the CO.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 547
Automatic Call Distribution Overflow
If an ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is diverted to an overflow ACD
DN and answer supervision has not already been provided, the answer
signal returned to the CO depends on the source ACD queue from where
the call came. If the source ACD queue has CCB enabled, the CCB signal
is sent to the CO.
Autoterminate
If an incoming DID or CO call from an autoterminate trunk terminates on a
set or ACD queue with a CCBA Class of Service, the CCB answer signal
is provided in place of the regular answer signal.
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Sets
For BRI sets CCBA/CCBD Class of Service cannot be programmed.
Therefore, it is not possible to prevent BRI sets from accepting DDC collect
calls.
Central Answering Position
The answer signal returned to the CO for calls that get answered by a Central
Answering Position (CAP) is determined by the source ACD configuration
and not the customer option (CCBA/CCBD in LD 15) on the source node.
Centralized Attendant Service
The answer signal returned to the CO for calls that get answered by a
Centralized Attendant Service is determined by the customer option
(CCBA/CCDB in LD 15) on the source node.
Centrex Switchhook Flash
A Centrex Switchhook Flash cannot be invoked by another feature while the
CCB answer signal is being sent.
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced
If a station activates Malicious Call Trace (MCT) while the CCB answer
signal is being sent, MCT activation is ignored. This also applies to the case
when MCT is activated from a remote node.
Meridian Mail
Because Meridian Mail is configured using ACD queues, the same
interactions exist as in the ACD case. When Meridian Mail sends a call
answer message to the system, the CCB configuration in the source ACD
queue is used to determine if a CCB answer signal should be sent to
the Central Office. All mail boxes using the same ACD queue to access
Meridian Mail will get the same CCB treatment.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
548 Collect Call Blocking
If some of the mail boxes are allowed to receive collect calls, this may be a
problem. A possible solution is to configure two ACD queues on the system
to access Meridian Mail. One queue would have collect calls allowed and
the second queue would have collect calls denied.
Network Automatic Call Distribution
The answer signal returned to the CO for a network ACD call from a route
with CCB enabled is determined by the source ACD queue. If the source
ACD queue has CCB enabled, the CCB answer signal is returned in place
of the regular answer signal.
Pilot DN
If an incoming DID or CO call has CCB enabled and is routed to a pilot
DN, the answer signal returned to the CO is determined by the CCB
configuration of the terminating station.
Private Line Service
If an incoming DID or CO call from a private line trunk terminates on a set
with a CCBA Class of Service, the CCB answer signal is provided in place
of the regular answer signal.
Recorded Announcement
A Recorded Announcement (RAN) route is defined as having CCBA YES or
NO, which is used if Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) or ACD queues were
not used to get to the RAN route. If the call is routed through ACD/CDP to
terminate on RAN, the CCB treatment will depend upon the CCB data of the
ACD/CDP, and not of the RAN route.
Tandem to Unsupervised Trunk
If an incoming DID or CO call tandems to an unsupervised trunk before
it terminates, the answer signal is sent by timeout. Therefore, any CCB
tandem calls made to unsupervised trunks will not have the CCB answer
signal sent until the timeout occurs.
Trunk Hook Flash
If a station activates Trunk Hook Flash (THF) while the CCB answer signal
is being sent, THF activation is ignored.
Feature packaging
Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 must be provisioned to activate
this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 549
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 16 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers."
(page 549)
Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers.
2. "LD 14 - Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards." (page
550)
Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards.
3. "LD 15 - Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants." (page 551)
Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants.
4. "LD 10 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones." (page 551)
Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
5. "LD 11 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 551)
Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
6. "LD 23 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues." (page 552)
Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues.
7. "LD 24 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks." (page 552)
Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks.
8. "LD 87 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes." (page
552)
Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes.
LD 16 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE RDB Route Data Block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
TKTP aaa Trunk type. Must be COT, DID, FEX, or WAT for CCB.
...
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
550 Collect Call Blocking
Prompt Response Description
M911_ANI NO M911 route. Must be set to NO to enable CCB.
...
ISDN NO ISDN route. Must be set to NO to enable CCB.
...
ICOG IAO ICT OGT Incoming and outgoing, incoming, or outgoing. Must be
either IAO or ICT to enable CCB.
Must be either IAO or OGT to get the CCBA prompt for
outgoing calls.
...
CNTL (NO) YES Change to controls or to timers.
...
CCB (NO) YES Collect Call Blocking enabled or disabled on incoming
route. CCB package 290 is required. Enter YES to obtain
CCB timer prompts.
CCB1 512-(1536)-4992 Collect Call Blocking delay timer 1 in milliseconds. Input
rounded to the next multiple of 128 milliseconds.
CCB2 500-(1520)-2550 Collect Call Blocking delay timer 2 in milliseconds. Input
rounded to the next multiple of 10 milliseconds. If any CCB
route members (trunks) are using firmware timing (FWTM
= YES in LD 14), changes to the CCB2 timer value will not
take effect until the new timer value is downloaded to the
card. This can be done by enabling the card or initializing
the switch.
CCBA (NO) YES Collect Call Blocking allowed or denied for outgoing route.
LD 14 - Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE DID COT FEX
WAT Trunk Type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
XTRK EXUT
XCOT Type of card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 551
Prompt Response Description
FWTM (NO) YES Firmware timing for flash. Enter YES to enable firmware
timing.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
RTMB Route number and Member Number
0-511 1-4000 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 1-4000 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
SUPN YES Answer supervision required.
LD 15 - Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE: FTR Features and options
CUST 0-99
0-31
Customer number
For Large Systems
For Small Systems
- OPT CCBA Allow Collect Call Blocking.
CCBD = Default
LD 10 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
...
CLS (CCBD) CCBA (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.
LD 11 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
552 Collect Call Blocking
Prompt Response Description
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
...
CLS (CCBD) CCBA (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.
LD 23 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE ACD ACD data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
ACDN xxxx ACD Directory Number.
...
CCBA (NO) YES (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.
LD 24 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
TYPE DIS DISA data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
...
DN xxxxxxx DISA Directory Number.
...
CCBA (NO) YES (Deny) allow CCB answer signal to be sent.
LD 87 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW
CHG Add.
Change.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
FEAT CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan.
TYPE TSC DSC Steering code type.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 553
Prompt Response Description
...
CCBA (NO) YES (Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
554 Collect Call Blocking
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
555
Conference Warning Tone
Enhancement
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 555)
"Operating parameters" (page 556)
"Feature Interactions" (page 556)
"Feature packaging" (page 556)
"Feature implementation" (page 556)
"Feature operation" (page 558)
Feature description
The Conference Warning Tone Enhancement feature was developed to
meet the Italian requirements to distinguish between a conference warning
tone and a true intrusion. A Conference Warning Tone warns users that
they are involved in a conference connection. An Intrusion Tone warns
users involved in a conference of an intrusion into their connection.
Prior to this development, the Intrusion Tone was also used as a Conference
Warning Tone, and the two tones could only be distinguished by their
cadences, not by their tone frequency. With this feature, a separate
Conference Warning Tone can be defined, with its tone and cadence defined
in LD 56. This tone and cadence can only be programmed in Flexible Tones
and Cadences (FTC) table 0.
The Conference Warning Tone can be enabled or disabled using the CWFT
prompt in LD 97. When the tone is enabled, a permanent speech path
connection is placed from the tone circuit to the conference circuit to provide
the tone to all parties connected in a conference. The tone and cadence
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
556 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement
for the Conference Warning Tone can be programmed to be distinctively
different from the tone and cadence produced by the Intrusion Tone given
by such features as Barge-In, Break-In, or Busy Verify.
Operating parameters
This feature only applies to the Cabinet system.
The Conference Warning Tone will only be contained and defined within
FTC Table 0. All other FTC tables will not contain any references to the
Conference Warning Tone and this tone cannot be copied to any other FTC
table by a numbered response to the DFLT (Default to existing FTC tone
table) prompt in LD 56. Since existing code does not allow FTC table 0 to
be deleted, there is no danger of deleting the Conference Warning Tone.
For cadence tables, table numbers above 15 should be chosen for the
Conference Warning Tone, because cadence tables numbers below 15 are
influenced by Software Controlled table numbers.
Feature Interactions
Tones and Cadences
There are no changes to the limitations to cadence numbers entry values.
The same restriction still applies.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Feature implementation
Note: When upgrading from a CS 1000S to a CS 1000E in Release 5.0,
if CFWT in LD 56 has a value other than 0, then conference warning
tones is enabled following the upgrade. After the upgrade, the CFWT
prompt is not available in LD 97. The conference warning tone must be
enabled/disabled and configured in LD 56.
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
•"LD 56 - Configure Conference Warning Tone" (page 557)
Configure Conference Warning Tone.
•"LD 97 - Enable Conference Warning Tone" (page 557)
Enable Conference Warning Tone.
•"LD 34 - Enable Conference Warning Tone" (page 557)
Enable Conference Warning Tone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 557
LD 56 - Configure Conference Warning Tone
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Modify existing data.
TYPE FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences data block.
TABL 0FTC table number 0. Only table number 0 can be used to
make changes to the Conference Warning Tone.
...
RING NO Modify the ringing feature definitions.
HCCT YES Modification of the hardware controlled cadence tone
definitions allowed.
...
- EEST NO End-to-end Signaling type.
- CFWT Conference Warning Tone.
- - XTON 0-(3)-255 The Conference Warning Tone number. A tone number
provided by the tone circuit.
- - XCAD 0-(19)-255 The Conference Warning Tone cadence number. Cadence
number must have been previously set up within LD 56 by
responding to the TYPE prompt with FCAD.
LD 97 - Enable Conference Warning Tone
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Modify existing data.
TYPE XCTP Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters.
CPAD (0)
1
Conference pad values.
Use software pad values.
Use pad values defined by switch settings.
DTMF 0-(14)-255 Tone table of the first Dual-tone Multifrequency digit to be
used.
CFWT (NO) YES (Disable) enable Conference Warning Tone.
Note: For CS 1000E Release 5.0 and later, LD 34 must be
used to Enable/Disable Conference Warning Tone.
LD 34 - Enable Conference Warning Tone
Command Description
ENLX l Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1.
DISX l Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
558 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
559
Conference
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 559)
"Operating parameters" (page 560)
"Feature interactions" (page 561)
"Feature packaging" (page 570)
"Feature implementation" (page 571)
"Feature operation" (page 572)
Feature description
Conference adds additional parties to an established call. The maximum
is three or six, depending on the Conference feature assigned to the
conference call originator. Not all conference parties have to be local to the
system, although one party must be an internal Directory Number (DN)
to uphold the conference connection. The attendant can also establish
six-party conferences.
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones require a separate Conference 3 or
Conference 6 key/lamp pair. M2317 sets establish conference calls by
means of a softkey. Analog (500/2500 type) telephones use the switchhook
to establish a three-party conference.
The six-party Conference (C6A) Class of Service enables analog (500/2500
type) telephones to establish a six-party conference, which operates the
same as a three-party conference, with the exception of Conference Control
operation.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
560 Conference
Conference Control disconnects an unwanted third party (trunk only) from a
three-party conference. Analog (500/2500 type) telephone users implement
this feature by means of switchhook flash. Telephones with the six-party
conference capability implement Conference Control by dialing SPRE + 87.
It is recommended that all analog (500/2500 type) telephones have either the
three-party conference (C6D) Class of Service or the six-party Conference
(C6A) Class of Service to avoid confusion when using Conference Control.
Operating parameters
Due to the possibility of getting annoying noise (squealing, for example)
when two or more trunks are involved in a conference, it is strongly
recommended that no more that two trunks be involved in the process.
At least one party in the conference must be a telephone on the local
system for the duration of the conference call.
Attendant Administration does not support the implementation of six-party
conference for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. An error message is
displayed if an attempt is made to remove Transfer Allowed (XFA) Class of
Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones with a C6A Class of Service.
A Transfer allowed (XFA) Class of Service is required for a three-party
conference (C6D) and is also a prerequisite for the six-party conference
Class of Service (C6A) on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Dial access of Conference Control is provided only for analog (500/2500
type) telephones with a C6A Class of Service.
The number of time slots is limited to 30 per conference loop. For Small
Systems, a maximum of five simultaneous conferences, each consisting of
six conference users, is supported per conference loop.
Double conferences are blocked to avoid conference chains (that is, set
A and set B are on an established call. The user of set B presses the
Conference key to call set C. Any attempt by set C to initiate another
conference is blocked if set B has not yet completed the conference).
While the originating side of a call is linked to a transfer or conference key
(that is, the originator of a transfer/conference call has not yet completed
the transfer/conference), the terminating side cannot initiate a transfer or
conference. Conference calls cannot be transferred.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 561
A warning tone is available for conference calls. When the option is enabled,
the tone lets callers know that they are entering a conference call. The
switch for this option is preset to disable the warning tone. For information
on the switch settings for the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, refer to Circuit
Card Reference (NN43001-311).
Feature interactions
500/2500 Line Disconnect
If one of the parties in the conference is connected to a 500/2500 port that is
in turn connected to a Voice Response Unit (VRU), dial tone is provided to
the 500/2500 port when all the other parties in the conference disconnect.
This feature enhancement applies in the same way to Call Transfer and
Hunting.
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1
The use of the Conference key does not activate the AC15 Recall: Transfer
from Meridian 1 feature. Conference call is not supported because it is not
possible to have two parties on the same trunk.
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall
The conference feature is sometimes used to perform a transfer when
a controlling party establishes a call, the controlling party establishes a
conference with a third party and releases, and a call is established between
the two remaining parties.
If an established call is extended over a trunk to initiate a conference call,
this conference call cannot be set up if this trunk has answer supervision
and the called extension has not answered. The AC15 Timed Reminder
Recall feature cannot be activated by using the conference feature to extend
a call over an AC15 TIE trunk, because the AC15 TIE trunk must have
answer supervision and the called extension must be ringing.
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar
It is not possible in any situation with Transfer from Norstar to establish a
three-party conference. It is not possible for an AC15 trunk to initiate a
consultation if it is involved in a conference.
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN
If a set is participating in a conference, no charge is displayed for that set.
Whenever an ISDN CO trunks that provides Advice of Charge (AOC) is
added to a conference, the call charging information, received from the
network, accumulates against the set that initiates the call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
562 Conference
Once the last set involved in a conference call disconnects, a search is
made of all trunks remaining in the conference call to determine which trunk
has been established in the call for the longest period of time. This trunk
becomes the chargeable TN. Once this trunk disconnects, the process is
repeated so a new chargeable TN can be located.
Attendant Barge-In
Attendant Busy Verify
Conference Control cannot be activated if an attendant has used Barge-In
or Busy Verify during a conference that involves a trunk.
Attendant Break-In
If the attendant cannot break in to a conference call because the call is
supporting the maximum number of callers, busy tone continues and the
Break-In key lamp flashes.
Attendant Console
Three-party Conference (C6D) allows analog (500/2500 type) telephones on
established calls to flash the switchhook and Dial 0 to talk to the attendant.
Six-party conference users follow the same sequence, but the conference
loop is seized and the call is treated as a conference call. When only two
parties remain from the conference, the call is returned to a simple call if
neither of the remaining parties is an attendant console.
Attendant Overflow Position
An Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) call answered on an AOP DN may
be conferenced with another DN.
Autodial Tandem Transfer
The Autodial Tandem Transfer feature is blocked during Conference and
No Hold Conference calls.
Automatic Redial
When an Automatic Redial (ARDL) call is not accepted by the calling party,
the Conference (A03 or A06) key is ignored.
B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching
When a conference connection is established, no pads are switched in on
the trunk side; any extra loss that is required is provided by the conference
circuit based on an algorithm which takes into account the number of lines
and trunks.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 563
Call Forward All Calls
On analog (500/2500 type) telephones, Call Forward All Calls can be
activated or canceled during a conference call.
Call Forward by Call Type
Calls modified by Conference receive Call Forward by Call Type treatment
for the conferenced telephone. If party A calls party B, and B tries to
conference in party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are that of C.
For example, Joan and Bob are in conversation, and they try to conference
in Mack. Mack is not at his desk, so the attempted conference call is sent to
the destination associated with Mack’s telephone.
Call Page Network Wide
A station set or attendant console that conferences an external Call Page
Network Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an
external PAGENET controlled call is blocked.
Call Park
A parked call can be accessed after Conference is activated
Call Party Name Display
When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the
Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display. The telephones
involved in the conference have blank displays. If the conference returns
to a two-way only call, each telephone displays the DN and name of the
other telephone.
Call Pickup
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. Meridian 1
proprietary telephones can activate Call Pickup if an idle Directory Number
(DN) key is available. The conference call must be put on hold before
pressing the idle DN key to pick up the call.
Call Pickup Network Wide
Call Pickup Network Wide may be used to pickup an enquiry call from a
conference, subject to the same limitations as apply to Call Transfer.
Call Transfer
Conference can be used to transfer calls, eliminating the need for a separate
Call Transfer key/lamp pair on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Calls in
the ringing state cannot be transferred with Conference. The third party
must answer before the transfer can be completed.
A conference can also be established after initiating a Call Transfer
operation. After the third party answers, pressing the Conference key
establishes a three-way conference.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
564 Conference
When a switchhook flash transfers calls on analog (500/2500 type)
telephones with three-party conference (C6A) Class of Service, the
transferring party goes on hook, leaving the other two parties established.
Telephones with a C6A Class of Service involved in a conference having
more than three parties must add the last party to the conference, then flash
the switchhook and go on hook to complete the transfer.
Called Party Disconnect Control
Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as trunks
without disconnect supervision when conferenced.
Calling Party Name Display Denied
Call Party Name Display, and thus the Calling Party Name Display Denied
enhancement, do not apply to conference calls.
Calling Party Privacy
The Calling Party Privacy (CPP) feature will pass the Privacy Indicator to the
terminating set to inhibit the display of the Calling Party Name and Number
if the Conference feature is used for the purpose of performing a transfer.
Camp-On, Forced
Telephones involved in Conference calls cannot be camped on to. Overflow
tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced Camp-On.
Centrex Switchhook Flash
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) allows conference calls through the CO. It
can be invoked only if there is an established call connected to an outside
trunk. If the telephone is engaged in internal conference calls, THF cannot
be used.
Charge Account and Calling Party Name
Conference calls produce multiple Call Detail Recording (CDR) records.
Whenever a new trunk is added to a conference, the connection between
the connected telephone and the trunk is recorded, and a connection to the
conference loop is established. This causes CDR to generate a start record
with the telephone and trunk identified as the involved parties. As trunks are
removed from a conference, CDR end records are produced. These records
may identify different telephones or conferences as the local parties.
China - Attendant Monitor
If any party involved in a monitored call attempts to activate conference,
monitoring is immediately deactivated. With Attendant Monitor active, the
attendant cannot create a conference without first disabling the Attendant
Monitor feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 565
China - Supervised Analog Lines
If a terminal device answers an incoming call and then initiates a conference,
no battery reversal answer supervision signal is extended to the terminal
device when new parties of the conference answer. However, a hook flash
disconnect supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when the
last party in the conference disconnects.
If a terminal device initiates a conference, battery reversal answer
supervision is extended to the terminal device when the first party answers.
No polarity change is made when additional parties are added to the
conference. The polarity is reverted to normal when the terminal device
disconnects or when the last party in the conference disconnects.
China - Toll Call Loss Plan
Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference is in progress. When
a local party connecting to a toll call makes a conference call, the pad
levels on the ONS line card are switched back to their original (non-toll
call) values. Then, the existing Conference algorithm takes care of the
necessary pad switching. This would not alter the existing conference call in
terms of loss levels.
When a conference call joins in a toll call, the Toll Loss Plan is not effective.
When a conference call involving a toll call becomes a two-party call, the
Toll Loss Plan is applied on the set and DTI2 trunk.
The conference pad switching algorithm is not changed for the Toll Loss
Plan, since the 7 db requirement does not apply to a Conference call.
Controlled Class of Service
If Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is activated at a telephone involved in
a conference call, established Central Office or toll calls are not affected.
The CCOS restriction level is applied immediately, and no new calls can be
initiated from the conference. The telephone remains in the CCOS active
state after the conference is terminated.
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
If Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is activated at a telephone on a
conference call, established Public Exchange/Central Office or toll calls are
not affected. The CCOS restriction level is applied immediately; however,
no new calls can be initiated from the conference. That telephone remains
in the CCOS state after the end of the conference.
Dial Access to Group Calls
The Conference feature cannot be applied to a Group Call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
566 Conference
Dial Intercom
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone is part of a Dial Intercom Group
(DIG), the user of the telephone can conference only with another user
whose telephone is within the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG).
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion
Executive Intrusion is denied if the requested party is established in a local
conference, or if the requested party is involved in an enquiry call. These
limitations may apply to the unrequested party depending on the connection
being used between the requested and unrequested parties.
End-to-End Signaling
The attendant console and the telephone receiving Attendant End-to-End
Signaling cannot both activate End-to-End Signaling simultaneously.
Group Call
Neither Call Transfer nor Conference can be initiated during a Group Call. If
an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user flashes the switchhook during an
established Group Call, the user is dropped from the call.
Held Call Clearing
Active Conference calls are cleared by an on-hook or Release key action.
Conference calls being held are cleared by an on-hook action only, and not
by a Release key action. In either case, all other parties on the conference
remain connected.
Hot Line
A Flexible Hot Line (non-enhanced) telephone cannot place conference
calls, but an Enhanced Hot Line telephone can activate the conference
feature. If the Hot Line restriction option is set, the conference call can
terminate only to other Hot Line telephones. If the restriction option is not
set, the conference call can terminate to any type of telephone.
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion
A Call Completion request cannot be made on a conference call attempt.
ISDN QSIG Name Display
An incoming QSIG call with name display presentation allowed is
conferenced locally. When a conferee drops out of the conference, calling
party’s name information is displayed and is passed on to another conferee.
Name display information remains until the last local set remains on the call.
With presentation restricted, the calling party’s name information is not
displayed as conferees leave the call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 567
In-Band Automatic Number Identification
If an agent activates the Conference feature while active on an In-Band
Automatic Number Identification (IANI) call, the display is cleared. The
display remains clear while the Conference call is active. If the conferenced
party releases first, the ANI number appears on the agent’s display.
Malicious Call Trace
When a station or console that is on the conference loop activates the
MCT feature, the trace record shows only the conference loop number and
conference number as the ORIGTN, and the Terminal Number (TN) of the
station or console that activated the feature as the TERTN. No information
on the other parties in the conference is given.
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced
If MCT is activated during a conference, the trace record shows the
conference number and the conference loop number. Trace records are
printed for each party involved in the conference. The originator of the call’s
trace record is printed first.
Meridian Mail Conference Control
Three- and six-party conference allows 2500 telephones to disconnect from
Meridian Mail by dial access during a conference call.
A 2500 telephone on an established call flashes the switchhook to place
the existing call on Consultation Hold. After receiving special dial tone,
the user dials the third party. If the third party does not answer, the call is
forwarded to Meridian Mail. If the 2500 telephone flashes the switchhook
again, a three-party conference is established, including Meridian Mail. If
the user does not flash the switchhook at this time, Privacy is in effect and
the user can disconnect from Meridian Mail by dial access before returning
to the original call. This can be done if the user is in conference or on a
simple two-party call.
To disconnect from Meridian Mail, press octothorpe (#) to stop the recorded
greeting, octothorpe (#) to stop recording your message, and 83 to
disconnect. To disconnect from any other message system connected to
the system, press 3 to stop the recorded message and the asterisk (*) to
disconnect.
Meridian 911
When a call is answered, and then conferenced, the trunk priority is lost (the
conference consultation call is an internal call and treated as low priority by
the software). This operation is the same for normal calls and 911 calls.
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon
M911 abandoned calls cannot be conferenced.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
568 Conference
Message Registration
The party that originates a call is charged. The charge cannot be moved
to another party using Conference.
Multi-Party Operations
Current Conference feature for analog (500/2500 type) telephones with C6A
is not affected by conference with TSA Class of Service.
Multi-Party Operations - Call Join
The Call Join feature allows a user of a system or digital telephone to
conference in or transfer a third party to a party held on the user’s telephone,
without having to dial the third party. The user can then hang up.
Multi-Party Operations -Three-Party Service
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements
The patience tone or the Misoperation ringback is not applied to a
conference party.
Music With basic Music on Hold, when a call is placed on consultation hold
while a Conference is being established, music does not play. Enhanced
Music (EMUS) package 119 is required for music on consultation hold.
See the "Music, Enhanced" feature description in Features and Services
Fundamentals (NN43001-106), Book 2.
Music, Enhanced
The held party receives Music when the Conference key is pressed, while
the conference is being established, and whenever the conference is
reduced to two parties with one party on Hold. Once the conference is
established, Music is no longer provided.
A Six-party Conference operates the same as a Three-party Conference.
Network and Executive Distinctive Ringing
If a new party is to be included in an established conference, the ringing that
is applied to the set of the new party depends on the sets of the established
parties. The system scans the trunks and sets of the conferees for a trunk
marked as distinctive or a set designated as executive. The ringing cadence
of the new set depends on the highest index found by the scan.
Network Intercom
A Conference call may involve a mixture of intercom and regular DN keys.
No Hold Conference
This feature can be enabled at any time that a regular Conference-6 feature
can be activated.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature interactions 569
Off-Hook Alarm Security
The Off-Hook Alarm Security (OHAS) line lockout treatment occurs when a
telephone associated with an OHAS DN initiates a Conference call and the
ASTM expires. Only the Conference initiator receives the OHAS treatment;
other conferees remain in Conference. If the initiator of the Conference
call presses the Conference key, the OHAS DN is conferenced in with the
other conferees.
On Hold on Loudspeaker
It will not be possible to conference the loudspeaker call to another party.
Override
A conference call cannot be entered by using Override.
Override, Enhanced
Telephones involved in conference calls cannot be force camped on or
Priority Overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones
attempting either Forced Camp-On or Priority Override.
Paging Paging trunks cannot be conferenced.
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)
Whenever a PPM trunk is added to a conference, a CDR Start record is
generated, if CDR is equipped on the trunk. The PPM pulse counts from the
trunk are accumulated against the party who initiated the call. If a party who
adds a PPM trunk to the conference disconnects while the conference is still
in progress, read requests are sent to the PPM trunk to read the residual
count. Then, the onboard counter is cleared, the residual count is added to
the temporary meter, and the contents of the temporary meter are added to
the terminal meter. A CDR Transfer (X) record is then printed against this
party, and the temporary meter is cleared. The party that is charged is the
one that has been in conference the longest. When a trunk with disconnect
supervision disconnects, a CDR End record is immediately printed. For
trunks that do not provide a disconnect signal, their CDR records are not
printed until the last party disconnects from the conference.
Privacy Override
The Conference feature can be used to add other parties to a Privacy
Override connection.
Recorded Announcement Trunk
A Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunk cannot be Conferenced.
Recorded Telephone Dictation
Dictation trunks cannot be conferenced.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
570 Conference
Ring Again
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call.
Station Activity Records
For a set with Class of Service Call Detail Monitoring Allowed (CDMA)
involved in a call with a trunk, a Station Activity Record is produced only
when that set conferences in the first party. Conferencing of all subsequent
parties does not generate a "D" record. An additional "D" record is produced
when the last conferee with Class of Service CDMA connected to the trunk
goes on hook. This does not affect any other CDR record generation during
a conference.
Trunk Access from any Station
A switchhook flash on analog (500/2500 type) telephones results in special
dial tone. Dialing SPRE + 4 (TAFAS access code) then picks up an incoming
Trunk Access from any Station (TAFAS) call. A second switchhook flash
reconnects the user to the original conference call. The call picked up by
TAFAS is put on Consultation Hold. No other action can be taken with a call
picked up in this way during an established conference call.
Trunk Barring
The originator of a conference call can connect only to a barred route on
a consultation basis. A switchhook flash from an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone results in a reestablished connection with the Originating Trunk
Connection. The user of a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone must release
the barred connection to return to the Originating Trunk connection, or the
conference containing the Originating Trunk connection; operating the
Conference key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone has no effect. An
attendant may return to the Originating Trunk Connection, or the conference
containing the Originating Trunk Connection, by releasing the barred
connection. This is done by pressing the RLS DEST key; pressing the
Conference key has no effect.
Trunk to Trunk Connection
Trunk to Trunk Connection allows external trunks to remain established in a
call, provided that all external trunks involved have disconnect supervision.
With respect to charging costs associated with a conference call, once the
last set involved in the conference call disconnects, a search is made of all
remaining trunks in the call to determine which call is established in the call
for the longest period of time. This trunk is the chargeable Terminal Number
(TN). This process is repeated to find the next chargeable TN.
Feature packaging
This feature is included in base system software.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 571
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 10 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for analog (500/2500
type) telephones." (page 571)
Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for analog (500/2500 type)
telephones.
2. "LD 11 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones." (page 571)
Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary
telephones.
LD 10 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
CLS (XFD) XFA
(C6D) C6A (Deny) allow transfer Class of Service.
(Deny) allow six-party conference (C6A requires an XFA
Class of Service).
LD 11 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
KEY xx AO3 AO6 Add a Conference 3 or Conference 6 key.
xx = key number.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
572 Conference
Feature operation
To add a new party to an established call on a Meridian 1 proprietary
telephone, follow these steps:
Procedure 2
Add a new party to an established call on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
Step Action
1Press Conference.
The first party is on hold and you receive a dial tone.
2Dial the number of the new party.
When the new party answers, you may talk privately.
3Press Conference to include all parties in the call.
4To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),
repeat steps 1-3.
—End—
If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, press Rls
to disconnect. To return to the call, press the key beside the fast flashing
indicator.
To add a new party to an established call on an analog (500/2500 type)
telephone, follow these steps:
Procedure 3
Add a new party to an established call on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone
Step Action
1Flash the switchhook.
You hear three beeps followed by dial tone. The first party is on hold.
2Dial the telephone number of the person to be included in your call.
When the call is answered, you may talk privately with the new party.
3Flash the switchhook to include all parties in the call.
4To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),
repeat steps 1-3.
If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, flash
the switchhook to return to the original caller.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 573
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
574 Conference
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
575
Console Operations
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 575)
"Operating parameters" (page 576)
"Feature interactions" (page 576)
"Feature packaging" (page 576)
"Feature implementation" (page 577)
"Feature operation" (page 577)
Feature description
Console Operations consists of Console Presentation and Queue
Thermometer.
Console Presentation
This part of the feature makes it possible to present a call to a certain
Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key only to specified consoles of a customer or
an Attendant Console Group (ACG).
Those consoles are configured (LD 15 option PSA/PSD) to have
presentation status for the ICI key to handle the following call treatments:
•If a call is not automatically presented to an idle console, it is indicated
on the appropriate ICI key on all consoles within the customer or ACG
(LD 15 option MTI/CUI).
•When all attendants with presentation status for a certain ICI key within
a group, customer or ACG are in position busy, then a call to that ICI key
is presented to any other console within the group or only presented to
the last console that is not in Night Service in a group (LD 15 option
RECA/RECO).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
576 Console Operations
•When a ACG is in Night Service, a call to that ACG is redirected to the
customer or trunk night DN, or to a night ACG (LD 15 option NCA/NCD).
Queue Thermometer
This part of the feature applies to a special console which has four
single-digit numeric displays. Each display can be configured to show the
number of attendant calls in queue for specified ICI keys of a customer
or an ACG (LD 15 option MTI/CUI).
A queue thermometer display can also be configured to show the number
of calls to those ICI keys that are not individually displayed on any other
display of that console.
Optionally, this sum may exclude calls to ICI keys to which inter-attendant
calls, recalls and metered calls are presented (LD 15 option DRT/DRE).
Operating parameters
Console Presentation
When Multi-tenant Service (MTS) is in use, the following limitations apply
when using Console Operations:
•All attendants must belong to an ACG
•All attendants must belong to only one ACG, and
•No attendants must belong to ACG 0.
Feature interactions
Console Presentation
Departmental Listing Directory Number
Departmental Listing Directory Number is a way of directing attendant calls.
The feature has some similarities to MTS, but it overrides Multi-tenant
Service (MTS) and is therefore not affected by Console Presentation.
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide
Console Operation makes it possible for each console to select which ICI
call types is presented to the console. Network wide LDN does not work
with the Console Presentation feature because it is not supported by NAS.
Console Operation can, however, be configured with two additional LDNs.
The queue thermometer indicates how many calls are in the queue for a
certain ICI key. An ICI key can correspond to more than one ICI type. Even
though the ICI type of a call may be different with or without this feature
active, it will not interact with queue thermometer operations.
Feature packaging
Console Operations (COOP) package 169.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 577
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Configure the Console Presentation feature." (page 577)
Configure the Console Presentation feature.
2. "LD 15 - Configure the Queue Thermometer feature." (page 577)
Configure the Queue Thermometer feature.
Console Presentation
LD 15 - Configure the Console Presentation feature.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change.
TYPE: ATT_DATA Attendant console options
...
- OPT (PSD) PSA Presentation Status selection allowed (denied) on attendant
consoles.
(CUI) MTI ICI lamps show Multi-tenant Service (MTS) Attendant
Console Group (AGP) information for incoming calls.
(RECO) RECA Attendant calls is redirected when there is no presentation
status to other consoles in the console group; RECO when
all consoles are busy, RECA when all but one console is
busy.
(NCD) NCA When an Attendant Console Group is in Night Service,
redirection of attendant calls is allowed (denied).
Queue Thermometer
LD 15 - Configure the Queue Thermometer feature.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add, or change.
TYPE: CDB Customer Data Block.
...
- OPT (DRE) DRT Queue thermometer includes (excludes) Inter-Attendant
calls, Recalls and Metered calls.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
578 Console Operations
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
579
Console Presentation Group Level
Services
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 579)
"Operating parameters" (page 580)
"Feature interactions" (page 580)
"Feature packaging" (page 581)
"Feature implementation" (page 581)
"Feature operation" (page 583)
Feature description
A Console Presentation Group (CPG) is a subset of the consoles configured
for a customer. A CPG handles attendant calls from one or more tenants
and incoming trunk calls on one or more routes. CPG improves functions for
the following CPG Level Services:
•Attendant Overflow Positions (AOP)
AOP DN and waiting time threshold can be specified for each CPG.
•Call Waiting Indication
Count thresholds, timers, and buzz options can be defined for each CPG.
•Incoming Call Identification (ICI)
ICI keys can be defined for each CPG. Attendants see only those ICI
definitions for their own CPG.
•Listed Directory Numbers (LDN)
Each CPG allows four LDNs.
•Night Service (NSVC)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
580 Console Presentation Group Level Services
Each CPG can go into Night Service mode independent of the other
groups.
•Recorded Announcement (RAN)
Each CPG can have its own recorded overflow announcements.
Operating parameters
Console Presentation Group (CPG) services and Departmental Listed
Directory Numbers (DLDN) are mutually exclusive at the customer level.
That is, DLDNs can be equipped on the same system with Console
Presentation Groups (CPGs), but not enabled for the same customer group
at the same time.
Feature interactions
Attendant Administration
Attendants can dial the access code and activate the Administration mode.
In this mode, they can modify the configuration of any telephone for this
customer.
Attendant Secrecy
The Secrecy option specified for a customer applies to all attendants for
that customer.
Attendant Supervisory Console
The supervisory console specified for a customer belongs to one CPG. In
the Supervisory mode, ICI indicators show only the information for ICIs in
that CPG. Thresholds specified in the Customer Data Block apply only to
the CPG where that console resides, and do not effect any other CPG.
Call Park
Parked calls recall to the attendant who parked them. If that attendant
console goes into Position Busy mode, the call recalls to an attendant in the
same CPG as the original.
If the attendant goes into Night Service while a call is parked, the recall
is presented to the Night DN defined for that CPG. If an attendant goes
into Night Service while the recall is in the attendant queue, it stays in the
attendant queue until the call is abandoned.
Tenant access checking between the set (A) who picks up a parked call and
the party (B) who parked the call, is enforced as follows:
•If B is a set, tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between A and B.
•If B is an attendant, A and B must belong to the same CPG for
tenant-to-tenant access.
•If access is denied, set A (who intends to pick up the access-denied
parked call) receives a blocking tone.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 581
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number
CPG does not work with the network part of Network-Wide Listed Directory
Number (LDN) because CPG is not supported by Network Attendant
Service, which the network part requires. This feature does, however,
provide two additional LDNs for each Console Presentation Group.
Night Key for Direct Inward Dialing Digit Manipulation
The Day/Night can be activated with the DRC key by any attendant in the
Console Presentation group.
Feature packaging
Console Presentation Groups (CPGS) package 172 requires:
•Multi-Tenant Service (TENS) package 86
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 93 - Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG)." (page 581)
Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG).
2. "LD 93 - Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group." (page 581)
Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group.
3. "LD 93 - Assign tenants to an attendant group number." (page 582)
Assign tenants to an attendant group number.
4. "LD 93 - Assign a route to an attendant group number." (page 582)
Assign a route to an attendant group number.
5. "LD 93 - Add Console Presentation Group features." (page 582)
Add Console Presentation Group features.
LD 93 - Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG).
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change.
TYPE TENS Multi-Tenant data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CPGS YES Enable CPG Level Services.
LD 93 - Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
582 Console Presentation Group Level Services
Prompt Response Description
TYPE CPG Console Presentation Group data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
AGNO 0-63 Attendant Console Group number.
ANUM 1-63 1-63 Attendant console numbers.
LD 93 - Assign tenants to an attendant group number.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change.
TYPE TCPG Tenant to Console Presentation Group data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
TEN 1-511 Tenant number.
AGNO 0-63 Attendant Console Group number.
LD 93 - Assign a route to an attendant group number.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change.
TYPE RCPG Route to Console Presentation Group data block.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
AGNO 0-63 Attendant Console Group number.
LD 93 - Add Console Presentation Group features.
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW CHG Add, or change Multi-Tenant Service for a customer.
TYPE CPGP Console Presentation Group level parameters.
CUST xx Customer number, as defined in LD 15
CPG 1-63 Console Presentation group number.
LDN0 xxxx Listed DN 0.
NIT1 xxxx First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN.
TIM1 hhmm Hour minute for First NTOD DN.
NIT2 xxxx Second NTOD DN.
TIM2 hhmm Time for Second NTOD.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 583
Prompt Response Description
NIT3 xxxx Third NTOD DN.
TIM3 hhmm Time for Third NTOD DN.
NIT4 xxxx Fourth NTOD DN.
TIM4 hhmm Time for Fourth NTOD.
ICI xx aaa Incoming Call Indicators (ICI).
AQTT 0-(30)-255 Attendant queuing threshold.
AODN xxxx Attendant overflow DN.
CWCL (0)-255 (0)-255 Number of waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound.
CWTM (0)-511 (0)-511 Time for waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound.
CWBZ (NO) YES
(NO) YES
Call Waiting Buzz.
The first field provides a two-second buzz when the upper
CWCL or CWTM threshold is exceeded.
The second field provides a buzz when the first call enters the
queue.
Feature operation
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
584 Console Presentation Group Level Services
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
585
Context-sensitive soft keys
Feature description
Context-sensitive soft keys provide dynamic functionality to the IP Phones
similar to that currently supported on the M39xx digital telephone series.
Context-sensitive soft keys are located directly below the LCD screen on
the IP Phone. The soft key label above each key dynamically changes
depending on the call processing state.
Two new soft keys, Callers List and Redial List, appear in the default idle
state when an IP phone is registered on a Signaling Server with Personal
Directory (PD) server enabled.
The Call Server adds up to ten additional Context-sensitive soft keys on
the IP Phones. See Table 13 "Call features" (page 586) for a list of the
call features with its corresponding soft key position. The functionality and
labeling of soft keys on an IP Phone is defined by the Call Server using
the key map download message. The context-sensitive soft key feature is
enabled on the IP Phone and cannot be turned on or off.
See"Using call features" (page 590)for examples of IP Phone screens in
different call states.
Soft keys configuration
The default order and position of the soft keys change depending on the
features that are configured by a system administrator. For each feature
that is not configured, the corresponding soft key does not appear in the
applicable screen. If a soft key is not configured, the remaining soft keys
shift up to fill the empty soft key position.
The set of soft keys must be configured in set data block for IP terminal
in LD 11.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
586 Context-sensitive soft keys
Table 12
LD 11 - Configure soft keys
Prompt Response Description
REQ NEW Configure a new soft key
TYPE xxxx Type of telephone
CUST xx Customer number
TN
...
...
KEY x aaa yyy (cccc or D) xx = Key number
aaa = Key name or function
(SCR/MCR/PVN/PVR/SCN
yyyy = DN
cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N,
where N = the value entered at the
SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1.
D = the character "D". When the
character D is entered, the system
searches the DN keys from key 0 and
up to find a DN key with a CLID table
entry. The CLID associated with the
found DN key is then used.
...
Table 13
Call features
Key Number Feature Name Description
17 Call Transfer (TRN) Use the Call Transfer feature to transfer a call to
a third-party. You can consult with the third-party
privately before completing the transfer.
18 Three-party conference (A03) or
Six-party conference (A06) The conference feature adds additional parties
to an established call. The maximum is three
or six, depending on the conference feature
assigned to the conference call originator. A
system administrator manually configures the
feature for Three- or Six-party conference call
using LD 11.
19 Call Forward (CFW) Call Forward automatically forwards incoming
calls to another destination, within or outside the
system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Operating parameters 587
Key Number Feature Name Description
20 Ring Again (RGA) After a busy tone is received, the Ring Again
feature alerts the caller once the line becomes
free.
21 Call Park (PRK) Call Park places a call in a parked state, similar
to hold, where it can be retrieved by an Attendant
Console or telephone. A parked call must have
an access ID, also known as a Park DN.
22 Ringing Number Pickup (RNP) An incoming call on one telephone can be
picked up on another telephone. A system
administrator defines the call pickup group.
23 Speed Call (SCU/SCC) or
System Speed Call (SSU/SSC) A call is made using a one-, two-, or three-digit
code. Your system administrator defines the
Speed Call code and Speed Call lists.
Note: The soft key label on your telephone can
appear as SpcUsr or SpdCtl depending on
how Key 23 in LD 11 is defined by your System
Administrator.
24 Privacy Release (PRS) In multiple appearance, single call arrangements,
the Privacy Release feature allows another
appearance of the Directory Number (DN) to
enter the call. Privacy is then reestablished until
Privacy Release is activated again.
25 Charge Account (CHG) After a Charge Account number is used, the
entire call is billed to that DN. The number can
be entered before or during a call. The Charge
Account feature is not supported for internal
calls.
26 Call Party Number (CPN) This feature is used in conjunction with Call
Detail Recording (CDR). A Charge Account call
is billed directly to a specific account or charge
number instead of a DN.
Operating parameters
Features are added or removed by a system administrator using LD 11.
The default order and position of soft keys is determined by the number of
features configured on your IP Phone.
The following IP Phones support the context-sensitive soft key feature:
•IP Phone 2001
•IP Phone 2002 and 2004—Phase II
•IP Phone 2007
•IP 2050 Softphone
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
588 Context-sensitive soft keys
•IP Phone 1110, 1120E, 1140E, and 1150E
•IP Phone 2033
•WLAN Handsets 2210, 2211, and 2212
Feature restrictions
Context-sensitive soft keys are supported on the Survivable Remote
Gateway (SRG) in normal mode only.
Feature interactions
When the Context-sensitive soft keys on the IP Phone are used by a
Call-Server-based application such as Corporate Directory or a Signaling
Server-based application such as Personal Directory, the soft keys are
defined by the active application. The application controls the soft labels
that are displayed. The IP Phone returns to the Context-Sensitive Soft Key
labeling upon completion of the application.
During an abnormal call-processing operation, the IP Phone advances to
the Reorder state screen and the Reorder tone is sounded. For example, if
an invalid extension is entered, the Reorder state screen appears on the
display with the message Release and try again.
CallPilot-related soft keys are only available if the CallPilot voice mailbox
is accessed from an IP Phone by using the inbox key instead of directly
dialing a CallPilot DN.
The IP Phone 2033 and some third-party IP Phones have only three soft
keys . The firmware handles the translation from four soft keys to three
soft keys.
Feature packaging
The Context-sensitive soft key feature is included in the base system
software.
Feature implementation
The features listed in the "Soft keys configuration" (page 585) list can be
added or removed by a system administrator using LD 11.
The Callers List and Redial List feature keys are not configurable in LD
11 because the Personal Directory feature is not a Call-Server-based
application. These keys are available from the call-processing default idle
state of the IP Phone if the Personal Directory (PD) server is enabled.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 589
Feature operation
The following table identifies what is displayed on the IP Phone LCD screen
when in a specific call state.
Table 14
Call state screens
Call state Action Display
Default Idle Key map download message is sent
to the telephone and the default idle
state appears.
For IP Phone 2001, 2002, 1110,
1120E, and 2033, the default idle
state is Fwd Caller Redial
For IP Phone 2004, 2007, 2050,
1140E, and 1150E, the default
idle state is Forward Callers
Redial
For WLAN Handsets 2210, 2211,
and 2212, there are only four
characters available for each soft
key label.
Note: Depending on your
telephone type and the number
of characters available for each
soft key label on the LCD screen,
some soft key labels can appear
differently than what is identified
in this document. For example,
Forward appears as Fwd on an IP
Phone 2001 with a six- character
soft key label.
Dial Tone Lift the handset or press the line
(DN) key to get a dial tone. The dial
tone screen appears.
SpcUsr Pickup Charge CParty
Predial Press the dialpad from the idle state
to advance the display to the predial
screen.
CLEAR DELETE CANCEL
Dialing There are no soft keys needed. Extension number is displayed.
Ringing The calling telephone receives
ringback tone from the called
telephone.
Extension and calling name are
displayed. For example, 7466
John Smith
Busy If the destination number is busy,
the display advances to the busy
state screen.
Destination Busy
Activate RING AGAIN?
RingAgn
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
590 Context-sensitive soft keys
Call state Action Display
Reorder If an invalid number is dialed, the
reorder state screen appears.
Release and try again
Established (Active)
Call After a call is established there are
two layers of soft keys available.
Press the More key to toggle
between these layers.
Layer 1:
Conf Trans Park More...
Layer 2:
PrivRls Charge CParty
More...
Note: Some soft keys such as the SpcUsr key are not configured by
default. The System Administrator will configure as needed.
Using call features
Table 15
Examples of IP Phone screens in different call states
Feature Action Display
Call Forward Press the Forward key from the
default idle state.
Enter Forward Number appears
on the display line.
Call Forward Number
Edit Enter the forward number. CFWD
Press CFWD or Enter new #
The arrow continues to flash until
you press the >Forwar soft key.
The telephone is returned to the
default idle state of
>Forwar Callers Redial
with an arrow beside >Forwar
After pressing CFW the user has
40 seconds to complete the CFW
otherwise it will timeout.
Cancel Call Forward Press the >Forwar soft key from
the idle screen state.
Call Forward cancelled
Busy A busy tone is received. Destination Busy
Activate RING AGAIN?
Note: The Ring Again feature times
out if the feature is not activated.
The telephone returns to the idle
state.
Ring Again
Activate—screen 1 Press RingAgn.>RingAg Forward Callers
Redial
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Using call features 591
Feature Action Display
Ring Again
Activate—screen 2 After the busy party is free, the IP
Phone sends a short alerting tone.
Ring again ready,
Select a line RING AGAIN
>RingAg Forward Callers
Redial
Cancel Ring Again Press the >RingAgn soft key to
cancel and return to the idle state.
Forward Callers Redial
Conference
(available from the
Established (Active)
call state)
Press the Conf soft key. The conference transfer dial tone
screen appears:
Layer 1: >Conf SpcUsr Pickup
More...
Layer 2: Charge CParty
More...
Enter a number. After the call is
answered, press the >Conf soft key.
Transfer Press the Trans soft key. The transfer number editing state
screen appears:
Layer 1: Trans SpcUsr Pickup
More...
Layer 2: Charge CParty
More...
Enter a number and press the
>Trans key for the telephone to
return to the idle state screen.
Speed Call From the dial tone state, press the
SpcUsr soft key.
Note: How this key is configured in
LD 11 determines whether you see
SpcUsr or SpdCtl.
Press the SpcUsr soft key. Enter
the speed call code. The telephone
advances to the ringing state.
Callers Press the Callers soft key from
the idle screen state. Press the up
or down arrow on the telephone
dialpad.
Dial Edit Copy Del appears on
the screen
Redial Press the Redial soft key from
the idle screen state. Press the up
or down arrow on the telephone
dialpad.
Dial Edit Copy Del appears on
the screen
Note: The IP Phone must be registered on the Signaling Server with the
Personal Directory (PD) server enabled for the Callers and Redial soft
key features to be available. The function of the Callers and Redial list
views are controlled by the PD server which can be configured in LD 117.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
592 Context-sensitive soft keys
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys
The following table identifies the soft keys in CallPilot as they relate to the
IP Phone dialpad. CallPilot soft keys can be used instead of the telephone
dialpad.
Note: CallPilot-related soft keys are only available if the CallPilot voice
mailbox is accessed from an IP Phone by using the inbox key instead
of directly dialing a CallPilot DN.
Table 16
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys
Feature Action on CallPilot Equivalent on telephone
Layer 1:
Play Press the Play key to listen to
a message. Press 2 on the dialpad.
Delete Press the Delete key to delete
the current message. Press 7, 6 on the dialpad.
Call Press the Call key to call the
sender of a message. Press 9 on the dialpad.
More... Use the More key to toggle to
layer 2.
Layer 2:
Stop Press the Stop key to pause
playback of a message. Press # on the dialpad.
Conference Press the Conf key to
conference another caller
to your voice mailbox.
Note: This is not a CallPilot
soft key but a Call Server
feature key. This feature gives
someone else access to your
mailbox.
Reply Press the Reply key to the
message. Press 7, 1 on the dialpad.
More... Use the More key to toggle to
layer 3.
Layer 3:
Compose Press the Compose (Comp)
key to compose a new
message.
Press 7, 5 on the dialpad.
Forward Press the Forward (FORWRD)
key to forward a message. Press 7, 3 on the dialpad.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys 593
Feature Action on CallPilot Equivalent on telephone
Goodbye Press the Goodbye (Bye)
key to exit the voice message
system.
Press 8, 3 on the dialpad.
More... Use the More key to toggle
back to layer 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
594 Context-sensitive soft keys
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
595
Controlled Class of Service
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 595)
"Operating parameters" (page 595)
"Feature interactions" (page 596)
"Feature packaging" (page 597)
"Feature implementation" (page 597)
"Feature operation" (page 599)
Feature description
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) alters the Class of Service
restriction levels on telephones that have been defined as CCOS
controlling telephones. This applies to Meridian 1 proprietary telephone
users designated as CCOS controllers. While CCOS is active, Public
Exchange/Central Office or toll calls made from these telephones cannot be
completed without first being routed through an attendant.
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones designated as CCOS controlling
telephones are assigned a CCOS key/lamp that is used to activate or cancel
the system-defined CCOS restriction level on individual DNs.
Operating parameters
Controlling telephones can be any Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.
CCOS controlling telephones must refer to the Prime Directory Number
(PDN) when activating or canceling CCOS on other telephones.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
596 Controlled Class of Service
Feature interactions
Authorization Code
The Authorization Code overrides a telephone’s CCOS restriction level.
Conference
If CCOS is activated at a telephone involved in a conference call, established
Central Office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction level is
applied immediately, and no new calls can be initiated from the conference.
The telephone remains in the CCOS active state after the conference is
terminated.
Flexible Feature Codes
If Electronic Lock (ELK) is activated, the CCRS Class of Service is used
whether Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is active or not. ELK takes
precedence over CCOS. If ELK is deactivated, the set is treated as per
existing operation.
When FFC ELKA and a password is entered, this set will use the CCRS
Class of Service configured in LD 15. The CCRS Class of Service will
always be used whether or not CCOS is currently controlling the set’s
Class of Service. When FFC ELKD and a password is entered, the set will
use the appropriate Class of Service associated with this set. If CCOS is
enabled for the set, the associated customer Class of Service is used (that
is, CCRS, ECC1, or ECC2). If CCOS is not enabled for this set, the set’s
own Class of Service is used.
When FFC ELK is deactivated, the set reverts back to the Class of Service
as it should be without FFC ELK, instead of always reverting back to the set’s
Class of Service (that is, if CCOS is enabled, it will use the customer’s Class
of Service; if CCOS is not enabled, it will use the set’s Class of Service).
Hot Line
When a Hot Line DN is on a telephone that has Controlled Class of Service
activated, Hot Line calls ignore the imposed Class of Service if the System
Speed Call (SSC) package is present and the Hot Line list is given an
adequate Network Class of Service (NCOS) for the override
Multiple Appearance Directory Number
CCOS restriction levels are activated or canceled on controlled telephones
through their Prime Directory Number (PDN). When the PDN of a Meridian
1 proprietary telephone is made CCOS active, all DNs on that telephone are
also restricted. If the DN is a PDN on other telephones, those telephones
are also restricted (if they have CCSA Class of Service).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 597
Room Status
You can change the access limitations for room telephones from the BGD or
from a telephone equipped with a Room Status key (RMK).
Scheduled Access Restrictions
During normal hours, CCOS limitations override normal telephone
limitations. During off-hour periods or times when a Scheduled Access
Restrictions (SAR) LOCK is in effect, however, Scheduled Access
Restrictions apply. When the LOCK or off-hour period ends, CCOS
limitations continue to apply until they are removed or SAR becomes
effective again. Whether a CCOS controller or electronic lock is used to
activate CCOS, there is no indication to the user when Scheduled Access
Restrictions are in effect, overriding CCOS limitations. A telephone defined
in LD 10 or 11 or a trunk defined in LD 14, which is assigned an SAR
group number, has its Class of Service defined by the SAR schedule of its
SAR group.
Station Category Indication
The Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) feature has priority over SCI. A
station’s SCI category is suppressed when CCOS is active, and calls to the
attendant DN carry the CCOS class defined in the database.
Feature packaging
The (CCOS) package must be equipped to activate the Controlled Class of
Service feature.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Enable CCOS for a customer." (page 598)
Enable CCOS for a customer.
2. "LD 11 - Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones." (page 598)
Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
3. "LD 10 - Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones." (page 598)
Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
4. "LD 11 - Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian
1 proprietary telephones." (page 599)
Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian 1
proprietary telephones.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
598 Controlled Class of Service
LD 15 - Enable CCOS for a customer.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: CCS Controlled Class of Service options
CUST 0-99
0-31
Customer number
For Large Systems
For Small Systems
- CCRS UNR
CUN
CTD
TLD
SRE
FRE
FR1
FR2
Unrestricted.
Conditionally unrestricted.
Conditionally toll-denied.
Toll-denied.
Semi-restricted.
Fully restricted.
Fully restricted 1.
Fully restricted 2.
LD 11 - Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (CCSD), CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS.
LD 10 - Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
CLS (CCSD) CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 599
LD 11 - Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =
card and u = unit.
KEY xx COS Assign CCOS controlling key.
Feature operation
To activate CCOS, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press CCOS.
Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key
will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to
determine if CCOS is already active.
2Dial the Prime Directory Number (PDN) of the telephone to be
changed and press CCOS.
3Press Rls.
—End—
To deactivate CCOS, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press CCOS.
2Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original Class of
Service and press CCOS.
3Press Rls.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
600 Controlled Class of Service
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
601
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 601)
"Operating parameters" (page 601)
"Feature interactions" (page 602)
"Feature packaging" (page 602)
"Feature implementation" (page 602)
"Feature operation" (page 605)
Feature description
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) allows a controller or
attendant console to alter the Class of Service (CLS) restriction levels of
other Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) telephones. The feature allows
two customer-defined levels of restriction. In addition, the CCOS key can be
assigned to an attendant console as a programmable key.
Operating parameters
Controlling telephones can be any Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.
A CCOS controlling telephone must refer to the Prime DN when activating
or canceling CCOS on other telephones.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.
This feature is applicable only when the CLS lamp is lit on the controlling
telephone.
The CLS key on an attendant console can be used only on an idle loop.
(The loop lamp is lit; source and destination lamps are dark.)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
602 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
Feature interactions
Attendant Administration
This feature cannot change Controlled Class Service Restrictions (CCRS),
ECC1 or ECC2, but can assign CLS keys to certain telephones.
Attendant Supervisory Console
When the attendant is in the supervisory mode, CCOS programming is
prohibited.
Authorization Codes
The Authorization Code can override a telephone’s CCOS restriction level.
Conference
If CCOS is activated at a telephone on a conference call, established Public
Exchange/Central Office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction
level is applied immediately; however, no new calls can be initiated from the
conference. That telephone remains in the CCOS state after the end of
the conference.
Coordinated Dialing Plan
The internal DN is used for programming the CLS level for Coordinated
Dialing Plan (CDP) from the controlling telephone.
Multiple Appearance Directory Number
All CCOS restriction levels are activated and canceled from the Prime
Directory Number (PDN) for CCOS controlling telephones. The PDN for a
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone is made CCOS active, and all DNs for that
telephone are restricted as well. If that DN is a PDN on other telephones,
they are also restricted (if they have CCSA Class of Service).
Pre-translation
The DN used to program the CCOS should be the actual DN before
pre-translation. When programming CCOS, the DN entered is not
pre-translated.
Feature packaging
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) package 173 requires:
•Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81.
Feature implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
1. "LD 15 - Define the Class of Service limitations for the system." (page
603)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 603
Define the Class of Service limitations for the system.
2. "LD 11 - Assign keys for the controller telephone." (page 604)
Assign keys for the controller telephone.
3. "LD 10 - Configure controlled analog (500/2500 type) telephones."
(page 604)
Configure controlled analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
4. "LD 11 - Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."
(page 604)
Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
5. "LD 12 - Assign ECCS keys for attendant console." (page 604)
Assign ECCS keys for attendant console.
LD 15 - Define the Class of Service limitations for the system.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: CCS Controlled Class of Service options
CUST Customer number
0-99 Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-31 Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.
- CCRS
(UNR)
CTD
CUN
FRE
FR1
FR2
SRE
TLD
CCOS limitations.
Unrestricted service.
Conditionally Toll Denied.
Conditionally Unrestricted.
Fully Restricted.
Fully Restricted level 1.
Fully Restricted level 2.
Semi-Restricted.
Toll Denied.
- ECC1 xxx Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 1.
xxx = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FRE, FR1, FR2, SRE, TLD.
- ECC2 xxx Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 2.
xxx = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FRE, FR1, FR2, SRE, TLD.
Input limitations apply when CCSA is active. When CCSA is inactive, the telephone has the CLS
assigned in LD 10/11.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
604 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
LD 11 - Assign keys for the controller telephone.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
KEY xx COS Key number for CCOS key on controller telephone.
LD 10 - Configure controlled analog (500/2500 type) telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: 500 Telephone type.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
CLS (CCSD) CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS.
LD 11 - Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
CLS (CCSD) CCSA (Deny) allow CCOS.
LD 12 - Assign ECCS keys for attendant console.
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change.
TYPE 2250 Attendant console type.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 605
Prompt Response Description
TN Terminal number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
KEY xx COS Key number for CCOS controller key on attendant console.
xx = key number (must be greater than 1).
Feature operation
To activate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) from a Meridian 1
proprietary telephone with the feature currently inactive, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Press CCOS to begin the activation sequence.
Note that this is a toggle: if CCOS is already active, pressing the key
will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to
determine if CCOS is already active.
2Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The
controlling telephone’s display, if equipped, shows the DN of the
changed telephone and a 0 (zero).
3To select ECC1, dial # 1.
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The controlling telephone’s
display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 1.
To select ECC2, dial # 2.
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The controlling telephone’s
display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 2.
4Press Rls.
—End—
To activate ECCS from an attendant console, follow these steps:
Step Action
1Select an idle loop key.
2Press CCOS.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
606 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced
Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key
will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to
determine if CCOS is already active.
3Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The
console’s display shows the DN of the changed telephone. A 0 (zero)
is displayed if the telephone is active in the original CCOS mode.
If the telephone does not have CCOS or ECCS active, the console
does not acknowledge that you have successfully entered a valid
CCOS DN.
4To select ECC1, dial # 1.
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The console’s display shows
the DN of the changed telephone and a 1.
To select ECC2, dial # 2.
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The console’s display shows
the DN of the changed telephone and a 2.
5Press Rls.
—End—
To deactivate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), follow these
steps:
Step Action
1Select an idle loop key.
2Press CCOS.
3Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original Class of
Service and press CCOS.
4Press Rls.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
607
Converged Office
The multimedia strategy of many CS 1000 customers is based on deploying
the Microsoft®Office Communicator soft clients and Live Communications
Server. This strategy enables the introduction of multimedia capabilities
using popular instant messenger (IM) clients without the need to install and
support additional desktop software.
The Nortel Converged Office feature combines the business-grade
telephony of the Communication Server 1000 with the real-time multimedia
communication and the remote call control provided by Microsoft®Office
Live Communications Server 2005 and Microsoft®Office Communicator
2005 products.
For a complete description of this product, refer to Nortel Converged Office
Fundamentals (NN43001-525).
On the Call Server, package 408, Multimedia Systems Convergence
(MS_CONV) must be unrestricted. Class of Service (CLS) Remote Call
Control (T87D/T87A) must be allowed in LD 11. For more information, see
Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
608 Converged Office
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
609
Corporate Directory
Contents This section contains information on the following topics:
"Feature description" (page 609)
"Operating parameters" (page 610)
"Feature interactions" (page 611)
"Feature packaging" (page 611)
"Feature implementation" (page 611)
"Feature operation" (page 612)
Feature description
A Corporate Directory database is created from Telephony Manager (TM)
information. This database is downloaded and stored on the system.
The Corporate Directory feature extends the use of this database to IP
Phones. Access to Corporate Directory is provided through the Directory
key.
Corporate Directory is not supported on the IP Phone 2001, IP Audio
Conference Phone 2033, and IP Phone 1110.
Corporate Directory provides an alphabetical list of entries using last names
(system generated). Users can:
•search by name
•view additional information on each entry
•dial from the Corporate Directory
The system administrator can configure TM to download the directory
database manually, or automatically, to the system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
610 Corporate Directory
For information on the Corporate Directory feature for M3900
series telephones, refer to Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals
(NN43001-567).
Operating parameters
The following telephones support the Corporate Directory feature:
•IP Phone 2002
•IP Phone 2004
•IP Phone 2007
•IP Phone 1120E
•IP Phone 1140E
•IP Phone 1150E
•IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050
•WLAN Handset 2210
•WLAN Handset 2211
•WLAN Handset 2212
•WLAN Handset 6120
•WLAN Handset 6140
To access Corporate Directory from the telephone, the user must have the
Corporate Directory Allowed (CRPA) Class of Service defined in LD 11.
When Corporate Directory is being updated with new data, the user cannot
access Corporate Directory.
The TM 3.1 Corporate Directory utility gathers data from the TM 3.1
databases and downloads it to the system. To use the Corporate Directory
utility, TM 2.0 or later must be installed. For more information, refer to
Telephony Manager 3.1 Installation and Commissioning (NN43050-300).
Call Server memory requirements
The Call Server memory usage for Corporate Directory is the same for both
IP Phones and Digital Telephones.
The equations for approximating Call Server memory usage for Corporate
Directory are:
1. Call Server hard disk space needed (bytes) = Number of directory
entries * Average length of all entries *2
2. Call Server RAM needed to store database (bytes) = (Average length of
all entries + 20) * 1.25 * Number of directory entries
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature implementation 611
For a sample database where the average length is 29.5 characters, see
Table 17 "Memory requirements based on database size" (page 611) for the
Call Server memory requirements.
Table 17
Memory requirements based on database size
Call Server
RAM needed Database size
(rounded to nearest 1000)
Call Server Hard disk
space needed
(rounded to next 0.5 MB)
1MB 16 000 1.5 MB
2MB 32 000 2.0 MB
3MB 48 000 3.5 MB
4MB 64 000 4.0 MB
5MB 80 000 5.5 MB
6MB 96 000 6.0 MB
7MB 113 000 7.0 MB
Feature interactions
Call Transfer
Conference
The Corporate Directory lookup feature works during Call Transfer and
Conference operations.
Feature packaging
This feature is packaged under Corporate Directory (CDIR) package 381.
Feature implementation
You can change the Call Server configuration while IP Phone users are
logged on to Corporate Directory. The changes only take effect when the
user logs off and then logs on again to the Corporate Directory.
LD 11 - Configure CRPA/CRPD Class of Service.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG Add new data, or change existing data.
TYPE: a...a Telephone type. Type ?for a list of possible responses.
TN Terminal Number
l s c u Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
cu Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where
c = card and u = unit.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
612 Corporate Directory
Prompt Response Description
...
CLS (CRPD) CRPA Enable or disable the Corporate Directory feature for this
TN.
Feature operation
Refer to "Accessing the Corporate Directory" (page 612) to access the
Corporate Directory on the IP Phones.
Accessing the Corporate Directory
Step Action
1Press the Directory key to view a list of available applications.
2Highlight Corporate Directory, and then press the Select soft key.
3Go through the Status Query process.
4Enter a name, and select Search.
You can enter special characters in the search parameters. The
special characters include some symbols (for example, plus sign [+]
and dash [-]) and international characters.
5To enter special characters, press the Up navigation key.
The special characters are displayed.
6Use the navigation keys to review the special characters available.
The Corporate Directory may not be available for the following
reasons:
•The Corporate Directory is locked. The message "Try again
Later" displays.
•The Corporate Directory file is not available. The message
"Directory unavailable" displays.
•The Class of Service is not configured.
7To exit the Corporate Directory, press the Quit key or the Directory
key.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Feature operation 613
Special characters
The special character set includes all characters from the extended portion
of the ASCII character set. The extended ASCII character set that supports
the IP Phone’s current language is the character set that appears in the
edit mode. The special character set contains up to 130 characters. It is
displayed in six lines with 24 characters on each line. Use the navigation
keys to scroll through the list or to move through a 24-character line.
The special charactor set does not include upper and lowercase letters or
numerals. Use the keypad of the IP Phone to define these characters.
Search/Edit screen features
Review Table 18 "Search and Edit screen features" (page 613)for more
information on the Search/Edit screen features.
Table 18
Search and Edit screen features
Select this key... To...
Delete Backspace one character.
Cancel Close the Corporate Directory.
Case Switch the next character to either uppercase or lowercase.
Search Search for directory entries. Results are displayed in either a List View
screen or No Match screen.
More Switch pages.
Number 1-9 Toggle characters.
Up/Down
navigation Display a screen to enter special characters.
Use the Up and Down navigation keys to navigate through the lists of
available special characters.
Right/Left
navigation Move cursor location.
When reviewing special characters, use these keys to select a character in
the line display.
Choose Select a special character. This option is available when reviewing the
special characters.
Text Close the special character display. No special character is selected. The
display returns to the default Search/Edit screen.
Corporate Directory views
There are two search results screens available for the IP Phones:
•ListView (default view)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
614 Corporate Directory
•CardView—not available for IP Phone 2002
If a search was successful and entries were found in the directory, the first
match displays on the screen.
If there is no match to the search query, you can choose to either start a
new search or change the information in the initial search.
ListView
The ListView screen shows a list of names where the user selects the name
they want to call from the list using the navigation keys.
CardView
The Card view provides the following information about the name found in
the directory: name, telephone number, and department name. Cardview
is not available for IP Phone 2002.
Table 19
ListView and CardView screen features
Press this key... To...
Up or Down Scroll through the list of directory entries that match your
search criteria.
Right On the IP Phone 2004 and IP Softphone 2050, change view
to Card view, where the name, telephone number, and
department are displayed.
Left In Card view only, return to List view.
Dial Dial the selected DN.
•If there is no DN number associated with the directory
entry, a message displays ("No number in directory").
•If there is no available DN key, a message displays ("No
available line"). When displayed, select Done to return
to the List view or Card view.
NewFind Return to the Search/Edit screen.
Resume Return to the Search/Edit screen with the previously
entered name displayed.
Appears on both views.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard
Release 5.5 9 May 2008
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Publication: NN43001-106
Document status: Standard
Document version: 02.04
Document date: 9 May 2008
To provide feedback or to report a problem with this document, go to http://www.nortel.com/documentfeedback
Sourced in Canada
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing
NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice
Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Navigation menu